RMxprt_onlinehelp

Table of Contents1. Getting Started with RMxprt Creating a Project and Inserting a New RMxprt Design . . 1-3 Opening Existing RMxprt Projects and Saving as New . . 1-4 Opening RMxprt Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening Recent RMxprt Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving RMxprt Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving a New RMxprt Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving the Active RMxprt Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving a Copy of an RMxprt Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving RMxprt Project Data Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 1-4 1-4 1-4 1-5 1-5 1-5 Recovering RMxprt Project Data in an Auto-Save File . . 1-6 RMxprt Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Saving Project Notes in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 The RMxprt Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 RMxprt Title Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Working with the RMxprt Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Working with the RMxprt Shortcut Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Shortcut Menu in the Toolbars Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Shortcut Menus in the Project Manager Window . . . . . . 1-11 Working with the RMxprt Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Undoing RMxprt Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Contents-1 Release 14.5 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Maxwell Online Help Redoing RMxprt Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Working with the RMxprt Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Working with the RMxprt Machine Editor Windows . . . . . 1-13 Setting the Window View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Printing in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Working with the RMxprt Project Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Working with the RMxprt Project Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Viewing RMxprt Design Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Working with the RMxprt Properties Window . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Showing and Hiding the RMxprt Properties Window . . . . 1-16 Working with the RMxprt Progress Window . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Working with the RMxprt Message Manager . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Clearing Messages for the RMxprt Project . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Clearing Messages for the RMxprt Model . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Copying Messages in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Quick Start for RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19 RMxprt Example Part 1: Create a New Project . . . . . . . . . RMxprt Example Part 2: Select a Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . RMxprt Example Part 3: Input Design Data . . . . . . . . . . . RMxprt Example Part 4: Analyze the Design. . . . . . . . . . . RMxprt Example Part 5: Create Reports and View Output RMxprt Example Part 6: Output Design Data . . . . . . . . . . 1-19 1-19 1-20 1-28 1-29 1-34 2. Setting Up RMxprt Projects Setting Up A Machine Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Changing the Machine Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 SetMachineType . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Design Settings in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Setting the Material Threshold in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 RMxprt Export Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Setting User Defined Data File for a Design . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Validating RMxprt Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Setting General Options in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Contents-2 Release 14.5 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Maxwell Online Help Setting RMxprt Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 RMxprt Options: General Options Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 RMxprt Options: Solver Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Setting Machine Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Specifying the Material Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Model Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Machine Option for Wire Setting . . . . . . . . Editing Wire Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 2-12 2-12 2-13 Edit AC Windings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Enable Winding Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Edit Winding Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 View Winding Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Working with the Slot Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 The Slot Editor Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 Slot Editor Data Editing View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 The New Slot Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 Slot Editor Graphical View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 Editing Slot Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 The Edit Slot Segment Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 Working with Variables in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35 Adding a Project Variable in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Design Variable in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add Array of Values for an RMxprt Design Variable . . . . . Defining Mathematical Functions in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . Defining an Expression in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35 2-37 2-39 2-41 2-41 Using Valid Operators for Expressions in RMxprt . . . . . . 2-42 Using Intrinsic Functions in Expressions in RMxprt . . . . 2-42 Using Piecewise Linear Functions in Expressions in RMxprt 244 Using Dataset Expressions in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45 Assigning Variables in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45 Choosing a Variable to Optimize in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45 Including a Variable in a Sensitivity Analysis in RMxprt . . 2-46 Contents-3 Release 14.5 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Maxwell Online Help Choosing a Variable to Tune in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46 Including a Variable in a Statistical Analysis in RMxprt . . 2-47 3. Wire Specification Libraries Configure Wire Specification Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Specify the Wire Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Edit Wire Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Edit Round Wire Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Edit Rectangular Wire Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Wire Shape Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Recommended Wire Sides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Wire Sides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Export/Import Wire Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Save Wire Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 4. Working with Materials in RMxprt Material Library Management for RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Soft-Magnetic Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Adding New Materials to an RMxprt Project . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Relative Permittivity for RMxprt Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Relative Permeability for a Maxwell or RMxprt Material . . 4-5 Specifying a BH Curve for Nonlinear Relative Permeability 4-5 Bulk Conductivity for an RMxprt Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 Dielectric Loss Tangent for RMxprt Material . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 Magnetic Loss Tangent for RMxprt Material . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Magnetic Coercivity for Maxwell and RMxprt Materials . . 4-10 Core Loss Type for an RMxprt Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Calculating Properties for Core Loss in RMxprt (BP Curve) 411 Electrical Steel Core Loss from a Single-Frequency Loss Curve 4-12 Electrical Steel Core Loss from Multi-Frequency Loss Curves 4-15 Power Ferrite Core Loss from Multi-Frequency Loss Curves 416 Contents-4 Release 14.5 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Maxwell Online Help Mass Density for RMxprt Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 Composition for RMxprt Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 Permanent Magnet Materials in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 Nonlinear vs. Linear Permanent Magnets . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 Compute Remanent Br from B-H curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 Calculating the Properties for a Non-Linear Permanent Magnet in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 Calculating the Properties for a Linear Permanent Magnet 4-23 Using Demagnetization Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 Hysteresis Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 Demagnetization Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25 Recoil Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26 Recoil Magnetic Permeability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27 Inflection Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28 Curve Fitting of Demagnetization Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28 Three Parameter Curve Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29 Four Parameter Curve Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31 Conductor Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34 Setting the Material Threshold for RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34 Editing Conductivity Properties in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34 5. Specifying RMxprt Solution Settings Generating a Custom Design Sheet for RMxprt . . . . . . . . 5-3 Key Words in Output Data for RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Creating RMxprt Customized Design Sheet Template . . . 5-5 Design Template of Microsoft Excel Worksheet in Preferred Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Resort to Key Words in Design Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Set Boundary for Data Imported into Worksheet for RMxprt 5-7 Insert Figures into Template for RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Use Different Languages for RMxprt Design Sheets . . . . 5-9 Post-process Data for RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Contents-5 Release 14.5 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Maxwell Online Help 6. Running an RMxprt Simulation Aborting RMxprt Analyses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Re-solving an RMxprt Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 7. Post Processing and Generating Reports in RMxprt Viewing RMxprt Solution Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Browse Solutions in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Exporting a Simplorer Model or Customized Design Sheet 7-5 Create a Maxwell Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 Creating Reports in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Modifying Reports in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening All Reports in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting All Reports in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the Display Type in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 7-8 7-8 7-8 Creating 2D Rectangular Plots in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Creating 3D Rectangular Plots in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 Creating Data Tables in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 Working with Traces in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Removing Traces in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Replacing Traces in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Adding Blank Traces in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Sweeping a Variable in a Report in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Selecting a Function in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13 Selecting a Parameter, Variable, or Quantity to Plot in RMxprt 7-17 Creating Quick Reports in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19 RMxprt Quick Report Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19 8. Specifying RMxprt Winding Data Setting the Winding Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Winding Types Available for Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Enable the Winding Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 Edit Winding Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Contents-6 Release 14.5 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Maxwell Online Help Setting the Number of Winding Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Connecting and Disconnecting Windings . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Poly-phase Winding Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 Windings Basic Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 Poly Phase AC Winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 Whole-coiled Windings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 Half-coiled Windings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 Single-Layer Windings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 Lap-type Windings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Concentric-type Windings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14 Double-Layer Windings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15 Fractional-Pitch Winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17 Auto-arrangement of AC Windings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18 Phase Spread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20 Coil Arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20 Coil Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25 Connection of Double-pole Dual-speed Windings . . . . . . 8-29 DC Windings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wave Winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frog-leg Winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Virtual Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31 8-32 8-32 8-34 Equipotential Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34 Pole Windings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35 Limited Space for Wire Arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37 Round Wire Winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38 Cylinder Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39 Edgewise Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40 Pole Winding with Half Turns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40 Exporting Winding Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42 9. RMxprt Machine Types Three-Phase Induction Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Analysis Approach for Three-Phase Induction Motors . . . 9-2 Defining a Three-Phase Induction Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Contents-7 Release 14.5 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Maxwell Online Help Defining the General Data for a Three Phase Induction Motor 9-4 General Data for Three-Phase Induction Motors . . . . . . . 9-5 Defining the Stator Data for a Three-Phase Induction Motor 95 Stator Data for Three-Phase Induction Motors . . . . . . . . 9-6 Defining the Stator Slots for a Three-Phase Induction Motor 97 Stator Slot Data for Three-Phase Induction Motors . . . . . 9-7 Defining the Stator Windings for a Three-Phase Induction Motor 9-8 Stator Winding Data for Three-Phase Induction Motors . 9-13 Stator Vent Data for Three-Phase Induction Motors . . . . 9-16 Defining the Rotor Data for a Three-Phase Induction Motor 916 Rotor Data for Three-Phase Induction Motors . . . . . . . . . 9-17 Defining the Rotor Slots for a Three-Phase Induction Motor 918 Rotor Slot Data for Three-Phase Induction Motors . . . . . 9-18 Defining the Rotor Winding for a Three-Phase Induction Motor 9-19 Rotor Winding for Three-Phase Induction Motors . . . . . . 9-19 Rotor Vent Data for Three-Phase Induction Motors . . . . 9-20 Defining the Shaft Data for a Three-Phase Induction Motor 921 Shaft Data for Three-Phase Induction Motors . . . . . . . . . 9-21 Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Three-Phase Induction Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21 Solution Data for Three-Phase Induction Motors . . . . . . 9-22 Single-Phase Induction Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23 Analysis Approach for Single-Phase Induction Motors . . . 9-23 Defining a Single-Phase Induction Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25 Defining the General Data for a Single-Phase Induction Motor 9-26 Contents-8 Release 14.5 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Maxwell Online Help General Data for Single-Phase Induction Motors . . . . . . 9-27 Defining the Stator Data for a Single-Phase Induction Motor 928 Stator Data for Single-Phase Induction Motors . . . . . . . . 9-29 Defining the Stator Slots for a Single-Phase Induction Motor 929 Stator Slot Data for Single-Phase Induction Motors . . . . . 9-30 Defining the Stator Windings for a Single-Phase Induction Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31 Stator Winding Data for Single-Phase Induction Motors . 9-38 Defining the Rotor Data for a Single-Phase Induction Motor 941 Rotor Data for Single-Phase Induction Motors . . . . . . . . 9-42 Defining the Rotor Slots for Single-Phase Induction Motors 942 Rotor Slot Data for Single-Phase Induction Motors . . . . . 9-42 Defining the Rotor Windings for Single-Phase Induction Motors 9-43 Rotor Winding Data for Single-Phase Induction Motors . 9-43 Adding or Removing a Vent from a Single-Phase Induction Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44 Defining the Shaft Data for a Single-Phase Induction Motor 944 Shaft Data for Single-Phase Induction Motors . . . . . . . . 9-44 Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Single-Phase Induction Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45 Solution Data for Single-Phase Induction Motors . . . . . . 9-45 Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47 Analysis Approach Data for Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47 Stator Winding Connected to a Sinusoidal AC Source . . 9-48 Stator Winding Fed by a DC to AC Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51 Defining an Adjustable-Speed Synchronous Machine . . . 9-53 Defining the General Data for an Adjust-Speed Synchronous Contents-9 Release 14.5 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Maxwell Online Help Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54 General Data for Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines . 9-54 Defining the Stator Windings and Conductors for an AdjustSpeed Synchronous Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58 Stator Winding Data for Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines 9-68 Defining the Rotor Data for an Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69 Rotor Data for Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines . . . 9-70 Defining the Rotor Pole for an Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-70 Rotor Pole Data for Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines 9-72 Defining the Shaft Data for an Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-72 Shaft Data for Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines . . . 9-72 Setting Up Analysis Parameters for an Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-72 Solution Data for Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines . 9-73 Permanent-Magnet DC Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-75 Analysis Approach for PMDC Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-75 Defining a Permanent-Magnet DC Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-76 Defining the General Data for PMDC Motors . . . . . . . . . 9-76 General Data for PMDC Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-77 Defining the Stator Data for a PMDC Motor . . . . . . . . . . 9-77 Stator Data for PMDC Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-78 Defining the Stator Pole for a PMDC Motor . . . . . . . . . . . 9-78 Stator Pole Data for PMDC Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-79 Defining the Rotor Data for a PMDC Motor . . . . . . . . . . . 9-80 Rotor Data for PMDC Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-80 Defining the Rotor Slots for a PMDC Motor . . . . . . . . . . . 9-81 Rotor Slot Data for PMDC Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-81 Defining the Rotor Windings and Conductors for a PMDC Motor 9-82 Defining Different Size Wires for a PMDC Motor . . . . . . . 9-86 Contents-10 Release 14.5 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-86 Defining the Commutator and Brush for a PMDC Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . . . . 9113 Defining the Rotor Pole for a Three-Phase Synchronous Machine . . . 9-88 Commutator and Brush Data for PMDC Motors . . . . . 9-114 Defining the Rotor Winding Data for a Three-Phase Synchronous Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-108 Stator Vent Data for Three-Phase Synchronous Machines 9111 Defining the Rotor for a Three-Phase Synchronous Machine 9112 Rotor. . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-93 Analysis Approach for Three-Phase Synchronous Machines 993 Defining a Three-Phase Synchronous Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-115 Contents-11 Release 14. . . 9-90 Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a PMDC Motor . 9-90 Shaft Data for PMDC Motors . . . Inc. . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-100 Stator Winding and Insulation for Three-Phase Synchronous Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. . . . . . . .© SAS IP. . . . . . . Rotor Pole.Maxwell Online Help Rotor Winding Data for PMDC Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-89 Defining the Shaft Data for a PMDC Motor . 9-97 General Data for Three-Phase Synchronous Machines . . . . . . . . . . 9-97 Defining the Stator for a Three-Phase Synchronous Machine 9-97 Stator Data for Three-Phase Synchronous Machines . . 9-96 Defining the General Data for a Three-Phase Synchronous Machine . . Inc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-98 Defining Stator Slots for a Three-Phase Synchronous Machine 9-99 Stator Slot Data for Three-Phase Synchronous Machines 9-99 Defining Stator Windings and Insulation for a Three-Phase Synchronous Machine . . . . . . . . . . . and Insulation for Three-Phase Synchronous Machines . . . . . 9-90 Solution Data for PMDC Motors . . . . . . . . . . 9-91 Three-Phase Synchronous Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All rights reserved. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All rights reserved. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-125 Circuit Data for Brushless PMDC Motors . . . . . 9-138 Defining the Rotor Data for a Brushless PMDC Motor . . . 9119 Solution Data for Three-Phase Synchronous Machines . . . 9124 Defining the Circuit Data for a Brushless PMDC Motor . . . Inc. .Maxwell Online Help Rotor Winding Data for Three-Phase Synchronous Machines 9-117 Defining the Rotor Damper Data . . . . . . . . . 9-127 Defining the Stator Slots for a Brushless PMDC Motor . . . 9-117 Damper Data for Three-Phase Synchronous Machines . . . . . . . . . 9-118 Shaft Data for Three-Phase Synchronous Machines . . . . . . . . . . . 9-127 Stator Slot Data for Brushless PMDC Motors . . . . . . . . . 9-126 Stator Data for Brushless PMDC Motors . . . . . . . . 9-137 Stator Winding Data for Brushless PMDC Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-129 Defining Different Size Wires for a Brushless DC Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. . . 9-117 Defining the Shaft Data for a Three-Phase Synchronous Machine . . . . . . 9-126 Defining the Stator Data for a Brushless PMDC Motor . . . . 9-139 Rotor Data for Brushless PMDC Motors . . 9128 Defining the Stator Windings and Conductors for a Brushless PMDC Motor . . . . . 9-119 Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Three-Phase Synchronous Machine . . . . . . . . . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inc. . . . . . .5 . . . . 9121 Analysis Approach for Brushless PMDC Motors . . . 9121 Defining a Brushless Permanent-Magnet DC Motor . . . 9-140 Contents-12 Release 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9123 Defining the General Data for a Brushless PMDC Motor 9-123 General Data for Brushless PMDC Motors . . . 9-120 Brushless Permanent-Magnet DC Motors . . .© SAS IP. . . . . . 9-140 Defining the Rotor Pole for a Brushless PMDC Motor . . . . . . . . . . 9-143 Solution Data for Brushless PMDC Motors . . . . . . . 9-144 Switched Reluctance Motors . .5 . . . 9-155 Defining the Rotor Data for a Switched Reluctance Motor 9155 Rotor Data for Switched Reluctance Motors . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inc. . . . . 9145 Defining a Switched Reluctance Motor . . . . . . . . . 9-152 Defining the Stator Winding Data for a Switched Reluctance Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-157 Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Switched Reluctance Motor . . . . 9-142 Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Brushless PMDC Motor 9-142 Analysis Offered . . . . . . 9-151 Defining the Stator Data for a Switched Reluctance Motor 9151 Stator Data for Switched Reluctance Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-149 Defining the Circuit Data for a Switched Reluctance Motor 9149 Circuit Data for Switched Reluctance Motors . . . . . All rights reserved. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-142 Defining the Shaft Data for a Brushless PMDC Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .© SAS IP. . 9-142 Shaft Data for Brushless PMDC Motors . . . . . . . . . . . .Maxwell Online Help Rotor Pole Data for Brushless PMDC Motors . . . . . 9-156 Defining the Shaft Data for a Switched Reluctance Motor 9156 Shaft Data for Switched Reluctance Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inc. . . . . . . . . 9Contents-13 Release 14. . . . . . . . . . 9145 Analysis Approach for Switched Reluctance Motors . . . . . 9147 Defining the General Data for a Switched Reluctance Motor 9148 General Data for Switched Reluctance Motors . .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. . . . . . . . 9-152 Defining Different Size Wires for a Switched Reluctance Motor 9-154 Stator Winding Data for Switched Reluctance Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-162 General Data for Line-Start PM Synchronous Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-163 Defining the Stator Slots for a Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor 9-164 Stator Slot Data for Line-Start PM Synchronous Motors . . 9-173 Optional Rotor Damper for Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor 9-173 Defining the Shaft Data for a Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor 9-174 Contents-14 Release 14. . . . 9-168 Stator Winding Data for Line-Start PM Synchronous Motors 9169 Optional Vent for Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor Stator 9171 Defining the Rotor Data for a Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor 9-171 Rotor Data for Line-Start PM Synchronous Motors . . . . . . . 9-172 Defining the Rotor Pole for a Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor 9-172 Rotor Pole Data for Line-Start PM Synchronous Motors . . 9159 Analysis Approach for Line-Start PM Synchronous Motors 9159 Defining a Line-Start Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motor 9-161 Defining the General Data for a Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor .© SAS IP. .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inc. . . . . . . . Inc. .Maxwell Online Help 157 Solution Data for Switched Reluctance Motors . . . . . . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . . . . . . . . . . . 9-162 Defining the Stator Data for a Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor 9-162 Stator Data for Line-Start PM Synchronous Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . All rights reserved. . . .5 . . . . . . . . . . . 9-165 Defining Different Size Wires for a Line-Start Synchronous Motor . . . . . . . . . . 9-164 Defining the Stator Windings and Conductors for a Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-157 Line-Start Permanent-Magnet Synchronous Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-186 Defining the Rotor Data for a Universal Motor . . . . 9-181 Stator Pole Data for Universal Motors . . .© SAS IP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Maxwell Online Help Shaft Data for Line-Start PM Synchronous Motors . . . . . . . . . 9-180 Defining the Stator Pole for a Universal Motor . . . . . . . 9177 Analysis Approach for Universal Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-179 General Data for Universal Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . . .5 . . . . 9177 Defining a Universal Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-174 Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . All rights reserved. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-180 Stator Data for Universal Motors . . . . . 9188 Defining the Rotor Windings and Conductors for a Universal Motor . . 9-183 Defining Different Size Wires for a Universal Motor Stator Winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inc. . . . . . . 9-193 Defining the Commutator and Brush for a Universal Motor 9195 Contents-15 Release 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-185 Stator Winding Data for Universal Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-189 Defining Different Size Wires for a Universal Motor Rotor Winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-186 Rotor Data for Universal Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 9178 Defining the General Data for a Universal Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-193 Rotor Winding Data for Universal Motors . . Inc. 9-183 Defining the Stator Windings and Conductors for a Universal Motor . . . . . . . 9-179 Defining the Stator Data for a Universal Motor . . . . . 9-188 Rotor Slot Data for Universal Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. . . . . . 9-175 Universal Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-187 Defining the Rotor Slots for Universal Motors . . . . . . . 9174 Solution Data for Line-Start PM Synchronous Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9197 Solution Data for Universal Motors . . . . . 9-209 Winding Data for Commutating . . . 9-198 General DC Machines . . 9-202 General Data for General DC Machines . 9-208 Commutating Data for General DC Machines . All rights reserved. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-210 Rotor Data for General DC Machines . . . . . . . . . 9-207 Compensating Data for General DC Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-203 Defining the Stator Data for a General DC Machine . . . . 9202 Defining the General Data for a General DC Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-205 Stator Pole Data for General DC Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-197 Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Universal Motor . . 9-210 Defining the Rotor Data for a General DC Machine . . . . . . . . Inc. . . . . . . . . . .© SAS IP. . . 9-205 Defining the Stator Field Data for a General DC Machine 9206 Stator Field Data for General DC Machines . . . . . . . . . . 9196 Defining the Shaft Data for a Universal Motor . .5 . . . . . . . . . . 9-206 Shunt Data for General DC Machines . . . . 9-206 Series Data for General DC Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-200 DC Machine Operating as a Generator . . . . . . . . . 9-211 Defining the Rotor Slots for a General DC Machine . . . . . . 9-203 Stator Data for General DC Machines . . . . . . . . . 9-197 Shaft Data for Universal Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . . . . . . . 9199 Analysis Approach for General DC Machines . . . . 9-201 Defining a General DC Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inc. . . . . . . . . 9-212 Rotor Slot Data for General DC Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-204 Defining the Stator Pole for a General DC Machine .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. .Maxwell Online Help Commutator and Brush Data for Universal Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-212 Defining the Rotor Windings and Conductors for a General DC Contents-16 Release 14. 9199 DC Machine Operating as a Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-231 Defining the Stator Winding Data for a Claw-Pole Alternator 9232 Stator Winding Data for Claw-Pole Alternators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-217 Vent Data for General DC Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-226 Power and Efficiency . 9236 Defining the Rotor Data for a Claw-Pole Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-227 Defining a Claw-Pole Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Maxwell Online Help Machine . . Inc. . . . . . . . . 9228 Defining the General Data for a Claw-Pole Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 9-221 Defining the Shaft Data for a General DC Machine . . . . . . . . 9225 Analysis Approach for Claw-Pole Alternators . . .© SAS IP. . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-213 Defining Different Size Wires for a General DC Machine Rotor Winding . . . . . 9-226 Rotor Equipped with a Permanent Magnet Only . . . . . .5 . . . . . . . . .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-238 Rotor Data for Claw-Pole Alternators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-231 Stator Slot Data for Claw-Pole Alternators . . 9225 Rotor Equipped with an Excitation Winding . . . . . 9-222 Shaft Data for General DC Machines . . . 9-230 Defining the Stator Slot Data for a Claw-Pole Alternator . 9-223 Claw-Pole Alternators . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-222 Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a General DC Machine 9222 Solution Data for General DC Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-239 Contents-17 Release 14. 9-229 General Data for Claw-Pole Alternators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-229 Defining the Stator Data for a Claw-Pole Alternator . 9-219 Defining the Commutator and Brush for a General DC Machine 9-220 Commutator and Brush Data for General DC Machines . . . . . . Inc. . . . . . . . . . All rights reserved. . . . . . . . 9-229 Stator Data for Claw-Pole Alternators . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-217 Rotor Winding Data for General DC Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-251 Define NSSM Shaft Data . . . . . 9-255 View Design Sheet . . . 9-261 Transient FEA of the Non-Salient Synchronous Machines 9261 Create Maxwell 2D Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-239 Rotor Pole Data for Claw-Pole Alternators . . . . . Inc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . . . . . . . . . 9-262 Review Maxwell2D Design Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-256 View Curves . . . . . 9Contents-18 Release 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-254 Analysis Setup for Three-Phase Non-Salient Synchronous Machines . . 9254 Add Solution Setup for NSSM . 9255 View Performance . . . . 9-247 Define NSSM Rotor Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-257 Create Reports . . . . 9-240 Shaft Data for Claw-Pole Alternators . . . 9-262 Generic Rotating Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .© SAS IP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-255 Design Output for Non-Salient Synchronous Machines . . . . 9242 Defining Three-Phase Non-Salient Synchronous Machines 9246 Defining the General Data for a Three-Phase NSSM . . . . . . . . . . 9-246 Defining the Stator for Three-Phase NSSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-240 Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Claw-Pole Alternator 9240 Solution Data for Claw-Pole Alternators . .Maxwell Online Help Defining the Rotor Pole for a Claw-Pole Alternator . . . . 9-254 Validate NSSM Solution Setup . . . . . . . . .5 . . . . .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All rights reserved. 9-239 Defining the Shaft Data for a Claw-Pole Alternator . . . . . 9-241 Three-Phase Non-Salient Synchronous Machines (NSSM) 9242 Analysis Approach for Three-Phase Non-Salient Synchronous Machines . . . . . . . . . 9-299 Stator Vent Data . . . . . . . . 9-297 Defining the Shaft Data for a Generic Rotating Machine 9-297 Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Generic Rotating Machine 9-298 Solution Data for Generic Rotating Machines . . 9-286 Stator and Rotor Winding Data for Generic Rotating Machines 9-291 Stator and Rotor Circuit Data for Generic Rotating Machines 9295 Defining the Axial AC Rotor Brush for a Generic Rotating Machine . . . . Inc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Maxwell Online Help 270 Analysis Approach for Generic Rotating Machines . . . .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. . . . . . . . . . . 9-271 Defining a Generic Rotating Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9274 Defining the General Data for a Generic Rotating Machine 9275 Defining the Stator and Rotor Data for a Generic Rotating Machine . . . . . . . Inc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-296 Vent Data for Generic Rotating Machines .5 . . . . . . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . All rights reserved. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .© SAS IP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-281 Defining PM_INTERIOR Type Rotor Core Poles for a Generic Rotating Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-276 Defining Stator and Rotor Core Data for a Generic Rotating Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-279 Defining AXIAL_PM Type Stator and Rotor Core Poles for a Generic Rotating Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9270 Generic Rotating Machine Operating as a Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9302 Contents-19 Release 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9301 Rotor Vent Data . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-282 Defining the Stator and Rotor Windings for a Generic Rotating Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-277 Defining the Stator and Rotor Core Slots for a Generic Rotating Machine . . . . . . . . . . . 5 .Maxwell Online Help Contents-20 Release 14. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.© SAS IP. . Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. . All rights reserved. Inc. you first select one of the above motor or generator types. shaft) under Machine in the project tree. Line-start permanent-magnet synchronous motors. Three-Phase Non-Salient Synchronous Machine Generic Rotating Machine When you start a new model in RMxprt. Universal motors. Adjust-speed synchronous motors and generators. Permanent-magnet DC motors.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Solution and output options (such as the rated output power) are set when you add a solution setup (by right-clicking Analysis in the project tree). Brushless permanent-magnet DC motors. Switched reluctance motors. Related Topics: The RMxprt Desktop RMxprt Commands Getting Started with RMxprt 1-1 Release 14. You then enter the parameters associated with that machine type in each RMxprt Properties window.1 Getting Started with RMxprt Rotational Machine Expert (RMxprt) is an interactive software package used for designing and analyzing electrical machines. Inc. stator. Claw-pole alternators. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . General DC machines. Using RMxprt.5 . General options are available directly at the Machine level of the project tree. . All rights reserved. you can simulate and analyze the following types of machines: • • • • • • • • • • • • Three-phase and single-phase induction motors. rotor. Three-phase synchronous machines. Inc.© SAS IP. The properties windows are accessed by clicking each of the machine elements (for example. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.© SAS IP. . All rights reserved. . Inc.5 .Maxwell 3D Online Help Setting Up A Machine Model Creating a New RMxprt Project Specifying RMxprt Machine Data 1-2 Getting Started with RMxprt Release 14. Inc. 2. Click File>New. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . such as material assignments. Project definitions. Select the machine type you want. A new project is listed in the project tree. Getting Started with RMxprt 1-3 Release 14. where n is the order in which the project was added to the current session.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. All rights reserved. It is named Projectn by default.5 . Click Project>Insert RMxprt Design or click the RMxprt icon on the toolbar. 3. Inc. are stored under the project name in the project tree. Specify the name of the project when you save it using the File>Save or File>Save As commands.Maxwell 3D Online Help Creating a Project and Inserting a New RMxprt Design To create a new project: 1. and click OK. .© SAS IP. The Select Machine Type window appears. Inc. (Otherwise. Save the active project with a different name or in a different location.) 2. The new project is now saved. Enter a new name for the new project. 2. 3. Opening Recent RMxprt Projects To open a project you recently saved: • Click the name of the project file at the bottom of the File menu. click File>Save As. Saving RMxprt Projects Use the File>Save As command to do the following: • • • Save a new project.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 1. By default. Related Topics Saving a New Project Saving the Active Project Saving a Copy of a Project Saving a New RMxprt Project 1. Click OK. The Save As window appears. To create a new project from an existing one: 1.Maxwell 3D Online Help Opening Existing RMxprt Projects and Saving as New You may also create new projects from existing ones. and click Save. open the existing project you want to copy first. Inc. All rights reserved. .© SAS IP. The project information appears in the project tree. Save the active project in another file format for use in another program. 4. Use the File>Save command to save the active project. If you are already in the existing project. Click File>Save As. Opening RMxprt Projects Open a previously saved project using the File>Open command. Inc. The Open dialog box appears. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.5 . . by saving them under new file names. Select the file you want to open. The Save As dialog box appears. 1-4 Getting Started with RMxprt Release 14. files that can be opened or translated by RMxprt are displayed. Use the file browser to find the RMxprt version 6 project file. Click File>Open. with the same information as the existing project. Use the file browser to find the directory where you want to save the file. active project with a new name. where n is the order in which the project was added to the current session. 2. all files will have the . Click File>Save As. Inc.© SAS IP. Related Topics Saving the Active Project Saving a Copy of a Project Saving the Active RMxprt Project • Click File>Save.mxwl extension. 3. By default. The auto-save file is stored in the same directory as the project file and is named Projectn.5 . An "edit" is any action you perform that changes data in the project or the Getting Started with RMxprt 1-5 Release 14. . By default. Click Save. Warning Be sure to save machine models periodically. or to a new location: 1. Type the name of the file in the File name box.rmpt. RMxprt automatically saves project data after every ten edits.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Click Save. Related Topics Saving a New Project Saving a Copy of a Project Saving a Copy of an RMxprt Project To save an existing. 3. RMxprt automatically saves all data for the project to the auto-save file. . Related Topics Saving a New Project Saving the Active Project Saving RMxprt Project Data Automatically RMxprt stores recent actions you performed on the active project in an auto-save file in case a sudden workstation crash or other unexpected problem occurs. Use the file browser to find the directory where you want to save the file. 4. it may not automatically save frequently enough for your needs. RMxprt saves the project to the location you specified. Although RMxprt has an "auto-save" feature. All rights reserved. RMxprt saves the project over the existing one. Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. except solution data. RMxprt saves the project with the new name or file extension to the location you specified.Maxwell 3D Online Help 2. Type the name of the file in the File name box. Saving frequently helps prevent the loss of your work if a problem occurs. a different file extension. 4.auto by default. Related Topics Recovering Project Data in an Auto-Save File Recovering RMxprt Project Data in an Auto-Save File Following a sudden workstation crash or other unexpected problem. after a problem occurs. Once the specified number of edits is carried out. Click Tools>Options>General Options.Maxwell 3D Online Help design. this option is set at 10. Auto-save always increments forward. For example. 2. you can choose to re-open the original project file (Projectn.rmpt will automatically be saved as Projectn. 3. a "model-only" save occurs.auto" extension is appended to the original project file name. . The Options dialog box appears. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.rmpt. Inc. By default. Click OK to apply the specified auto-save settings.5 .mxwl) in an effort to recover the solution data or to open the auto-save file. 2. To modify the auto-save settings: 1. The Crash Recovery window appears. and solution analysis.rmpt project file for which you want to recover its Projectn.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. you can recover the project data in its auto-save file. Launch RMxprt from your desktop. . verify that Do Autosave is selected.. Under the Project Options tab. Inc.mxwl. With auto-save activated. including actions associated with project management. Note 4. In the Autosave interval box. RMxprt deletes the auto-save file. an ". Click File>Open. Warning When you recover a project's auto-save file you cannot recover any solutions data. Select the original Projectn. RMxprt assumes that you have saved any desired changes at this point. 3. if RMxprt has unexpectedly crashed: 1.© SAS IP.auto auto-save file. therefore. When RMxprt auto-saves. giving you the option to open the original project file 1-6 Getting Started with RMxprt Release 14. To recover project data in an auto-save file. This option is selected by default. This means that RMxprt does not save solutions data or clear any undo/redo history.auto. All rights reserved. recovering an auto-save file means you will lose any solutions data that existed in the original project file. model creation. even when you undo a command. RMxprt counts it as an edit. enter the number of edits that you want to occur between automatic saves. Project1. Warning When you close or rename a project. Related Topics Saving Project Data Automatically RMxprt Files When you create any project in the Maxwell desktop.mxwl Maxwell or RMxprt project. 3. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.mxwlresults Folder containing results data for a project. Click OK to save any changes. you cannot recover the original project file that has been overwritten. Saving Project Notes in RMxprt You can save notes about a project. 4.5 . and then click OK. design_name. This is useful for keeping a running log on the project.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Some common file and folder types are listed below: . 2.© SAS IP. project_name. The Design Notes dialog box appears. Inc. removing the results directory (solutions data) from the original project file as it overwrites to the auto-save file. Click RMxprt>Edit Notes. RMxprt replaces the original project file with the data in the auto-save file. recovering data in an auto-save file is not reversible. . Warning If you choose to recover the auto-save file. This file is stored in the project_name. or click Cancel to exit without saving edits. including an RMxprt project.asol Results data for a design. This file's contents may be empty if a solution is unavailable. Getting Started with RMxprt 1-7 Release 14. Inc.results Folder containing results data for a design. Click OK to save the notes with the current project. such as its creation date and a description of the device being modeled. 2.Maxwell 3D Online Help or the auto-save file. Click in the window and type your notes. . where you can edit the project's notes.mxwlresults folder. RMxprt immediately overwrites the original project file data with the auto-save file data. design_name. Double-click the Notes icon in the project tree.mxwl file extension and stored in the directory you specify. it is given a . This folder is stored in the project_name. To edit existing project notes: 1. All rights reserved.mxwlresults folder. The Design Notes window appears. Any files related to that project are also stored in that directory. To add notes to a project: 1. Select Open project using autosave file to recover project data in the auto-save file. one on the diagram.© SAS IP. and one on the main desktop window. a message manager window. a progress window. Consistent with the Maxwell desktop. 1-8 Getting Started with RMxprt Release 14. Inc. To open a new window.Maxwell 3D Online Help The RMxprt Desktop RMxprt is integrated within the Maxwell desktop. the properties window. If user-defined rotor or stator slots are used in the design. the message manager window and the progress window are dockable and resizable. the RMxprt interface consists of 9 desktop components: a title bar. Inc. a project manager window.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. . All rights reserved. click Window>New Window. a status bar. . One can remain fixed on the winding. a properties window. a menu bar. toolbars. a slot editor window also displays when a rotor or stator slot is selected in the project tree. and a machine editor window. The project manager window. You can open multiple machine editor windows to display different parts at the same time.5 . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. and select the window you want to view. . For an RMxprt design. its title is appended in the title bar within square brackets. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. the design name and the design type. Inc.Maxwell 3D Online Help To move back and forth between windows. Inc. All rights reserved. the project name. select the Windows menu. The information of the active design includs the desktop name. .5 .© SAS IP. It displays the information of the active design. Getting Started with RMxprt 1-9 Release 14. If a machine editor window is maximized. RMxprt Title Bar The title bar is located at the top of the application window. the design type is Machine.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Maxwell 3D Online Help Working with the RMxprt Menu Bar The menu bar enables you to perform all Maxwell. Tools menu Use the Tools menu to modify the active project's material library. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. and undo and redo actions. RMxprt menu Use the RMxprt menu commands to validate design input data. and define project variables and datasets. Maxwell2D. Such tasks include managing project files. which appear at the top of the desktop: File menu Use the File menu commands to manage RMxprt project files and printing options. set up Optimetrics. arrange the material libraries. or RMxprt design to the active project. and change the machine editor window view. . edit wire size. and setting and modifying all project parameters. Project menu Use the Project menu commands to add a Maxwell 3D. Related Topics Getting Help 1-10 Getting Started with RMxprt Release 14. . Help menu Use the Help menu commands to access the online help system and view the current software version information. such as edit winding layout. customizing the desktop. Machine menu Use the Machine menu to work with the machine data. post process solutions. analyze all designs of the active project. manage designs in one or more projects. display options. and/or RMxprt tasks.© SAS IP. and other design tasks. View menu Use the View menu commands to display or hide desktop components. and modify many of the software's default settings. delete projects. add analysis setups. Window menu Use the Window menu commands to rearrange the application windows and toolbar icons. drawing objects. Inc. update project definitions from libraries. analyze designs. and set dimension unit for the active editor window. run and record scripts. Edit menu Use the Edit menu commands to modify properties in the active design. All rights reserved. customize the desktop's toolbars. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. ePhysics. set up parameters.5 . RMxprt contains the following menus. depending on the software you purchased. then the Project Manager window is currently visible on the desktop. and in the Message Manager window. display or hidden coil connection. Inc. or see message details. which enables you to modify the toolbar settings on the desktop. To access the shortcut menu in the Project Manager window. in the Properties window. In the Project Manager window Use the shortcut menus in the Project Manager window (or the project tree) to manage project files and design properties. Note Most of the commands on the shortcut menus are also available on the menu bar. Inc. Shortcut Menu in the Toolbars Area Use the shortcut menu in the toolbars area of the desktop to show or hide windows or toolbars. paste or delete) property values. append. To access the shortcut menu in the toolbars area: • Right-click in the toolbars area at the top of the desktop. and customize the toolbars. Getting Started with RMxprt 1-11 Release 14. For example. and customize the toolbars.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. these commands duplicate menu commands at the top of the screen. in the Project Manager window. In Machine Editor window Use the shortcut menu in the Machine Editor window to edit winding layout. In the toolbars area Use the shortcut menu in the toolbars area of the desktop to show or hide windows or toolbars. change the view. modify. for a particular node: • • Select a node or item. copy.Maxwell 3D Online Help Working with the RMxprt Shortcut Menus A variety of shortcut menus — menus that appear when you right-click a selection — are available in the toolbars area of the desktop. in the project tree has a shortcut menu. . A check box appears next to a command if the item is visible. . Shortcut Menus in the Project Manager Window Each node. In the Slot Editor window Use the shortcut menu in the Slot Editor window to insert. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.5 . and copy to Clipboard. In Properties window Use the shortcut menus in the Properties window to edit (cut. if a check box appears next to the Project Manager command. copy message. All rights reserved.© SAS IP. Right-click in the Project Manager window. or item. and remove slot segments. In Message Manager window Use the shortcut menus in the Message Manager window to clear. Click Customize to open the Customize dialog box. in the Machine Editor window. 1. 1. the last action that was canceled. . the RMxprt>Analyze command. that is. click the project icon. the last action you performed on the active project or design. You can rearrange the position of the various toolbars. • • To display a brief description of the toolbar button. Click Edit>Undo. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. click the Reset All button in the Customize window. Your last action is now undone. Undoing RMxprt Commands Use the Undo command on the Edit menu to cancel. click on the left edge of a toolbar and drag it to new location. move the pointer over the button.. do one of the following: • To redo the last action you canceled on the active project. or redo.Maxwell 3D Online Help Working with the RMxprt Toolbars The toolbar buttons and shortcut pull-down lists act as shortcuts for executing various commands. To relocate a toolbar. or undo. .5 . In the Project Manager window. such as inserting a design. You can redo a canceled action related to project management. You cannot undo an analysis that you have performed on a model. Inc. Inc. To display all toolbar buttons. such as drawing an object or deleting a field overlay plot. Note When you save a project. do one of the following: • To undo the last action you performed on the active project. Hint To modify the toolbars on the desktop. Related Topics Redoing Commands Redoing RMxprt Commands Use the Redo command on the Edit menu to reapply. Click Edit>Redo. RMxprt always clears the entire undo/redo history for the project and its designs. 1-12 Getting Started with RMxprt Release 14. • To redo the last action you canceled on the active design. Note 2. 2. such as inserting a design or adding project variables. In the Project Manager window. • To execute a command. click the design icon.© SAS IP. click Tools>Customize. or undone. click the design icon. and postprocessing.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. click the project icon. model creation. • To undo the last action you performed on the active design. click a toolbar button or click a selection on the shortcut pull-down list. All rights reserved. minimize or close a Machine Editor window by clicking the relevant button on the right-top corner of the window. click Window>New Window. One can remain fixed on the Winding Editor. You can maximize. A check box appears next to this command if the status bar is visible. Working with the RMxprt Machine Editor Windows You can open multiple machine editor windows in RMxprt. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. the Winding Editor tab displays a table of values. If no Machine Editor window is displayed. Diagram and Winding Editor tabs. As you enter appropriate property values. To open a new window. and windings in the Main. Inc. . Inc. and one on the Main tab. and select the window you want to view. Related Topics Undoing Commands Working with the RMxprt Status Bar The status bar is located at the bottom of the application window. the Machine Editor window dynamically updates the rotor. Note When you save a project. It displays information about the where mouse is pointed. Related Topics Setting the Window View Getting Started with RMxprt 1-13 Release 14. tile them horizontally or vertically. RMxprt always clears the entire undo/redo history for the project and its designs. you can use RMxprt>Machine Editor to bring one window up.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. To move back and forth between windows. All rights reserved.© SAS IP. You can cascade all Machine Editor windows. slots. the window title is displayed within square brackets in the Title Bar of the main application window. When only one Machine Editor window is maximized.Maxwell 3D Online Help Your last canceled action is now reapplied. select the Windows menu. stator. To display or hide the status bar: • Click View>Status Bar. As you provide winding information.5 . one on the Diagram tab. . . 3.5 .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.© SAS IP. The Print dialog box appears. 2. 1-14 Getting Started with RMxprt Release 14. . All rights reserved. Click Cancel to dismiss the window without printing. Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. or you can send the output to a . Do one of the following: • • • Click OK to print the project.prn file. You can change the print quality (a higher dpi produces a higher quality print but takes more time and printer memory). Printing in RMxprt The printing commands enable you to print the display in the active window. To zoom into the diagram in the window: • Click View>Zoom In. To zoom out of the diagram in the window: • Click View>Zoom Out. Click Properties to define printer settings. Click File>Print.Maxwell 3D Online Help Printing in RMxprt Setting the Window View To fit the entire diagram in the window: • Click View>Fit All. To print the project: 1. Inc. 3.© SAS IP. It is named Projectn by default. it is listed as the second-level node in the project tree. do one of the following: • Click View>Project Manager. Expand the design icon in the project tree to view specific data about the model. 2. All rights reserved. A check box appears next to this command if the Project Manager window is visible. select Expand Project Tree on Insert.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.Maxwell 3D Online Help Working with the RMxprt Project Manager The Project Manager window displays the open project's structure. Click Tools>Options>General Options. 4. The specific options depend on the machine type you have selected. Click the Project Options tab. which is referred to as the project tree. The Options dialog box appears. the rotor. where n is the order in which the project was added to the current session of the Maxwell Desktop. the stator. Expand the project icon to view all designs and material definitions belonging to the project. Under Additional Options. Inc. Related Topics Viewing RMxprt Design Details Automatically Expand the Project Tree Setting the RMxprt Project Tree to Expand Automatically You can set the project tree to automatically expand when an item is added to a project. Click OK. and then click Project Manager on the shortcut menu. • Right-click in the toolbars area on the desktop. Getting Started witn RMxprt 1-15 Release 14. For RMxprt projects. regardless of type. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. Related Topics Working with the RMxprt Project Tree Shortcut Menus in the Project Manager Window Working with the RMxprt Project Tree The project tree is located in the Project Manager window and contains details about all open projects.5 . A check box appears next to this command if the Project Manager window is visible. . To show or hide the Project Manager window. where n is the order in which the design was added to the project. The top node listed in the project tree is the project name. the project tree shows where you can select each portion of the machine to open the corresponding tab sheet in the Properties window. The project tree lists options for the general motor characteristics. It is named RMxprtDesignn by default. and other options such as winding data or commutating data. . The Project Manager window displays details about all projects open in the Maxwell Desktop. 1. Viewing RMxprt Design Details Once you insert an RMxprt design into a project. and the ability to edit them in the Properties window vary depending on the type of item selected. Some objects have tabs on the window to control the properties displayed. Working with the RMxprt Properties Window The Properties window displays the attributes.© SAS IP. Single clicking on an item in the Machine section of the project tree displays a docked Properties window located under the project tree. Changes to values in the docked properties window apply immediately to the selected object. The properties. A dialog box appears with that setup's parameters. . double-click the design setup icon that you want to edit. which you can then edit. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. The floating window can be moved for convenience in viewing the RMxprt Machine Editor window. Optimetrics Displays any Optimetrics setups added to an RMxprt design. . Related Topics Showing and Hiding the Properties Window Setting the Properties Window to Open Automatically Showing and Hiding the RMxprt Properties Window To show or hide the Properties window on the desktop. Note To edit a project's design details: • In the project tree. and then click Properties on the shortcut menu.Maxwell 3D Online Help The RMxprtDesignn node contains the following project details: Machine Allows you to specify parameters for various aspects of the machine. Inc. A solution setup specifies how RMxprt computes the solution. A horizontal scroll bar lets you adjust the view of the properties if necessary. do one of the following: • Click View>Property Window. The tabs available in the Properties window also vary depending the selection.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Changes to values in the floating window are not applied until you click the OK button. Double-clicking on an item in the Machine section of the project tree opens a floating Properties window. of an item selected in the project treeand enables you to edit an item's properties. A whole or part geometry will be drawn in the Main tab of the Machine Editor window (based on the values you enter). • Right-click in the toolbars area at the top of the desktop. Inc.5 . A check box appears next to this command if the Properties window is visible. Results Displays any post-processing reports that have been generated. A check box appears next to this command if the Properties window is visible. Analysis Displays the solution setups for an RMxprt design. or properties. All rights reserved. 1-16 Getting Started with RMxprt Release 14. Click Clear messages for Project#. Right-click in the toolbars area at the top of the desktop.Maxwell 3D Online Help Working with the RMxprt Progress Window The Progress window monitors a simulation while it is running. . do one of the following: • • Click View>Message Manager. 2. 2. such as error messages about the design's setup or informational messages about the progress of an analysis. Related Topics Clearing Messages for the RMxprt Project Clearing Messages for the RMxprt Model Copying Messages in RMxprt Clearing Messages for the RMxprt Project You can clear all the messages for a particular project. • Right-click in the toolbars area at the top of the desktop. Copying Messages in RMxprt You can copy all the messages for a particular project. Right-click the project# in the Message Manager. do one of the following: • Click View>Progress Window. Right-click the RMxprtDesign# in the Message Manager.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.© SAS IP. A check box appears next to this command if the Progress window is visible. Click Clear messages for RMxprtDesign#. Getting Started witn RMxprt 1-17 Release 14. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. A pop-up appears. and then click Progress on the shortcut menu. A check box appears next to this command if the Progress window is visible. .5 . To clear messages: 1. and then click Message Manager on the shortcut menu. To display or hide the Message Manager window on the desktop. A pop-up appears. Clearing Messages for the RMxprt Model You can clear all the messages for a particular model. Inc. To clear messages: 1. All rights reserved. Inc. To display or hide the Progress window on the desktop. A check box appears next to this command if the Message Manager is visible. Working with the RMxprt Message Manager The Message Manager displays messages associated with a project's development. 1-18 Getting Started with RMxprt Release 14. A pop-up appears.Maxwell 3D Online Help To copy messages: 1. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 2. Click Copy messages to clipboard. Inc. . .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Inc. All rights reserved.5 .© SAS IP. Right-click in the Message Manager. This displays the Select Machine Type window. Input design data. Inc. Start Maxwell from the desktop. This creates a new project folder in the project window with the default name of Projectn. Click File>New from the menu bar. Click Project>Insert RMxprt Design or click the RMxprt icon in the tool bar. select Brushless Permanent Magnet DC Motor and click OK. Analyze the design.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. All rights reserved.Maxwell 3D Online Help Quick Start for RMxprt This section briefly introduces how to enter the environment of the software RMxprt and quick mastering its main functions by providing a simple example. Create a Maxwell 2D Project for electromagnetic field analyses Create an electric machine model for Simplorer System Simulation RMxprt Example Part 1: Create a New Project To create a new project: 1. 2. From the list of machine types. Inc. Getting Started with RMxprt 1-19 Release 14. The basic process flow chart is shown below. . . 2.© SAS IP.5 . for this example. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Create Reports and View output characteristics curves. RMxprt Example Part 2: Select a Machine To select a machine to insert into the new project: 1. Create a new Project Select the machine type. 4.5 . The frictional loss at the computed rated speed will be modified if the computed rated speed is different from the given rated speed. 1-20 Getting Started with RMxprt Release 14.) This value is referred to the given Reference Speed. Set the values as indicated below. Click the button to display the Select Circuit Type window. Inc. 5. RMxprt Example Part 3: Input Design Data In this part of the example. Continue to Part 3 of the example to Input Design Data. . This displays the Machine Icon.© SAS IP. Double-click the Circuit icon to view the Circuit properties window. 0 Set this to 1500 DC Set this to C2. Select the C2 button.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. All rights reserved. Click the + symbol by the RMxprt:Designn icon in the project tree to view the design hierarchy. Click OK to close the Machine properties window. 1. Double-click the icon to view the Machine Properties window. Machine Type Number of Poles Rotor Position Frictional Loss Wind Loss Reference Speed Control Type Circuit Type Brushless Permanent Magnet DC Motor Set this to 4 Set to Inner Set this to 11 (Frictional and wind loss is typically within the range of 1%~3% of the rated output power.Maxwell 3D Online Help This closes the window and inserts the Brushless Permanent Magnet DC Motor design in the project. 3. 2. you provide values for the design and for various parts. in this example. Inc. Click the + symbol by the Machine icon to view the design hierarchy of the motor. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 2% is estimated. . and OK to close the window. Select RMxprt library in the Libraries box in the upper right corner of the Materials window: then select M19-24G. 0. Lead Angle of Trigger Set this to 0 to obtain the maximum average emf for the following phase in the trig_on period. All rights reserved.Maxwell 3D Online Help Set the values as indicated below.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Double-click the Stator icon to view the Stator properties window. add RMxprt (under materials) and click the Save as Default check box. Set this to 75. 6. Set this 65 for the length of the Stator iron core. 7. Getting Started with RMxprt 1-21 Release 14. Inc. quit the Materials window.© SAS IP. Then click OK. click Tools>Configure Libraries. .5 . . Note: If RMxprt is not listed in the libraries box in the upper right corner of the Materials window.95 Click on the button to display the Materials window. Inc. Set the values as shown below. Trigger Pulse Width Transistor Drop Diode Drop Set this to 90 Set this to 2 Set this to 2 Click OK to close the circuit properties window. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Outer Diameter Inner Diameter Length Stacking Factor Steel Type Set this to 120. Set this to 1. Take a moment to look at the Maxwell Design window. Then set the given values for the slot shapes. Inc. you see a table of the coils. Tooth Width Hs0 Set to 0. you will see two concentric rings that represent the inner and outer diameters you specified.0 Hs2 Set to 8. . Auto Design Uncheck the box to disable auto design. Inc. Click the 2 button and OK to close the window. and the out slots. All rights reserved. Click the + symbol by the Stator icon to view the hierarchy under the stator.2 Bs0 Set to 2. Double-click the slot icon to view the Slot Properties window. (To skew one slot pitch. Close the properties window and open it again.5 Hs1 Set to 1. If you click the Main tab. with columns for Phase.5 Bs1 Set to 5. Select 2 as the Slot type. 9. The Tooth Width property becomes invisible. the in slots. Set this to 24. . Click the button on the row cell to display the Select Slot Type window. Some of the properties will not appear until you disable the Auto Design property in the first row. There is also a drawing showing the placement of the 24 slots of the type that you defined here.5 .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.Maxwell 3D Online Help Number of Slots Slot Type Skew Width 8. 10. Parallel Tooth Uncheck this box.6 1-22 Getting Started with RMxprt Release 14. Set the values as shown below. turns. If you click the Winding Editor tab.) Click OK to close the Stator Properties window.6 Bs2 Set to 7. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.© SAS IP. i. a coil spans from slot 1 to slot 6. . 5.e.© SAS IP. Inc. Number of Strands Select 1 for the number of strands (or number of wires per conductor). Wire Wrap Thickness for electromagnetic wire is 7~10% of Wire Diameter. This is the total thickness of double side wire insulation. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. full pitch = 24 slots / 4 poles = 6. Typically. All rights reserved. . For this example.Maxwell 3D Online Help 11. Wire Wrap Select 0. Winding tab Winding Layers Winding Type Set this to 2. "Whole Coiled. the Slot number of turns per coil is equal to 30 for double-layer winding. 12. i. Click OK to close the Slot Properties window.5 . Different manufacturers produce different Wire Wrap Thickness for electromagnetic wire. i. the coils in all the slots per phase are in series-connected. Wire Size Click on the Properties field to display the Wire Size window and select AUTO for automatic design of wire gauge. Coil Pitch Set this to 5. Inc. End/Insulation Input Half-turn Uncheck this box. The input value 0 means that RMxprt will automatically check into the wire gauge library for the wrap thickness relevant to the wire gauge. This example uses short coil pitch.e.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS." Parallel Branches Select 1 for the number of parallel-connected branches. Conductors per Set this to 60 for the number of conductors per slot. Getting Started with RMxprt 1-23 Release 14. Wire Size will be set to 0 in the Wire Size window. tab Length Half Turn Length This item is not shown if Input Half Turn Length is unchecked. Double-click the stator Winding icon to view the Winding Properties window.e. Set the values as shown below. This example relies on RMxprt to automatically select the optimum diameter and the gauge code for electromagnetic wire. Set the values as shown below. 15. Inc.Maxwell 3D Online Help End Adjustment Set this to 0 for the linear overhang of the end part of the coil out of the iron core as shown below. Base Inner Radius 0 Tip Inner Diameter 0 End Clearance 0 Slot Liner Set this to 0.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. therefore input 0.3 for the single side thickness of slot insulation. This is also the diameter to match the shaft Input 65 for the length of the rotor core. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Wedge Thickness 0 Layer Insulation 0 Limited Fill Factor 0. Click Machine>Wiiding>Connect All Coils. the lengths of the iron cores of the stator and the rotor are the same. . In this example.0. .© SAS IP.5 .2* AirGap.75 13. All rights reserved. In this example. Outer Diameter Inner Diameter Length Set this to 74. 14. Input 26 for the inner diameter of the rotor core. Click OK to close the stator Winding Properties window. 1-24 Getting Started with RMxprt Release 14. the coil turns immediately at the slot opening. Double-click the Rotor Icon to view the Rotor Properties window. This is the Stator inner diameter . Inc. The Winding tab in the main window shows all coils connected. the laminations are punched together on the same sheet.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. .95. therefore. Input 0. 16. Inc. Getting Started with RMxprt 1-25 Release 14. Select 1. the brands of the silicon-steel sheet and the stacking factors are the same for the stator and the rotor. 17. Double-click the Pole icon to view the Pole Properties window.© SAS IP. . In this example. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.5 .Maxwell 3D Online Help Steel Type Stacking Factor Pole Type Select M19-24 for the brand of the silicon-steel sheet for the rotor. 18. Click on the button on the Pole Type field to display the Select Pole Type window. Click the + symbol by the Rotor icon to open the project hierarchy under the rotor. Inc. Click the 1 button and OK to close the window. All rights reserved. Click OK to close the Rotor Properties window. 5 .Maxwell 3D Online Help Set the values as shown below.© SAS IP. .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Inc. Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . 1-26 Getting Started with RMxprt Release 14. All rights reserved. 5 . Embrace 0.667 means 60 mechanical degrees of the coverage of the magnet as shown in the figure. Inc. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. . All rights reserved. In a four pole machine with Embrace. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.Maxwell 3D Online Help Embrace Input 0.© SAS IP. each arched permanentmagnetic piece covers 90 mechanical degrees along the rotor surface. 1. .7. Similarly. Embrace of the rotor represents the ratio of the rotor central angle corresponding to the arc length along the rotor surface of an arched permanent-magnetic piece to the rotor central angle corresponding to a rotor pole. Getting Started with RMxprt 1-27 Release 14. 0. Click Tools>Options>Machine Options.© SAS IP. 1-28 Getting Started with RMxprt Release 14. maximum magnetic energy product 183 kJ/m3. Click OK to close the window. Inc. there exists an offset between the two centers. . 2.5 for the thickness of the permanent-magnetic steel. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.96 Tesla. go to Analyze the Design. In the electric machines with non-uniform air-gap. This example uses uniform air-gap. Add the following values. Inc. All rights reserved. To continue to Part 4 of the example. the offset is set to 0. The Machine Options window appears. RMxprt Example Part 4: Analyze the Design. Magnet Thickness Input 3. 3. The Wire setting should be set to American. Click RMxprt>Analysis Setup>Add Setup. RMxprt terms it as Pole Arc Offset. Magnet Type 19. This permanent-magnetic steel possesses residual flux density 0. This displays the Solution Setup window. Click OK to close the Pole Properties window. and relative recoil magnetic permeability 1.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.Maxwell 3D Online Help Offset Input 0. a few options should be decided by the following procedures: 1. therefore. The arched permanent-magnetic pieces to form the magnets of the rotor might not be concentric with the rotor as shown in the figure. Before analyzing a design project. Select XG196/96. .5 . coercive force 690 kA/m. Inc. Close the dialog to save the Setup.Maxwell 3D Online Help 4. use the diagnostic information in the Message Window to resolve any issues. All rights reserved. Load Type Const Power Rated Output Power 0. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1. With the Solution tab selected. 6.55 kW Rated Voltage 220 Rated Speed 1500 Operating Temperature 75c 5. Since automatic design function for Getting Started with RMxprt 1-29 Release 14. Click RMxprt>Validation Check to ensure that all values have been set. go to Create Reports and View Output. . .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. select Stator Winding as the Data selected. click RMxprt>Analyze All. When the design has been validated. you can view the solution data. This opens the Solutions window with the Solutions tab selected.© SAS IP. RMxprt Example Part 5: Create Reports and View Output After you have run an analysis. Inc. and the Full Load Operation Data displayed. this part of data should be the same as the data input in the Stator Winding Properties window. To continue to Part 5 of the example. Solution Data . Click RMxprt>Results>Solution Data. If any items do not pass validation. The progress of the analysis is shown in the Progress window.the Data field in the Solutions window is a drop down menu from which you can select the following: • • • • • • • • Full Load Operation Material Consumption No Load Operation Permanent Magnet Rotor Data Stator Slot Stator Winding Steady State Parameters Parameter Design Sheet Curves . The Solutions window contains tabs for the following: • • • • 2.5 .Selecting the Curves tab lets you view pre-defined graphs. Except for a few data corresponding to the wire gauge. 1-30 Getting Started with RMxprt Release 14. . In the Solutions window. Here most of the data is the same as input in the Rotor Pole properties window. The electromagnetic wire with Wire Diameter of 0. but it still 0 based on the wire wrap data in the library. change the Data selection to Permanent Magnet. Click OK to close the properties window. Inc. 4. you can open the Winding Properties window and specify the value. After the second analysis is completed. in addition to Mechanical Pole Embrace which is input based on the physical geometry.8118 for the electromagnetic wire diameter.8118 for the diameter of the electromagnetic wire. d.e. click RMxprt>Results>Solution Data to view the effect of Wire Wrap Thickness of the electromagnetic wire on Stator Slot Fill Factor. Wire Wrap 0. Stator Slot Fill Factor represents the percentage of occupation of the slot area. e. b. open the Wire Size selection window. For Wire Size. In the Solutions window.8118 is equivalent to AWG 20. Because input Thickness (mm): wire wrap is 0.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. select 0. Thickness (mm): Stator Slot Fill Factor (%): 3. The only difference is that the Pole Arc radius replaces Pole Arc Offset and. In the slot Wire Wrap field. The Rotor data is displayed. Stator Slot Fill Factor (%): 61. Wire Wrap 0 for the insulation thickness of the electromagnetic wire. change the Data selection to Rotor Data.8118. input 0. RMxprt calculates the following data: Wire Diameter (mm): 0. RMxprt picks it up from the selected wire library (American wire).Maxwell 3D Online Help the wire gauge is selected in the input. a. Click RMxprt>Analyze All. which corresponds to 20 for the wire gauge. c.08 for the insulation thickness of the electromagnetic wire. Inc.08. Electrical Pole Embrace is also given. i. Wire Diameter (mm): 0.5 . the ratio of the total square sectional area of wires (including Wire Wrap Thickness) in a slot to the total slot area less the slot insulation. Now that Wire Diameter of the electromagnetic wire is calculated by RMxprt. Electrical Pole Embrace is calculated by the ratio of the average magnetic flux density to the maximum magnetic flux density according to the magnetic flux density distribution along the air-gap. . 74.© SAS IP.4557.165. All rights reserved. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. the Recoil Residual Flux density and Recoil Coercive Force of the recoil line based on the demagnetization flux density. the leakage inductance.© SAS IP. The mmfs of the teeth and the yoke of the stator. . .73 A/mm2 (stator current distribution per circumferential length along air-gap) Armature Current Density (through cross-sectional area of stator wire) Getting Started with RMxprt 1-31 Release 14. 5.45 A 70. the following characteristic parameters of the machine are calculated as: Parameters Calculated Values Units Average Input Current 2. which are used for finite element analysis when a linear PM characteristics must be specified.Maxwell 3D Online Help This part displays the characteristic data of the permanent magnets as well as the Demagnetization Flux density. Inc. direct.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. The magnetic flux leakage coefficient takes into account the part of the magnetic flux in the rotor not linking with the stator. This part displays the stator winding factor.and the quadratic-axis inductances.97 A/mm 4. change the Data selection to Full Load Operation. In the Solutions window. and the yoke of the rotor.550.93 A 2. Inc. the resistance of the phase winding.and the quadratic-axis time constants. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. change the Data selection to No-Load Operation. In the Solutions window. In the Solutions window. the direct. which locates at the knee part of the B-H curve. 7. At Rated Output Power (kW): 0. This part displays the magnetic flux densities in the teeth and the yoke of the stator.52 Tesla. the air-gap. The no-load revolution speed of this machine is equal to 2001 rpm. change the Data selection to Steady State Parameters.5 . The armature reaction mmf due to the armature current is referred to the demagnetization mmf. below the saturation situation. The maximum value among the three magnetic flux densities is 1. All rights reserved. the yoke and the permanent magnet of the rotor are given respectively for half magnetic reluctance path. the ideal torque constant KT and the ideal back emf constant KE.88 A2/mm3 (of input current waveform in one voltage period) RMS Armature Current (of phase current waveform in one voltage period) Armature Thermal Load (product of Specific Electric Loading and Armature Current Density Specific Electric Load ) 14. The correction factors for the yoke lengths of the stator and the rotor to calculate the yoke mmfs of the stator and the rotor are also given here. 6. 46 W 20.69 W 95.32 W 0.© SAS IP.36 Nm 32. Inc. This is the layout and the arrangement of the whole two-phase winding of phases A and B.6 W 85. .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. . and scroll down to Winding Arrangement.6 A (at computed Rated Speed) Iron-Core Loss (due to loss curves of stator and rotor iron-core materials) Armature Copper Loss (stator winding ohmic loss) Transistor Loss (transistor switching loss) Diode Loss (diode power consumption) Total Loss (sum of above losses) Output Power (the rated operating point is derived based on Output Power) Input Power (product of Rated Voltage and Average Input Current) Efficiency (ratio of Output Power to Input Power) Rated Speed (at Rated Output Power) Rated Torque (at Rated Output Power) Locked-Rotor Torque (starting torque at zero revolution speed) Locked-Rotor Current (starting current at zero revolution speed) 8. In the Solutions window.6 W 550 W 645. and the short coil pitch factor 5 is taken into account.Maxwell 3D Online Help Frictional and Wind Loss 11. 1-32 Getting Started with RMxprt Release 14.5 .24 W 53. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc.3 Nm 47.2 % 1562 rpm 3.87 W 9. All rights reserved. select the Design Sheet tab. click the Curves tab.) The following data of the armature winding corresponds to one phase armature winding. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. degrees): 30 Phase-A axis (elec. Inc.Maxwell 3D Online Help The 2-phase. Equivalent Model Depth 65 Equivalent Stator Stacking Factor 0.m2 10. You can view other predefined graphs by selecting from the drop down menu in the Name field. you can resize the window. 360 Number of Turns (total number of turns viewed into output terminals) Parallel Branches 1 Terminal Resistance 4. (This is at the very bottom. In the Solutions window.7 mH (stator winding dc resistance under given operating temperature.87 Tesla 690 kA/m Equivalent Hc (coercive force) Estimated Rotor Moment of Inertia 0.95 Equivalent Rotor Stacking Factor 0. This displays the Input DC Current Versus Speed graph. All rights reserved. If the text is too small to read. .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Inc. degrees): 0 Input Data.0015 kg. In the Solutions window with the Design Sheet table selected. 2-layer winding can be arranged in 6 slots as below: AAABBB 9. . degrees): 105 First slot center (elec.© SAS IP.5 Ohm 1.95 mm Equivalent Br (residual flux density) 0. Selecting the Curves tab lets you view pre-defined graphs for the following relations: • • • • Inut DC Current Versus Speed Efficiency Versus Speed Output Power Versus Speed Output Torque Versus Speed Getting Started with RMxprt 1-33 Release 14. scroll down to Transient FEA Angle per slot (elec. 75oC) End Leakage Inductance (of stator winding) The following data is the equivalent values used to 2D electromagnetic field analyses.5 . Teeth to Teeth If you select this box. . Click RMxprt>Set Export Options. go to Output Design Data. Click Done to close the Traces window and display the combined graph. the central lines of the stator teeth always coincide with the periodic dividing lines. The lower the value. Inc. In 2D electromagnetic field analysis to the torque with 2D Maxwell. 12. click RMxprt>Results>Create Report. Choose the smaller period to shorten the runtime for 2D Maxwell analyses. To continue to part Six of the example. For example. Nevertheless. Click OK to display the Traces window. .Maxwell 3D Online Help • • • • • • Cogging Torque in Two Teeth Induced Coil Voltages at Rated Speed Air-Gap Flux Density Induced Winding Phase Voltage at Rated Speed Winding Currents Under Load Phase Voltage Under Load You can also create additional plots with multiple curves. the more accurate the torque calculation. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. the structure of electric machine can be divided into several periods. These traces appear in the Traces field. Band Arc is the central angle corresponding to each division. but longer the computation time in order. This opens the Export Options window.5 . the default value is 3o. 13. All rights reserved.© SAS IP. Band Arc The air-gap is divided uniformly along the circumference. it can be divided into four periods. RMxprt Example Part 6: Output Design Data To export the model for Maxwell 2D Analysis: 1. 11. otherwise. the value of Band Arc is sensitive. Design Sheet This lets you specify an Excel Spreadsheet template for a customized design sheet. select Input DC Current and Efficiency vs Speed. Then select Output Torque. Inc. the central lines of the rotor teeth or the rotor magnet poles coincide with the periodic dividing lines. and click the Add Trace button. the central lines of the rotor slots or the interpole lines of the rotor magnet poles coincide with the periodic dividing line. In the Traces window. Difference The angular displacement from the rotor to the stator in electric degrees. therefore. The four pole electric machine in this example has a whole slot number per pole per phase. The effective range of its value is between 1o to 5o. 1-34 Getting Started with RMxprt Release 14. the finer the air-gap meshes.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Periodic According to the geometric symmetry. This displays the Create Report dialog box. 5. This displays the Export Simplorer window. . Inc. 8. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. click RMxprt>Analysis Setup>Export>Simplorer Model. 7. The Progress window shows activity. Specify a ProjectName.Maxwell 3D Online Help 2. Click OK. 3.5 . All rights reserved.© SAS IP. Inc. 6. 4. Getting Started with RMxprt 1-35 Release 14.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Click OK. . Click RMxprt>Analysis Setup>Export>Maxwell 2D. This displays the Export Maxwell 2D window. Provide a project name and a location. To export a Simplorer model. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. All rights reserved. .Maxwell 3D Online Help 1-36 Getting Started with RMxprt Release 14. Inc. Inc.5 . .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.© SAS IP. If you move or change the names of files without using these commands.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. In general. and field solution and post-processing information. material assignments. the software may not be able to find information necessary to solve the model. use the File menu commands to manage projects. where n is a number. Setting Up RMxprt Projects 2-1 Release 14. or designs. Inc. Each design ultimately includes a geometric model. .5 . All rights reserved. Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.© SAS IP. .2 Setting Up RMxprt Projects An RMxprt project is a folder that includes one or more models. A new project called Projectn is automatically created when the software is launched. You can also open a new project by clicking File>New. Use the Validate command to validate the design. 3. (Click Project>Insert RMxprt Design. Related Topics: Specifying RMxprt Winding Data Quick Start for RMxprt 2-2 Setting Up RMxprt Projects Release 14. Also specify the Machine options (such as the units and the wire setting such as the wire shape and gauge). 7. and optimization settings.. 8. including the coercivity. and specific RMxprt options. 6. or run an optimization. Use the Tools menu commands to specify general options (such as post-processing and autosave settings). assign any Materials to the machine parts. . and relative recovery permeability. Insert an RMxprt design. parametric. follow this general procedure: 1. Inc. run a parametric analysis. BH-curve parameters.5 .Maxwell 3D Online Help Setting Up A Machine Model To set up an RMxprt model.© SAS IP. Double-click the Machine items in the project tree. Use the Results post-processing commands to display the lamination and plot the solutions. and specify the machine type from the Select Machine Type window. 5. 4. setting values such as: • • Permanent magnet definition. solver options (such as the default process priority). to specify the settings for the various parts of the selected machine parameters. Under Definitions in the project tree. .) 2. Use the Analyze commands to generate a solution. energy density. Use the Setup commands (either on the RMxprt menu or on the Analysis or Optimetrics submenus via the project tree) to specify variable.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. All rights reserved. Inc. 2. The design tree items (such as the Machine Rotor. Right-click on the design tree machine item. Permanent-Magnet SynSetting Up RMxprt Projects 2-3 Release 14. Brushless PermanentMagnet DC Motor.© SAS IP. “TPSM”. Command: RMxprt>Machine Type or right-click on a machine model in the Project Manager and select Machine Type on the context menu. Choose the desired new machine type and click the OK button. Line-Start Permanent-Magnet Synchronous Motor. The SetMachineType script command provides for this functionality in scripts. “DCM”.<design_name> dialog box. “BLDC”. Inc. “PMDC”. . and click on Machine Type to open the Machine Type <project_name> . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. All rights reserved. • • Note The design’s machine type label is changed to that of the new machine type. “GRM”. “LSSM”. if the original design name and type was 3hp (Single Phase Induction Motor). Claw-pole Synchronous Machine. Instead. “UNIM”. and Shaft data) under the design type will be updated with the default machine data applicable to the new machine type. . “SRM”. For example.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. DC Machine. and you change the machine type to a Switched Reluctance Motor. “TPIM”. Syntax: SetMachineType <MachineType> Return Value: None Parameters: <MachineType> Type: <string> The desired machine type. You can Undo/Redo the machine type change if you wish to revert to the original machine type and vice-versa. To change the machine type for an existing model: 1. Possible values are: “ASSM”. “NSSM”. Stator. “CPSM”.Maxwell 3D Online Help Changing the Machine Type RMxprt allows you to change the machine type for an existing design. representing respectively: Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machine. the design name would be 3hp (Switched Reluctance Motor). Generic Rotating Machine.5 . “SPIM”. the initial default data for the new machine type is used. or pull down the RMxprt main menu. Inc. Related Topics RMxprt Machine Types SetMachineType Use: Modifies an existing machine type. The original machine data which applies to the new machine type is not retained. Universal Motor Example: SetMachineType “ASSM” 2-4 Setting Up RMxprt Projects Release 14.Maxwell 3D Online Help chronous Generator.© SAS IP. Inc.5 . Non-Salient Synchronous Machine.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. . Switched Reluctance Motor. Single-Phase Induction Motor. Three-Phase Induction Motor". All rights reserved. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Three-Phase Synchronous Machine. . Inc. The Design Settings dialog box appears.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. and materials with Permeability greater than 100 as steels.Maxwell 3D Online Help Design Settings in RMxprt The Design Settings dialog allows you to specify how the simulator will deal with some aspects of the design. Setting the Material Threshold in RMxprt 1. 5. Note RMxprt will treat materials with conductivity greater than 10. The Design Settings dialog box appears with the Set Material Threshold tab selected. All rights reserved.000). Click RMxprt>Design Settings. Type a value in the Conductivity Threshold text box (Default=10.000 as conductors. Specify User Defined Data. . change the values by clicking the Tools>Options>RMxprt Options menu and setting the material thresholds in the RMxprt Options dialog. Set Export Options . 4. • • • Set the Material Threshold for treating materials as conductors/insulators.© SAS IP. Inc. Inc. 3. . If you want these values to be the default. Type a value in the Permeability text box (Default=100). 2. Click OK. Related Topics Setting RMxprt Options RMxprt Export Options To set export options for the project: 1.5 . Click RMxprt>Design Settings. Setting Up RMxprt Projects 2-5 Release 14. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Difference The angular displacement from the rotor to the stator in electric degrees. more accurate the torque calculation. the structure of electric machine can be divided into several periods. button to find and select a file. .© SAS IP. enter values in any enabled text boxes. Inc. Some common requests from users which have been implemented in RMxprt solver.Maxwell 3D Online Help 2. These options may also be set on the Export Options tab of the RMxprt Options dialog box. Band Arc is the central angle corresponding to each division. 2-6 Setting Up RMxprt Projects Release 14. Nevertheless.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Teeth to Teeth When selected. For the selected field. Related Topics Generating a Custom Design Sheet for RMxprt Setting User Defined Data File for a Design RMxprt allows a user to define some design data in a text file which can be created by a text editor. select or clear the following Field check boxes: Periodic According to the geometric symmetry. for the following special circumstances: • • Some special requests from a user which are not necessary to be added to RMxprt UI. Choose the smaller period to shorten the run-time for 2D Maxwell analyses.. the default value is 3o. • 5. Less the value. therefore. In 2D electromagnetic field analysis to the torque with 2D Maxwell. 4. instead of by RMxprt UI. All rights reserved.5 . but longer the computation time in order. You can also click the . . Click OK. Using the Tools>Options>RMxprt Options command changes the default for the current design and all future designs. The value of Band Arc is sensitive. For the Design Sheet. otherwise. Band Arc The air-gap is divided uniformly along the circumference. the central lines of the rotor teeth or the rotor magnet poles coincide with the periodic dividing lines. finer the air-gap meshes. The effective range of its value is between 1o to 5o. The four pole electric machine in this example has a whole slot number per pole per phase. Inc. type a file name in the Excel Template text box. Segmented Arc Note 3.. the central lines of the rotor slots or the interpole lines of the rotor magnet poles coincide with the periodic dividing line. On the Export Options tab. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. it can be divided into four periods. the central lines of the stator teeth always coincide with the periodic dividing lines. but have not been added in RMxprt UI. All rights reserved.5 . Inc. Click OK to complete the setup. Click Open to confirm the selection. the updated solver and the required file format for user defined data will be sent to the user. Inc.Maxwell 3D Online Help When a user's requests have been implemented in an RMxprt solver but have not been added in RMxprt UI. Changes to User Defined Data will cause existing solutions to become invalid. User Defined Data is save in the design file.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 7. Then. 4. Click in the box and enter the data entries desired. 5. The file contents will be imported into the text box. 3. 8. Select the user defined data file which will be displayed in File name box. click Import File to import user defined data from an external file. . . 1. User Defined Data may be entered directly into the text box. select RMxprt>Design Settings to display the Design Settings dialog. Select the User Defined Data tab. Alternatively. To use the feature of user defined data. the user must first edit the data file using a text editor according to the format provided. 6. 2. Setting Up RMxprt Projects 2-7 Release 14.© SAS IP. Click the Enable checkbox to enable the use of User Defined Data. Browse to the directory containing the file. When you perform a validation check on a project.5 . View any messages in the Message Manager window. View the results of the validation check in the Validation Check window. it is very important that you first perform a validation check on the project. carefully review the setup details for that particular step and revise them as necessary. Indicates the step is incomplete. Inc. and then the Validation Check window appears. 2-8 Setting Up RMxprt Projects Release 14. Click RMxprt>Validation Check to run a validation check after you have revised any setup details for an incomplete or incorrect project step. If the validation check indicates that a step in your project is incomplete or incorrect. Click RMxprt>Validation Check.Maxwell 3D Online Help Validating RMxprt Projects Before you run an analysis on a model. To perform a validation check on the active project: 1. The following icons can appear next to an item: Indicates the step is complete. RMxprt checks the project setup. 3. . RMxprt runs a check on all setup details of the active project to verify that the necessary steps have been completed and their parameters are reasonable. Indicates the step may require your attention. Inc. 4. All rights reserved. 2. 6.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. .© SAS IP. Click Close. 5. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Related Topics: Setting RMxprt Options Setting Up RMxprt Projects 2-9 Release 14.Maxwell 3D Online Help Setting General Options in RMxprt Default settings for many of the options in RMxprt may be set through the Tools>Options menu. Click each tab. displaying six available tabs: • • • • • Project Options Miscellaneous Options Default Units Analysis Options WebUpdate Options 2.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. . 3. All rights reserved. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. To set general options for RMxprt: 1. Inc. . and make the desired selections. The General Options window appears.© SAS IP. Inc. Click Tools>Options>General Options. Click OK.5 . Click OK. Three Phase Induction Motor Setting the material thresholds under Tools>Options impacts the default setting for the current and all future projects/designs. Click each tab. . use the RMxprt>Design Settings command and change the material thresholds on the Set Material Thresholds tab. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. The RMxprt Options window appears. 3. All rights reserved. Single Phase Induction Motor Three Phase Synchronous Machine Brushless Permanent-Magnet DC Motor Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machine Permanent-Magnet DC Motor Switched Reluctance Motor Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor Universal Motor DC Machine Claw-Pole Synchronous Machine Three Phase Non-Salient Synchronous Machine Generic Rotating Machines In the Threshold Options section. Inc. Note 3. To change the default machine type when you initially insert a project. Inc. enter the Default conductivity and Default permeability values in siemens/m.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.Maxwell 3D Online Help Setting RMxprt Options To specify default settings for RMxprt options: 1.5 . RMxprt Options: General Options Tab These options are set on the General Options tab of the RMxprt Options dialog box. and make the desired selections.© SAS IP. . 1. select one of the following from the Default machine type pull-down list: • • • • • • • • • • • • • 2. Select or clear the following check boxes: 2-10 Setting Up RMxprt Projects Release 14. Click Tools>Options>RMxprt Options. displaying two available tabs: • • General Options Solver 2. To change the material threshold for the current design only. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Inc. . Setting Up RMxprt Projects 2-11 Release 14. select one of the following from the Default Process Priority pull-down list: • • • • • 2.5 . the project is only saved if it has been modified since its last save.© SAS IP. Save before solving When you enable the Save before solving setting. Related Topics: Setting the Material Threshold RMxprt Options: Solver Tab These options are set on the Solver tab of the RMxprt Options dialog box. To set the solver options for RMxprt. . 1. Inc. All rights reserved.Maxwell 3D Online Help • Note • 4. Critical (highest) Priority (Not recommended) Above Normal Priority (Not recommended) Normal Priority Below Normal Priority Idle (lowest) Priority Click OK to close the dialog box. Apply variation deletions immediately Click OK to close the dialog box. To set the material threshold for the model: 1. you can set the following project options: • • • Material threshold Model units Wire setting Some of these and other options are available via the Tools>Options>Machine Options command.wir does not provide the data for thickness of insulation. please select the data file for wire gauge. if the Conductivity threshold is set to be 106. 2. Select or clear the Rescale to new units check box. On the Material Threshold tab. but only for the purpose of reference to users. Otherwise. All wire files are stored in the file folder syslib. Nevertheless. . type a value in the Conductivity Threshold box. The Set Material Threshold dialog box appears. 2. 2.The data file American.wir does provide the data for thickness of insulation. the data file Chinese. 3. RMxprt has numerous wire gauge specifications according to the various national Standards for bare copper wire gauges (including both round and rectangular wires). Click RMxprt>Design Settings. 4.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Click OK. Click OK. therefore different manufacturers produce electromagnetic wire with different thickness of insulation. The Set Model Units dialog box appears. 4. Select a one of the System Libraries such as American or Chinese from the Wire Setting 2-12 Setting Up RMxprt Projects Release 14.© SAS IP. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. For example. 3. there exist no national standards for thickness for insulation. To specify the wire setting: 1. Inc. Select the desired units from the pull-down list. then for any material with conductivity greater than or equal to 106 is treated as a conductor. Specifying the Material Threshold The material threshold classifies the material type.5 . All rights reserved. The Machine Editor Options dialog box appears. . Type a value in the Permeability box. Click Machine>Units. Inc. Click Tools>Options>Machine Options.Maxwell 3D Online Help Setting Machine Options In RMxprt. the material is treated as a non-conductor. Specifying the Machine Option for Wire Setting Before you input data for your electric machine design project. Setting Model Units 1. 3. . For Round: Specify the desired values for Gauge No. Related Topic Editing Wire Data Editing Wire Data Users must create their own data files for wire gauges according to the data for wire gauge and thickness of insulation provided by manufacturers. English Unit System stands for British unit system. Click Machine>Wire The Edit Wire Data dialog box appears. the message box Note pops up to inform changing in unit system is only for specifying input data unit.The data file American. Gauge No. Use the radio buttons specify whether to consider priority factors.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Wrap thickness of insulation wrap. The corresponding data for wire gauge appear automatically in the pop-up window for Machine>Wire. There are no national standards for thickness for insulation. These files are stored in the file folder syslib. Wire Shape Limit (B/A) max the maximum ratio between the wide and the narrow sides. all the sectional areas of wire gauge with the ratio B/A between the wide and the narrow sides satisfying the condition Setting Up RMxprt Projects 2-13 Release 14. All Size for No Consideration of Priority Factors Select the radio button All Size on the right to Type of Wire-Data Table and then click the command button Calculate in the window Wire Data. but only for the purpose of reference to users. Specify the desired values to limit ratios of the two sides. For Rectangle: a. All rights reserved.wir does not provide the data for thickness of insulation. in mm or inch. To define or edit wire data: 1.. Diameter.© SAS IP.5 . . therefore different manufacturers produce electromagnetic wire with different thickness of insulation. When changing the unit system. Inc. Click the Round or Rectangle tab for the wire shape you want to edit. Diameter diameter of bare copper wire. Inc. Wire Shape Limit (B/A) min b.Maxwell 3D Online Help pull-down list. the data file Chinese. Click OK. in mm or inch. Select the units from the Unit System pull-down list. and/or Wrap. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 2. but not for transferring data between two unit systems 3. Metric Unit System stands for the metric unit system. wire gauge index number. the minimum ratio between the wide and the narrow sides.wir does provide the data for thickness of insulation. the sectional areas appear in blue numbers (rarely used). 5.5 . • • • At the cross of the odd columns and the odd rows. All rights reserved. and click Close to close the window. click Add Row or Add Column. . This is convenient for users to use recommended wire gauge according to R20 Priority Number Series. the sectional areas appear in black numbers (recommended to use). and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Optionally. click Import to import wire data from a file. When you are finished. 6. 4. Skip One for Consideration of Priority Factors Select the radio button Skip One on the right to Type of Wire-Data Table and then click the command button Calculate in the window Wire Data. click Export to export the data you entered to a file. Inc. At the cross of the even columns and the even rows. click Save to save the data. the sectional areas do not show (generally not used).Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. all the sectional areas of wire gauge with the ratio B/A between the wide and the narrow sides satisfying the condition (B/A) max > B / A > (B/A) min appear in three different modes in the table Rectangular Wire Data. Optionally.© SAS IP. to add new rows or columns for the wire. Inc. . Related Topic Specifying the Machine Option for Wire Setting 2-14 Setting Up RMxprt Projects Release 14.Maxwell 3D Online Help (B/A) max > B / A > (B/A) min appear in the table Rectangular Wire Data. Optionally. 7. At the cross of the odd columns and the even rows or the even columns and the odd rows. Conductors per Slot.and double-layer winding. Number of Poles.or double-layer poly-phase ac windings provided all coils have the same number of turns. sine-wave three-phase winding.Single-phase induction motors 3.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. . To do this.Claw-pole alternators 6. Number of Slots. odd. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. RMxprt also provides a very flexible tool. For a double-layer winding. The Winding Editor is available to the following types of electric machines: 1. and so forth.© SAS IP. odd. RMxprt creates a default winding arrangement based on the basic winding specifications: Number of Phases.Three-phase synchronous motors and generators 4. To display the dialog box Winding Editor: 1.Three-phase induction motors 2.and small-phase-spread variable-pole multiple-speed winding. to allow users to design a variety of special winding types according to their own needs. In the Properties window. even. All rights reserved.Line-start permanent-magnet synchronous motors 5. such as compound single. …. and Coil Pitch. Enable Winding Editor Setting the Winding Type property to Editor enables the command Machine>Edit Layout on the menu bar. RMxprt can also handle the coils with half turns which are arranged in the order of even. Inc. set the Winding Type Value to Editor.Brushless permanent-magnet DC motors When you edit the AC winding of a new design for the first time. Select Winding in the Project Tree. as long as it is physically possible. Users do not need to define coils one by one. the Winding Editor. Inc. Then you can edit the winding configuration based on the default arrangement. click on the button Winding Type Value to display the WINDING Type Setting Up RMxprt Projects 2-15 Release 14. Winding Layers.Adjustable-speed permanent-magnet synchronous motors and generators 7. .5 . big.Maxwell 3D Online Help Edit AC Windings RMxprt can automatically arrange almost all commonly used single. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . This closes the WINDING Type selection window and sets the Winding Type Value to Editor. All rights reserved.Maxwell 3D Online Help selection window.© SAS IP.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.5 . Now the 2-16 Setting Up RMxprt Projects Release 14. Inc. It also enables the command Machine>Winding>Edit Layout on the menu bar. Inc. Select Editor as the Winding Type and click OK. as shown: 2. . right-clicking in the data table section of the Winding Editor tab in the Machine Setting Up RMxprt Projects 2-17 Release 14. Inc. This displays the Winding Editor dialog as shown. Click Machine>Winding>Edit Layout.5 . . Inc. as shown: 3. All rights reserved. .© SAS IP. The Winding Editor dialog box includes functions that do not appear in the Winding Editor tab sheet in the RMxprt Machine Editor window.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.Maxwell 3D Online Help Machine Editor window displays the default winding arrangement. In addition. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Edit Winding Configuration Each row of the winding data table in the Winding Editor dialog box is identified with the coil index in the column Coil. All rights reserved.© SAS IP. but it is editable in the dialog box Winding Editor. 2-18 Setting Up RMxprt Projects Release 14. . This information is displayed in the tab sheet Winding Editor in the RMxprt Machine Editor window as well.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Inc. . Inc. • The winding data table contains four columns: Phase is for the phase to which the coil belongs.5 . and its subsidiaries and affiliates.Maxwell 3D Online Help Editor displays a shortcut menu where you may also select Edit Layout. it is possible to arrange the distribution of coils of single and double layer winding of any type required. and all the flow-out-side slots as bottom layer. Selecting 2 lists half of the total coils in the table. Out Slots is for the slot number with the coil side current flowing out ("flow-outside" for short). and the whole slots are divided into two unit machines. and all the coils are listed in the table of the editing window. • • • The Periodic Multiplier pull-down list box displays the numbers of unit machines for selection. . etc. All rights reserved. OK to accept the current values and close the dialog box Winding Editor.5 . . When the check box Constant Pitch is unchecked. If the check box Constant Turns is unchecked. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. or resumes to the data that you have saved. all the flow-in-side slots are defined as top layer. The Winding Editor dialog box includes three command buttons. Inc. By changing the properties in the columns of the table. For the two-layer windings. Selecting 1 means the whole slots are considered as one unit machine. If 2 Layers are specified in the Winding Properties window. and the column Out Slot is disabled. If 2 Layers are specified in the Winding Properties window. The flow-out-side slot number is automatically computed based on the input in the edit box Coil Pitch in the tab sheet Winding in the project tree in the RMxprt Machine Editor window. Inc. Constant Pitch Checking this box grays the column Out Slots to the values cannot be edited.© SAS IP. the slot number ends with a "B" to show the bottom layer. the slot number ends with a "T" to show the top layer. Reset all the data in the table resumes to the situation of data when the dialog box Winding Editor was first opened. the column Turns in the table is brightened allowing for editing and modifying the number of turns.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. the column Out Slot is enabled to allow arbitrarily changing the slot pitch for each coil. The Winding Editor also includes two check boxes: Constant Turns Checking the check box (multiple choices) Constant Turns indicates that the number of turns keeps constant and the column Turns in the table is grayed (disabled). It means that the coil pitch is constant. Setting Up RMxprt Projects 2-19 Release 14. In Slots is for the slot number with the coil side current flowing in ('flow-in-side' for short).Maxwell 3D Online Help Turns is for the number of turns of the coil. Default all the data in the table resumes to the situation of data from the automatic arrangement by RMxprt. you can execute the following commands to display or hide the winding connections. a shortcut menu pops up. Upon executing. 1. Right-click on the winding layout section of the Machine Editor window.5 .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 3. and you will be able to view or hide only one coil or one phase connection related to the slot layer. All rights reserved. Winding connections may also be viewed by shortcut menu. Inc. You may copy the connection drawing to clipboard from the shortcut menu as well. Inc.© SAS IP. 2-20 Setting Up RMxprt Projects Release 14.Maxwell 3D Online Help View Winding Connections When you have specified the winding data. If you right-click on a slot layer. . To remove the connections in the graphical display in the Machine Editor window. the graphical display in the Machine Editor window shows the connections as shown: 2. Click the menu command Machine>Winding>Connect All Coils. . Select Connect All Coils or Disconnect All Coils to toggle the coils display on or off. commands related to that slot layer will be enabled. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. select Machine>Winding>Disconnect All Coils. depending on the standard Slot Type on which it is based.Maxwell 3D Online Help Working with the Slot Editor RMxprt provides a flexible tool. The slot label in the Project tree changes to one of the following: UserDefSymmetricSlot (user-defined symmetric slot). 2. select the Rotor or Stator whose slot is to be converted. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Standard slot types in a project can be converted to equivalent user-defined versions that can be edited in the RMxprt Slot Editor tool as follows: 1. All rights reserved. Inc. Type 1 Slot Type 2 Slot Type 5 Slot Type 3 Slot Type 6 Slot Type 4 Slot Setting Up RMxprt Projects 2-21 Release 14. and click OK. UserDefUnsymmetricSlot (userdefined unsymmetric slot). In the Project tree. Check User Defined Slot. In the Rotor or Stator Properties Window. to enable users to edit user-defined slots easily. click the Slot Type Value button to open the Select Slot Type dialog box.5 . Inc. . 3. .© SAS IP. the Slot Editor. or UserDefHalfSlot (user-defined half slot).Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 2.Maxwell 3D Online Help Standard Slot Types 1. Inc. and 6 are symmetric. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . Standard slot Type 5 is unsymmetric. Inc.© SAS IP. All rights reserved. . 4. Related Topics The Slot Editor Window Slot Editor Data Editing View Slot Editor Graphical View The New Slot Dialog Box Editing Slot Segments Editing Unsymmetric Slots Editing Half Slots The Edit Slot Segments Dialog Box 2-22 Setting Up RMxprt Projects Release 14. 3. Half slots are present if the machine’s Rotor or Stator Properties Window includes a Half Slot property that has been enabled.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.5 . unsymmetric. the Slot Editor window appears on the desktop. Data Editing View Graphical View Related Topics Slot Editor Data Editing View Slot Editor Graphical View The New Slot Dialog Box Editing Slot Segments Editing Unsymmetric Slots Editing Half Slots The Edit Slot Segments Dialog Box Setting Up RMxprt Projects 2-23 Release 14.5 . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc.© SAS IP. A symmetric slot is shown in the figure below. The slot editor window is split into two frames. which contains an expandable tree view of the slot and its constituent segments. . All rights reserved. and half-slot. The right frame shows a graphical view of the slot geometry formed by its segments.Maxwell 3D Online Help The Slot Editor Window When you select a user-editable slot in the Project tree.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Inc. Slot geometry types that can be edited are: symmetric. . The left frame is the data editing view. the Slot root tree item is pre-defined and cannot be modified. . Changing segment values in the slot editor updates the Properties Window. The Properties Window is also updated to show the selected segment’s properties. The top segment in the tree. Segment names also follow this top-to-bottom order. The data of neighboring segments are tightly coupled due to this geometry connection. regardless of any operations that are made.5 . cannot be deleted. Segment3.Maxwell 3D Online Help Slot Editor Data Editing View In the tree view. All rights reserved. Related Topics The Slot Editor Window Slot Editor Graphical View The New Slot Dialog Box Editing Slot Segments Editing Unsymmetric Slots Editing Half Slots The Edit Slot Segments Dialog Box 2-24 Setting Up RMxprt Projects Release 14. Selecting a segment in the tree highlights the corresponding segment (and its mirror image for symmetric slots) in the Slot Editor Graphic view – indicated by small open circles at the endpoints of the segments. Segment2. etc. and vice-versa. Segment1. Adjacent segments viewed in the tree are geometrically connected to each other as viewed on the slot graph. Segment1. the slot segment tree items always follow in order from top to bottom of the slot.© SAS IP. . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. In the slot data edit view.. Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Remove Right Half . Inc. Remove Left (or Right) Half. Related Topics The New Slot Dialog Box Editing Slot Segments Editing Unsymmetric Slots Editing Half Slots Setting Up RMxprt Projects 2-25 Release 14.5 . .splits the slot into a Left Side and a Right Side transforming it into an unsymmetric slot.© SAS IP. All rights reserved. Split to Half-Half .opens the New Slot dialog box in which the user can select a new standard slot. right-clicking the Slot tree item pops up a context menu displaying the following choices: • • • New Slot . . transforming the slot into a half-slot. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. Each side then can be edited independently.removes the segments for the left (or right) half of the symmetric slot.Maxwell 3D Online Help Editing Symmetric Slots For a symmetric slot. Left Side and Right Side.. resulting in a right or left half-slot. Left Right Flip . Right-clicking the Slot tree item pops up a context menu with the following choices: • • • • New Slot . two additional expandable sub-branches.5 . The slot remains unsymmetric. The segments in each side can be edited independently. which mirrors the selected side’s segments and merges the segments into a symmetric slot. Merge Left (or Right) to Symmetric .the left (or right) side segments are mirrored and merged to form a symmetric slot. Remove Left Half. or Remove. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. are present in the slot tree.Maxwell 3D Online Help Editing Unsymmetric Slots For an unsymmetric (i. Inc. split) slot type. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. All rights reserved.removes the segments for the left (or right) half of the symmetric slot.the left side and right side segments are flipped (reflected and interchanged). . Related Topics The New Slot Dialog Box Editing Slot Segments Editing Symmetric Slots Editing Half Slots 2-26 Setting Up RMxprt Projects Release 14.opens the New Slot dialog box in which the user can select a new standard slot.e. Right-clicking either the Right Side or Left Side sub-branch tree item opens a context menu on which you can choose either: Merge to Symmetric. Remove Right Half . which removes the selected side and all of its segments. . transforming the slot into a half-slot.© SAS IP. Clicking OK confirms the choice and replaces the existing slot type in the editor with a slot of the selected type. Mirror . . The slot remains unsymmetric. Setting Up RMxprt Projects 2-27 Release 14. Related Topics The New Slot Dialog Box Editing Slot Segments Editing Symmetric Slots Editing Unsymmetric Slots The New Slot Dialog Box Selecting New Slot in any of the Slot tree item context menus opens the New Slot dialog box.the left (or right) half-slot segments are mirrored (reflected and copied).Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. The user must then edit the slot segments to form the desired slot geometry. The new slot has only Segment1 present.the left (or right) half-slot segments are flipped (reflected). Left Half Slot. Radio buttons allow the user to select a Symmetric Slot.the left (or right) half-slot segments are mirrored and merged to form a symmetric slot. Unsymmetrical Slot. only the segments on one side of the slot can be edited.© SAS IP. Inc. Left Right Flip . .opens the New Slot dialog box in which the user can select a new standard slot. Right-clicking the Slot tree item pops up a context menu displaying the following choices: • • • • New Slot . or Right Half Slot as the type to be added.Maxwell 3D Online Help Editing Half Slots For a half slot. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. All rights reserved. transforming the slot into an unsymmetric slot.5 . Merge to Symmetric . 2-28 Setting Up RMxprt Projects Release 14. Append. to Fit All the view in the frame. Append.Maxwell 3D Online Help Slot Editor Graphical View The slot editor graphic view allows users either to View One Slot of the type currently being edited. In the slot data edit view. These commands are discussed more fully in the section on Editing Slot Segments. View One Slot View Geometry Right-clicking anywhere in the graphic view pops up a context menu. . Modify. or to View the Geometry of the machine stator or rotor with all of the slots in place. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Related Topics The Slot Editor Window Slot Editor Data Editing View The New Slot Dialog Box Editing Slot Segments Editing Unsymmetric Slots Editing Half Slots The Edit Slot Segments Dialog Box Editing Slot Segments The RMxprt Slot Editor allows users to edit the segments that form the geometry of slots. Inc. then right-click to bring up a context menu containing the same segment editing commands.5 . then right-clicking on it displays a context menu with commands that allow users to Insert. Modify.© SAS IP. Alternatively. In addition to changing the view. users can select a slot segment directly in the graphic view. selecting a slot segment item on the tree. .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. and Remove segments. the menu provides commands to Zoom In and Zoom Out. Inc. as well as commands to Insert. All rights reserved. and Remove slot segments. Maxwell 3D Online Help When a slot segment is selected. Setting Up RMxprt Projects 2-29 Release 14. below) the currently selected segment.removes the currently selected segment. Inc. Each edit triggers immediate validation. If edited values are improper.© SAS IP. warning message windows are displayed describing the problem. . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. users can also modify the segment data directly in the desktop property window. The ends of the segments on either side of the removed segment are joined when the segment is removed. Modify Segment .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. The segment is modified by the user in the Edit Slot Segment dialog box. All rights reserved. The appended segment is defined by the user in the Edit Slot Segment dialog box.modifies the currently selected segment.. NOTE: You cannot insert a segment before Segment1. NOTE: Segment1 cannot be removed. The added segment is defined by the user in the Edit Slot Segment dialog box.e. . Editing operations support Undo/Redo. • • • Append Segment .adds a segment after (i. Scripting functions are also available. • Insert Segment -adds a segment before the currently selected segment.5 . Remove Segment . Inc. All rights reserved. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.© SAS IP. and radius. . user can define the shape and dimension(s) of the segment to be added. starting and ending width. or appended relative to the currently selected segment in the slot data edit view. Parameters that determine the shape of the segment can be edited in the Segment Data panel. Inc. inserted.Maxwell 3D Online Help The Edit Slot Segment Dialog Box In the Edit Slot Segment dialog. Inc. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2-30 Setting Up RMxprt Projects Release 14. As shown below. .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. The Selected Shape panel shows dimensional parameters that affect the segment shape such as: height. eight basic geometric shapes are provided for defining the slot segment.5 . makes the segment an arc whose radius is determined by a user-specified offset from the rotor/ stator center with respect to the slot center. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . Inc. Arc offset on slot center .makes the segment a straight line. End width . .© SAS IP. Arc offset on tooth center . All rights reserved.sets the starting width and unit of measure. The value shown depends on the ending width of the previous segment and thus is not editable.5 .sets the ending width and unit of measure. A drop-down box provides three additional options for controling the segment shape: • • • Line edge (the default) . Inc. Slot Center Tooth Center Offset Offset Setting Up RMxprt Projects 2-31 Release 14.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.Maxwell 3D Online Help • • Start width .makes the segment an arc whose radius is determined by a user-specified offset from the rotor/ stator center with respect to the tooth center. All rights reserved.sets the radius and unit of measure for the segment. End width . Start width . . Start width . 2-32 Setting Up RMxprt Projects Release 14. Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. The value shown depends on the ending width of the previous segment and thus is not editable.sets the starting width and unit of measure. Parallel tooth . . The value shown depends on the ending width of the previous segment and thus is not editable.effectively sets the segment end width to the same value as the start width resulting in the slot sides being parallel to each other. Inc. Parallel slot .Maxwell 3D Online Help • • Start width . A drop-down box provides three options for controling the segment shape: • • • • • • • End width (the default).sets the ending width and unit of measure. Radius .sets the starting width and unit of measure.sets the ending width and unit of measure.5 . The value shown depends on the ending width of the previous segment and thus is not editable.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.© SAS IP. Height -sets the height and unit of measure for the segment.sets the starting width and unit of measure.sets the segment end width to a value such that the slot side is parallel to the adjacent slot side of the tooth formed between them. © SAS IP. All rights reserved. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.5 . . . warning message windows are displayed describing the problem. Clicking the OK button confirms the changes and closes the dialog box.Maxwell 3D Online Help Validation of the entered data is done when either the OK or Preview is clicked.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Inc. The Preview button allows users to preview the current changes in the slot graph window without confirming the changes. If edited values are improper. Clicking the Cancel button cancels the changes and closes the dialog box. Related Topics The New Slot Dialog Box Editing Slot Segments Editing Symmetric Slots Editing Unsymmetric Slots Editing Half Slots Setting Up RMxprt Projects 2-33 Release 14. Inc. .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. . All rights reserved. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.© SAS IP. Inc.5 .Maxwell 3D Online Help 2-34 Setting Up RMxprt Projects Release 14. Inc. or mathematical function that can be assigned to a design parameter in RMxprt. There are two types of variables in RMxprt: Project Variables A project variable can be assigned to any parameter value in the project in which it was created. All rights reserved.© SAS IP. 1. When you intend to run a parametric analysis in which you specify a series of variable values within a range to solve. The names of intrinsic functions and the pre-defined constant pi (π) cannot be used as variable names. Inc. • Alternatively. By default. or RMxprt can automatically append the $ after you define the variable. . Variables are useful in the following situations: • • • • When you expect to change a parameter often. right-click the project name in the project tree. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. click Add. RMxprt differentiates project variables from other types of variables by prefixing the variable name with the $ symbol. mathematical expression. . You can sort the project variables by clicking on the Name column header. Project variable names must start with the symbol $ followed by a letter. In the Name box. Variable names may include alphanumeric characters and underscores ( _ ). or RMxprt will automatically append the project variable's name with the symbol after you define the variable. When you intend to optimize a parameter value by running an optimization analysis. variSetting up RMxprt Projects 2-35 Release 14. You can manually include the $ symbol in the project variable's name. Under the Project Variables tab. 3. Click Project>Project Variables. When you expect to use the same parameter value often.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.Maxwell 3D Online Help Working with Variables in RMxprt A variable is a numerical value. type the name of the variable. 2. You can manually include the symbol $ in the project variable's name when you create it. Project variables can be used in any design within the project. The Add Property dialog box appears. The Properties dialog box appears. Inc. and then click Project Variables on the shortcut menu. Design Variables A design variable can be assigned to any parameter value in the RMxprt design in which it was created. Related Topics Setting up an Optimetrics Analysis Adding a Project Variable in RMxprt A project variable can be assigned to a parameter value in the RMxprt project in which it was created. RMxprt differentiates project variables from other types of variables by prefixing the variable name with the following symbol: $.5 . Inc. If the value is an expression. noted by a triangle pointing down. and description cannot be modified when Read-only is selected. The new variable and its value are listed in the table. Clicking once sorts them in ascending order. Optionally. The evaluated values of any dependent variables also are changed. the evaluated value is shown. type a description of the variable in the Description box.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Warning If you include the variable's units in its definition (in the Value box). Updating the expression also changes the evaluated value display. Similarly. For Project Variables in the Unit Type text box you can use the drop down menu to select from the list of available unit types. . type the quantity that the variable represents. value for the variable. The variable's name. or a mathematical function. In the Value box. selecting Length as the Unit Type causes the Unit menu to show a range of metric and english units for length. the Units drop down lists a range of standard Ohm units. “None” is the default. 8.© SAS IP. Optionally. Value Each selection affects the settable options. 6. All rights reserved. select Read-Only. if you select the Unit Type as Resistance. Inc. Separator Value Array Index Variable Associate Array variable. with no triangle. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. You can also designate a variable as Sweep. 5. The quantity can be a numerical value. 4. If you clear the Show Hidden option. or default.Maxwell 3D Online Help ables are sorted in original order. value. include the units of measurement. Optionally.5 . 7. Select a radio button for the variable use: Selected Use Setable Properties Variable Unit Type. 11. Click OK. For example. 10. When you select a Unit Type. Clicking against sorts in descending order. unit. the choices in drop down menu for the Units text box adapt to that unit type. select Hidden. do not include the variable's units when you enter the variable name for a parameter value. You return to the Properties dialog box. The quantity entered will be the current. 9. Clicking a third time sorts in original order. Optionally. . You may need to use the scroll bar or resize the 2-36 Setting up RMxprt Projects Release 14. the hidden variable will not appear in the Properties dialog box. a mathematical expression. noted by a triangle pointing up. Value. Units. If a variable has dependent variables.5 . the Sweep checkbox is disabled and cannot be changed.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 1. . Tuning. Unit. 12. or Remove variables. The new variable can now be assigned to a parameter value in the project in which it was created. The Sweep checkbox lets you designate variables to include in solution indexing as a way to permit faster post processing. Type. Click RMxprt>Design Properties. checking or unchecking a variable’s Sweep setting produces a warning that the change will invalidate existing solutions. Sensitivity or Statistics. leave the radio button with Value selected until you have defined a variable. • Alternatively. Inc. click OK to dismiss the warning dialog. To continue.Maxwell 3D Online Help dialog to view the check boxes. and Read-only and Hidden check boxes. Evaluated Value.© SAS IP. All rights reserved. From the Properties dialog you can Add. Any existing Design variables are listed in the Properties dialog with the name followed by cells for Value. If a solution exists. The other radio buttons let you enable defined variables for Optimization. Variables with Sweep unchecked are not used in solution indexing. Edit. A Show Hidden checkbox on the lower right of the Properties dialog controls the appearance of any Hidden variables . Selecting one of these radio buttons adds a new column to the Variable definition Setting up RMxprt Projects 2-37 Release 14. right-click the design name in the project tree. Inc. and then click Design Properties on the shortcut menu. Description. Click OK. . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. A design variable can be assigned to a parameter value in the RMxprt design in which it was created. Adding a Design Variable in RMxprt A design variable is associated with an RMxprt design. Initially. Add Array. The Properties dialog box appears opened on the Local Variables tab. The units for a dependent variable will automatically change to those of the independent variable on which the value depends. Additionally. Similarly. noted by a triangle pointing down. 3. 4. do not include the variable's units when you enter the variable name for a parameter value. If the mathematical expression includes a reference to an existing variable. cannot be the direct subject of optimization. Clicking against sorts in descending order.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. tuning. . and may include alphanumeric characters and underscores ( _ ). type the quantity that the variable represents. . In the Unit Type text box you can use the drop down menu to select from the list of available unit types. In the Value box. Select a radio button for the variable use: Selected Use Setable Properties Variable Unit Type. variables are sorted in original order. the Units drop down lists a range of standard Ohm units. dependent variables. this variable is treated as a dependent variable. Units. or a mathematical function. selecting Length as the Unit Type causes the Unit menu to show a range of metric and english units for length. Inc. Optionally. The Add Property dialog box appears. 5. Clicking a third time sorts in original order. sensitivity analysis. include the units of measurement. or 2-38 Setting up RMxprt Projects Release 14. if you select the Unit Type as Resistance. Clicking once sorts them in ascending order. with no triangle. 2. Value Array Index Variable Associate Array variable. All rights reserved. Note If you include the variable's units in its definition (in the Value box). a mathematical expression. “None” is the default. Value Each selection affects the settable options. Value Separator Value Post Processing Variable Unit Type. noted by a triangle pointing up. Units. the choices in drop down menu for the Units text box adapt to that unit type. By default. In the Name box. When you select a Unit Type. You can sort the variables by clicking on the Name column header. 6. Click Add. though useful in many situations. Inc. The quantity can be a numerical value. For example. Variable names must start with a letter.© SAS IP.5 . The names of intrinsic functions and the pre-defined constant pi (π) cannot be used as variable names. type the name of the variable. The quantity entered will be the current (or default value) for the variable. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.Maxwell 3D Online Help row for which you can check or uncheck Include for regular variables for that kind of Optimetrics simulation. • Alternatively. and then click Design Properties on the shortcut menu. Hidden. .5 . Setting up RMxprt Projects 2-39 Release 14. 1. the evaluated value is shown. You may need to use the scroll bar or resize the dialog to view the check boxes. sensitivity or tuning setups. You can also add a variable defined with an array of values. Complex numbers are not allowed for variables to be used in an Optimetrics sweep. All rights reserved. Click RMxprt>Design Properties. To continue. 9. . or for optimization.© SAS IP. If the value is an expression. or Sweep. You can designate a variable as Read-only. The new variable and its value are listed in the table. From the Properties dialog you can Add. Note 7. checking or unchecking a variable’s Sweep setting produces a warning that the change will invalidate existing solutions. The Local Variables Properties dialog box appears. Click OK. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. The new variable can now be assigned to a parameter value in the design in which it was created. statistical.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Optionally. The evaluated values of any dependent variables also are changed. type a description of the variable in the Description box. Updating the expression also changes the evaluated value display. the Sweep checkbox is disabled and cannot be changed.Maxwell 3D Online Help statistical analysis. Add Array of Values for an RMxprt Design Variable A design variable is associated with an RMxprt design. If a solution exists. Inc. Variables with Sweep unchecked are not used in solution indexing. 8. The Sweep checkbox lets you designate variables to include in solution indexing as a way to permit faster post processing. right-click the design name in the project tree. click OK to dismiss the warning dialog. Click OK. You return to the Properties dialog box. Inc. 10. If a variable has dependent variables. Select a Unit Type and Units from the drop down menus. 4. Inc.) 2-40 Setting up RMxprt Projects Release 14. . All rights reserved. The Add Array dialog displays. 2. Initially. Unit. button. button to display the Number of Rows dialog.. Specify a variable Name in the text field. and Read-only and Hidden check boxes.. A Show Hidden checkbox on the lower right of the Properties dialog controls the appearance of any Hidden variables. . or Remove variables. Array variables cannot be enabled for Optimetrics use. Sensitivity or Statistics. Description. you can begin by clicking the Append Rows. Type. (For Edit in plain text field. Click the Add Array.. Tuning.. Any existing Design variables are listed in the Properties dialog with the name followed by cells for Value.Maxwell 3D Online Help Add Array. To specify the array with Edit in Grid Selected.© SAS IP. Edit.. Evaluated Value.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 3. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.5 . Inc. see below.. leave the radio button with Value selected until you have defined a variable.. 5. The other radio buttons let you enable regular variables for Optimization. Theta. All rights reserved. . tan. *. abs. X. and the inverse trigonometric functions’ return values are in radians. R is the cylindrical radius. R. click OK to close the dialog. The following mathematical functions may be used to define expressions: Basic functions /. If you do not specify units.(Unary minus). the units are assumed to be radians. Setting up RMxprt Projects 2-41 Release 14.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. +. all trigonometric expressions expect their arguments to be in radians. is the only available pre-defined constant. This displays a list of indexed data rows in the Add Array dialog. These function names are reserved and may not be used as vari-able names. you could define: x_size = 1mm. Y. tanh The predefined variables X. All cells must contain a value. and arithmetic operators. Add Row Below. You can type any data value in the cells. mod (modulus). the bracketed and comma delimited format is used. && (logical and). and Rho is the spherical radius. sqrt Trigonometric expressions sin. 7. -. Phi. Phi. The Array variable is listed in the Design Properties dialog as a Local Variable. cosh. Specify a value and click OK. asin. and Rho are the spherical coordinates. The array variable value field includes the array contents in brackets with the unindexed data values delimited by commas. Y. Z. The symbol. and Rho must be entered as such. Inc. . Theta. < (less than). and /. y_size = x_size + sin(x_size). For example. It may not be reassigned a new value. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. If you enter alphanumeric text in a cell it must be delimited by double quotes. You can edit the rows relative a row selection by clicking buttons to Add Row Above. Defining an Expression in RMxprt Expressions are mathematical descriptions that typically contain intrinsic functions. pi ( π ). >= (greater than equals). If you want to use degrees. Defining Mathematical Functions in RMxprt A mathematical function is an expression that references another defined variable. <= (less than equals). . acos. sqn. such as +. you must supply the unit name deg. as well as defined variables. != (not equals). -. sinh. and Z are the rectangular coordinates. atan. exp. or Remove Row. A function's definition can include both expressions and variables. ! (not). such as sin(x).5 .Maxwell 3D Online Help 6. pow. When you have completed the array. == (equals). cos. *. > (greater than). ln (natural log). Inc. When the argument to a trigonometric expression is a variable.© SAS IP. ** (exponentiation). || (logical or) Intrinsic functions if. If you elected to edit the array Edit in plain text field in the Add Array dialog. Using Valid Operators for Expressions in RMxprt The operators that can be used to define an expression or function have a sequence in which they are performed. For example. as in previous software versions.5 . it is automatically changed to "^".Maxwell 3D Online Help Numerical values may be entered in Ansoft's shorthand for scientific notation. . All rights reserved. .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. The following list shows both the valid operators and the sequence in which they are accepted (listed in decreasing precedence): () parenthesis 1 ! not 2 ^ (or **) exponentiation 3 (If you use "**" for exponentiation. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 5x107 could be entered as 5e7. Inc. Intrinsic function names are reserved and may not be used as variable names.) - unary minus 4 * multiplication 5 / division 5 + addition 6 - subtraction 6 == equals 7 != not equals 7 > greater than 7 < less than 7 >= greater than or equal to 7 <= less than or equal to 7 && logic and 8 || logic or 8 Using Intrinsic Functions in Expressions in RMxprt RMxprt recognizes a set of intrinsic trigonometric and mathematical functions that can be used to define expressions. Inc.© SAS IP. 2-42 Setting up RMxprt Projects Release 14. variable) linear extrapolation on x Setting up RMxprt Projects 2-43 Release 14.Maxwell 3D Online Help The following intrinsic functions may be used to define expressions: Function Description Syntax abs Absolute value (|x|) abs(x) sin Sine sin(x) cos Cosine cos(x) tan Tangent tan(x) asin Arcsine asin(x) acos Arccosine acos(x) atan Arctangent (in range atan(x) of -π/4 to π/4 degrees) atan2 Arctangent (in range atan2(y. . .© SAS IP.y) if If if(cond_exp. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. even(x) odd Returns 1 if integer part of the number is odd.true_exp. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.5 . Inc. returns 0 otherwise. returns 0 otherwise.x) of -π/2 to π/2 degrees) asinh Hyperbolic Arcsine atanh Hyperbolic Arctangent atanh(x) sinh Hyperbolic Sine sinh(x) cosh Hyperbolic Cosine cosh(x) tanh Hyperbolic Tangent tanh(x) even Returns 1 if integer part of the number is even. false_exp) pwl Piecewise Linear with pwl(dataset_exp. odd(x) sgn Sign extraction sgn(x) exp x Exponential (e ) asinh(x) exp(x) y pow Raise to power (x ) pow(x. All rights reserved. 5 . Using Piecewise Linear Functions in Expressions in RMxprt The following piecewise linear intrinsic functions are accepted in expressions: pwl (dataset_expression. variable) pwl_periodic (dataset_expression.y) Note If you do not specify units. When the argument to a trigonometric expression is a variable.y) parameters mod Modulus mod(x. All rights reserved. If you use "log(x)" in an expression. variable) 2-44 Setting up RMxprt Projects Release 14.Maxwell 3D Online Help pwlx Piecewise Linear x with linear extrapolation on x pwlx(dataset_exp. inverse trigonometric functions' return values are in given in radians.) log10 Logarithm base 10 log10(x) int Truncated integer function int(x) nint Nearest integer nint(x) max Maximum value of two max(x. all trigonometric functions interpret their arguments as radians.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Inc. Likewise. Inc. the software automatically changes it to "ln(x)". .y) parameters min Minimum value of two min(x.© SAS IP. variable) pwlx (dataset_expression. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. variable) periodic extrapolation on x sqrt Square Root sqrt(x) ln Natural Logarithm ln(x) (The "log" function has been discontinued. .y) rem Fractional part (remainder) rem(x. variable) pwl_periodic Piecewise Linear with pwl_periodic(dataset_exp. supply the argument with the unit name deg. the units are assumed to be radians. If you want values interpreted in degrees. override the default minimum and maximum values that Optimetrics will use for the variable in every optimization analysis. A curve is fitted to the segments of the plot. 6. 2. Optionally. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. and may also be assigned to variables. click Project>Project Variables. enabling you to define the design variable. pwlx and pwl_periodic functions. click RMxprt>Design Properties. Click the tab that lists the variable you want to optimize. For the variable you want to optimize. in which case the variable may be used as the second parameter to pwl. enabling you to define the project variable. 4. . Note Dependent variables cannot be optimized. and an expression is derived from the curve that best fits the segmented plot. The Properties dialog box appears. Each plot consists of straight line segments whose vertices represent their end points. The pwl_periodic function also interpolates along the x-axis but periodically. the optimizer does not conSetting up RMxprt Projects 2-45 Release 14.5 . You can assign a variable to nearly any design parameter assigned a numeric value in RMxprt. you must specify that you intend for it to be used during an optimization analysis in the Properties dialog box. 1. Inc. . Dataset expressions are derived from a series of points in a plot created in the Datasets dialog box. the Add Variable dialog box appears. pwlx and pwl_periodic) functions. All rights reserved.. If the variable is a project variable. Choosing a Variable to Optimize in RMxprt Before a variable can be optimized. the Add Variable dialog box appears. 3..Maxwell 3D Online Help The pwl and pwlx functions interpolate along the x-axis and returns a corresponding y value.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.. During optimization. If the variable is a design variable. The created expression is then used in the piecewise linear intrinsic functions. select Include. If you typed a variable name that included the $ prefix. The selected variable is now available for optimization in an optimetrics setup defined in the current design or project. 5.yn)) These expressions may be used as the first parameter to piecewise linear (pwl. Select the Optimization option. Using Dataset Expressions in RMxprt Dataset expressions take the following form: dset((x0. Click the row containing the variable you want to optimize. Inc. Assigning Variables in RMxprt To assign a variable to a parameter in RMxprt: • Type the variable name or mathematical expression in place of a parameter value in a Value box. but that has not been defined. . If you typed a variable name that has not been defined.© SAS IP.y0). (xn. you must specify that you intend for it to be used during a sensitivity analysis in the Properties dialog box. If the variable is a design variable. All rights reserved.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. select Include. Optimetrics will not consider a variable value for the first design variation that is greater than this step size away from the starting variable value. Related Topics Setting up an Optimization Analysis Including a Variable in a Sensitivity Analysis in RMxprt Before a variable can be included in a sensitivity analysis. Optionally. 8. The Properties dialog box appears. Optimetrics will not consider variable values that lie outside of this range. Click OK. 1. . During sensitivity analysis.Maxwell 3D Online Help sider variable values that lie outside of this range. Select the Sensitivity option. Note Dependent variables cannot be included in a sensitivity analysis. 2-46 Setting up RMxprt Projects Release 14. During sensitivity analysis. If the variable is a project variable. Optionally. Click the tab that lists the variable you want to tune. Click OK. Click the row containing the variable you want to include in the sensitivity analysis. 7. override the default minimum and maximum values that Optimetrics will use for the variable in every sensitivity analysis. click RMxprt>Design Properties. 2. 5. Click the tab that lists the variable you want to include in the sensitivity analysis. 1. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. The selected variable is now available for sensitivity analysis in a sensitivity setup defined in the current design or project. The Properties dialog box appears. click Project>Project Variables. 2. 4. Inc. . 6. click RMxprt>Design Properties.© SAS IP. click Project>Project Variables. you must specify that you intend for it to be tuned in the Properties dialog box. For the variable you want to include in the sensitivity analysis. If the variable is a design variable. 7.5 . override the default initial displacement value that Optimetrics will use for the variable in every sensitivity analysis. 3. Inc. If the variable is a project variable. Related Topics Setting up a Sensitivity Analysis Choosing a Variable to Tune in RMxprt Before a variable can be tuned. For the variable you want to include in the statistical analysis. 5. For the variable you want to tune. 2.5 . Related Topics Tuning a Variable Including a Variable in a Statistical Analysis in RMxprt Before a variable can be included in a statistical analysis. 3. click RMxprt>Design Properties. Optionally.© SAS IP. Select the Statistics option. select Include. Note Dependent variables cannot be included in a statistical analysis. Related Topics Setting up a Statistical Analysis Setting up RMxprt Projects 2-47 Release 14. Click OK. 5. . 6. Inc. 6. Click the tab that lists the variable you want to include in the statistical analysis. you must specify that you intend for it to be used during a statistical analysis in the Properties dialog box. All rights reserved.Maxwell 3D Online Help 3. 7. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Note Dependent variables cannot be tuned. Click OK. override the distribution criteria that Optimetrics will use for the variable in every statistical analysis. Select the Tuning option. If the variable is a design variable. The Properties dialog box appears.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Click the row containing the variable you want to include in the statistical analysis. . select Include. Inc. click Project>Project Variables. The selected variable is now available for tuning in the Tune dialog box. The selected variable is now available for statistical analysis in a statistical setup defined in the current design or project. 1. If the variable is a project variable. 4. 4. Click the row containing the variable you want to tune. Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.5 . Inc. . . All rights reserved.© SAS IP.Maxwell 3D Online Help 2-48 Setting up RMxprt Projects Release 14. 5 . . Inc. Inc. These wire gauge specifications are based on widely used standards currently available in industry. All rights reserved. .© SAS IP.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Wire Specification Libraries 3-1 Release 14.3 Wire Specification Libraries RMxprt contains a library of standard wire sizes for use in machine designs. wir Chinese.wir IEC_R40Grade2.wir provide dimensions of integer AWG numbers.wir IEC_R20Grade3.wir provides dimensions for all ANSI bare wires.wir provide dimensions for bare and film insulated copper wires with single.wir ANSI_TripleFilm. RMxprt provides following wire gauge specifications based on the current widely used standards for bare copper wire gauges (including both round and rectangular wires): American.wir provide dimensions of R40 series.wir File American.wir ANSI_HeavyFilm.wir IEC_R20Grade2. AWG_Int_TripleFilm. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. ANSI_QuadFilm. Files ANSI*. where <Library Directory> is set via Tools>Options>General Options>Project Options.wir IEC_R40Grade1.wir AWG_Int_QuadFilm. 3-2 Wire Specification Libraries Release 14. triple and quad builds of integer and half AWG numbers. 2. . heavy.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.Maxwell 3D Online Help Configure Wire Specification Library In order to be able to select wire size for your design specifications.wir Files AWG_Int*. Inc.wir.wir These files are stored in the file folder <Library Directory>/syslib.5 .wir provide dimensions of enameled copper wires with Grade-1. In files IEC*. and 3 insulations of R20 series. All rights reserved. Inc.wir AWG_Int_SingleFilm. Files IEC_R40*.wir Files IEC_R20*.wir IEC_R20Grade1. the gauge numbers are equivalent to the AWG numbers according to the nominal diameters.wir AWG_Int_HeavyFilm. .© SAS IP. your need to configure wire specification library before you insert a new design in your project.wir ANSI_SingleFilm. IEC_R40Grade3. as shown. Select one of the following library locations: • • • System Libraries . Note The new wire setting does not affect all existing designs.© SAS IP. located at <Library Directory>/syslib User Libraries . Wire Specification Libraries 3-3 Release 14.user created public libraries. Click Tools>Options>Machine Options. 4. located at <Project Directory>/PersonalLib where <Library Directory> and <Project Directory> are set via Tools>Options>General Options>Project Options. located at <Library Directory>/userlib Personal Libraries .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. but affects all designs inserted later. Click OK to close the dialog box. . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 2. 3. . The Machine Editor Options dialog box appears. All rights reserved.user created private libraries. Inc. Inc.libraries installed with Maxwell.Maxwell 3D Online Help Specify the Wire Setting To specify the wire setting: 1. Select one specification library from the pull-down list in Wire Setting area.5 . The selected wire specification library is saved with each design. Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Inc. modify wire data or Import a wire specification library file.Maxwell 3D Online Help Hint To modify the wire specification library saved in an existing design.5 . Inc. and Save wire data to the design. double click the design to active its Machine Editor window. . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. All rights reserved. . 3-4 Wire Specification Libraries Release 14. click Machine>Wire.© SAS IP. Changing the unit system is only for specifying input data unit. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. as shown.© SAS IP. . Select the units from the pull-down list Unit System:.Maxwell 3D Online Help Edit Wire Data Users can modify wire data for the active design and export to create their own data files for the wire gauges according to the data for the wire gauge and thickness of insulation provided by the manufacturers. Wire Specification Libraries 3-5 Release 14. To define or edit wire data: 1. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. mm: Metric Unit System stands for the metric unit system. There are two tabs. Click Machine>Wire. Round and Rectangle. 2. not for transferring data between two unit systems.5 . All rights reserved. . • • Note in: English Unit System stands for British unit system. in the dialog box for editing wire shapes. The dialog box Edit Wire Data appears. and/or Wrap.Maxwell 3D Online Help Edit Round Wire Data Click the tab Round for editing the round wire shape. You can edit the wire data in the spreadsheet by doing the following: 1.: wire gauge index number. Inc.© SAS IP. . 3.5 . Directly modify the wire data. • • • Gauge No. Diameter. in mm or inch as shown.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. in mm or inch. Wrap: thickness of insulation wrap. Inc.. Delete rows for the wire by clicking Delete Row. Diameter: diameter of bare copper wire. . All rights reserved. you specify the desired values for Gauge No. Add new rows for the wire by clicking Add Row. In the Round tab sheet. 3-6 Wire Specification Libraries Release 14. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 2. Click the command button Calculate in the dialog box Edit Wire Data. Inc. In the Rectangle tab sheet. Recommended Wire Sides Use the radio buttons to specify whether to consider priority factors. . as shown below. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. • • Wire Shape Limit (B/A) max: the maximum ratio between the wide and the narrow sides. All rights reserved. Table Type. and Sides.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. • Skip One: Wire Specification Libraries 3-7 Release 14. Inc. • All Size: For No Consideration of Priority Factors. . specify the desired values for Wire Shape Limit.© SAS IP. Wire Shape Limit Specify the desired values to limit ratios of the two sides.Maxwell 3D Online Help Edit Rectangular Wire Data Click the tab Rectangle for editing the rectangular wire shape. Wire Shape Limit (B/A) min: the minimum ratio between the wide and the narrow sides. all the sectional areas of wire gauge with the ratio B/A between the wide and the narrow sides satisfying the condition (B/A)max > B / A > (B/A) min appear in the spread sheet table.5 . All rights reserved. Inc. At the cross of the odd columns and the odd rows. 2. 2. . click Close to close the Edit Wire Data dialog box. The default directory for an exported wire data file is userlib. Inc. Provide the file name to export in the File name: edit box and use the default file type Wire Size File (*. click Add Row or Add Column. 3. the Export File dialog box appears. Click OK to return to the Edit Wire Data dialog box. Directly modify the wire data.© SAS IP. the sectional areas do not show (generally not used). When you finish editing. 2.Maxwell 3D Online Help For Consideration of Priority Factors. you can save the wire data you entered by clicking Save. 3. At the cross of the even columns and the even rows. This is convenient for users to use recommended wire gauge according to R20 Priority Number Series. Delete rows or columns for the wire. 3. the sectional areas appear in black numbers (recommended to use). Export/Import Wire Data After editing. . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Provide the file name to import in the File name: edit box (or by browsing) and use the default file type Wire Size File (*. 2. 3. 2. you can import the wire data from a file: 1. Add new rows or columns for the wire. Click the command button Calculate in the dialog box Edit Wire Data.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.wir). Click Export.wir). the sectional areas appear in blue numbers (rarely used). Click OK to return to the Edit Wire Data dialog box. During editing. all the sectional areas of wire gauge with the ratio B/A between the wide and the narrow sides satisfying the condition (B/A) max > B / A > (B/A) min appear in three different modes in the spread sheet. Before editing. 3-8 Wire Specification Libraries Release 14. the Import File dialog box appears. Note Save wire data only updates the wire data in the active design. Wire Sides You can edit the wire data in the spread sheet: 1. 1. Click Import. At the cross of the odd columns and the even rows or the even columns and the odd rows. Save Wire Data 1. you can export the wire data to a file: 1.5 . click Delete Row or Delete Column. To consider the current design. Adding New Materials. However. All rights reserved.5 .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Once the library is configured. Related Topics: Configuring Design Libraries Material Library Management for RMxprt Working with Materials in RMxprt 4-1 Release 14. If you edit materials from this command for the current and then export them. remove. Inc. . Searching for Materials. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. see the topics in Maxwell help under Assigning Materials. Inc. RMxprt includes a material library containing common materials used in motor design. and Viewing and Modifying Material Attributes. Editing definitions from the project window does not modify the configured libraries for any particular design.4 Working with Materials in RMxprt RMxprt shares many common functions related to materials and material handling with Maxwell3D and Maxwell2D. Assigning Materials. use the Tools>Edit Configured Libraries option. .© SAS IP. this library needs to be configured so that it is automatically loaded for any new RMxprt design. and edit RMxprt materials in two main ways: • • Using the Tools>Edit Configured Libraries>Materials menu command. Doing so ensures that new libraries are added to the configured list for the current design. you can add. they will also be available to assign to objects in other designs. For general topics such as. Right-clicking Materials in the project tree and selecting Edit All Libraries. 5 . . 4-2 Working with Materials in RMxprt Release 14. . hard-magnetic material (permanent magnet) and electromagnetic wire. Inc. Inc. It is convenient to create a data file library for them for quick selection while inputting design data.Maxwell 3D Online Help Material Library Management for RMxprt The three most crucial electromagnetic materials in the electric machine are soft-magnetic material (silicon steel sheet). All rights reserved. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.© SAS IP.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 5 . Click the B-H curve button to open the window. • In the project tree. To make the new project material available to all projects. When you do so. in turn is accessed from the Edit Libraries window. . To assign a material to an object: 1. the value field changes to a B-H Curve button. turbo-generator etc. and select Edit All Libraries.© SAS IP. . Working with Materials in RMxprt 4-3 Release 14. which. The Edit Libraries dialog box appears. you can also right-click Materials. Click Tools>Edit Configured Libraries>Materials.Maxwell 3D Online Help Soft-Magnetic Materials The stator and the rotor iron cores in the electric machine are generally laminated with punched sheets of nonlinear soft-magnetic silicon steel. you first set the Core Loss Type of the material to Electrical Steel (rather than None or Power Ferrite) as a material property in the View/Edit Material window. Some special types of electric machines. use integrated solid rotor iron core of soft-magnetic material. All rights reserved. such as moment motor. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. Access to the window for editing the B-H curve is enabled when you set the Magnetic Permeability value to nonlinear (rather than simple or Anisotropic).Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. For the loss characteristics (B-P Curve). this enables the Calculate Properties selection for drop down at the bottom of the window. the magnetization characteristics (B-H Curve) and the loss characteristics (B-P Curve) of the iron-core material must be defined. Related Topics: Adding New Materials to an RMxprt Project Setting the Material Threshold for RMxprt Assigning Materials Removing Materials Validating Materials Sorting Materials Viewing and Modifying Material Attributes Copying Materials Exporting Materials to a Library Calculating Properties for Core Loss in RMxprt (BP Curve) Adding New Materials to an RMxprt Project You can add a new material to a project or to the global user-defined material library. Inc. 2. For magnetic field analysis and core loss analysis of the electric machine. When you set the value to nonlinear.. The dialogue boxes to do so are accessed from the View/Edit Material window. Click Add Material. you must export the material to a global user-defined material library. Select Core Loss Coefficient from the drop down menu to open the B-P Curve window. Inc. Click OK to close the Edit Libraries dialog box. 3. Anisotropic The following two parameters appear: • • T(1. All rights reserved. and enable additional properties. for This Product only or for All Products. Optionally. .© SAS IP. If the material setup is valid. specify values for any additional parameters that appear. Click Validate Material to verify the settings you have specified are valid for the existing properties.1) T(2. additional parameters appear beneath some properties in the same way that Magnitude appears beneath Magnetic Coercivity. 7. Bulk Conductivity Magnetic Coercivity (including the Magnitude of the vector) Core Loss Type .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.5 . displayed when Active Design is selected: • • • • • Relative Permeability. In the Properties of the Material table. with the new material added to the list of materials. additional fields are displayed. The Edit Libraries dialog box reappears. 8. Click OK to save the new material.Maxwell 3D Online Help The View/Edit Material dialog box appears. Type Value Simple Type a value for the Relative Permittivity. The selection makes a difference in the properties displayed. change the Units for any of the properties. . Mass Density If you select This Product. select whether this material should be available for the Active Design only. and specify the units. • • • • Relative Permittivity Dielectric Loss Tangent Magnetic Loss Tangent Composition 6. As necessary. a green check mark appears below the Validate Material button. Type a name for the new material in the Material Name text box. Inc. specify the Type and the Value for the following material properties. Note 5. 9. When you select certain Type or Value options. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.2) Type a simple value for each. Relative Permittivity for RMxprt Material Specify the following for Relative Permittivity.type selections for this property may enable access to coefficient calculation windows. 4-4 Working with Materials in RMxprt Release 14. 4. In the View/Edit Material for section. Note The Anisotropic type is not used in RMxprt design. Select Anisotropic as the Type to display the additional parameters: T(1. For the Relative Permeability property do one of the following (depending on the type of material you are defining): a. and Z Component unit vector fields for Magnetic Coercivity. and specify the coordinates for the BH-curve in the BH Curve dialog box. .2). Any of these actions open the View/ Edit Materials dialog box. you need to specify the magnetization characteristics (B-H Curve).2) T(3. Open the View / Edit Materials dialog from the Edit Materials window either by: • • Selecting an existing material that you need to edit. 1. b. but it will be transferred to Maxwell 3D Design automatically when the design is created by RMxprt. Clicking Add Material. Inc. . Also enables X. Specifying a BH Curve for Nonlinear Relative Permeability When you define a new material or edit an existing material in the View /Edit Materials window with a nonlinear relative permeability.3). Working with Materials in RMxprt 4-5 Release 14. A B-H Curve button appears in the Value column.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.5 . 2. Selecting Nonlinear for any of these additional parameters also causes a B-H Curve button to appear in the Value column. Relative Permeability for a Maxwell or RMxprt Material Select one the following for relative permeability and specify the units: Type Simple Anisotropic Value Type a value for the Relative Permeability. All rights reserved.1).© SAS IP. T(3. and click View / Edit Material. The following parameters appear: • • • T(1. Inc. Nonlinear Click BH Curve.1) T(2. Y.Maxwell 3D Online Help Note This property is not used in RMxprt design analysis. Select Nonlinear as the Type. T(2. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.3) Select either a Simple or Nonlinear Type for each of these parameters. . For a material property without an existing BH curve definition. For an existing curve. the selected radio button corresponds to the existing B type. Set the Units for H and B by selecting from the drop down menus. . v alidation checks are performed on the coordinate list when you attempt to change the type. the Relative Permeability Value button label in the View/Edit Material dialog box changes to Bi-H Curve as visual indication of the type of curve currently defined for the materail. A material property defined using an Intrinsic BH curve will fail validation check in all the other product/design types. Choose the type of curve you want to define by selecting either Normal or Intrinsic.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Inc. You can change the type at any time. an error message will be displayed and the type of B will not be changed. All rights reserved. Note • • The Intrinsic BH curve is supported only in Maxwell 2D/3D magnetostatic and transient design types.Maxwell 3D Online Help Input the BH curve by clicking the B-H Curve button opens the BH Curve dialog box. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. If data is valid.© SAS IP. 3. a query dialog 4-6 Working with Materials in RMxprt Release 14. For a property with existing BH curve definition. Inc. If the data is not valid. 4. When an Intrinsic BH curve is added. the dialog opens with an empty list of coordinates and the default type will be Normal.5 . the slope of the curve can not be less than 0. which can then be exported to a tab-delimited file.5 . Inc. Note 5. As you enter values. and if they are in the wrong columns. click Swap X-Y Data to switch the B values and H values in the graphics display. Refer to Using SheetScan for working with the SheetScan tool. you can click the following buttons: • • • • Add Row Above Add Row Below Append Rows (to specify the number of rows to append to the table) Delete Rows Optionally. fer example. and Delete Rows buttons. the graph is updated. Add Row Below. The initial value of B must be 0 (zero). Inc. . To Add or Edit rows. the slope of the curve can not be less than that of free space anywhere along the curve. All rights reserved.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. The value of B must increase along the curve. click Import Dataset to import BH curve data from a file. For an Intrinsic BH curve.) Working with Materials in RMxprt 4-7 Release 14.Maxwell 3D Online Help box displays asking if the coordinates should be converted. Pressing No can be used. (Refer to Adding Datasets and Exporting Datasets for related information on working with datasets. . Changing the type of the BH curve invalidates all solution data Enter B and H values in each row of the Coordinates table. You can also use the SheetScan tool to extract curve data from sources such as manufacturer datasheets to a dataset.© SAS IP. when users have specified the BH coordinates and then realize they haven't select the desired type. Note the following requirements for creating a valid curve: • • • • For a Normal BH curve. and imported via Import Dataset. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Placing the cursor in a table cell enables the Add Row Above. 5 .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. . an error message displays if a slope is out of tolerance.© SAS IP. Inc. identifying the data points between which the slope is less than that of free space. . Out of tolerance data points must be correctred before you can successfully exit the dialog. When you OK the dialog. Inc. 4-8 Working with Materials in RMxprt Release 14. 6. All rights reserved. click OK to close the window. the Relative Permeability Value button label changes to Bi-H Curve as visual indication of the type of curve currently defined for the materail. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. The BH curve you have defined is associated with the Relative Permeability property of the material. When finished entering data.Maxwell 3D Online Help Normal BH curves with a positive B value at the first point will be extrapolated. Intrinsic curves are not extrapolated. Note When an Intrinsic BH curve is added. . Anisotropic The following two parameters appear: • • T(1.1) T(2.© SAS IP. All rights reserved. Dielectric Loss Tangent for RMxprt Material Specify the following for dielectric loss tangent. Type Value Simple Type a value for the Bulk Conductivity. . Anisotropic The following two parameters appear: • • T(1. Working with Materials in RMxprt 4-9 Release 14.1) T(2. Note This property is not used in RMxprt design analysis. Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.5 . Note The Anisotropic type is not used in RMxprt designs.2) You can specify a Simple or Nonlinear type for each of these parameters. but it will be transferred to Maxwell 3D Design automatically when the design is created by RMxprt. Inc.Maxwell 3D Online Help Bulk Conductivity for an RMxprt Material Specify the following for bulk conductivity and specify the units: Type Value Simple Type a value for the Bulk Conductivity.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.2) Type a simple value for each. and three additional fields of Type Unit Vector: X Component. Note This property is not used in RMxprt design analysis.5 . Core Loss Type for an RMxprt Material Specify the following for core loss type and specify the units: Name Value 4-10 Working with Materials in RMxprt Release 14. Anisotropic The following two parameters appear: • • T(1. Inc. and Z Component appear in which you can enter values or specify functions.2) Type a simple value for each.© SAS IP. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Y Component. Inc. All rights reserved.Maxwell 3D Online Help Magnetic Loss Tangent for RMxprt Material Type Value Simple Type a value for the Bulk Conductivity. but it will be transferred to Maxwell 3D Design automatically when the design is created by RMxprt. . • • If the Relative Permeability Type is either Simple or Anisotropic.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. .enter a Value for the Magnitude. If the Relative Permeability Type is Nonlinear. Magnetic Coercivity for Maxwell and RMxprt Materials Specify the following for magnetic coercivity and specify the units: Type Vector Value Appears by default.1) T(2. Magnitude becomes uneditable. 2. . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Power Ferrite The following parameters appear: • • • Cm X Y Selecting Power Ferrite also enables the Calculate Properties for Core Loss versus Frequency pull-down list at the bottom of the dialog box. All rights reserved.5 .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. and select Edit All Libraries. Inc. This enables the Calculate Properties for pull-down menu at the bottom of the dialogue box with the following two choices: • • Calculate Properties for: Core Loss at One Frequency Calculate Properties for: Core Loss versus Frequency It also displays parameters associated with Electrical Steel materials. Selecting the Core Loss versus Frequency opens the BP Curve window. you can also right-click Materials. Calculating Properties for Core Loss in RMxprt (BP Curve) To be able to extract parameters from the loss characteristics (B-P Curve). Click Tools>Edit Configured Libraries>Materials. .Maxwell 3D Online Help None No core loss is to be calculated for this material. In the Core Loss Type row. 3. you first set the Core Loss Type of the material to Electrical Steel (rather than None or Power Ferrite) as a material property in the View / Edit Material window. select Electrical Steel from the Value pull-down list. Inc.© SAS IP. The View/Edit Material window appears. • Or in the project tree. To calculate core loss properties for an electrical steel material: 1. Selecting the Core Loss Coefficient opens the BP Curve window. Working with Materials in RMxprt 4-11 Release 14. Click Add Material. Electrical Steel The following parameters appear: • • • Kh: Hysteresis Kc: Classical Eddy Ke: Excess Selecting Electrical Steel also enables the Calculate Properties for Core Loss Coefficient the pull-down list at the bottom of the dialog box. The Edit Libraries window appears. Kh -Hysteresis Kc .Classical Eddy Ke .5 . .5 = K1 Bm + K2 Bm 4-12 Working with Materials in RMxprt Release 14. The iron-core loss is expressed as: pv = ph + pc + pe 2 1. The accuracy in inputting the data for B-P Curve for the electrical steel material has significant effect on the correctness of the analyses to the electromagnetic characteristics of the electric machine.© SAS IP. The BP Curve window appears. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Do one of the following to specify a BP curve: • • Import the curve from a saved file. Note 3. and Ke are updated as new default values. You should input the data for B-P Curve according to the accurate data provided by the manufacturers of materials. . Inc. 4. The View/Edit Material dialog box reappears. Computation of Core Loss from a Single-Frequency Loss Curve The principles of the computation algorithm are summarized as follows.Excess Click OK. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. The property values fro Kh. 2. All rights reserved. • • • 5. Select the units in which the B-P curve is measured from the Core Loss Unit pull-down list. Kc. Enter the coordinates manually. Type values and select units for the following: • • • • Mass Density Frequency Thickness Conductivity The following parameters are dynamically updated with both the specified unit and the standard unit (w/m^3) as the input data changes.Maxwell 3D Online Help Electrical Steel Core Loss from a Single-Frequency Loss Curve With the Core Loss Type set to Electrical Steel: 1. Select Core Loss at One Frequency from the Calculate Properties for: pull-down menu. The other two loss coefficients are obtained as Working with Materials in RMxprt 4-13 Release 14. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.5 Therefore K1 = kh f + Kc f K2 = ke f 2 1.© SAS IP. .5 err ( K 1. Minimize the quadratic form to obtain K1 and K2.5 . Bmi – the i-th point of the data on the loss characteristics curve. Inc. 2 1.5 The classical eddy-current loss coefficient is calculated directly as 2 2 d k c = π σ -----δ where σ is the conductivity and d is the thickness of one lamination sheets.Maxwell 3D Online Help where the eddy-current loss is p c = k c ( fB m ) 2 the hysteresis loss is 2 p h = k n fB m and the excessive loss is p e = k e ( fB m ) 1. .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. K 2 ) =  p vi –  K 1 B mi + K 2 B mi    i 2 = min where Pvi . Inc. All rights reserved. Related Topics: Calculating Properties for Core Loss (BP Curve) for Maxwell Core Loss Coefficients for Electrical Steel Core Loss Coefficient Extraction Core Loss Type for a Maxwell Material 4-14 Working with Materials in RMxprt Release 14.5 . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . All rights reserved.© SAS IP. Inc. . Inc.Maxwell 3D Online Help 2 K1 – kc f 0 k h = --------------------------f 0 K2 k e = -----------1.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.5 f 0 where f0 is the testing frequency for B-H Curve. Maxwell 3D Online Help Electrical Steel Core Loss from Multi-Frequency Loss Curves With the Core Loss Type set to Electrical Steel: 1. Add frequency points at which a dataset is available for the Core Loss. 5. Add Dataset information for the frequency by manually entering the data or importing the data from a table. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 4.5 .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. click the Edit Dataset button to launch the Edit Dataset dialog. Continue adding dataset information until all frequencies have datasets defined. Computation of Core Loss from Multi-Frequency Loss Curves The principles of the computation algorithm are summarized as follows. Click OK when all frequencies have valid data to complete the core loss calculation and return to the View/Edit Material dialog.© SAS IP. The iron-core loss is expressed as: pv = ph + pc + pe Working with Materials in RMxprt 4-15 Release 14. Inc. All rights reserved. Using the Edit area. Inc. 3. Select Core Loss versus Frequency from the Calculate Properties for: pull-down menu. . The Core Loss versus Frequency window appears as shown: 2. . For each Dataset added. Click OK to accept the dataset and return to the Core Loss versus Frequency dialog. Add Dataset information for the frequency by manually entering the data or importing the data from a table. kc and ke directly. The Core Loss versus Frequency window appears as shown: 2.5 .the number of loss curves. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.the number of points of the i-th loss curve. Select Core Loss versus Frequency from the Calculate Properties for: pull-down menu. ni . All rights reserved.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. . click the Edit Dataset button to launch the Edit Dataset dialog.two dimensional lookup table for multi-frequency loss curves. For each Dataset added. Inc.5 p vij – k h f i B mij + k c f i B mij + k e f i B mij  = min   where m . Click OK to accept the dataset and return to the Core Loss versus Frequency 4-16 Working with Materials in RMxprt Release 14. 4.© SAS IP. Inc. k e ) = m ni   i = 1j = 1 2 2 2 2 1. Power Ferrite Core Loss from Multi-Frequency Loss Curves With the Core Loss Type set to Power Ferrite: 1. Add frequency points at which a dataset is available for the Core Loss. Using the Edit area. Bmij) .5 = k h fB m + k c ( fB m ) + k e ( fB m ) Minimize the quadratic form to obtain kh . err ( k h. . 3. k c.5 1.Maxwell 3D Online Help 2 2 1. and Pvij = f(fi . . 5. . V(2). If Lamination. Computation of Power Ferrite Core Loss from Loss Curves The principles of the computation algorithm are summarized as follows. Inc.the number of points of the i-th loss curve. Then Cm is calculated from the equation above. Mass Density for RMxprt Material Provide a Simple value for Mass density in kg/m^3. and Pvij = f(fi .5 . specify the: • • Stacking Factor . err ( c. The iron-core loss is expressed as: x y p v = Cm f B m or log ( p v ) = c + x ⋅ log ( f ) + y ⋅ log ( B m ) where c = log ( C m ) Minimize the quadratic form to obtain c. Continue adding dataset information until all frequencies have datasets defined. Note This property is not used in RMxprt design analysis. but it will be transferred to Maxwell 3D Design automatically when the design is created by RMxprt. or V(3).two dimensional lookup table for multi-frequency loss curves. x and y. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. All rights reserved. Inc. ni . y ) = m ni   [ log ( p vij ) – ( c + x ⋅ log ( f i ) + y ⋅ log ( B mij ) ) ] = min 2 i = 1j = 1 where m . x. Composition for RMxprt Material Specify whether the composition is Solid or Lamination.a drop down menu lets you select V(1). Bmij) . Click OK when all frequencies have valid data to complete the core loss calculation and return to the View/Edit Material dialog.Maxwell 3D Online Help dialog. Working with Materials in RMxprt 4-17 Release 14.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.the number of loss curves.takes a simple value Stacking Direction .© SAS IP. Simply enter the appropriate values of Br or Hc for the material when defining its properties. 4-18 Working with Materials in RMxprt Release 14. . and the magnetic remanence. Nonlinear vs. the intersection of this line with B-axis is the remanent Br as the result of the applied magnetization field. The magnetic coercivity.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. is defined as the B-H curve's H-axis intercept.Maxwell 3D Online Help Permanent Magnet Materials in RMxprt A permanent magnet is defined as a material that generates a magnetic flux due to permanent magnetic dipoles in that material. Hc. the permanent magnet's behavior can be approximated using a linear relationship between B and H. however. there is no need to create a nonlinear material. Compute Remanent Br from B-H curve The value of the remanent Br of the individual element after the magnetization field is computed is determined in such a way: after having located the operating point on the original non-remanent BH curve. Inc. as its B-axis intercept. Br.5 . draw a line which is parallel to the original recoil curve with the slope of μ 0 μ r and passes the operating point.© SAS IP. . permanent magnets are nonlinear and should be modeled via a B-H curve as shown below. Inc. Linear Permanent Magnets In general. In these cases. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. All rights reserved. B Linear Permanent Magnet Nonlinear Permanent Magnet Br Hc H In many applications. .60 1.60 0. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Inc. All rights reserved.5 .20 0. .0 4000.0 10000.40 0.Maxwell 3D Online Help Steel_1010 Ansoft LLC 2.40 B [T] 1.0 6000. First. a BH curve may be input directly as follows: 1. Inc.00 0. The View/Edit Material dialog box appears.00 ANSOFT 1.80 0.0 2000.80 1.20 1. The nonlinear BH curve is defined by setting the Relative Permeability Type either to Non- Working with Materials in RMxprt 4-19 Release 14.0 8000. Click the View/Edit Materials… button in the Edit Libraries dialog box.00 0.0 H [A/m] Calculating the Properties for a Non-Linear Permanent Magnet in RMxprt Non-linear permanent magnet properties may be specified in one of two ways.© SAS IP. 2. 4-20 Working with Materials in RMxprt Release 14. . Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. (Refer to Adding Datasets for general information on working with datasets.Maxwell 3D Online Help linear or Anisotropic. All rights reserved.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. . A B-H Curve button appears in the nonlinear property’s Value column 3. This opens the BH Curve dialog box in which you can input (or modify) curve data. If you select Anisotropic. each of its components can be selected Nonlinear and can be specified by a BH Curve. Inc.© SAS IP.5 . Input the BH curve by clicking the B-H Curve button in the property Value column. • • The Intrinsic BH curve is supported only in Maxwell 2D/3D magnetostatic and transient design types. identifying the data points between which the slope is less than that of free space. When you OK the dialog. All rights reserved. the slope of the curve can not be less than that of free space anywhere along the curve. . the curve is treated as a demagnetization curve. To model temperature dependency for a nonlinear permanent magnet you must: • Use an Intrinsic BH curve to model the Relative Permeability Working with Materials in RMxprt 4-21 Release 14. A material property defined using an Intrinsic BH curve will fail validation check in all the other product/design types. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. . When an Intrinsic BH curve is added. Inc.5 . the slope of the curve can not be less than 0. When a BH curve goes through the second quadrant or third quadrant.© SAS IP. 4. The operations to input a nonlinear demagnetization curve are the same as entering a BH curve for Steel material.Maxwell 3D Online Help • • Note For a Normal BH curve. an error message displays if a slope is out of tolerance. the Relative Permeability Value button label changes to Bi-H Curve as visual indication of the type of curve currently defined for the materail.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. For an Intrinsic BH curve. Click Non-Linear Permanent Magnet from the drop down menu. Set the Relative Permeability to Nonlinear. Inc. . Selecting Edit rather than None causes display of the Edit Thermal Modifier dialog..Maxwell 3D Online Help • Specify a Thermal Modifier for both Relative Permeability and the Magnitude of Magnetic Coercivity. . Alternatively. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. a non-linear BH curve can be modeled by the following four parameters: • • • • residual flux density Br coercive field force Hc maximum energy product (BH)max relative recoil permeability μr From the View/Edit Materials window: 1. Checking this box causes the Thermal Modifier column to display at the right side of the Properties of the Material table.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. drop down menu at the bottom of the window. 2. which contains 4-22 Working with Materials in RMxprt Release 14.5 .© SAS IP. All rights reserved. Inc. Apply a thermal Modifier by selecting the Thermal Modifier checkbox. This displays the Properties for Non-Linear Permanent Magnet dialog box.. This enables the Calculate Properties for. Provide a value and select units from the drop down menu. Hc (enabled by default) Coercive field force Hc in the units specified. This contains the following fields. Provide a value and select units from the drop down menu. provide a value and select units from the drop down menu. Mur Provide a value for relative permeability. Maxwell will create a lookup table based on the Four-Parameter Curve Fitting algorithm. . BHmax Maximum magnetic energy product (BH)max If enabled.© SAS IP. All rights reserved. Linear Permanent Magnets Calculating the Properties for a Linear Permanent Magnet Temperature Dependent Nonlinear Permanent Magnets Calculating the Properties for a Linear Permanent Magnet Edit a linear demagnetization curve is simple. If enabled. in Tesla. 3. This enables the Calculate Properties for Permanent Magnet drop down menu at the bottom of the window. and update the coordinates of the BH curve automatically as long as the input data of four parameters pass the validation check.5 .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. . provide a value and select units form the drop down menu. From the View/Edit Materials window: 1. Inc. This displays the Properties for Permanent Magnet window. Click Permanent Magnet from the drop down menu. Inc. Br Residual flux density Br. Related Topics Non-Linear vs. Mu (enabled by default) Provide a value. 2. Set the Relative Permeability to Simple. The values for Relative Permeability and Magnitude under Magnetic Coercivity are updated as new default values.Maxwell 3D Online Help the following fields into which you enter the appropriate values. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Working with Materials in RMxprt 4-23 Release 14. Hc Coercive field force Hc in the units specified. Click OK to close the dialogue and return to the View/Edit Materials window. © SAS IP. Click OK to close the dialogue and return to the View/Edit Materials window. provide a value and select units from the drop down menu. . It is characterized with "fat" hysteresis loop. Note The accuracy in inputting the characteristic parameters for the permanent-magnetic material has significant effect on the correctness of the analyses to the electromagnetic characteristics of the electric machine.5 . It is suggested that users should input the characteristic parameters of the permanent-magnetic material according to the accurate data provided by the manufacturers of materials. Using Demagnetization Curves Many permanent magnet manufactures directly provide demagnetization curves for their products. Hysteresis Loop The permanent-magnetic material belongs to hard-magnetic material. . Mp 3. This section and the next section describe the basic parameters for the demagnetization curve of permanent magnets and the curve fitting based on these parameters. 4-24 Working with Materials in RMxprt Release 14. The values for Relative Permeability and Magnitude under Magnetic Coercivity are updated as new default values. manufactures provide some main parameters.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Residual flux density Br. If enabled. coercive field force Hc and maximum magnetic energy product (BH)max. but in most cases. in Tesla. All rights reserved.Maxwell 3D Online Help Br/Mp (disabled by default) Checking this enables the radio buttons that let you specify either Br or Mp. Inc. coercive field force Hc and maximum magnetic energy product (BH)max. The characteristics of the permanent-magnetic material are represented with its main parameters: residual flux density Br. such as residual flux density Br. therefore is used in the permanentmagnet electric machine to produce magnetic field. RMxprt provides a few characteristic parameters of permanent-magnetic materials for reference. and relative recoil magnetic permeability μr. Br If enabled. which encloses large area as shown in the figure. When magnetized. it keeps high magnetic property with the external magnetic field removed. provide a value and select units form the drop down menu. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Since Hm and Bm are in opposite directions. It means that the permanent-magnetic material is applied with demagnetization magnetic field intensity. All rights reserved. when the magnetic flux goes through the permanent-magnetic material. It is the basic characteristics curve of the permanent-magnetic material. On the demagnetization curve. . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. the magnetic potential difference along the direction of the magnetic flux does not drop.Maxwell 3D Online Help Demagnetization Curve The part of the maximum hysteresis loop of the permanent-magnetic material in the second quadrant is called the demagnetization curve as shown in the next figure. Inc.5 . but Working with Materials in RMxprt 4-25 Release 14. . but the magnetic field intensity has negative values.© SAS IP. the magnetic flux density has positive values. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. the demagnetization field intensity varies repeatedly in both directions. In fact. the permanent-magnetic material is a magnetic source. it is obvious that at (B = Br / 2. . the magnetic energy reaches its maximum value and is termed maximum magnetic energy product (BH)max. All rights reserved. Inc. when the permanent magnet electric machine is working. similar to the electric source in the electric circuit. Inc. on the other hand. which is another significant parameter to represent the magnetic characteristics of the permanent-magnetic material.5 . Recoil Lines The relationship between the magnetic flux density and the magnetic field intensity represented by the demagnetization curve only exists when the magnetic field intensity varies in the same direction. H = Hc / 2). the value of the magnetic field intensity corresponding to zero magnetic flux density B is termed coercive field force Hc. The two extreme positions on the demagnetization curve are the two significant parameters to represent the magnetic characteristics of the permanent-magnetic material.e.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. The produce of the magnetic flux density and the magnetic field intensity at any point on the demagnetization curve is termed magnetic energy product (BH). i. (BH)max = Br Hc / 4.Maxwell 3D Online Help rises. . On the demagnetization curve.© SAS IP. At the two extreme positions (B = Br. Therefore. To some permanent-magnetic materials with linear demagnetization curve. H = 0) and (B = 0. When demagnetization field is applied to the magne- 4-26 Working with Materials in RMxprt Release 14. the value of the magnetic flux density corresponding to zero magnetic field intensity H is termed residual flux density Br. which is proportional to the magnetic energy density possessed by the permanent magnet at the given operating situation. the magnetic energy product is equal to zero. Somewhere at an intermediate position. H = Hc). the magnetic energy product reaches its maximum value. the magnetic flux density will vary reversibly along the recoil line PR.5 . On the local hysteresis loop. If Hq > Hp. . By repeatedly applying the demagnetization field intensity. the magnetic flux density will decrease along the new curve RUP.© SAS IP. Recoil Magnetic Permeability The ratio of the average slope of the recoil line to the magnetic permeability in vacuum μ0 (μ0= 4 x 10-7 H/m) is termed relative recoil magnetic permeability or recoil magnetic permeability for short. therefore should be avoided as possible. If demagnetization field with intensity Hq not exceeding the original value Hp is applied thereafter. but not the previous one PR.Maxwell 3D Online Help tized permanent magnet. but along another curve PVR. the magnetic flux density decreases along the curly segment BrP on the demagnetization curve as shown in the figure If the external demagnetization field intensity Hp is removed when the magnetic flux density reaches the point P. the rising segment and the dropping segment are quite close to each other. therefore can be approximated by the straight line PR. If the external demagnetization field intensity is reapplied. It will vary along the new recoil line QS.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. This sort of irreversible variation in magnetic flux density causes instability in the characteristics of electric machines and complicates the design computation of permanent magnet electric machines. All rights reserved. a localized loop is formed and is termed local hysteresis loop. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. the magnetic flux density will increase not along the original demagnetization curve. Inc. μr: μr = 1 ΔB μ0 ΔH Working with Materials in RMxprt 4-27 Release 14. Inc. . the magnetic flux density drops to a new starting point Q. which is termed recoil line with P as the starting point. the new recoil line RP no longer coincides with the straight segment on the demagnetization curve. This is the best ideal demagnetization curve for electric machine applications.© SAS IP. the recoil line coincides with the straight segment on the demagnetization curve. 0) on the demagnetization curve. Inc. Inc. Some permanent-magnetic materials. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. such as most of the rare-earth permanent-magnetic materials. Hc. (BH)max and μr. In other words.Maxwell 3D Online Help If the demagnetization curve is curly. Inflection Point Some permanent-magnetic materials. such as some ferrite permanent-magnetic materials. but typically varies within a small range.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. . If the demagnetization field intensity exceeds the inflection point k. the recoil line coincides with the demagnetization curve. it is approximated as a constant and is taken as the slop of the tangent to the point (Br. If the demagnetization field intensity does not exceed the inflection point k. show straight demagnetization curve in the whole range. 4-28 Working with Materials in RMxprt Release 14. When the demagnetization field intensity drops to a given value. 0) on the demagnetization curve. Therefore. . the demagnetization curve turns to decrease rapidly. The turning point is termed inflection point. show straight upper segment on the demagnetization curve.5 . Curve Fitting of Demagnetization Curves RMxprt fits the demagnetization curve according to the given characteristic parameters Br. the recoil lines at different starting points are approximated as a family of parallel lines. This makes the magnetic property keep stable while the permanent-magnet electric machine is working. the value of μr depends on the location of the starting point and is a variable. All rights reserved. In those cases. which are all parallel to the tangent to the point (Br. Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. . Any magnetic flux density B in the interval 0 ≤ B ≤ Br corresponds to the magnetic field intensity H: Ha – Hc Hc ( 1 – a ) Br – B H = – H c + -------------------.B = – H c + -----------------------.5 . Hc and (BH)max. All rights reserved. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . Inc. the principles of the three-parameter curve fitting algorithm are summarized as follows.© SAS IP.Maxwell 3D Online Help Three Parameter Curve Fitting Given the three characteristic parameters Br.Using the following figure as a reference: Hc H a = ------a and Br B a = -----a where a<1. Inc.B = – H c ------------------Ba – B B r – aB B r – aB Working with Materials in RMxprt 4-29 Release 14. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.Maxwell 3D Online Help The tangent at any point is given by: B 2  1 – a ----  B – 1 dH r Br dB  -----------.= = ----------------------------. . Inc. .© SAS IP. All rights reserved.= ( BH ) max 2 (1 + 1 – a) Solving yields: a = 2 Br Hc Br Hc – ----------------------------------------------( BH ) max ( BH ) max 4-30 Working with Materials in RMxprt Release 14. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.------ dB  1–a Hc dH The magnetic flux density Bm and the magnetic field intensity Hm corresponding to the maximum magnetic energy product satisfy the following relationship: dB ------dH B = Bm Br = ------Hc Solving yields: Br B m = ------------------------1+ 1–a and Hc H m = – ------------------------1+ 1–a Let the magnetic energy product at the point equal to (BH)max be: Br Hc B m H m = --------------------------------.5 . 5 . With Br0. Hc.Maxwell 3D Online Help The relative recoil magnetic permeability μr is calculated as: Br 1 dB = ( 1 – a ) -------------μ r = -----. The curve should touch the ideal recoil line at the tangent point (Ht. . The segment of this line in the second quadrant is termed the ideal recoil line. therefore RMxprt employs a more accurate fitting technique: four-parameter curve fitting technique. Bt). the real operating point lies often not on the demagnetization curve. 2. The relative recoil magnetic permeability calculated with the three-parameter curve fitting technique will cause deviation. but on the recoil line. Inc. as introduced below. Draw a line through the point (0. 4. and (BH)max. For the nonlinear permanent-magnetic material.© SAS IP. Br) with the slope equal to -μrμo as shown in the Figure. . Given the four characteristic parameters Br. Find the virtual magnetic flux density Br0. the principles of the four-parameter curve fitting algorithm are summarized as follows: 1.------μ0 Hc μ 0 dH B = Br Four Parameter Curve Fitting The three-parameter curve fitting technique fits the demagnetization curve well. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. draw the demagnetization curve with the three-parameter curve fitting technique. Inc. (BH)max and μr. Hc. 3. Any magnetic flux density B in the interval 0 ≤ B ≤ Br Working with Materials in RMxprt 4-31 Release 14. All rights reserved.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Start from the initial guess for the lower and the upper bounds for the virtual magnetic flux density Br0: ( BH ) max  B 0 = max  μ r μ o H c. ------------------------ Hc   B1 = Br 2. . Hc. Inc. All rights reserved.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. and (BH)max.Maxwell 3D Online Help corresponds to the magnetic field intensity H: B r0 – B  ------------------------ –Hc B – a B r0 o  H =  B – Bt  H +  t -------------μ μ  r o B ≤ Bt B ≥ Bt The virtual magnetic flux density Br0 is found by iteration: 1. draw the demagnetization curve with the three-parameter curve fitting technique.5 .© SAS IP. With Br0.– -----------------------( BH ) max ( BH ) max 4-32 Working with Materials in RMxprt Release 14. . Let: B0 + B1 B r0 = -------------------2 3. a0 = 2 B r0 H c B r0 H c -----------------------. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. 8. the assumed Br0 is too big. the lower bound of the interval needs to be increased.Maxwell 3D Online Help 4. Working with Materials in RMxprt 4-33 Release 14. Repeat steps (2) through (7) until Hr converges to 0 within satisfactory precision. so let B0=Br0.© SAS IP.5 . For any magnetic flux density B in the interval 0 ≤ B ≤ Br the corresponding magnetic field intensity H will be calculated by: B r0 – B  ------------------------ –Hc B – a B r0 o  H =  B – Bt  + H  t -------------μ μ  r o 6. Inc. however. . Hr<0. Inc. the upper bound of the interval needs to be decreased. The curve should touch a line parallel to the ideal recoil line at the tangent point (Ht. so let B1=Br0. the assumed virtual Br0 is too small. Bt). B ≤ Bt B ≥ Bt Calculate the value of Hr corresponding to Br using: Br – Bt H r = H t + ----------------μr μ0 7.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. If.  B r0 a0 = 0   B t =  B r0 – μ r μ 0 H c ( 1 – a 0 )B r0 a0 > 0  ---------------------------------------------------------------------a0   and B r0 – B t H t = – H c --------------------------B r0 – a 0 B t 5. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . All rights reserved. If Hr>0. RMxprt’s treatment of conductors may be set by the used by adjusting the Material Threshold. 5. 3. Editing Conductivity Properties in RMxprt 1. Type a value in the Permeability text box (Default=100). Click OK. The Design Settings dialog box appears with the Material Threshold tab selected. All rights reserved. Simple: For this type.000 as conductors. Inc. Anisotropic: For this type. and materials with Permeability greater than 100 as steels. Inc. In the View/Edit Materials dialog. change the values by clicking the Tools>Options>RMxprt Options menu and setting the material thresholds in the RMxprt Options dialog. RMxprt checks that the material is appropriate for the machine part based upon whether it is a conductor or other material type. you must specify material properties for three principal directions: a.000). 3.© SAS IP. . T(3. . Bulk Conductivity has two property types in the Type pull-down list. Type a value in the Conductivity Threshold text box (Default=100. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 2.5 . • • Note 4. Mass Density is a Simple parameter. 4-34 Working with Materials in RMxprt Release 14. RMxprt distinguishes conductors based on material threshold settings.3) The Anisotropic type is not used in RMxprt design analysis. Select the material in the list whose conductivity properties you wish to edit and click the View/Edit Materials button. Click Tools>Edit Configured Libraries>Materials to open the Edit Libraries dialog box. Note RMxprt will treat materials with conductivity greater than 100. 2.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.2) c. you must enter a simple value for the property value. Click RMxprt>Design Settings. If you want these values to be the default. Setting the Material Threshold for RMxprt 1. T(1.1) b. but it will be transferred to Maxwell 3D Design automatically when the design is created by RMxprt.Maxwell 3D Online Help Conductor Data When a material is assigned to a machine part. 4. T(2. Note To enable selection of Generator for Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines. All rights reserved. Click RMxprt>Analysis Setup>Add Solution Setup.5 . If available for the machine you are using. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. operating temperature. and then click Add Solution Setup on the shortcut menu. right-click Analysis in the project tree. To add a solution setup to a design: 1. the options are: • • Const Speed Const Power Specifying RMxprt Solution Settings 5-1 Release 14.© SAS IP. Select a design in the project tree. When you make the selection. Click the General tab. Select a Load Type from the pull-down list. Defaults 3. . <machine type> Includes settings specific to the selected machine type.5 Specifying RMxprt Solution Settings Specify how RMxprt computes a solution by adding a solution setup to the design. speed. . Includes settings to save and clear user-defined default values. 5. the machine Control Type must be set to AC in its Properties window. this makes a difference in the Load Type available. Inc. select an Operation Type from the pull-down list. • Alternatively. 2. For Motor operation. It is divided among the following tabs: General Includes general solution settings.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. including rated output power. The Solution Setup dialog box appears. etc. You can define more than one solution setup per design. 4. This may be Motor or Generator. 8. Type the Operating Temperature. under Analysis in the project tree. . 10. Setup1). Click OK.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 5-2 Specifying RMxprt Solution Settings Release 14. Type the Rated Voltage. based on the machine type you have selected. and select the units. For example. and select the units. and select the units.© SAS IP. Type the Rated Speed. The 3 Phase Synchronous Machine includes options for: • • • • Rated Power Factor Winding Connection (Wye or Delta) Exciter Efficiency Input Exciting current and units The Brushless DC Motor does not use the <machine type> tab.5 . The options vary depending on the machine. the Load Type options are: • • Infinite Bus Independent Generator 6. 11. Inc. All rights reserved. Inc. 12. and then click Properties on the shortcut menu.Maxwell 3D Online Help • • • Const Torque Linear Torque Fan Load If the model has an Operation Type. and select the units. 7. Note To edit a setup after it has been created. Click the <machine type> tab (if any for this machine). Specify the desired settings. Type the Rated Output Power. and you select Generator. right-click the specific setup (for example. 9. . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. the 3 Phase Induction Motor includes options for: • • Frequency and Units Winding Connection (Wye or Delta). The post-processing of data is automatically performed. Specific data not available in Design Output is shown as N/A. RS in Slot Sizes is N/A (mm) when stop type is 1. the literal expressions for various parameters are termed key words of output data. Choose the Solution Setup from the pull-down menu. The Design Settings dialog box appears. Note Several Design Sheet examples are shipped with RMxprt in the examples subdirectory of your installation. for instance. The Export dialog box appears. Click OK. 2. and clicking Save. To set the export options: 1. specify an Excel Template by clicking the . the Design Output for Line-start Permanent-magnet Synchronous Motor (lssm) is shown below. Related Topics: Exporting a Maxwell or Simplorer Model Key Words in Output Data for RMxprt In Design Output of RMxprt. . 4. 2. you first need to customize a template in Microsoft Excel and set the export options.) button to browse to the desired location. Inc.. button. . enter the location to export the files to. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. 5. Specifying RMxprt Solution Settings 5-3 Release 14.. for instance. Before you can specify a design sheet. selecting the template you want to use. To create a design sheet based on a previously-customized template after the design has been analyzed: 1.Maxwell 3D Online Help Generating a Custom Design Sheet for RMxprt RMxprt allows users to import all the data items of Design Output into a Microsoft Excel worksheet in order for users to design Design Sheet of their own styles according to their own requirements using Microsoft Excel. In the Path field. Select the Export Options tab. Winding Weight is 0.. Click RMxprt>Analysis Setup>Export. RMxprt will connect to Microsoft Excel according to the set path and automatically import the relevant data from Design Output into a copy of the customized Design Sheet Template.© SAS IP. Click RMxprt>Design Settings. In the Design Sheet section. or use the ellipsis (. For example. All rights reserved. 3.. Select Customized Design Sheet from the Type pull-down menu.947 (kg).Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 3.5 . Click OK. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.5 . All rights reserved. "Frictional Loss".© SAS IP. "Frequency". To resort to those key words into Microsoft Excel worksheet. the corresponding data in the Design Output should be import into the worksheet. are all key words of output data. .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. "Rated Output Power". Inc.Maxwell 3D Online Help In the Design Output. etc. 5-4 Specifying RMxprt Solution Settings Release 14. "Rated Voltage". . Inc. "Number of Poles". . and its subsidiaries and affiliates.Maxwell 3D Online Help Creating RMxprt Customized Design Sheet Template As a sample example. Specifying RMxprt Solution Settings 5-5 Release 14. rename the blank worksheet file as "lssm" and save it under the path ansoft\rmxprt5 as shown below. Inc. select relevant parameters.© SAS IP.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.5 . Inc. All rights reserved. arrange the page formats of worksheet. the Line-start Permanent-magnet Synchronous Motor (lssm) is used to demonstrate the process for creating a Customized Design Sheet template. Design Template of Microsoft Excel Worksheet in Preferred Styles According to special requirements and preferences. . Start Microsoft Excel. Taking as example a part of the parameters of the Design Sheet of the Linestart Permanent-magnet Synchronous Motor (lssm). the designed worksheet template is shown below. Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Resort to Key Words in Design Output In the spaces for importing data in the template (shown in yellow).Maxwell 3D Online Help In the template. xxxxx stands for the relevant key words as shown below. the yellow-colored areas are reserved for importing data. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 5-6 Specifying RMxprt Solution Settings Release 14. Inc. . Inc. . Within the double quotation marks. key in = "xxxxx". All rights reserved.5 .© SAS IP. In the figure below. . .© SAS IP.5 . for instance. the cells in the green-colored area are all keyed in with = "" to form boundary. Specifying RMxprt Solution Settings 5-7 Release 14.Maxwell 3D Online Help Set Boundary for Data Imported into Worksheet for RMxprt Rmxprt automatically searches for matching key words while importing data into the Microsoft Excel worksheet. All rights reserved. RMxprt defines = "" as identification of boundary. it is possible to set the searching boundary. Inc. and therefore the searching time. To reduce the searching space. Inc. While importing data.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. RMxprt will not search below or to the right of the boundary for matching key words. . All rights reserved. In the following example.Maxwell 3D Online Help Insert Figures into Template for RMxprt With resort to function Paste.© SAS IP. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Inc. it is possible to insert desired figures into the worksheet template. 5-8 Specifying RMxprt Solution Settings Release 14. for instance. . four figures of slot types are inserted.5 . Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. In the following example.Maxwell 3D Online Help Use Different Languages for RMxprt Design Sheets It is possible to use a preferred language other than English in the Microsoft Excel worksheet template. . . Inc. Inc. Specifying RMxprt Solution Settings 5-9 Release 14. Simplified Chinese is used.© SAS IP.5 . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. All rights reserved. for instance. Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Inc. .Maxwell 3D Online Help Note Key words are not allowed to be expressed in other languages. Post-process Data for RMxprt Using the relevant functions of Microsoft Excel. Inc. calculate the weight of a winding using the following formula: 5-10 Specifying RMxprt Solution Settings Release 14. it is possible to post-process data in the worksheet template. For example. All rights reserved. .5 .© SAS IP. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. All rights reserved.0078/4 Specifying RMxprt Solution Settings 5-11 Release 14.© SAS IP. Inc.5 .14*D32*D32*0.Maxwell 3D Online Help winding weight = number of slots × number of conductors per slot × number of parallel wires × length of half turns of coil × sectional area of wire × specific weight of wire In the following figure. . the formula is entered into the relevant cell as: =H7*D30*D31*D36*3. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. . All rights reserved. Inc. .Maxwell 3D Online Help 5-12 Specifying RMxprt Solution Settings Release 14. Inc.5 .© SAS IP.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . © SAS IP. 2. Click RMxprt>Analyze. Each solution setup is solved in the order it appears in the project tree. Running an RMxprt Simulation 6-1 Release 14.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. The next solution setup will be solved when the previous solution is complete.5 . In the project tree. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. To run more than one analysis at a time. . 1. . select Analysis.6 Running an RMxprt Simulation After you specify how RMxprt will compute the solution. Inc. begin the solution process. Inc. 2. Select a solution setup in the project tree. Click RMxprt>Analyze All. under the design you want to solve. To solve every solution setup in a design: 1. All rights reserved. follow the same procedure while a simulation is running. and select Abort from the shortcut menu. the data for that pass or current frequency point is deleted. If you aborted the solution in the middle of an adaptive pass. 6-2 Running an RMxprt Simulation Release 14. . All rights reserved. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.© SAS IP.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. The analysis stops immediately.5 .Maxwell 3D Online Help Aborting RMxprt Analyses To end the solution process before it is complete: • Right-click in the Progress window. Any solutions that were completed prior to the one that was aborted are still available. Inc. Inc. . The solution setup with the invalid solution is marked with an X in the project tree and in the Results window. Inc. .5 . Inc. Running an RMxprt Simulation6-3 Release 14.© SAS IP.Maxwell 3D Online Help Re-solving an RMxprt Problem If you modify a design after generating a solution. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 2. the solution in memory will no longer match the design. Select a solution setup in the project tree. To generate a new solution after modifying a design. . follow the procedure for running a simulation: 1. All rights reserved.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Click RMxprt>Analyze. Maxwell 3D Online Help 6-4 Running an RMxprt Simulation Release 14.© SAS IP.5 . All rights reserved.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. . Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. . Create a Customized Design Sheet Post Processing and Generating Reports in RMxprt 7-1 Release 14.© SAS IP. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. All rights reserved. Export a model to be used in Maxwell2D. Maxwell 3D. Inc. . Specify output variables. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. .5 .7 Post Processing and Generating Reports in RMxprt When RMxprt has completed a solution. you can display and analyze the results in the following ways: • • • • View solution data. or Simplorer. this contains a Data field with a drop-down menu that allows you to view many different data tables. Inc.© SAS IP.5 . Inc. and then click Performance on the shortcut menu. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. The Solutions dialog contains three tabs: • • Performance . Right-click Results in the project tree. The file contains tables with information for such things as (depending on the machine type): • • • • • • • • • • • • General Data Stator Data Rotor Data Permanent Magnet Data Material Consumption Rated Operation No-Load Operation Steady State Parameters No Load Magnetic Data Full Load Data Winding Arrangement Transient FEA Input Data To print the design sheet: 1. 7-2 Post Processing and Generating Reports in RMxprt Release 14. . . All rights reserved.res file for the current setup. which vary with the machine type. do one of the following: • • • • Click RMxprt>Results>Solution Data. and then click Solution Data on the shortcut menu. Click the Solution Data button on the toolbar. Right-click Setup1 in the Project tree.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Right-click the design sheet to display the context menu.this displays the contexts of the .Maxwell 3D Online Help Viewing RMxprt Solution Data To access the Solutions dialog box. Some examples are: • • • • • • • • • • Aux Winding Full Load Operation Material Consumption No Load Operation Permanent Magnet Rotor Data Rated Parameters Stator Slot Stator Winding Steady State Parameters Design Sheet . Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. . 2. Inc. add/edit data markers and labels. 1. Plot data can also be exported to various formatted text files that can then be imported into spreadsheets. and view the Setup. Post Processing and Generating Reports in RMxprt 7-3 Release 14.Maxwell 3D Online Help 2. Solution and State tables. All rights reserved. Click the Properties button to view the Solution Browser properties dialog. Click RMxprt>Results>Browse Solutions This displays the Solutions dialog with the Browse tab selected. Refer to Modifying the Background Properties of a Report for additional information. To print plots from the Curve tab: 1. you can use the RMxprt>Results>Browse Solutions to look through and manage them.this displays the plots that were automatically generated by the solver. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. From here you can select a design. edit axis. 3. • Select the printer. and click OK to print. Curves . Browse Solutions in RMxprt If you have run different solutions on a design. etc. Select the printer. Inc. legend. and click OK to print.5 . Select Print from the shortcut menu. You can select these from a drop-down menu (menu contents vary with the machine type): • • • • • • • • • • Note Input DC Current vs Speed Efficiency vs Speed Output Power vs Speed Output Torque vs Speed Cogging Torque in Two Teeth Induced Coil Voltage at Rated Speed Air Gap Flux Density Induced Winding Phase Voltage at Rated Speed Winding Currents Under Load Phase Voltage Under Load You can also open the Solution Data dialog box directly on the Curves tab by clicking the Curves toolbar button. 3. Note The context menu also provides commands that allow the user to change various plot characteristics such as: trace type and properties such as color. Click Print on the menu to display the Print dialog.© SAS IP. . The plot image can also be copied to the clipboard for pasting in another application. 2. The Print dialog box appears. Right-click on the desired plot to display the context menu.a nd title properties. 5 .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. All rights reserved.© SAS IP. . It can be organized as: • • • Variation / Setup / Solution Setup / Solution / Variation Setup /Variation / Solution Click OK to accept your selection and close the dialog.Maxwell 3D Online Help This contains radio buttons for you to select the tree view. 3. you can also select and delete solutions. From the Solutions dialog. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. . 7-4 Post Processing and Generating Reports in RMxprt Release 14. Inc. 5 . Attempting to export without the requisite files present automatically launches simulation to generate them. a <design_sheet_name>.] button and browsing to the desired directory.vbs You can now use the Simplorer Tools>Run Script command to run the . (Refer to the Simplorer online help for detailed information on running scripts. ..sml <project name>_<design name>_<setup name>_signals.. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . Inc. You can also right-click on Analysis or Analysis>Setup in the Project Manager and select Export. Note 2. You can also create a new directory.sml <project name>_<design name>_<setup name>_SimCkt. – For Simplorer models.. if desired. 3.© SAS IP. – For Customized Design Sheets. All rights reserved.) You can now work with the model in the product to which you exported it.Maxwell 3D Online Help Exporting a Simplorer Model or Customized Design Sheet To export the model to a Simplorer model. Optionally.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Select the setup you want to export from the Solution Setup drop-down list.vbs script to generate the components on the Simplorer schematic. or Customized Design Sheet: 1. three files will be exported: • • • <project name>_<design name>_<setup name>. 6. 7. Click RMxprt>Analysis Setup>Export to open the Export dialog box. ] button to specify a design Variation to use during export. Click OK. click the Variation ellipsis [.xls file will be generated. 5. solve the design for the specific solution setup from which the export is desired.. Related Topics: Generating a Custom Design Sheet for RMxprt Post Processing and Generating Reports in RMxprt 7-5 Release 14. Select one of the following from the Type drop-down list: • • Simplorer Model Customized Design Sheet 4. Inc. Specify the Path to store the exported files in by clicking the Path ellipsis [. First. and perform other kinds of analyses. Variable definitions and assignments are automatically mapped from the solved RMxprt design to the Maxwell design. All rights reserved. Inc. You can now work with the model in the Maxwell2D or Maxwell3D design. Therefore. In Maxwell 14. parameters. etc.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. and equivalent damping is added to accelerate the process approaching to the rated output power. and analyze results. it is useful to apply constant power as the mechanical load.Maxwell 3D Online Help Create a Maxwell Design RMxprt provides a way to export solved models as either a Maxwell 2D or Maxwell 3D design. • • • Note All the RMxprt machine types are supported.© SAS IP. 5. This allows the user to choose the default variable values to be used in the Maxwell design being created with variables. excitations. Click OK to create the Maxwell design. This setup is visible when Consider Mechanical Transient on the Mechanical tab of the Motion Setup dialog box is checked. Creating a Maxwell2D/3D design from an old version (version 15 or older) of a solved RMxprt design results in the Maxwell2D/3D design being created without any variables even if the original RMxprt design uses variables. In such cases. Select one of the following from the Type drop-down list: • • Maxwell 2D Design Maxwell 3D Design 3. and recommends resolving the setup to get the variable assignments. are automatically created.. To export the model to a Maxwell 2D Design or Maxwell 3D Design: 1.0 2D/3D designs created by RMxprt. 2. Note For Maxwell 2D/3D designs for motor applications.5 . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. add boundaries and excitations. the mechanical transient is setup according to the rated mechanical output power. the Message Manager displays a warning message informing the user that the Maxwell design being created does not contain any variable assignments from the RMxprt design. the computed output mechanical power at a given constant speed may not reach the desired rated power. . Optionally. perform analyses. Inc. Setups for boundaries.. Select the setup you want to export from the Solution Setup drop-down list. . click the [. Click RMxprt>Analysis Setup>Create Maxwell Design The Create Maxwell Design dialog box appears. 7-6 Post Processing and Generating Reports in RMxprt Release 14.] button to specify a Variation in the Set Design Variation dialog box. 4. Inc. All rights reserved. 3. 7. 2. 3. The updated report appears in the view window. Modifying Reports in RMxprt To modify the data that is plotted in a report: 1. In the Display Type pull-down list. In the Solution pull-down list. and then click Done. b. The available options in the Traces dialog box depend on the report type you create and the available solution data. or graphical representation. 4. Click Done. click RMxprt. 4. The Traces dialog box appears. click the solution containing the data you want to plot. Click Output Variables. In the Report Type pull-down list. One of the ways you can analyze your solution data is to create a report. 9. Click RMxprt>Results>Create Report. that displays the relationship between a design's values and the corresponding analysis results. 8. To update all modified reports: Click RMxprt>Results>Update Reports. Click OK. Post Processing and Generating Reports in RMxprt 7-7 Release 14. Once you have created a report. Select Modify Report from the shortcut menu. The Output Variables dialog box appears.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 6.Maxwell 3D Online Help Creating Reports in RMxprt After RMxprt has generated a solution.5 .© SAS IP. Following is the general procedure for creating a report: 1. addition options become available on the Results submenu. Click Done when you are finished modifying the report. The Traces dialog box appears. . The report appears in the view window and is listed in the project tree. click the design containing the solution data you want to plot. do the following: a. In the Target Design pull-down list. Modify the selections in the Traces dialog box as needed. Add the expression you want to plot. select the type of report you want to create. 5. Inc. To create a new mathematical expression to plot. . In the project tree. Reports are created using the Traces dialog box. A shortcut menu appears 2. all of the results for that solution are available for analysis. Add one or more traces to include in the report. The Create Report dialog box appears. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. right-click the report you want to modify. b. specify the quantity to plot along the x-axis in one of the following ways: • Select Use Primary Sweep. In the Display Type list. 6. This opens all reports. The Traces dialog box appears.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. x-y graph of results. selected quantities against a swept variable or another quantity. All rights reserved. To simplify viewing and comparisons. click Rectangular Plot. To close all open reports: Click Window>Close All. In the Category list. This deletes all reports for the project. Deleting All Reports in RMxprt To delete all reports for a project: Click RMxprt>Results>Delete All Reports. . Click RMxprt>Results>Create Report. c. click the type of information to plot. 4. Inc. 7-8 Post Processing and Generating Reports in RMxprt Release 14. click the value to plot. click the mathematical function of the quantity to plot. 7. 3. In the Function list.© SAS IP. specify the information to plot along the y-axis: a. In the Target Design list. click the design containing the solution data you want to plot. . click the data type you want to plot. 5. The Create Report window appears. Inc.Maxwell 3D Online Help Opening All Reports in RMxprt To open all reports for a project: Click RMxprt>Results>Open All Reports. 2. In the Report Type list. In the Quantity list. Select from the following Display Type formats in the Create Report dialog box: Rectangular Plot A 2D rectangular (x-y) graph. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.5 . Data Table A spreadsheet with rows and columns that displays. 1. Click OK. it may be helpful to use Window>Cascade or Window>Tile Horizontally or Window>Tile Vertically commands. Under the Y tab. Creating 2D Rectangular Plots in RMxprt A rectangular plot is a 2D. 3D Rectangular Plot A 3D rectangular (x-y-z) graph. The Y tab is selected by default. Selecting the Display Type in RMxprt The information in a report can be displayed in several formats. Under the X tab. in numeric form. 5 . In the Target Design list. The Traces dialog box appears. Under the Z tab. confirm or modify the sweep variables that will be plotted. click the design containing the solution data you want to plot. click the type of information to plot.Maxwell 3D Online Help The first (primary) sweep variable listed under the Sweeps tab will be plotted along the xaxis. Each column lists an axis on the report and the information that will be plotted on that axis. 1. In the Category list. 3. The Create Report window appears. and Function of the quantity to plot on the x-axis. • Clear the Use Secondary Sweep option. The function of the selected quantity is plotted against the swept variable values or quantities you specified on an x-y graph. All rights reserved. specify the information to plot along the y-axis in one of the following ways: • Select Use Secondary Sweep. The trace is added to the traces list at the top of the Traces dialog box.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. click the data type you want to plot. x-y-z graph of results. click the mathematical function of the quantity to plot. In the Report Type list. Click OK. Click RMxprt>Results>Create Report. 8. and then select the Category. click 3D Rectangular Plot. Optionally. In the Quantity list. and then select the Category. Quantity. add another trace by following the procedure above. A trace represents one or more lines connecting data points on the graph. 10. Under the Sweeps tab. . 7. Post Processing and Generating Reports in RMxprt 7-9 Release 14. The quantity you select will be plotted against the secondary sweep variable listed under the Sweeps tab. specify the information to plot along the z-axis: a. . The plot is listed under Results in the project tree. The second (secondary) sweep variable listed under the Sweeps tab will be plotted along the y-axis. The Z tab is selected by default. In the Display Type list. Related Topics Sweeping a Variable Working with Traces Creating 3D Rectangular Plots in RMxprt A rectangular plot is a 3D. 2. Inc. • Clear the Use Primary Sweep option. Under the Y tab. and Function of the quantity to plot on the y-axis. 11. Click Add Trace. Click Done. 5. Quantity.© SAS IP. In the Function list. 6. 9. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. The quantity will be plotted against the primary sweep variable listed under the Sweeps tab. Inc. 4. b. c. click the value to plot. In the Report Type list. click the value to display. . • 9. 4. Under the Y tab. In the Function list. c. Click RMxprt>Results>Create Report. click the design containing the solution data you want to plot. click the data type you want to plot. confirm or modify the swept variables that will be plotted. Click Add Trace. 12. Related Topics Sweeping a Variable Working with Traces Creating Data Tables in RMxprt A data table is a spreadsheet with rows and columns that displays. in numeric form. 5. 11. In the Quantity list. 10. In the Target Design list. The Traces dialog box appears. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. The Y tab is selected by default. The trace is added to the traces list at the top of the Traces dialog box. specify the information to plot along the x-axis in one of the following ways: • Select Use Primary Sweep. 7-10 Post Processing and Generating Reports in RMxprt Release 14. 2. Under the Sweeps tab. The Create Report window appears. The function of the selected quantity or quantities is plotted against the values you specified on an x-y-z graph. In the Display Type list. The plot is listed under Results in the project tree. click Data Table. In the Category list. The quantity you select will be plotted against the primary sweep variable listed under the Sweeps tab. A trace represents one or more lines connecting data points on the graph.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Inc. Click OK. selected quantities against a swept variable or other quantities. 1. Inc. 6. 7. The first (primary) sweep variable listed under the Sweeps tab will be plotted along the xaxis. . click the type of information to display.Maxwell 3D Online Help 8. Under the X tab. click the mathematical function to use for the quantity.© SAS IP. select the quantity you are interested in and its associated function: a. add another trace by following the procedure above. b. Click Done. and then select the Category. Each column lists an axis on the report and the information that will be plotted on that axis. and Function of the quantity to plot on the x-axis. All rights reserved. Under the X tab. Clear the Use Primary Sweep option. select the values you want to plot the quantity against in one of the following ways: • Select Use Primary Sweep. Quantity. 3.5 . Optionally. . The trace represents the function of the quantity you selected and will be plotted against other quantities or swept variable values. a trace represents a quantity's value at another quantity's value or at selected swept variable values. . The trace will be visible in the report when you click Done. and Function of the quantity to plot against the quantity you selected in step 5. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. The quantity you selected in step 5 is listed at each variable value or additional quantity value you specified.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. and then select the Category. Post Processing and Generating Reports in RMxprt 7-11 Release 14. A trace is added to the traces list at the top of the Traces dialog box. you can "sweep" over some or all of those values. You can modify the information to be plotted by typing the name of the quantity or sweep variable to plot along an axis directly in the boxes. Inc. This quantity will be plotted against the primary swept variable listed under the Sweeps tab. Quantity.© SAS IP. • Clear the Use Primary Sweep option. Related Topics Sweeping a Variable Working with Traces Working with Traces in RMxprt A trace in a 2D or 3D report defines one or more curves on a graph. Inc. 9. 10. 11. All rights reserved. A report can include any number of traces and. Click Done. 2. In general.Maxwell 3D Online Help The quantity you selected in step 5 will be displayed against the first (primary) sweep variable listed under the Sweeps tab. Each column lists an axis on the report and the information that will be plotted on that axis. Optionally. In the Traces dialog box. resulting in a curve in 2D or 3D space. If you have solved one or more variables at several values. Click Add Trace. The data table is listed under Results in the project tree. Under the Sweeps tab. confirm or modify the swept variables that will be plotted. Note The Traces dialog box can be accessed via the Create Report dialog box. In the context of a data table. The values used for a plot's axes can be variables in the design or functions and expressions based on the design's solutions. Click Add Trace. for rectangular graphs. up to four independent yaxes. to add a trace to a report: 1. A trace in a data table defines part of the displayed matrix of text values. 8. specify the information you want to plot along the appropriate axes. add another trace by following the procedure above.5 . The trace is added to the traces list at the top of the Traces dialog box. and then click Remove Trace. or design variable that typically has more than one value.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. and the new trace information you specified replaces it in the traces list. From the Traces dialog box. 3. . In the Traces dialog box. Inc. Select the trace you want to remove from the traces list. All rights reserved. a swept variable is an intrinsic. The trace you selected is removed. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. the first sweep variable listed is the "primary sweep".5 . you can plot any calculated or derived quantity against one or more of the swept variable's values. and then click the variable name you want to be the primary sweep variable. 4. project. To remove all traces from the report: • Click Remove All Traces.Maxwell 3D Online Help Removing Traces in RMxprt You can traces from the traces list in the following ways: To remove one trace from the report: • Select the trace you want to remove from the traces list. To modify which variable is the primary sweep variable: • Click the Name box for the primary sweep variable. 7-12 Post Processing and Generating Reports in RMxprt Release 14. You can now type the quantities to plot in the appropriate axes boxes. the second sweep variable listed is the "secondary sweep". Click Replace Trace. 2. specify the information you want to plot along the appropriate axes. Inc. Related Topics Working with Traces Sweeping a Variable in a Report in RMxprt In RMxprt. Related Topics Working with Traces Adding Blank Traces in RMxprt To add a blank trace to the traces list: • Click Add Blank Trace.© SAS IP. Any additional sweep variables are represented as additional curves on the graph. Related Topics Working with Traces Replacing Traces in RMxprt To replace a trace in the traces list with a different trace definition: 1. If you are creating a 3D report. . When you click the Sweeps tab in the Traces dialog box. Click Done. 5 . all of the possible values for the selected variable are listed. Inc. min. follow the same procedure. . To modify the values that will be plotted for a variable: 1. SweepVariable) explicitly means derivative over the sweep variable specified in the second argument (such as "Freq"). cang_deg and cang_rad. max. Selecting a Function in RMxprt The value of a quantity being plotted depends upon its mathematical function. avg. clear All Values and select the specific values to plot against the selected quantity. Inc. rms. • Alternatively. . All rights reserved.© SAS IP. The available. These are: deriv. Some of these functions can operate along an entire curve. cut at +/-180 ang_rad Angle in radians asin Arc sine asinh Hyperbolic arc sine atan Arc tangent atanh Hyperbolic arc tangent avg Average of first parameter over the second parameter avgabs Absolute value of average. pk2pk. Click a variable in the table.Maxwell 3D Online Help To modify the secondary sweep variable or any additional sweep variable. integ. These functions can also be applied to previously specified Quantities and Functions as Range Functions when using the Set Range Function dialog. To the right. All of the selected variable's values are plotted. valid functions depend on the type of quantity (real or complex) that is being plotted. The function is applied to the quantity which is implicitly defined by all the swept and current variables.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Post Processing and Generating Reports in RMxprt 7-13 Release 14. You can select from the following functions in the Function list: abs Absolute value acos Arc cosine acosh Hyperbolic arc cosine ang_deg Angle (phase) of a complex number. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. which you select from the Function list in the Report dialog box. 2. These functions have syntax as follows: • • deriv(quantity) implicitly implies derivative over the primary sweep deriv(quantity. Select All Values. ise Returns the integral of the squared deviation of the selected quantity from a target value that is entered via an additional argument. conjg Conjugate of the complex number.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.To use this function.5 .© SAS IP. along the second parameter (typically sweep variable). you need to open the Add Trace Characteristics dialog and select the Error category. cang_rad Cumulative angle of the first parameter in radians along a second parameter (typically a sweep variable) Returns a double precision value. Uses trapezoidal area.. itae Returns the time-weighted absolute deviation of the selected quantity from a target value that is entered via an additional argument. 7-14 Post Processing and Generating Reports in RMxprt Release 14. returns 0 otherwise exp Exponential function (the natural anti-logarithm) formfactor Returns root mean square RMS/Mean Absolute Value for the selected simulation quantity. integabs Absolute value of integral. im Imaginary part of the complex number int Truncated integer function integ Integral of the selected quantity. To use this function. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. you need to open the Add Trace Characteristics dialog and select the Error category. Inc. To use this function. Inc. Returns a double precision value cut at +/-180. you need to open the Add Trace Characteristics dialog and select the Error category. even Returns 1 if integer part of the number is even. cos Cosine cosh Hyperbolic cosine crestfactor Peak/RMS (root mean square) for the selected simulation quantity dB(x) 20*log10(|x|) dBm(x) 10*log10(|x|) +30 dBW(x) 10*log10(|x|) deriv Derivative of first parameter over second parameter. iae Returns the integral of the absolute deviation of the selected quantity from a target value that is entered via the additional argument. .Maxwell 3D Online Help cang_deg Cumulative angle (phase) of the first parameter (a complex number) in degrees. All rights reserved. . Inc. pulsefall9010 Pulse fall time of the selected simulation quantity according to the 90%10% estimate.Maxwell 3D Online Help itse Returns the time-weighted squared deviation of the selected qty from a target value that is entered via an additional argument. j0 Bessel function of the first kind (0th order) j1 Bessel function of the first kind (1st order) ln Natural logarithm log10 Logarithm base 10 lsidelobex The ‘x’ value for the left side lobe: the next highest value to the left of the max value. pulsefront9010 Pulse front time of the selected simulation quantity according to the 10%90% estimate. Returns the peak-to-peak value for the selected simulation quantity.© SAS IP. . The ‘y’ value for the left side lobe: the next highest value to the left of the max value. you need to open the Add Trace Characteristics dialog and select the Error category. pmin Period minimum prms Period Root Mean Square. Difference between max and min of the first parameter over the second parameter. min_swp Minimum value of a sweep. returns 0 otherwise overshoot Obtains the peak overshoot over a point (double argument) per Calculates period. lsidelobey mag Magnitude of the complex number max Maximum of magnitudes. ex. max_swp Maximum value of a sweep. normalize(mag(x)) odd Returns 1 if integer part of the number is odd. Inc. Post Processing and Generating Reports in RMxprt 7-15 Release 14. min Minimum magnititude. nint Nearest integer normalize Divides each value within a trace by the maximum value of the trace.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. All rights reserved. pmax Period max. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. pkavg Returns the ratio of the peak to peak-to-average for the selected quantity.To use this function. .5 . pk2pk Peak to peak. Maxwell 3D Online Help pulsefront3090 Pulse front time of the selected simulation quantity according to the 30%90% estimate. pulsetail50 Pulse tail time of the selected simulation quantity from the virtual peak to 50%. Inc. rmsAC Returns the AC RMS for the selected quantity. All rights reserved. 7-16 Post Processing and Generating Reports in RMxprt Release 14. Pulse width of input stream pw_plus_min Min. pulsemin Pulse minimum from the front and tail estimates for the selected simulation quantity. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. pulsemaxtime Time at which the maximum pulse value of the selected simulation quantity is reached. PulseWidth Functions pw_plus Pulse width of first positive pulse pw_plus_max Max. . pulsewidth5050 Pulse width of the selected simulation quantity as measured from the 50% points on the pulse front and pulse tail. rms Returns total root mean square of the selected quantity.© SAS IP. Pulse width of input stream pw_plus_avg Average of the positive pulse width input stream pw_plus_rms RMS of the positive pulse width input stream pw_minus_max Max.5 . . pulsemax Pulse maximum from the front and tail estimates for the selected simulation quantity. Pulse width of input stream pw_minus_min Min. Inc. Pulse width of input stream pw_minus_avg Average of the negative pulse width input stream pw_minus_rms RMS of the negative pulse width input stream polar Converts the complex number in rectangular to polar re Real part of the complex number rect Converts the complex number in polar to rectangular rem Fractional part ripple Returns the ripple factor (AC RMS/Mean) for the selected quantity.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. pulsemintime Tiime at which the minimum pulse value of the selected simulation quantity is reached. Inc. Takes 'x' as argument (3. Takes 'x' as argument (3. y0 Bessel function of the second kind (0th order) y1 Bessel function of the second kind (1st order) YAtXMax Threshold crossing time: report first time (y value) at which an output quantity crosses XMax.Maxwell 3D Online Help rsidelobex The ‘x’ value for the right side lobe: the next highest value to the right of the max value. a value from a calculated expression. xdb20beamwidt Width between left and right occurrences of values ‘x’ db20 from max. you need to open the Add Trace h Characteristics dialog and select the Radiation category.0 default) To use this function. or Quantity to Plot in RMxprt Each trace in a report includes a quantity that is plotted along an axis. you need to open the Add Trace dth Characteristics dialog and select the Radiation category. The quantity being plotted can be a value that was calculated by RMxprt. rsidelobey The ‘y’ value for the right side lobe: the next highest value to the right of the max value. Variable. Inc. XAtYVal Returns the X value at the first occurance of Y value. xdb10beamdwi Width between left and right occurrences of values ‘x’ db10 from max. To use this function. XAtYMin Threshold crossing time: report first time (x value) at which an output quantity crosses a user definable threshold (YMin). such as L11. All rights reserved.© SAS IP. Post Processing and Generating Reports in RMxprt 7-17 Release 14. Selecting a Parameter.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. sgn Sign extraction sin Sine sinh Hyperbolic sine sqrt Square root tan Tangent tanh Hyperbolic tangent Undershoot Obtains the peak undershoot over a point (double argument). YatXVal Returns the Y value at the first occurance of X value. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. XAtYMax Threshold crossing time: report first time (x value) at which an output quantity crosses YMax.0 default). . YAtXMin Threshold crossing time: report first time (y value) at which an output quantity crosses a user definable threshold (XMin). .5 . 2. . Output Variables Derived quantities RMxprt project or design variables. select one of the following categories: Variables User-defined project or design variables.© SAS IP. All rights reserved.5 . In the Traces dialog box. Inc. parameters or solution curves. . 7-18 Post Processing and Generating Reports in RMxprt Release 14. Select a quantity to plot from the Quantity list.Maxwell 3D Online Help To select a parameter. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. or quantity to plot: 1. The available quantities depend on the selected category and the setup of the design.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. variable. The new plot or plots appear in the Project tree under the Results icon. flux linkages. etc: Category Description Coil Voltage Report voltages in the machine coil. Misc. Percentage Report machine efficiency. line current. Post Processing and Generating Reports in RMxprt 7-19 Release 14.5 . torque to current ratio. Flux Density Report flux density in the machine air gap. 1. Right-click to display the shortcut menu and select Quick Report. 2. select a setup or sweep icon of interest. source current. Report miscellaneous quantities specific to the machine type such as power factor. armature current. output torque. output power. . On the Project tree. induction torque. Inc.© SAS IP. Voltage Report Line and Phase voltage. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Induced Voltage Report Induced Line and Phase voltages. solution type.Maxwell 3D Online Help Creating Quick Reports in RMxprt Following is the procedure for creating a quick report. . Current Report currents for each line or phase of the machine. Related Topics Creating Reports Modifying Reports RMxprt Quick Report Categories RMxprt Quick Report Categories When using the Quick Reports function for Solutions. 3. Torque Report cogging torque.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. The Quick Report dialog appears. Inc. Select the one or more categories for the report from the list and click OK. the following report categories may be available depending upon the solution parameters requested. All rights reserved. magnet generated torque. Power Report air gap power. A rectangular plot for each selected category displays. .5 .Maxwell 3D Online Help Angle Reports power factor angle. . All rights reserved.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.© SAS IP. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. Inc. 7-20 Post Processing and Generating Reports in RMxprt Release 14. Inductance Reports air gap permeance. Angular Speed Reports angular speed. Click OK to close the Properties dialog box. You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window.© SAS IP. The following machine types have winding data available: • • • • • • • • • • • Three-Phase Induction Motors (stator winding) and (rotor winding) Three-Phase Synchronous Machines (stator winding) and (rotor winding) Brushless PMDC Motors (stator winding) Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines (stator winding) PMDC Motors (rotor winding) Switched Reluctance Motors (stator winding) Line-Start Permanent-Magnet Synchronous Motors (stator winding) Universal Motors (stator winding) and (rotor winding) General DC Machines (rotor winding) Claw-Pole Alternators (stator winding) Generic Rotating Machines Specifying RMxprt Winding Data 8-1 Release 14.5 . In the project tree. open the folder that requires a winding. Inc. . under Machine. for others. Inc. . Machine>Stator>Winding.8 Specifying RMxprt Winding Data To define the winding data for an RMxprt machine 1. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. • • For some machine types this would be Machine>Rotor>Winding. The specific properties available depend on the specific machine. All rights reserved. 2.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. and double-click Winding to open the winding Properties dialog box. 3. Specify the desired settings. Inc. RMxprt can also handle the coils with half turns which are arranged in the order of even. sine-wave threephase winding. Choices differ depending on the motor. Three-phase synchronous motors and generators 4. Winding Types Available for Machines Use the Winding Type dialog to set the Winding type.or double-layer poly-phase ac windings provided all coils have the same number of turns. A Winding Editor selection does not have a graphic. Line Start PM Synchronous Motor (stator winding). Winding Layers. …. Brushless Permanent Magnet DC Motor (stator winding).and small-phase-spread variable-pole multiple-speed winding. and Claw Pole alternator (stator winding) include: • • • Editor . For a double-layer winding. such as compound single. Line-start permanent-magnet synchronous motors 5. big. RMxprt also provides a very flexible tool Winding Editor in order for the users to design a variety of special winding types according to their own needs. Selections for the Three Phase Induction Motor (stator winding) and (rotor winding). Adjustable-speed permanent-magnet synchronous motors and generators 7. Three-phase induction motors 2. . as long as it is physically possible. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Number of Poles.and doublelayer winding. . odd. All rights reserved. The Winding Editor is available to the following types of electric machines: 1.5 .© SAS IP. and Coil Pitch. Single-phase induction motors 3. Claw-pole alternators 6. ThreePhase Synchronous Machine (stator winding) and (rotor winding). Users do not need to define coils one by one. Then you can edit the winding configuration based on the default arrangement. Passing the cursor over the buttons for the Winding types changes the graphic to show the available windings for the motor in the design. Conductors per Slot. Inc.enable the Winding Editor Whole Coiled Half Coiled Selections for the DC Permanent Magnet Motor (rotor winding) and Universal Motor include (stator winding) and (rotor winding): • Lap 8-2 Specifying RMxprt Winding Data Release 14. odd. and so forth. To display the Winding Type dialog double-click on the Winding property button. Brushless permanent-magnet DC motors When you edit the AC winding of a new design for the first time. Number of Slots.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. even. RMxprt creates a default winding arrangement based on the basic winding specifications: Number of Phases.Maxwell 3D Online Help Setting the Winding Type RMxprt can automatically arrange almost all commonly used single. 1. Adjust Speed Synchronous Machine (stator winding). If you select the Editor type. double-click on the button Winding Type value to display the Winding Type selection window. It also enables the Machine>Edit Layout command on the menu bar. . This closes the Winding Type selection window and sets the Winding Type Value to Editor. 2. Now the Machine Editor window displays the default Specifying RMxprt Winding Data 8-3 Release 14. To do this. Select Editor as the Winding Type and click OK.5 .90 deg phase belt 2-layer coil for both single and double layer Sin_1 . Open the Winding Properties window and set the Winding Type value to Editor. This closes the window and sets the Winding Type property.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Inc.second class sinusoidal coil four double layer only The Switched Reluctance motor does not involve winding selections. . It also enables the command Machine>Winding>Edit Layout on the menu bar. 2.enable the Winding Editor Lap .Maxwell 3D Online Help • Wave Selection for the General DC Machines (rotor winding) include: • • • Lap Wave Frogleg Selections for single-phase induction motor include: • • • • Editor . and its subsidiaries and affiliates.© SAS IP. All rights reserved. Select the Winding Type and click OK. Inc. To display the dialog box Winding Editor: 1.first class sinusoidal coil four double layer only Sin_2 . Enable the Winding Editor Setting the Winding Type property to Editor enables the command Machine>Edit Layout on the menu bar. All rights reserved. . Inc. 3.© SAS IP. This displays the dialog box Winding Editor as shown. The dialog box Winding Editor includes functions that do not appear in the tab sheet Winding Editor in the RMxprt Machine Editor window. .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 8-4 Specifying RMxprt Winding Data Release 14. Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.5 . Click Machine>Winding>Edit Layout.Maxwell 3D Online Help winding arrangement. the graphical display in the main window shows the connections. • Machine>Winding>Connect All Coils Upon executing. . All rights reserved. The number of layers selected makes a difference in the display of data in the Winding Editor. Use the drop-down menu in the Winding Layers field to set the number as 1 or 2. Out Slots is for the slot number with the coil side current flowing out ("flow-outside" for short). . The winding data table contains four columns: Phase is for the phase to which the coil belongs. Connecting and Disconnecting Windings When you have specified the winding data. Setting the Number of Winding Layers To set the number of winding layers: 1. you can execute the following commands to automatically connect or disconnect the windings. Open the Winding Properties window by double-clicking on the Winding icon in the properties window. but it is editable in the dialog box Winding Editor. • Machine>Winding>Disconnect All Coils Upon executing.13 is identified with the coil index in the column Coil.Maxwell 3D Online Help 4. Turns is for the number of turns of the coil. Edit Winding Configuration Each row of the winding data table in the dialog box Winding Editor in Figure 3.5 . Inc. If 2 Layers are specified in the Winding Properties window. 2. Related Topics View Winding Connections Specifying RMxprt Winding Data 8-5 Release 14. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. the slot number ends with a "B" to show the bottom layer. In Slots is for the slot number with the coil side current flowing in ('flow-inside' for short). the graphical display in the main window updates to remove the connection. This information is displayed in the tab sheet Winding Editor in the RMxprt Machine Editor window as well. This sets the winding layers used in the winding. the slot number ends with a "T" to show the top layer. If 2 Layers are specified in the Winding Properties window.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.© SAS IP. Inc. The Winding Editor dialog box includes functions that do not appear in the RMxprt main window Winding Editor tab. Enabling the Winding Editor Dialog Setting the Winding Type property to Editor enables the Machine>Edit Layout command on the menu bar. . such as compound single. double-click on the Winding property button to display the Winding Type selection window. The left top part of the Winding Editor tab shows the winding data. This closes the Winding Type window and sets the Winding Type property to Editor. It also enables the Machine>Edit Layout command on the menu bar. To display the Winding Editor dialog: 1. All rights reserved.Maxwell 3D Online Help Poly-phase Winding Editor RMxprt provides a Winding Editor in order for users to design variety of special winding types according to their own needs. Open the Winding Properties window and set the Winding property to Editor. The Winding Editor is available to the following types of electric machines: • • • • • • • • Three-phase Induction Motor Three-phase Synchronous Motor Three-phase Synchronous Generator Permanent-magnet Synchronous Generator Line-start Permanent-magnet Synchronous Motor Adjustable-speed Permanent-magnet Synchronous Motor Brushless Permanent-magnet DC Motor Claw-pole Alternator You input data for Number of Poles in the Machine Properties window and data for the Number of Slots and Slot Type in the Stator Properties window. As long as the edited winding data have been saved.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 3. Right-click on the data table section of the Winding Editor tab of the main window. This displays the Winding Editor dialog. RMxprt automatically arranges the winding layout and display the relevant information that has been specified in the Winding Editor tab of the RMxprt main window. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. You set the Number of Slots in the Winding Properties window. as does the Winding Editor dialog. the total number of rows equals half the number of slots.and smallphase-spread variable-pole multiple-speed winding. Inc. Click Machine>Edit Layout. big. 8-6 Specifying RMxprt Winding Data Release 14. To do this. the Winding Editor tab will display the last saved winding data whenever Winding Editor dialog is launched. and so forth.© SAS IP. b. c. sine-wave three-phase winding. This displays an Edit Layout button. Inc.and double-layer winding. In this area.5 . Select Editor as the Winding Type and click OK. You can also invoke the Winding Editor dialog by: a. . Click the Edit Layout button to display the Winding Editor dialog. 2. and it editable in the Winding Editor dialog. All rights reserved. The Winding Editor dialog also includes three check boxes: • Periodic Multiplier: indicates the possibility to select the number of unit machines for editing winding arrangement. . • Constant Turns. Right click in the Winding Editor tab main window display. By changing the belonging phase in column Phase. the pull-down list box to the right displays the numbers of unit machines for selection. the column Turns in the table is brightened allowing for editing and modifying the number of turns.5 . the number of turns in column Turns. If the check box Constant Turns is unchecked. Column Turns is for the number of turns of coil. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. It has a drop-down menu to show the possible numbers for the periodic multiplier. and all flow-out-side slots as bottom layer. and whole slots are divided into two unit machines. For two-layer windings. Inc. Selecting 2 lists half of the total coils in the table. etc. Specifying RMxprt Winding Data 8-7 Release 14. the flow-out-side slot number in column Out Slot for each coil. Click Edit Layout from the shortcut menu. the slot number ends with a "B" to show the bottom layer. Selecting 1 means whole slots are considered as one unit machine.Maxwell 3D Online Help You can also display the Winding Editor dialog by: a. Checking the check box (multiple choices) Constant Turns indicates that the number of turns keeps constant and the column Turns in the table is grayed (disabled). the flowin-side slot number in column In Slot. If 2 Layers are specified in the Winding Properties window. When the check box Periodic Multiplier: is unchecked. The flow-out-side slot number is automatically computed based on the input in the edit box Coil Pitch in Stator2 page in RMxprt window. • Constant Pitch Checking this box grays the Out Slots column to the values cannot be edited. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. When checked. b. the pull-down list box to the right is grayed (enabled). • • • • Column Phase is for the phase to which the coil belongs. . the slot number ends with a "T" to show the top layer. it is possible to arrange the distribution of coils of single and double layer winding of any type required.© SAS IP. It means that the coil pitch is constant. This information is displayed in the Winding Editor tab in the RMxprt Main window. and all coils is listed in the table of the edit window. all the coils are listed in the table. Column Out Slots is for the slot number with the coil side current flowing out ('flow-out-side' for short). all flow-in-side slots are defined as top layer. Each row of the winding data is identified with coil index in the Coil column. If 2 Layers are specified in the Winding Properties window. Column In Slots is for the slot number with the coil side current flowing in ('flow-in-side' for short). This displays a shortcut menu. and Out Slot column is disabled. Click OK to accept the current values and close the Winding Editor dialog. For instance.Maxwell 3D Online Help When the check box Constant Pitch is unchecked. or with several strands of insulated wires. Coil A coil is wound with several turns. polepitch = totalnumberofslots --------------------------------------------------numberofpoles Coil Set The coils belonging to the same phase under one pole are connected in series as a coil set. Strands A conductor may consist of several wires of same or different sizes stranded together. Inc. all the data in the table resumes to the situation of data when the window Winding Editor was first opened. The linear part of a conductor imbedded into a slot of iron core is termed effective side. if the side of a coil in the 1-st slot spans 8 slots and is connected to the side of the coil in the 9-th slot.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. or resumes to the data that you have saved. However. Coils are generally wound with insulation-wrapped electromagnetic wire continuously on a winding mould. Coil Pitch The number of slots of the armature iron core spanned by the two effective sides of a coil is termed coil pitch. the coil pitch of the coil is y = 8. coils with single-turn for heavy current are often formed with two separate thick conductors. • • • Click the command button Default in the window Winding Editor. Click the command button Reset in the window Winding Editor.5 . A thick conductor is hammered onto the winding mould to form a half-coil. the column Out Slot is enabled to allow arbitrarily changing slot pitch for each coil. usually used in variable-pole multiple-speed machines Pole pitch: distance between two contiguous poles measured in number of slots. The number of strands is also called number of wires per conductor. .© SAS IP. denoted by y. but the current density is uniformly distributed. Full coil pitch: coil pitch = pole pitch Short coil pitch: coil pitch < pole pitch Long coil pitch: coil pitch > pole pitch. The conductor current may not uniformly distribute among all wires. all the data in the table resumes to the situation of data from automatic arrangement by RMxprt. Windings Basic Terminology Conductor A conductor refers to a half turn of a coil. 8-8 Specifying RMxprt Winding Data Release 14. each turn consisting of two conductors. Inc. A conductor may be formed with one insulated wire. All rights reserved. . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. The Winding Editor dialog includes three command buttons. a coil is wound with a number of turns. All rights reserved. a winding may be connected with several branches in parallel.© SAS IP.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.5 . A phase may consist of several branches connected in parallel. Every branch must produce exactly the same back emf and must have the same resistance. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.Maxwell 3D Online Help Winding The coils or coil sets of a phase are connected according to certain rules to form a phase winding. a conductor may be stranded by one or more same. In summary. Poly Phase AC Winding The common armature winding of poly-phase ac machines is catalogued and classified as shown in the following table. As a result. a turn is formed by two conductors. Inc. each branch consists of one or more coil sets connected in series. Inc.or different-size wires. . Polyphase AC Winding Double layer Variable-pole multiple speed type Fractional slot number type Wave-type Concentric type Lap Type Single Layer Crossed Concentric type (whole coiled or half coiled) Crossed Chain-type (whole coiled or half coiled) Concentric type (whole coiled or half coiled) Lap-type (whole coiled or half coiled) Chain-type (whole coiled or half coiled) Compound layer Specifying RMxprt Winding Data 8-9 Release 14. . the phase winding current is uniformly distributed among all branches. a coil set may have several series coils. You set the number of winding layers in the Winding properties window. Coil pitch depends on the connection. this type is characterized by • • • Number of coils halved.Maxwell 3D Online Help Whole-coiled Windings When the coils of an AC winding are connected so that there are as many coil sets per phase as there are poles. the winding is called "whole-coiled. 8-10 Specifying RMxprt Winding Data Release 14. . the winding is called "half-coiled. Comparing to double-layer type. Inc. No need for insulation between layers. All rights reserved.© SAS IP. Winding tab. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. and is not adjustable.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. .5 ." Whole Coiled Single Layer Whole Coiled Double Layer Half-coiled Windings When the coils are connected so that there is only one coil set per phase per pair of poles. Inc. therefore higher slot filling factor." Half Coiled Single Layer Half Coiled Double Layer Single-Layer Windings All the conductors in one slot are connected in series with all the conductors in another slot to form a single-layer coil. © SAS IP.5 . concentric. According to different layouts of the end winding. every coil set has only one coil. Chain-type Windings The name single-layer chain-type is from the linked chain-like developed winding diagram. Inc.and crossed-types. Half-coiled Chain-type Winding An example of three-phase 6-pole 18-slot single-layer half-coiled chain-type winding is shown in the following figure. All rights reserved. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Specifying RMxprt Winding Data 8-11 Release 14. .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Inc. For a chain-type winding. lap-. single-layer windings are classified as chain-. .Maxwell 3D Online Help • Being widely used in small capacity electric machines. at least one coil set has 2 or more coils which are overlapped each other. this winding type is also called "crossed lap-type".5 . 8-12 Specifying RMxprt Winding Data Release 14. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . .© SAS IP.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Inc. Inc. All rights reserved. In a lap-type winding. If some coil sets have only one coil.Maxwell 3D Online Help Whole-coiled Chain-type Winding An example of three-phase 4-pole 24-slot single-layer whole-coiled chain-type winding is shown in the following figure. Lap-type Windings The name single-layer lap-type is from the lapped layout of end connection. Maxwell 3D Online Help Half-coiled Lap-type Winding An example of three-phase 4-pole 24-slot single-layer half-coiled lap-type winding is shown in the figure on the left. All rights reserved. and an example of three-phase 8-pole 36-slot single-layer half-coiled crossed laptype windings is shown in the following figure on the right. Inc.© SAS IP.5 . and an example of three-phase 4-pole 36-slot single-layer whole-coiled crossed lap-type winding is shown on the right1 Specifying RMxprt Winding Data 8-13 Release 14. . and its subsidiaries and affiliates.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Inc. Whole-coiled Lap-type Winding An example of three-phase 4-pole 48-slot single-layer whole-coiled lap-type winding is shown on the left. . 8-14 Specifying RMxprt Winding Data Release 14.© SAS IP.Maxwell 3D Online Help Concentric-type Windings In a concentric-type winding. . this winding type is also called "crossed concentrictype".5 . the end magnetic leakage is a bit bigger. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. All rights reserved. Inc. but with the same central line and of concentric-circle-like. Nevertheless. and therefore is convenient to imbed into slots. . Inc. If some coil sets have only one coil. at least one coil set has 2 or more coils and non coils are overlapped each other.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. therefore is named concentric-type. Half-coiled Concentric-type Winding An example of three-phase 4-pole 24-slot single-layer half-coiled concentric-type winding is shown on the left. Its end connection can be arranged in layers. The single-layer concentric-type is formed of coils with different coil pitch. and an example of three-phase 8-pole 36-slot single-layer half-coiled crossed concentric-type winding is shown on the right. Adjustable coil pitch.© SAS IP. . the double-layer winding is whole-coiled in high speed. Inc. Winding tab. Double-Layer Windings In this type.and wave-types. You set the number of winding layers in the Winding properties window. Specifying RMxprt Winding Data 8-15 Release 14. this type is characterized by: • • • • Number of coils doubled.Maxwell 3D Online Help Whole-coiled Concentric-type Winding An example of three-phase 4-pole 48-slot single-layer whole-coiled concentric-type winding is shown on the left. the conductors in a slot are arranged in upper and lower layers. Need for insulation between layers. half-coiled in low speed. For the single speed electric machine. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. and an example of three-phase 4-pole 36-slot single-layer whole-coiled crossed concentric-type winding is shown on the right. therefore possible weakening of harmonic emfs with proper short pitch factor to improve electromagnetic properties of electric machines. Being widely used in electric machines with capacity over 10 kW. and danger in electric breakdown between phases. One side of each coil is imbedded in the upper layer in one slot and the other side is imbedded in the lower layer in another slot. Inc. According to different coil shapes. For the double speed electric machine with doubling number of poles. concentric. Comparing to single-layer-type.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. therefore lower slot filling factor. double-layer windings are classified as lap-.5 . the double-layer winding typically adopts whole-coiled type. All rights reserved. . Maxwell 3D Online Help Double-layer Lap-type Winding An example of three-phase 4-pole 24-slot whole-coiled double-layer lap-type windings (short pitch y = 5) is shown below. Inc. .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.5 .© SAS IP. Inc. 8-16 Specifying RMxprt Winding Data Release 14. . Double-layer Concentric-type Winding An example of three-phase 4-pole 24-slot whole-coiled double-layer concentric-type windings (short pitch y = 5) is shown below. All rights reserved. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. Compared to lap-type: • • • The winding of each phase connects the coils under different poles in series in one round.© SAS IP. . An example of three-phase 6-pole 45-slot fractional-pitch double-layer winding Specifying RMxprt Winding Data 8-17 Release 14.Maxwell 3D Online Help Double-layer Wave-type Winding The name double-layer wave-type is from the wave-like developed winding diagram as shown below. and so on so forth until all the coils belonging to this phase are connected. which is defined as q= total number of slots number of poles × number of phases A fractional-pitch winding has a fractional number q = b c d .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. All rights reserved. . Inc. called number of slots per pole per phase. This type needs less connection wire between poles. This type is usually used in single-turn preformed hard coil for low voltage high current electric machines. Fractional-Pitch Winding First.5 . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. and returns to the left to the first coil. introduce a number q. then winds the next round. 5 .Maxwell 3D Online Help 1 ( q=2 2 . Auto-arrangement of AC Windings RMxprt can arrange these windings automatically if all coils have the same number of turns. which can be expressed with unit vector. as described in the next section. . short pitch y = 7. Star Vector Diagram The conductors (or coils) in slots produce emf (or mmf). the angular phase difference in electric degrees between two contiguous slots is α= p × 180 ° Z 8-18 Specifying RMxprt Winding Data Release 14. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. the winding can be defined by winding editor. and number of slots Z. If a concentric-type layout display is desired.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.© SAS IP. pole pitch τ =7 1 2 ) is shown here. When the electric machine has number of pole p. This section describes the process to automatically arrange the coil distribution. All rights reserved.For winding layout display in RMxprt. . Inc. The wave-type winding is effective to a lap-type winding. the lap-type is default if windings are automatically arranged. and is also displayed as a lap-type winding. Inc. For the whole-pitch winding electric machine (q. is an integer). the angular phase difference between two contiguous vectors is 360 ° α= Z0 and the difference between the ordinal numbers of the slots of two contiguous vectors is m(bd + c )G − 1 y0 = d where G is a minimum integer to make y0 equal to an integer (y0 should take into account the possible reverse connection of coils under the contiguous pole).5 . Inc. If t > 1.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. c Z q= =b+ d mp where m is the number of phases. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.e. then Z0 and p0 construct a complete star vector diagram and form a unit electric machine. as shown later. All rights reserved. For the fractionalpitch winding electric machine. . t = p/2.Maxwell 3D Online Help Drawing the vectors of emfs (or mmfs) in all the slots according to their phase angles forms the star vector diagram of the winding. i. the star vector diagram repeats t times. Specifying RMxprt Winding Data 8-19 Release 14. the winding has t periods. Let Z Z0 = t . The figure below shows an example of the star vector diagram of 4pole 24-slot winding. and p0 = p t . If there exists the greatest common factor t between the number of slots Z and the number of pole pairs pp (= p/2).© SAS IP. . 6. the phase spread is 180°/m (m – the number of phases). When the number of phases is an odd number of greater than or equal to 3. Inc. Therefore. –C. –B. . the phase spread can be either 360°/m or 180°/m. the range occupied by the vectors of each phase under one pole is termed phase spread. …) can take only the double-layer half-coiled winding type. C. where the phase spread with negative sign is termed negative phase spread.5 . Then divide the whole region (360 electric degrees) to several phase spreads. the width of phase spread is 180o / 3 = 60o. For whole-coiled winding. Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. B. Finally. expressed in electric degrees or number of slots. the sequence of the phase spread is A. Coil Arrangement Coil arrangement is completed by the following processes. a winding with odd number of phases (3. The phase spread of a double-layer half-coiled winding is 360°/m. When the number of phases is an even number of greater than or equal to 4. For a single-layer winding. and the phase spread of a double-layer full-coiled winding is 180°/m. . a winding with even number of phases (4. B. Double-layer Windings Take a three-phase winding as an example. –A. The phase spread of a 2-phase winding is always 90° (= 180°/m).Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. the sequence of phase spread is A. Therefore. All rights reserved. draw the star vector diagram based on number of slots and number of poles.Maxwell 3D Online Help Phase Spread In the star vector diagram of a unit electric machine. …) can take any winding types. 5. First. The width of phase spread of half-coiled winding is 360o / 3 = 120o.© SAS IP. assign all phase spreads to each phase in such a way that the axis of each succeeded phase lags by 360/m electric degrees (90 electric degrees for 2 phases). which is derived from the number of phases and the winding type. C. 8-20 Specifying RMxprt Winding Data Release 14. The windings for single-phase induction motor are also considered as 2-phase windings. a 2-phase winding cannot take the double-layer half-coiled winding type. Therefore. the phase spread is always 360°/m. Inc. The star vector diagram of a three-phase whole-coiled (60o-phase-spread) winding is shown below on the left.Maxwell 3D Online Help The winding types can be set in the Winding Type panel for a machine that includes these options (in this case. All rights reserved. for double-layer whole-coiled windings as shown in on the left and double-layer half-coiled windings as shown on the right. a brushless permanent magnetic DC motor).Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. .5 . Specifying RMxprt Winding Data 8-21 Release 14. . Inc. and that of a half-coiled (120o phase spread) winding is shown below on the right.© SAS IP. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . All rights reserved. the numbers of slots occupied by phase spread are not all the same. Inc. In each d poles. Fractional-pitch Windings The number of slots per pole per phase of fractional-pitch winding is a mixed number.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. and the star vector diagram is the same as the double-layer whole-coiled winding. but repeat with the radix d. there are c poles with the slot number of phase spread equal to b + 1 (big phase spread). The phase spread of a three-phase single-layer whole-coiled or half-coiled winding is 60o. q=b Take as an example a three-phase 10-pole 36-slot fractional-pitch winding with phase spread of 60°. Inc. for single-layer wholecoiled windings as shown on the left and single-layer half-coiled windings as shown on the right.5 . c d In the unit electric machine.© SAS IP. d – c poles with the slot number of phase spread equal to b (small phase spread).Maxwell 3D Online Help Single-layer Windings The winding layers can be set in the properties window for the winding. . The number of slots per pole per phase of fractional-pitch winding is q= 36 1 =1 3 × 10 5 8-22 Specifying RMxprt Winding Data Release 14. In each 5 pole region. The repeating format is 2 1 1 1 1 for phase A. . each phase has big phase spread of 1 + 1 = 2 slots under 1 pole.5 . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. Inc. Asymmetric Windings Whole-pitch windings (q is integer) are always symmetric. the angular phase difference between two contiguous vectors in the star vector diagram is 360 o = 10 o 36 the difference between the ordinal numbers of the slots of two contiguous vectors is (G = 2) α= 3(1 × 5 + 1) × 2 − 1 =7 5 the repetition radix d = 5.© SAS IP. The repetition of phase spread distribution for all phases is shown in the following table. Fractional-pitch windings with c q=b d Specifying RMxprt Winding Data 8-23 Release 14. . All rights reserved. y0 = Slot number Phase spread Slot number Phase spread 1~2 A 19~20 –A 3 –C 21 C 4 B 22 –B 5 –A 23 A 6 C 24 –C 7~8 –B 25 B 9 A 27 –A 10 –C 28 C 11 B 29 –B 12 –A 30 A 13~14 C 31 –C 15 –B 33 B 16 A 34 –A 17 –C 35 C 18 B 36 –B The star vector diagram of winding is shown below.Maxwell 3D Online Help the greatest common factor between the number of slots 36 and the number of pole pairs 5 is t = 1. and small phase spread of 1 slot under 4 poles.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 954119 Phase C 0. but the total number of slots Z can be divided by m.949042 The angles between two-phase winding axes are: Phase A & B 119. it is avoid using asymmetric windings as possible.459 If a sinusoidal rotating field links the winding. The winding factors of each phase are: Phase A 0. If d is a multiple of the number of phases m.639823% 8-24 Specifying RMxprt Winding Data Release 14. Since 66 2 =3 3×6 3 d = m = 3.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.082 Phase B & C 120. Take as an example a three-phase 6-pole 66-slot fractional-pitch winding electric machine. In general. For asymmetric windings. Inc. it is possible to construct poly-phase winding with little asymmetry.5 . The output in the window Design Output is shown below.459 Phase C & A 120. Nevertheless. .286577% Zero-sequence component 0. Y and Z stands for –A. additional information is output. the fundamental induced-voltage components will be: Positive-sequence component 100% Negative-sequence component 0. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. q= The information for WINDING ARRANGEMENT is displayed as follows: The distribution of coil slots to phases: The 3-phase. respectively. -B and –C. it is sometime possible to design polyphase windings with little asymmetry in order to use existing punching tools.954119 Phase B 0.© SAS IP. the winding is asymmetric.Maxwell 3D Online Help becomes asymmetric if the denominator d is a multiple of the number of phases m. 2-layer winding can be arranged in 66 slots as below: AAAAZZZZBBBXXXXCCCCYYYAAAZZZZBBBBXXXCCCCYYYYAAAAZZZBBBBXXXXCCCYYYY X. . RMxprt can perform automatic arrangement for this sort of windings and obtain the phase-spread in electric degrees for each phase. as shown below. Inc. All rights reserved. 5 . For the lap type connection. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . Connect all coils in phase spread of A in positive direction.Maxwell 3D Online Help Coil Connections Connection of Double-layer Lap Windings Every vector represents the top-layer effective side of a coil. Connection of Single-layer Half-coiled Windings Every vector in A. . all coils Specifying RMxprt Winding Data 8-25 Release 14. phase B and C windings can also be connected. –B and –C phase spread. Inc. and is not displayed in the diagrams. In this way. The bottom effective side of the coil is determined based on the coil pitch. All rights reserved. Therefore.© SAS IP.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. the "return" effective side of the coil is located in –A. Inc. every vector in the diagrams can also stand for a coil. B and C phase spread represents "go" effective side of a coil. and all coils in phase spread of –A in negative direction to form the phase A winding. The winding connection layouts for the vector diagrams are shown below. The connection layouts of the lap type and the concentric type. In this way. all coils of phase A winding have coil pitch of 5. the winding becomes single-layer whole-coiled type with the same star vector diagram and phase spread. All rights reserved. for the concentric type (lower right in the diagram). but connected from slot 1 to slot 20.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Inc. and slot 8 to slot 13. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.© SAS IP. Inc.5 . if coil 1 is not connected from slot 1 to slot 8 (long coil pitch: coil pitch = 7 > pole pitch = 6). single-layer whole-coiled windings consume less electromagnetic wire than single-layer half-coiled windings. 8-26 Specifying RMxprt Winding Data Release 14. Therefore. Connection of Single-layer Whole-coiled Windings In the previous example. RMxprt can optimize connections to minimize the average coil pitch to form a single-layer whole-coiled winding. .Maxwell 3D Online Help are with full coil pitch. and has much shorter average coil pitch. . with respect to the same vector drawing are shown below. A star vector diagram with fractional coil pitch can also be connected with single-layer wholecoiled type. as shown in the following vector diagram. Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. When the number of slots per pole per phase q <2. An example of three-phase 4-pole 36-slot single-layer whole-coiled crossed concentric-type winding (q = 3.Maxwell 3D Online Help An example of three-phase 4-pole 36-slot single-layer whole-coiled crossed lap-type winding (q = 3. 60o phase-spread) is shown below. All rights reserved. the number of coil sets per phase may not equal to the number of poles (6 coils vs 10 Specifying RMxprt Winding Data 8-27 Release 14. Inc. 60o phase-spread) is shown below. .5 . .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.© SAS IP. The winding connection layout for the previous vector diagram is shown below. All rights reserved.5 . Inc.Maxwell 3D Online Help poles). it is still referred as whole coiled windings. 8-28 Specifying RMxprt Winding Data Release 14. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. .© SAS IP. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. and therefore. . but the algorithm to connect coils is the same (minimize the average coil pitch). Inc. .© SAS IP.Maxwell 3D Online Help Another example is an asymmetric three-phase winding. . The arrangement of coils is shown in the Table and in the following figure.and concentric-types. Specifying RMxprt Winding Data 8-29 Release 14. Connection of Double-pole Dual-speed Windings Commonly used for coils of double-layer windings are lap. The connection layout is shown below.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Double-pole dual-speed electric machine is connected as double-layer whole-coiled winding at high speed and as double-layer half-coiled winding at low speed. Inc. Single-speed double-layer winding electric machine is usually connected as whole-coiled winding.5 . All rights reserved. Take as an example a three-phase dual-speed 2/4-pole 24-slot double-layer winding. Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. . On the top-left is the 2pole 2Y-connection at high speed. Inc.© SAS IP. All rights reserved. on the top-right is the 4-pole -connection at low speed.5 . . Inc. 8-30 Specifying RMxprt Winding Data Release 14.Maxwell 3D Online Help Slot number Two poles Four poles 1 A A 2 A A 3 A A 4 A A 5 –C C 6 –C C 7 –C C 8 –C C 9 B B 10 B B 11 B B 12 B B Slot number Two poles Four poles 13 –A A 14 –A A 15 –A A 16 –A A 17 C C 18 C C 19 C C 20 C C 21 –B B 22 –B B 23 –B B 24 –B B The connection for variation of number of poles is shown in the next figure. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . Inc.© SAS IP.Maxwell 3D Online Help DC Windings Lap Winding The winding layout of a lap-type winding for dc machines is as shown below.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.5 . Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. A lap-type winding has the following relationships: Coil pitch y1 = Z  ε = integer p Commutator pitch yk = ± m Number of branches in parallel a = mp where Z number of slots p number of poles m number of multiplex Specifying RMxprt Winding Data 8-31 Release 14. . All rights reserved. All rights reserved. the number of branches in parallel of the wave winding has to be the same as that of the lap winding. or the multi- 8-32 Specifying RMxprt Winding Data Release 14. A wave-type winding has the following relationships: Coil pitch y1 = Z  ε = integer p yK = Km = integer p/2 Commutator pitch a=m Number of branches in parallel Frog-leg Winding A frog-leg winding consists of a lap winding and a wave winding. Inc. In order to connect the wave winding in parallel with the lap winding. .5 .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. . Inc. Assume the lap winding has m multiplex number. the wave winding should have the same branch bake emf as the lap winding.© SAS IP. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Therefore.Maxwell 3D Online Help Wave Winding The winding layout of a wave-type winding for dc machines is as shown below. All rights reserved.5 .© SAS IP. . The winding layout of a frog-leg-type winding with m=1 for dc machines is as shown below. Inc. .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. A frog-leg-type winding has the following relationships: Coil pitch y1a + y1b = Commutator pitch 2K = integer p y Ka + y Kb = 2K = integer p yKa = ±m y Kb = 2K m p Number of a = pm branch in parallel where m number of multiplex (of the lap winding) Specifying RMxprt Winding Data 8-33 Release 14.Maxwell 3D Online Help plex number of the wave winding must be mp/2. The connection pitch of equipotential connector Class B of multiplex-wave winding yp is equal to the number of commutator segments per branch pair in parallel. No need for Equipotential Connector for Simplex-wave Winding Simplex-wave winding does not possess electrically equipotential points. Therefore. Equipotential Connectors The points ideally possessing the same electric potential in armature winding are often wholly or partly connected by short copper wire. can not have equipotential connector. K K yp = = = integer p a Winding with yp = integer is termed symmetric winding. which is termed equipotential connector.5 . This is termed equipotential connector Class B. All rights reserved. often a number of coil sides are imbedded into one slot for simplification of structure. causes circulating current in lap winding. the number of slots Z is less than the number of coils S. . There exists the relationship S Z= μ where μ is the number of coil sides in each layer in one slot and is termed virtual slot factor. The connection pitch of equipotential connector Class A of simplex-lap winding yp is equal to the number of commutator segments per pole pair. Inc. Only symmetric winding can have equipotential connector Class A. the number of conductors per slots is equal to multiple of 2μ. equipotential connector Class B is needed among different sets of simplex-lap windings. therefore. increases losses and affects commutation in order. Therefore. In many cases. On the other hand. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc.Maxwell 3D Online Help Virtual Slots Windings of the dc machine are usually double-layer type. such as eccentric air-gap. Equipotential Connector Class B of Multiplex-wave Winding There are electric equipotential points among different sets of simplex-wave windings of multiplex-wave winding. simplex-wave winding does not need equipotential connector. Equipotential Connector Class A of Simplex-lap Winding Asymmetry in magnetic circuit.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. .© SAS IP. yp = K = integer a Equipotential Connector of Multiplex-lap Winding For multiplex-lap winding. equipotential connector Class A is needed for each set of simplex-lap windings. The equipotential connector Class A on the commutator of simplex-lap winding can solve this problem. There exist no electrically equipotential points among different sets of simplex-lap windings on the 8-34 Specifying RMxprt Winding Data Release 14. They can be connected to eliminate the nonuniform distribution of electric potential on commutator segments due to inequality of brush resistances. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. however.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Therefore there is no need for extra equipotential connectors. each pair of electrically equipotential points on commutator is connected by a lap coil and a wave coil in series. .Maxwell 3D Online Help commutator side of armature. All rights reserved. Inc. No Need for Equipotential Connector for Frog-leg Winding For frog-leg winding. Those points can be connected by conductors passing through inside armature. Inc. The connection acts as equipotential connector Class A for lap winding and as equipotential connector Class B for wave winding. Pole Windings The following two types of electric machines possess similar pole winding structure: • • DC machine (motor and generator) Three-phase synchronous machine (motor and generator) Specifying RMxprt Winding Data 8-35 Release 14.© SAS IP.5 . there exist electrically equipotential points among different sets of simplex-lap windings on different sides of armature as points A and B in the figure below. . 8-36 Specifying RMxprt Winding Data Release 14. Edgewise Coil pole winding with rectangular wire wound in flatting way. All rights reserved.5 . Inc. There are three types of structure as shown in the figure below: Round Wire pole winding with round wire. . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Cylinder Coil pole winding with rectangular wire wound in standing way.© SAS IP.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Inc.Maxwell 3D Online Help RMxprt adopts the same arrangement procedure for pole windings of the two types of electric machines. . © SAS IP.Maxwell 3D Online Help Limited Space for Wire Arrangement Before completing a winding arrangement. If either Overall Height or Overall Width is set to 0. Overall Width and Winding Clearance can be input from RMxprt panel. Overall Height Winding Clearance Overall Width Overall Height. Inc. a message of "The rotor/shunt/series/commutating winding control dimension is not big enough. . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. RMxprt needs to determine the limited space sizes for the winding. If the space from input or determined by space optimization is not sufficient to arrange for the input number of turns per pole. The limited sizes include: limited Overall Height.5 . Specifying RMxprt Winding Data 8-37 Release 14. . RMxprt perform automatic space optimization to obtain the maximum space for pole winding arrangement in the condition to guarantee the clearance between pole windings.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS." is displayed in Design Output window. Inc. as shown below. limited Overall Width and Winding Clearance (the clearance between two adjacent pole windings). All rights reserved. Maxwell 3D Online Help Round Wire Winding The arrangement of pole winding with round wire is shown below. With auto-arrangement of pole windings. Inc. .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. minimum number of layers. and so forth. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . All rights reserved.© SAS IP. minimum number of turns per layer.5 . and the maximum number of turns per pole that is available from the limited space. maximum number of turns per layer. Inc. RMxprt calculates maximum number of layers. 8-38 Specifying RMxprt Winding Data Release 14. © SAS IP. Specifying RMxprt Winding Data 8-39 Release 14. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Inc.5 . Inc. The cylinder coil is wound with half-turn over lapped layer by layer. Layers with the same number of turns constitute a section. All rights reserved. The output window Design Output displays the number of layers and the number of turns per layer of each section. and the maximum number of turns per pole that is available from the limited space.Maxwell 3D Online Help Cylinder Coil The arrangement of magnetic-pole winding with rectangular wire wound in standing way by RMxprt is shown below. . and the maximum number of turns per pole that is available from the limited space. . Inc.5 . The turns with the same wire gauge constitute a section (maximum three sections are allowed). The output window Design Output displays the number of turns of each section and the sizes of wire gauge. To guarantee the clearance between two adjacent pole windings. the wire width of the lower parts is decreased. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.Maxwell 3D Online Help Edgewise Coil The arrangement of magnetic-pole winding with rectangular wire wound in flatting way by RMxprt is shown below. a half turn may be included due to too few turns per pole. Pole Winding with Half Turns For some large machines. . When the number of turns per pole is an integer number.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. All rights reserved. the number of conductors per pole is an even number 8-40 Specifying RMxprt Winding Data Release 14. Inc. while the wire thickness is increased to keep the sectional area of wire invariant as possible.© SAS IP. 5 . as shown below. Inc.© SAS IP. the number of conductors per pole is an odd number.Maxwell 3D Online Help with equal conductor number at both pole sides. and the two terminal leads of one pole coil are at different axial sides (or at the same pole side). Inc. the two terminal leads of one pole coil are at the same axial side (or at different pole sides). . Therefore. . All rights reserved. one pole side has one more conductor than the other pole side. as shown below.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. When the number of turns per pole includes a half turn. In this case. Specifying RMxprt Winding Data 8-41 Release 14. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 3. Note The winding must be editable for the Export Layout command to be available. Browse to the location to save the file and enter a filename. . If you are using a standard winding. Click on the winding in the Project Tree window. . 2. click on the button next to Winding Type.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.5 . Select the Machine>Winding>Export Layout command from the menu. All rights reserved. 8-42 Specifying RMxprt Winding Data Release 14.© SAS IP. Inc. Click Save to export the winding data to a file and dismiss the dialog. 2. 3. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. In the Properties Window. Inc. The Winding Type dialog is displayed. You may also rightclick in the Winding Editor window and select Export Layout from the shortcut menu. Select Editor as the winding type and click OK. you can switch to the Winding Editor by: 1.Maxwell 3D Online Help Exporting Winding Data Winding data may be export to a table: 1. Inc. .9 RMxprt Machine Types Using RMxprt. Inc. .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. All rights reserved.© SAS IP.5 . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. you can simulate and analyze the following thirteen machine types: • • • • • • • • • • • • • Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machine Brushless Permanent-Magnet DC Motor Claw-Pole Alternator General DC Machine Generic Rotating Machine Line-Start Permanent-Magnet Synchronous Motor Permanent-Magnet DC Motor Single-Phase Induction Motor Switched Reluctance Motor Three-Phase Induction Motor Three-Phase Non-Salient Synchronous Machine Three-Phase Synchronous Machine Universal Motor RMxprt Machine Types 9-1 Release 14. which acts on the rotor in the direction of the rotation of the field in the air gap.Maxwell 3D Online Help Three-Phase Induction Motors After you have selected Three-Phase Induction Motors as your model type. The parameters in the equivalent circuit are dependent on the stator and rotor currents. you must define the following: • • • • General data. as shown in Figure 2. Inc. A torque of equal value acts upon the stator in the opposite direction. and ventage holes. Rotor data.5 . The two rotating fields produce a resultant rotating magnetic field in the air gap of the machine. In this case. the stator winding (with a sinusoidal spatial distribution and p pairs of poles) is connected to a three-phase symmetric voltage power supply. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. and the winding has p pairs of poles. The resulting currents in the stator produce a rotating magnetic field. Due to the saturation of the leakage field. Solution data. end-ring leakage reactance. X2 and R2 are the equivalent values from a distributed-parameter circuit.© SAS IP. has p coils. Stator data. The stator winding. In the figure. a second rotating magnetic field. . which consists of stator slot leakage reactance. skew. The performance of three-phase induction motors (IndM3) is analyzed based on the equivalent circuit of one phase in the frequency domain as shown in Figure 1. each with a symmetric spatial distribution and an opening of πD/2p. Inc. By option. speed. and materials. X1 and X2 are nonlinear. The rotor winding is often a squirrel cage type with the number of poles dictated by the number of poles in the stator. The interaction of this field in the air gap with the rotor bar currents produces an electromagnetic torque. and skewing leakage reactance. where D is the diameter of the winding. Currents are induced in the rotor bars and produce. diameter. which is connected to a phase of the supply system. Analysis Approach for Three-Phase Induction Motors For a three-phase induction motor. All rights reserved. and differential leakage reactance. and wire dimensions. the magnetic field in the air gap has p periods. respectively. such as the slot types. such as the voltage. 9-2 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. differential leakage reactance. X2 and R2 are rotor leakage reactance and rotor resistance. X1 is stator leakage reactance. X2 includes rotor slot leakage reactance. Due to the skin effects.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. such as the slot dimensions. . R1 is the stator resistance. end-winding leakage reactance. you can add vents to and remove an existing vent from the stator and rotor. in turn. such as rated output voltage and frequency. Inc. . Figure 1 Figure 2 In the exciting branch. and Ps are frictional and wind loss. respectively. which has been referred to the stator. The output power is: P2 = T2 * ω 2 where ω 2 = ω * (1 . is computed by the following: Pm = 3 * I2^2 * R2/s The electromagnetic torque Tm is: Tm = Pm/ ω where w is the synchronous speed in rad/s. and stray loss. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. After a phase voltage U1 is applied to the phase terminals. .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Xm is a linearized nonlinear parameter that varies with the saturation of the main field.Maxwell 3D Online Help They vary with the rotor slip s. The output mechanical shaft torque T2 is: T2 = Tm . Xm is the magnetizing reactance. can be easily computed by the circuit analysis. Pcu1. PFe.© SAS IP. The input power is: P1 = P2 + Pfw + Pcu2 + PFe + Pcu1 + Ps where Pfw. All rights reserved. stator phase current I1 and rotor current I2. Pcu2. All rotor parameters have been referred to the stator side. The electromagnetic power Pm.s) and is rotor speed in rad/s.Tfw where Tfw is the frictional and wind torque. The power factor is derived from: PF = P1/(m * U1 * I1) The efficiency is computed by: eff = P2/P1 * 100% RMxprt Machine Types 9-3 Release 14. stator copper loss. Inc. and RFe is the resistance corresponding to iron-core losses. rotor copper loss. iron-core loss.5 . or air-gap power. . 2. 4. 10. To define the general data: 1. ventage hole dimensions. Double-click the Machine-Rotor entry in the project tree to define the rotor geometry. Please refer to the Three-Phase Induction Motor Problem application note.Maxwell 3D Online Help Defining a Three-Phase Induction Motor The general procedure for defining a three-phase induction motor is as follows: 1. This value is the total number of poles in the stator (or the number of pole pairs multiplied by two). the model can be viewed in the Maxwell 2D Modeler. such as the number of poles and machine losses. such as the number of poles. 7. Double-click the Machine-Shaft entry in the project tree to define the magnetism of the shaft. Double-click the Machine-Rotor-Winding entry in the project tree to define the rotor conductor.5 . and a new Maxwell 3D design. double-click the Machine entry in the project tree on the desktop.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.© SAS IP. Note When you place the cursor over an entry field in the data windows. on the technical support page of the ANSYS web site. Once the design is analyzed. a brief description of that field appears in the status bar at the bottom of the RMxprt window. and click Add Solution Setup to define the solution data. Double-click the Machine-Stator-Winding entry in the project tree to define the stator windings and conductors. Enter the number of poles for the machine in the Number of Poles field. Right-click Analysis in the project tree. Insert a three-phase induction motor into an existing or new project. or it can be used to create a new Maxwell 2D project. Choose RMxprt>Analyze to analyze the design. Double-click the Machine-Rotor-Slot entry in the project tree to define the rotor slot dimensions. All rights reserved. 5. 12. Inc.) 2. Choose File>Save to save the project. . 3. Defining the General Data for a Three Phase Induction Motor Use the General Data Properties window to define the basic parameters of the induction motor. Double-click the Machine-Stator entry in the project tree to define the stator geometry. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. Double-click the Machine-Stator-Slot entry in the project tree to define the stator slot dimensions. for a specific example of a three-phase induction motor problem. 3. 11. and skew. 9. The stray load loss consists of the losses arising from non-uniform current distribution in the copper and additional core losses 9-4 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. 8. and frictional loss. Double-click the Machine entry in the project tree to define the general data. Inc. 6. To open the General Data Properties window. Enter the stray loss factor in the Stray Loss Factor field. slot data. Enter the Inner Diameter of the stator. Frictional Loss The frictional energy loss (due to friction) measured at the reference speed. 6.Maxwell 3D Online Help produced in the iron by distortion of the magnetic flux by the load current.) 2. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. All rights reserved. 3. Click OK to close the Properties window.2% Enter the energy loss due to friction at the given speed in the Frictional Loss field. double-click the Machine>Stator entry in the project tree on the desktop. Inc. Enter the length of the stator core in the Length field.8% of rated output power 2) 126-500 HP = 1. General Data for Three-Phase Induction Motors To access the general data. double-click Machine>Stator. Enter the wind loss due to air resistance measured at the reference speed in the Wind Loss field. Select a Steel Type for the stator core: RMxprt Machine Types 9-5 Release 14. Machine Type Defining the Stator Data for a Three-Phase Induction Motor The stator is the outer lamination stack where the three-phase windings reside. Stray Loss Factor The stray loss factor: the ratio of stray loss to rated output power. Enter the Outer Diameter of the stator.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. and conductors for the stator. and Machine-Stator-Winding to define the physical dimensions. 4. wires. Machine-Stator-Slot.© SAS IP. To open the Stator Data Properties window. 5. TTo define general stator data: 1. . . double-click the Machine entry in the project tree. 1) 1-125 HP = 1.5 . Reference Speed The given speed of reference. Number of Poles The number of poles the machine contains. 7. Enter the given speed in the Reference Speed field. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. Inc. Wind Loss The wind loss (due to air resistance) measured at the reference speed.5% 3) 501-2499 HP = 1. In the project tree. The General Data Properties window for a three-phase induction motor contains the following fields: The machine type you selected when inserting a new RMxprt design (Three Phase Induction Motor). The IEEE Standard provides different assumed stray load loss values for AC motors rated less than 2500 hp. 6. Enter the stacking factor for the stator core in the Stacking Factor field. 5. as follows: • • • 4. The steel type of the stator core. . The Select Definition window appears. Enter the thickness of the magnetic end pressboard in the Pressboard Thickness field.Maxwell 3D Online Help a.© SAS IP. Click OK to close the Select Slot Type window and return to the Properties window. Enter the Number of Slots in the stator. a schematic of the selected type appears.5 . 11. The type of slots in the stator core. The number of slots the stator core contains. Click OK to close the Properties window. check User Defined Slot if you wish to define the slot dimensions using the Slot Editor. Select a steel type from the list. 7. Enter 0 for a non-magnetic end pressboard. b. The inner diameter of the stator core. 9-6 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. The Select Slot Type window appears. Click the button for Steel Type. c. The Stator Data Properties window contains the following fields: Outer Diameter Inner Diameter Length Stacking Factor Steel Type Number of Slots Slot Type Lamination Sectors Pressboard Thickness Skew Width The outer diameter of the stator core. Click the button for the Slot Type. 8. Stator Data for Three-Phase Induction Motors To access the general stator data. The number of lamination sectors. The length of the stator core. Click the button to open the Select Definition window. The skew width measured in slot number. Click the button to open the Select Slot Type window. Enter the skew width. 12. . Inc. 9. double-click the Machine>Stator entry in the project tree. Inc. Optionally. c. When you place the mouse cursor over the slot type. Note Select a slot type (available types include 1 through 4).Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 10. b. displaying the slot dimension variables. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. All rights reserved. Select the Slot Type: a. in the Skew Width field. measured in slot number. Enter the number of sectors in the Lamination Sectors field. or define a new steel type. Click OK to close the Select Definition window and return to the Properties window. The magnetic press board thickness (0 for a non-magnetic press board). The stacking factor of the stator core. When this check box is selected. this slot dimension is determined automatically. this slot dimension is determined automatically. Always available. To define the stator slots: 1. When Auto Design is selected. this slot dimension is determined based on the value entered in the Tooth Width field. on which Bs1 and Bs2 are designed. Click OK to close the Properties window.© SAS IP. When Parallel Tooth is selected. Rs is added when the slot type is 3 or 4. and Bs2. The Stator Slot Data Properties window contains the following fields: Auto Design Select or clear this to enable or disable auto-design of slots Hs2. RMxprt Machine Types 9-7 Release 14. and Bs2. Inc. double-click the Machine-Stator-Slot entry in the project tree. When Auto Design is selected. only two other fields appear in the window: Hs0 and Bs0. . When this check box is selected. select the Parallel Tooth check box. this slot dimension is determined automatically. Optionally. double-click the Machine-Stator-Slot entry in the project tree on the desktop. to automatically design the dimensions of slots Hs2. To open the Stator Slot Data Properties window.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 4. to design dimensions of slots Bs1 and Bs2 based on the stator tooth width. Bs1. Tooth Width The tooth width for the parallel tooth. 3. and enter a value in the Tooth Width field. this slot dimension is determined based on the value entered in the Tooth Width field. Parallel Select this to design Bs1 and Bs2 based on the tooth width. you must define the slot dimensions using the Slot Editor. select the Auto Design check box. . the Bs1 and Bs2 fields are removed. Hs0 Hs2 Bs0 Bs1 Bs2 Rs 5. Inc. Stator Slot Data for Three-Phase Induction Motors To access the stator slot data. When Auto Design is selected.Maxwell 3D Online Help Defining the Stator Slots for a Three-Phase Induction Motor Note If you chose User Defined Slot in the Select Slot Type window.) 2. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Enter the available slot dimensions. When Parallel Tooth is selected. Always available. and the Tooth Tooth Width field is added. Available only when Auto Design and Parallel Tooth are both cleared. Available only when Auto Design is cleared. Available only when Auto Design and Parallel Tooth are both cleared. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window.5 . Bs1. Optionally. All rights reserved. Click the button for Winding Type. Select a Winding Type: a. insulation. A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). To define the wires and windings: 1.) 2. A slot dimension. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. . To open the Stator Slot Winding Properties window. All rights reserved. and windings of the stator.Maxwell 3D Online Help A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). . The Winding Type window appears. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.© SAS IP. double-click the Machine-StatorWinding entry in the project tree on the desktop.5 . Hs0 Hs2 Bs0 Bs1 Bs2 Rs Defining the Stator Windings for a Three-Phase Induction Motor Define the wires. b. Enter the number of layers in the stator winding in the Winding Layers field. 3. Click the Winding tab. A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). Select from one of the following three types of winding: • • • Whole Coiled Half Coiled Editor 9-8 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. 4. A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). conductors. Rs is added when the slot type is 3 or 4. A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). . winding Editor A one-layer whole-coiled winding: Whole Coiled Slot 123 RMxprt Machine Types 9-9 Release 14. Inc.© SAS IP. You need to set up the winding arrangement layer for each slot.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. All rights reserved. an outline of the selected winding appears. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. The following table describes the six types of windings that are possible (three for one-layer and three for two-layer): Type Description One A user-defined one-layer winding arrangement.5 .Maxwell 3D Online Help When you place the mouse cursor over a winding button. Inc. . 9-10 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. where m is the phase number. When you select for winding layers the you Layer can specify a different winding arrangement for each slot in the Winding Editor. . All rights reserved.Maxwell 3D Online Help A one-layer concentric half-coiled winding: Half Coiled Slot 123 Two A user-defined two-layer winding arrangement. Inc. .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.© SAS IP. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. Winding Editor A two-layer whole coiled winding: Whole Coiled Slot 123 The phase belt for this winding configuration is equal to 360/2m.5 . Inc. Enter the number of wires per conductor in the Number of Strands field. 7. Select or enter the number of parallel branches in one phase of the winding in the Parallel Branches field. Enter 0 to automat- RMxprt Machine Types 9-11 Release 14. only the top layer needs to be defined. Note c.© SAS IP.5 . Enter the total number of conductors in each stator slot in the Conductors per Slot field. The coil pitch is the number of slots separating one winding. Enter the thickness of the double-sided wire wrap in the Wire Wrap field. Inc. All rights reserved. . 9. For a two-layer winding. in the Coil Pitch field.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 5. 8. Once you have clicked a button to select a winding. Enter 0 to have RMxprt auto-design this value. if a coil starts in slot 1 and ends in slot 6. Enter the coil pitch. click OK to close the Winding Type window and return to the Properties window. This value is the number of turns per coil multiplied by the number of layers. it has a coil pitch of 5. measured in number of slots. the bottom layer will be determined according to the coil pitch. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . For example. if you check Constant Pitch in the Winding Editor. 6.Maxwell 3D Online Help A two-layer half-coiled winding: Half Coiled Slot 1 2 3 There is only one coil per phase per pair of poles. 13mm.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. and then you can select this wire table using the Tools>Options>Machine Options command. . The Wire Size window appears. Click the End/Insulation tab. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . 13. Select a value from the Wire Diameter pull-down list. You can select from the following options: You can select a specific gauge number. Do one of the following: • If you selected Input Half-turn Length. All rights reserved. Select or clear the Input Half-turn Length check box.Maxwell 3D Online Help ically obtain this value from the wire library. c. 3 wires with a diameter of 0.© SAS IP. This is useful when USER you want to enter a diameter that does not correspond to a particular wire gauge. b. Click the button for Wire Size. 9-12 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. Inc. Select a wire gauge from the Gauge pull-down menu. then enter the half-turn length of the armature winding in the Half Turn Length field.21mm and 2 with a diameter of 0. click OK to close the Wire Size window and return to the Properties window. d. and RMxprt automatically calculates AUTO the optimal value. Select the Wire Size: a. 11. The diameter information is then written to the output file when you analyze the design. 12. MIXED For example. When you select a gauge number. You can create your own wire table using Machine>Wire. Insulation Conductor y Wire Wrap = 2*y 10. This option sets the Wire Diameter to zero. This option allows you to manually enter the Wire Diameter. the <number> Wire Diameter field is automatically updated. a single conductor may consist of 5 wires. Inc. When you are done setting the wire size.5 . This option allows you to define a conductor that is made of different size wires. The gauge number is based on AWG settings. then enter the end length adjustment of the stator coils in the End Adjustment field. 17. Enter the thickness of the wedge insulation in the Wedge Thickness field. 16. double-click the Machine-Stator-Winding entry in the project tree. Enter the inner radius of the base corner in the Base Inner Radius field. End Adjustment End of Stator Stator Coil 14. The end adjustment is the distance one end of the conductor extends vertically beyond the end of the stator. Enter the thickness of the slot liner insulation in the Slot Liner field. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 20. Inc. Enter the thickness of the insulation layer in the Layer Insulation field. Stator Winding Data for Three-Phase Induction Motors To access the stator winding data. . Slot RMxprt Machine Types 9-13 Release 14. Click OK to close the Properties window. The Stator Winding Data Properties window contains the following fields: Winding tabWinding Layers The number of winding layers. Enter the inner diameter of the coil tip in the Tip Inner Diameter field. All rights reserved. 15. and Editor.5 . 19. 18. 21. Inc.© SAS IP. . Click the button to open the Winding Type window and choose from Whole Coiled.Maxwell 3D Online Help • If you cleared Input Half-turn Length. Enter the distance between two stator coils in the End Clearance field. Parallel Branches The number of parallel branches in the stator winding. Winding Type The type of stator winding.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Enter the limited slot fill factor for the wire design in the Limited Fill Factor field. Conductors per The number of conductors per stator slot (0 for auto-design). Half Coiled. which is the distance one end of the conductor extends vertically beyond the end of the stator. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Limited Fill The limited slot fill factor for the wire design. All rights reserved. Slot Liner The thickness of the slot liner insulation. Diameter End Clearance The end clearance between two adjacent coils. the End Adjustment field appears instead. Radius Tip Inner The inner diameter of the coil tip. Inc.Maxwell 3D Online Help Coil Pitch Number of Strands Wire Wrap End/ Insulation tab The coil pitch measured in number of slots. and gauge. the Length Half Turn Length field appears the next time you open the Properties window. The thickness of the double-sided wire wrap (0 to automatically obtain this value from the wire library). When this check box is selected. End Adjustment The end length adjustment of the stator coils. Wire Size The diameter of the wire (0 for auto-design). Click the button to open the Wire Size window where you can specify units. Factor 9-14 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. Wedge Thickness The thickness of the wedge insulation. The number of wires per conductor (0 for auto-design).5 . . Input Half-turn Select or clear this check box to specify whether or not you want to enter the half-turn length.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Half Turn Length The half-turn length of the armature winding. wire type. Base Inner The inner radius of the base corner. When this check box is selected. Layer Insulation The thickness of the insulation layer. diameter.© SAS IP. . Inc. 5 . The Winding Editor makes this possible by enabling you to specify the number of turns for each coil. 3.Maxwell 3D Online Help Winding Editor for a Three-Phase Induction Motor For a three-phase induction motor. 2.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. . Choose Add to add the new wire data. Enter the Thickness of the wire in the table. All rights reserved.© SAS IP. When you are satisfied with the coil settings. If you are working on a quarter or half model. 5. Enter a Number in the table to specify how many of the conductor’s wires have this diameter. you must have set the Winding Property for the Winding Type to Editor. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 2. Select either Round or Rectangular as the Wire Type. you may want to specify a multiplier by clicking the Periodic Multiplier check box and specifying a value. Inc. 3. Enter the appropriate wire data in the table: • • For a round wire: • • Enter the Diameter in the table. you cannot change the turns or pitch. . 5. Enter a Number in the table to specify how many of the conductor’s wires have this data. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each size wire you want to add. Select or deselect the Constant Turns or Constant Pitch check boxes. select MIXED from the Gauge pull-down menu. To specify the number of turns for each coil: 1. Defining Different Size Wires for a Three-Phase Induction Motor Use the Gauge option if you have a conductor that is made up different size wires. 4. set which phase you want for each coil and which slot is the “in” and “out” slot for the current in each coil. click OK to close the Winding Editor window. you may want to specify a different number of conductors for each stator slot. In the Wire Size window. Inc. In the table in the upper left. RMxprt Machine Types 9-15 Release 14. Enter the Fillet value in the table. When these options are selected. 4. To enable the Winding Editor. The Winding Editor window appears. To define different size wires: 1. For a rectangular wire: • • • • Enter the Width of the wire in the table. Click Machine>Winding>Edit Layout. depending on whether you want to be able to change these setting in the table above. © SAS IP.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. An equivalent wire diameter is displayed as Wire Size value in the Winding tab in the Properties window. Inc. To define general stator data: 1.13mm. double-click Machine-Rotor. 0 for non magnetic spacer Duct Pitch Center-to-Center distance between two adjacent Vent ducts Defining the Rotor Data for a Three-Phase Induction Motor The rotor consists of copper bars in which current is induced by the magnetic fields produced by the stator windings. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . 3. Enter the Number of Slots in the rotor. and 3 of those wires have a diameter of 0. Select the Slot Type: a. if one conductor is made up of 5 wires. Stator Vent Data for Three-Phase Induction Motors By option. you can add a vent to a three-phase induction motor. and Machine-Rotor-Winding to define the rotor slots and vents. Right-click to display the pop-up menu and select Insert Vent. Right-click to display the pop-up menu and select Remove Vent. The first line will list Diameter = 0. To remove a vent to stator in a three-phase induction motor. When you are finished defining the wires.Maxwell 3D Online Help 6. 1. To add a vent to stator in a threephase induction motor. double-click the Machine>Rotor entry in the project tree on the desktop. Click the button for the Slot Type. 2.) Enter the stacking factor for the rotor core in the Stacking Factor field. The second line will list Diameter = 0. Machine-Rotor-Slot. The vent icon appears in the project tree under the stator. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. then the mixed wire size table will have two lines. The Vent data for the stator includes the following fields.13 and Number = 2. click OK to close the Wire Size window. 9-16 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14.21 and Number = 3. and the other 2 have a diameter of 0. The vent icon disappears in the project tree under the stator. Select the stator icon in the project tree. Select the stator icon in the project tree. Note For example. 2. Inc. Vent Ducts Number of radial vent ducts Duct Width Width of radial vent ducts Magnetic Spacer Width Width of magnetic spacer which holds vent ducts. All rights reserved. 1. In the project tree.21mm.5 . . 2. 4. To open the Rotor Data Properties window. 5.5 . 10. Enter the outer diameter of the rotor in the Outer Diameter field. measured in rotor slot pitch. 7. Rotor Data for Three-Phase Induction Motors To access the general rotor data. Click on the Custom button on the Double Cage row. a schematic of the selected type appears. This value defines by how much the rotor bars are skewed. If you select Double Cage. Optionally. 13. Select a slot type (available types include 1 through 4). Otherwise. When you place the mouse cursor over the slot type. Inc. select Half Slot to draw only half of the rotor slots. or define a new steel type. Click OK to close the Select Slot Type window and return to the Properties window. Note c.© SAS IP. Enter the Skew Width. Enter the inner diameter of the rotor in the Inner Diameter field. The Select Slot Type window appears. . a. c. All rights reserved. Click OK to close the Properties window. displaying the slot dimension variables. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Note When you place the mouse cursor over the slot type. select Cast Rotor to allow the conductor to fill all the space available in the slot. Select a Steel Type for the rotor core: a. displaying the slot dimension variables. Inc. This displays the Select Slot Type window. b. 9. 8. double-click the Machine>Rotor entry in the project tree. 11. . Select a slot type (available types include 1 through 4).Maxwell 3D Online Help b. 6. Optionally. select Double Cage to specify the winding as a double-squirrel-cage winding.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Click OK to close the Select Definition window and return to the Properties window. The Select Definition window appears. 12. Optionally. Select a steel type from the list. b. The Select Slot Type window appears. a schematic of the selected type appears. Enter the length of the rotor core in the Length field. RMxprt Machine Types 9-17 Release 14. another line appears in the properties to let you specify the Bottom Slot type. Click the button for Steel Type. RMxprt assumes the slot wedge that fixes the bars is filled with insulator material in a 2D/3D geometry model. double-click the Machine-Rotor-Slot entry in the project tree on the desktop. Bs1.) 2. Click the button to open the Select Slot Type window. Inc. Select this to specify the winding as double-squirrel-cage. Rs. double-click the Machine-Rotor-Slot entry in the project tree.© SAS IP. Inc. A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected). Rotor Slot Data for Three-Phase Induction Motors To access the rotor slot data. Select or clear this to specify whether the rotor squirrel-cage winding is cast or not. Bs2.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. . The length of the rotor core. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. The steel type of the rotor core. A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected). The skew width measured in slot number. 3. Click the button to open the Select Definition window. All rights reserved. Hs01. Select this to specify a half-shaped unsymmetrical slot. The inner diameter of the rotor core. To open the Rotor Data Slot Properties window. 9-18 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. . The Rotor Slot Data Properties window contains the following fields: Hs0 Hs01 Hs2 Bs0 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected). A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected). Defining the Rotor Slots for a Three-Phase Induction Motor To define the type and dimensions of the rotor’s slots: 1. Hs2. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window.Maxwell 3D Online Help The Rotor Data Properties window contains the following fields: Stacking Factor Number of Slots Slot Type Outer Diameter Inner Diameter Length Steel Type Skew Width Cast Rotor Half Slot Double Cage The stacking factor of the rotor core. Bs0. The type of slots in the rotor core. The number of slots the rotor core contains. The outer diameter of the rotor core.5 . Enter the slot dimensions in the following fields: Hs0. Click OK to close the Properties window. Enter the length of the gap between the end ring and the iron core in the End Length field. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. c. A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected). All rights reserved. Click the button for Bar Conductor Type. Inc. . Select a conductor type from the list.Maxwell 3D Online Help Bs1 Bs2 Rs A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected). Click OK to close the Select Definition window and return to the Properties window. double-click the Machine-Rotor-Winding entry in the project tree on the desktop. The end ring connects the bars of the rotor to one another. Select a Bar Conductor Type for the rotor winding bar: a. RMxprt Machine Types 9-19 Release 14. or define a new conductor type. The Select Definition window appears. . double-click the Machine-Rotor-Winding entry in the project tree. Enter the end ring dimension in the radius direction in the End-Ring Height field.) 2.© SAS IP. or define a new conductor type. Select an End Ring Conductor Type for the rotor winding end ring: a. 6. not both. (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). Defining the Rotor Winding for a Three-Phase Induction Motor To define the rotor winding data: 1. A slot dimension. 7. Click OK to close the Properties window.5 .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. To open the Rotor Data Slot Properties window. Click the button for End Ring Conductor Type. This field specifies the value for only one end of the gap. Inc. c. 3. b. The Select Definition window appears. Select a conductor type from the list. Click OK to close the Select Definition window and return to the Properties window. 5. 4. The end ring’s height covers at least the cross section of the rotor conductor. Enter the end ring dimension in the axial direction in the End-Ring Width field. Rs is added when the slot type is 3 or 4. Rotor Winding for Three-Phase Induction Motors To access the rotor winding data. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. b. 1. Vent Ducts Number of radial vent ducts Duct Width Width of radial vent ducts Magnetic Spacer Width Width of magnetic spacer which holds vent ducts. . The end ring connects the bars of the rotor to one another. Inner hole diameter Diameter of vent holes in inner row. 9-20 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. . Select the rotor icon in the project tree. The vent icon appears in the project tree under the rotor. Select the rotor icon in the project tree.Maxwell 3D Online Help The Rotor Winding Data Properties window contains the following fields: The type of bar conductor used in the winding. Inc. Inc. Click the button to open the Select Definition window. Click the button to Conductor Type open the Select Definition window. All rights reserved. The length of the single-side end of the extended bar.5 . End Ring Height The height of the end rings in the radian direction. you can add a vent to a rotor in a three-phase induction motor. Bar Conductor Type End Length End Ring Width Rotor Vent Data for Three-Phase Induction Motors By option. The width of one side of the end rings in the axial direction. The Vent data for the rotor includes the following fields. 2. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 2. The vent icon disappears in the project tree under the stator. To add a vent to rotor: 1. End Ring The type of end ring conductor used in the winding. Right-click to display the pop-up menu and select Remove Vent.© SAS IP. Inner hole location Center to center diameter of inner hole vents Outer hole location Center to center diameter of outer hole vents. 0 for non magnetic spacer Duct Pitch Center to center distance between vent ducts Holes per row Number of axial vent holes per row. Outer hole diameter Diameter of vent holes in outer row. Right-click to display the pop-up menu and select Insert Vent. The end ring connects the bars of the rotor to one another. To remove a vent to stator in a three-phase induction motor. Shaft Data for Three-Phase Induction Motors To access the shaft data. Tload = Trated. . Fan Load The load varies nonlinearly with speed. double-click the Machine>Shaft entry in the project tree on the desktop. Linear Torque The torque increases linearly with speed. For an induction generator. 5. given by the output power divided by the given rated speed. Inc. Select the Load Type used in the motor from the following options: The speed remains constant in the motor. To open the Shaft Data Properties window. Tload = Trated * (n/ nrated)2 where Trated is given by the output power divided by the given rated speed.© SAS IP. . In this case. right-click Analysis in the project tree. 3.) 2. In this case. Enter the desired rotor speed in the Rated Speed field. Inc. When input Rated Speed is less than the Synchronous Speed. The torque remains constant regardless of the speed.Maxwell 3D Online Help Defining the Shaft Data for a Three-Phase Induction Motor To define the shaft: 1. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 2. The output power remains constant in the motor. Enter the output power developed at the shaft of the motor in the Rated Output Power field. the machine operates as a generator. Const Speed Const Power Const Torque 4. When input Rated Speed is greater than the Synchronous Speed. Select or clear the Magnetic Shaft check box to specify whether or not the shaft is to be made of magnetic material. The Shaft Data Properties window contains the following fields: Magnetic Shaft Select or clear this check box to indicate whether or not the shaft is made of magnetic material. the machine operates as a motor. Tload = Trated * (n/ nrated) where Trated is given by the output power divided by the given rated speed. the rated performance will be calculated at the input Rated Speed with the three-phase windRMxprt Machine Types 9-21 Release 14. The Operation Type is automatically set to Motor for this machine type. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. 6. Click OK to close the Properties window. All rights reserved. double-click the Machine>Shaft entry in the project tree. Click the General tab.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. In this case. To open the Solution Setup window. Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Three-Phase Induction Motor To define the solution data: 1. and click Add Solution Setup. Enter the RMS line-to-line voltage in the Rated Voltage field.5 . 3. and select the units. and select the units. Click OK to close the Solution Setup window. On the Three-Phase Induction Motor tab. All rights reserved. Const Torque. On the Three-Phase Induction Motor tab. The operation type is automatically set to Motor for this machine type. Enter the electrical line frequency in the Frequency field.5 . Select the Winding Connection from the following options: • • Wye (Y) Delta 11. Select from Wye or Delta. Type a value for the rated output voltage. Inc. Const Power. On the General tab. On the General tab. 10. Linear Torque. 9. Enter the temperature at which the system functions in the Operating Temperature field. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. right-click Analysis in the project tree. The Solution Setup window contains the following fields: Operation Type Load Type Rated Output Power Rated Voltage Rated Speed Operating Temperature Frequency Winding Connection On the General tab. Inc. Select from Const Speed. The default is Const Power. On the General tab. and select the units. ings connecting to infite bus.© SAS IP. Type a value for the rated speed. Type a value for the operating temperature. and click Add Solution Setup. . Type a value for the rated voltage. . 8. and select the units. and select the units. and select the units. On the General tab. and Fan Load.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Related Topics: Solution Data for Three-Phase Induction Motors Solution Data for Three-Phase Induction Motors To access the solution data. Type a value for the frequency.Maxwell 3D Online Help 7. Click the Three-Phase Induction Motor tab. Related Topics: Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Three-Phase Induction Motor 9-22 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. On the General tab. and materials used in the motor. . you must define the following: • • • • General data. auxiliary-phase positive-sequence components. . and one for running. By option. To produce a starting torque. Rotor data. The primary difference is that the stator windings. main-phase RMxprt Machine Types 9-23 Release 14. Both voltages and currents of the main-phase and auxiliary-phase windings are decomposed to positive.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. All rights reserved. so that both a starting and running performance are obtained. have axes of these that are displaced 90 electrical degrees in space. speed.Maxwell 3D Online Help Single-Phase Induction Motors After you have selected Single-Phase Induction Motors as your model type.and negative-sequence components. such as the slot dimensions. such as the slot types. diameter.© SAS IP. skew width. such as rated output voltage and frequency. Two parallel capacitors can also be used: one for starting. An algorithm called symmetric component method is applied to analyze single-phase induction motors (IndM1). the currents in the two windings must be out of phase. you can add a vent or remove a vent from the rotor. Usually a capacitor is connected in series with the auxiliary winding so that the auxiliary winding current is forced to lead the main winding current by about 90 electrical degrees. and ventage holes. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Solution data. Analysis Approach for Single-Phase Induction Motors The construction of a single-phase induction motor is structurally similar to the poly-phase squirrel-cage induction motors. which consist of a main winding and an auxiliary winding.5 . and wire dimensions. The equivalent circuits for mainphase positive-sequence components. Stator data. such as the voltage. Inc. Inc. XC is the reactance of the capacitor connected in series with the auxiliary winding.5 . R2. and Xm are main-phase stator resistance. . and magnetizing reactance. All rights reserved. rotor resistance. as shown in the figures. The equivalent impedance of the four circuits is Zm1. rotor leakage reactance. Figure 3 In the figures. auxiliary-phase stator leakage reactance. (b). and its subsidiaries and affiliates. main-phase stator leakage reactance. auxiliary-phase stator resistance. R1a. . and auxiliary-phase negative-sequence components are shown in (a). X2. R2. Inc. X1a. and Za2. Zm2. Inc. respectively. (c).Maxwell 3D Online Help negative-sequence components.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. According to the symmetric component method. R1m. Za1. and (d) of Figure 3. the positive and negative components of auxiliaryphase currents can be expressed in the form of a phasor as the following: Ia1 = (j / k)Im1 Ia2 = ((j / k)Im2 Because the main winding and the auxiliary winding have the same applied terminal voltage U1. and the coefficient k is the ratio of effective turns of the auxiliary winding to that of the main winding. respectively. X2. the voltage equations for both windings become the following: U1 = Um1 + Um2 = Im1Zm1 + Im2Zm2 U1 = Ua1 + Ua2 = Ia1Za1 + Ia2Za2 = (j / k)(Im1Za1 .jkZm2) / (Zm1Za2 + Zm2Za1) Im2 = U1(Za1 + jkZm1) / (Zm1Za2 + Zm2Za1) The total input current is: I1 = Im + Ia = (Im1 + Im2) + (Ia1 + Ia2) 9-24 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14.Im2Za2) The positive and negative components of main-phase current are calculated by the following: Im1 = U1(Za2 .© SAS IP. and Xm have been referred to the main winding. X1m. . 9. 12. Double-click the Machine-Stator-Winding entry in the project tree to define the stator windings and conductors. P2. Double-click the Machine-Rotor-Winding entry in the project tree to define the rotor conductor. or can be used to create a new Maxwell 2D project. 3. ventage hole dimensions. 5. Insert a single-phase induction motor design in an existing or newly created project. all current components shown in Figure 3 can be obtained by simple computation. Inc. 7. . Double-click the Machine-Stator-Slot entry in the project tree to define the stator slot dimensions. P1. Then the total input current is: I1 = Im + Ia = (Im1 + Im2) + (Ia1 + Ia2) The positive. Inc. and skew. The power factor is derived from: PF = P1 / (U1 * I1) Defining a Single-Phase Induction Motor The general procedure for structurally defining a single-phase induction motor is as follows: 1. Double-click the Machine-Rotor entry in the project tree to define the rotor geometry. Double-click the Machine entry in the project tree to define the general data. 6.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. a brief description of that field appears in the status bar at the bottom of the RMxprt window.s) The total air-gap power is: Pm = Pm1 . 2. and click Add Solution Setup to define the solution data. the model can be imported into the Maxwell 2D Modeler. and eff are computed in the same way as for three-phase induction motors.Pm2 Tm. 10. 8. RMxprt Machine Types 9-25 Release 14. 11.Maxwell 3D Online Help Based on these two components of main-phase current. Once the design is analyzed. Right-click Analysis in the project tree. T2.and negative-sequence air-gap power can be computed in the following way: Pm1 = 2 * Irm1^2 * R2 / s Pm2 = 2 * Irm2^2 * R2 / (2 . and a new Maxwell 3D design. 4. Double-click the Machine-Stator entry in the project tree to define the stator geometry. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Double-click the Machine-Rotor-Slot entry in the project tree to define the rotor slot dimensions. All rights reserved.5 . Choose RMxprt>Analyze to analyze the design. Double-click the Machine-Shaft entry in the project tree to define the magnetism of the shaft. Choose File>Save to save the project.© SAS IP. Note When you place the cursor over an entry field in the data windows. 8. Select the Operation Mode: a. 7. and switching speed fields: Run Capacitance Available for C-Run. To define the general data: 1. on the technical support page of the ANSYS web site. Enter the given speed in the Reference Speed field.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.5 . Click the button. The Select Operation Mode window appears. such as the number of poles. Enter the number of poles for the machine in the Number of Poles field.) 2. In the Capacitor run mode. C-Start Capacitance-start mode.Maxwell 3D Online Help Please refer to the A Capacitor-Run Single-Phase Induction Motor Problem application note. C-R&S 9-26 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. 3.© SAS IP. for a specific example of a single-phase induction motor problem. R-Start Resistor-start mode. Enter values in the following capacitance. This value is the total number of poles in the stator (or the number of pole pairs multiplied by two). The auxiliary winding is disconnected when the rotor reaches the switching speed. C-R&S Run Resistance Available for C-Run. All rights reserved. Defining the General Data for a Single-Phase Induction Motor Use the General Data Properties window to define the basic parameters of the induction motor. The capacitor is in series with the auxiliary winding. Enter the energy loss due to friction at the given speed in the Frictional Loss field. Select from one of the following: C-Run Capacitance-run mode. Inc. . Enter the wind loss due to air resistance measured at the reference speed in the Wind Loss field. Inner Rotor Outer Rotor 6. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. one for starting. Select one of the following for the Rotor Position: • • 4. c. double-click the Machine entry in the project tree on the desktop. the capacitor will be designed (if the auto-design mode is selected) to minimize the backward magnetomotive force. b. . The auxiliary winding is in series with the capacitor and is disconnected when the rotor reaches the switching speed. 5. Click OK to close the Select Operation Mode window and return to the Properties window. To open the General Data Properties window. Inc. Two capacitors are in series with the auxiliary winding. resistance. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. C-R&S Capacitance-run and start mode. and operation mode. frictional loss. one for running. and R-Start. Enter the given start current ratio. This is the ratio of the maximum starting torque to the starting current ratio. Accept the defaults. Inc. C-R&S. The capacitance of the run capacitor. General Data for Single-Phase Induction Motors To access the general data. (Tst)max. The minimum starting current. All rights reserved. The start-winding optimization goal is disabled for the C-Run operation mode. C-R&S Start Resistance Available for C-Start. RMxprt Machine Types 9-27 Release 14. . the capacitor and the resistance are designed according to the start goal. Available for C-Run and C-R&S operation modes. select the Objective Type from the following three options: • • • Note (Tst/Ist)max. Click the button to select from the following four modes: C-Run. 10. Click OK to close the Properties window. C-R&S Switching Speed Available for C-Start. This is the maximum starting torque (Ist)min (minimum starting current). See Note below. The frictional energy loss (due to friction) measured at the reference speed. double-click the Machine entry in the project tree. Available for C-Run and C-R&S operation modes. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. The given speed of reference. The resistance of the run capacitor. R-Start 9. In capacitor-run mode. Inc.Maxwell 3D Online Help Start Capacitance Available for C-Start.© SAS IP. For other modes. Select whether the rotor is an Inner Rotor or Outer Rotor. the capacitor is designed to minimize the backward magnetomotive force. The number of poles the machine contains. The wind loss (due to air resistance) measured at the reference speed. C-R&S.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. If the start winding needs to be optimized. C-Start. . Enter the given start torque ratio. The General Data Properties window for a three-phase induction motor contains the following fields: Machine Type Number of Poles Rotor Position Frictional Loss Wind Loss Reference Speed Operation Mode Run Capacitance Run Resistance The machine type you selected when inserting a new RMxprt design (Single Phase Induction Motor). if the auto-design function is active.5 . The maximum starting torque. selected from the following: • • • The maximum value of (Starting Torque/Starting Current). To neglect the Run Resistance in Maxwell. To open the Stator Data Properties window. Select a Steel Type for the stator core: a. and conductors for the stator. Enter the length of the stator core in the Length field. In the project tree. accept the defaults. or (Ist)min. • For (Ist) min (minimum starting current). (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. This is the maximum starting torque. Machine-Stator-Slot. 5. enter the Given Start Torque Ratio. Enter the Outer Diameter of the stator. Note When exporting the RMxprt model to Maxwell: • • If the value of the Run Resistance is zero in RMxprt.) 2.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. CR&S. Click the button for Steel Type. Available for C-Start. Available for C-Start and C-R&S operation modes. 4. 6. enter the Given Start Current Ratio.Maxwell 3D Online Help Start Capacitance The resistance of the start capacitor. double-click Machine-Stator. Inc. double-click the Machine>Stator entry in the project tree on the desktop. and R-Start operation modes. The start-winding optimization goal is disabled for the C-Run operation mode. Start Resistance The resistance of the start capacitor. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. wires. slot data. Enter the stacking factor for the stator core in the Stacking Factor field. Available for C-Start and C-R&S operation modes.© SAS IP. Objective Type If the start winding needs to be optimized. . To define general stator data: 1. . 3. Enter the Inner Diameter of the stator. For (Tst) max. Defining the Stator Data for a Single-Phase Induction Motor The stator is the outer lamination stack where the three-phase windings reside. • • For (Tst/Ist) max.5 . set the value to a small non-zero number in RMxprt. (Tst)max. and Machine-Stator-Winding to define the physical dimensions. Switching Speed The switching speed of the capacitor or resistor. the value of the Run Resistance will be autocomputed in Maxwell to a value of 1% of the capacitor reactance. This is the ratio of the maximum starting torque to the starting current ratio. Inc. All rights reserved. select from the following three objective types: (Tst/Ist)max. 9-28 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. . Stator Data for Single-Phase Induction Motors To access the general stator data. Defining the Stator Slots for a Single-Phase Induction Motor Use the Stator1 window to define the physical dimensions of the stator slots. 7. a schematic of the selected type appears. 8. The number of slots the stator core contains. To define the stator slots: 1. The Stator Data Properties window contains the following fields: Outer Diameter Inner Diameter Length Stacking Factor Steel Type Number of Slots Slot Type The outer diameter of the stator core.) Optionally. Bs1.© SAS IP. 3. and Bs2. The length of the stator core. or define a new steel type. to automatically design the dimensions of slots Hs2. To open the Stator Slot Data Properties window. select the Auto Design check box. Click the button to open the Select Definition window. and enter a value in the Tooth Width field. Select the Slot Type: a. Select a slot type (available types include 1 through 4). displaying the slot dimension variables. The Select Definition window appears. select the Parallel Tooth check box. double-click the Machine>Stator entry in the project tree. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. The stacking factor of the stator core. c. Click the button to open the Select Slot Type window. Enter the Number of Slots in the stator. Select a steel type from the list.5 . All rights reserved. RMxprt Machine Types 9-29 Release 14. . The steel type of the stator core. Click the button for the Slot Type. Inc.Maxwell 3D Online Help b. When you place the mouse cursor over the slot type. c. The inner diameter of the stator core. Optionally. to design dimensions of slots Bs1 and Bs2 based on the stator tooth width. The Select Slot Type window appears. 2.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. b. Click OK to close the Properties window. Inc. Click OK to close the Select Slot Type window and return to the Properties window. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. The type of slots in the stator core. Note 9. double-click the Machine-Stator-Slot entry in the project tree on the desktop. Click OK to close the Select Definition window and return to the Properties window. When Parallel Tooth is selected. Parallel Select this to design Bs1 and Bs2 based on the tooth width. Hs0 Hs1 Hs2 Bs0 Bs1 Bs2 Rs 5.© SAS IP. When Parallel Tooth is selected. When this check box is selected. Stator Slot Data for Single-Phase Induction Motors To access the stator slot data. Available only when Auto Design and Parallel Tooth are both cleared. Always available. 9-30 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. Enter the available slot dimensions. this slot dimension is determined based on the value entered in the Tooth Width field. on which Bs1 and Bs2 are designed. . double-click the Machine-Stator-Slot entry in the project tree. Inc. Wire Size The wire diameter (0 for auto-design). Hs1 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). When Auto Design is selected. and Bs2. the Bs1 and Bs2 fields are removed. Hs2 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). When Auto Design is selected. Rs is added when the slot type is 3 or 4. Always available.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. this slot dimension is determined automatically. this slot dimension is determined automatically. Strands Wire Wrap The thickness of the double-sided wire wrap (0 for auto-pickup from the wire library). When Auto Design is selected. Number of The number of wires per conductor in the series winding (0 for auto-design). Always available. Tooth Width The tooth width for the parallel tooth. The Stator Slot Data Properties window contains the following fields: Auto Design Select or clear this to enable or disable auto-design of slots Hs2. this slot dimension is determined automatically. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. All rights reserved. and the Tooth Tooth Width field is added. Available only when Auto Design and Parallel Tooth are both cleared. Click OK to close the Properties window.Maxwell 3D Online Help 4. Bs1. Inc. only two other fields appear in the window: Hs0 and Bs0. this slot dimension is determined based on the value entered in the Tooth Width field. Parallel Branches The number of parallel branches in the series winding. Hs0 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). Available only when Auto Design is cleared. When this check box is selected.5 . . . A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). To open the Stator Winding Properties window. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. When this option is selected. (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). Click the Winding tab.Maxwell 3D Online Help Bs0 Bs1 Bs2 Rs A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). Series (C). Enter the limited slot fill factor for the wire design in the Limited Fill Factor field. . Rs is added when the slot type is 3 or 4. conductors. Inc. 7. Enter the thickness of the slot liner in the Slot Liner field. Select or clear the Include Series Winding check box. 8. Enter the thickness of the wedge insulation in the Wedge Thickness field. Inc.© SAS IP. RMxprt Machine Types 9-31 Release 14. 6. appears in the Properties window. and windings of the stator.5 . Enter the number of slots in the Coil Pitch field. Enter the number of layers in the Winding Layers field. a third tab. Defining the Stator Windings for a Single-Phase Induction Motor Define the wires.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. insulation.) 2. A slot dimension. To define the wires and windings: 1. 3. This option sets whether or not to include the series winding in the speed adjustment. 5. Slot Insulation 4. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. double-click the Machine-Stator-Winding entry in the project tree on the desktop. All rights reserved. All rights reserved. an outline of the selected winding appears.© SAS IP. . b. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. The following table describes the six types of windings that are possible (three for one-layer and three for two-layer): Type Description A user-defined one-layer winding arrangement. Inc. Winding Editor A one-layer whole-coiled winding: Whole Coiled Slot 123 9-32 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. The Winding Type window appears. Inc. Select from one of the following three types of winding: • • • Whole Coiled Half Coiled Editor When you place the mouse cursor over a winding button. Click the button for Winding Type. .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.Maxwell 3D Online Help 9. You need to set up the winding One-Layer arrangement for each slot. Select a Winding Type: a.5 . 5 . . and its subsidiaries and affiliates.© SAS IP. where m is the phase number. A two-layer wave winding: Whole Coiled Slot 123 The phase belt for this winding configuration is equal to 360/2m. Inc. All rights reserved. where you can specify a different winding arrangement for Editor each slot. RMxprt Machine Types 9-33 Release 14.Maxwell 3D Online Help A one-layer concentric half-coiled winding: Half Coiled Slot 123 A user-defined two-layer winding arrangement. When you select 2 Winding layers. the Winding Winding Editor is enabled. .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Inc. .Maxwell 3D Online Help A two-layer half-coiled winding: Half Coiled Slot 1 2 3 There is only one coil per phase per pair of poles.© SAS IP. All rights reserved. only the top layer needs to be defined. The following winding types are available: A single-layer coil: Slot 123 A 90-degree phase-belt two-layer coil. 9-34 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. Note For a two-layer winding. Inc.5 . if you check Constant Pitch in the Winding Editor. . the bottom layer will be determined according to the coil pitch.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. click OK to close the Winding Type RMxprt Machine Types 9-35 Release 14. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.© SAS IP. The software will determine the winding distribution in the slots to get the sinusoidal current distribution: A second-class sinusoidal coil. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Once you have clicked a button to select a winding. All rights reserved.Maxwell 3D Online Help A first-class sinusoidal coil. Inc. . A second-class concentric coil: Slot 123 You must define the distribution of conductors per slot. The Conductors per Layer field defines the maximum number of conductors in the slot. c. The software will determine the winding distribution in the slots to get the sinusoidal current distribution. The available winding types vary with the slot type that is selected.5 . The Conductors per Layer field defines the maximum number of conductors in the slot. . A first-class concentric coil: Slot 123 You must define the distribution of conductors per slot. 10.Maxwell 3D Online Help window and return to the Properties window. Enter the number of wires per conductor in the Number of Strands field. Enter the thickness of the double-sided wire wrap in the Wire Wrap field. Enter the number of parallel branches in the main stator winding in the Parallel Branches field. Enter the end length adjustment of the main stator coil in the End Adjustment field. 13. 15. . Insulation Conductor y Wire Wrap = 2*y 16.5 . Enter the number of conductors per layer of main winding in the Conductors per Layer field. The end adjustment is the distance one end of the conductor extends vertically beyond the end of the stator.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Click the Main (A) tab. End Adjustment End of Stator Stator Coil 12. Inc. Enter 0 to automatically obtain this value from the wire library. Select the Wire Size: 9-36 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. 14. All rights reserved. Inc.© SAS IP. . Enter 0 to have RMxprt auto-design the value. 11. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. ) 25.13mm. The diameter information is then written to the output file when you analyze the design. and then you can select this wire table using the Tools>Options>Machine Options command. 27. c. d. and RMxprt automatically calculates AUTO the optimal value. When you are done setting the wire size. RMxprt Machine Types 9-37 Release 14. 22. Enter the number of conductors per layer of auxiliary winding in the Conductors per Layer field. All rights reserved. . Enter the number of wires per conductor in the Number of Strands field. Enter the end length adjustment of the auxiliary stator coil in the End Adjustment field. . MIXED For example. Select a value from the Wire Diameter pull-down list.© SAS IP. WIRE SIZE 24. Enter the number of parallel branches in the series stator winding in the Parallel Branches field. a single conductor may consist of 5 wires. Click the button for Wire Size. 20. This option allows you to manually enter the Wire Diameter. Enter the number of parallel branches in the auxiliary stator winding in the Parallel Branches field.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.5 . 19.Maxwell 3D Online Help a. Click the Aux (B) tab. You can create your own wire table using Machine>Wire.21mm and 2 with a diameter of 0. (This tab only appears when Include Series Winding is selected on the Winding tab. Enter the end length adjustment of the series winding in the End Adjustment field. This option allows you to define a conductor that is made of different size wires. Enter the number of wires per conductor in the Number of Strands field. Click the Series (C) tab. 18. This is useful when USER you want to enter a diameter that does not correspond to a particular wire gauge. The Wire Size window appears. Select a wire gauge from the Gauge pull-down menu. b. Enter 0 to have RMxprt auto-design the value. This option sets the Wire Diameter to zero. 17. 21. the <number> Wire Diameter field is automatically updated. Inc. The gauge number is based on AWG settings. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. You can select from the following options: You can select a specific gauge number. 26. Inc. Enter 0 to have RMxprt auto-design the value. WIRE WRAP 23. When you select a gauge number. 3 wires with a diameter of 0. click OK to close the Wire Size window and return to the Properties window. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. c. 30. The gauge number is based on AWG settings. Click the button for Wire Size. You can create your own wire table using Machine>Wire. Select the Wire Size: a. Select a value from the Wire Diameter pull-down list. This option allows you to manually enter the Wire Diameter. The diameter information is then written to the output file when you analyze the design. double-click the Machine-Stator-Winding entry in the project tree. . All rights reserved. b. click OK to close the Wire Size window and return to the Properties window. 9-38 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. Stator Winding Data for Single-Phase Induction Motors To access the stator winding data. The Wire Size window appears. and RMxprt automatically calculates AUTO the optimal value. When you select a gauge number. Inc. a single conductor may consist of 5 wires. 29. . Click OK to close the Properties window.21mm and 2 with a diameter of 0. Inc. You can select from the following options: You can select a specific gauge number. This option sets the Wire Diameter to zero. This option allows you to define a conductor that is made of different size wires. When you are done setting the wire size.© SAS IP. MIXED For example.13mm. Enter the thickness of the double-sided wire wrap in the Wire Wrap field. Select a wire gauge from the Gauge pull-down menu. and then you can select this wire table using the Tools>Options>Machine Options command. 3 wires with a diameter of 0.Maxwell 3D Online Help 28. Enter 0 to automat- Insulation Conductor y Wire Wrap = 2*y ically obtain this value from the wire library.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. the <number> Wire Diameter field is automatically updated. This is useful when USER you want to enter a diameter that does not correspond to a particular wire gauge. d.5 . This tab appears when Include Series Winding is selected on the Winding tab. End Adjustment The end length adjustment of the series winding. Wire Size The wire diameter (0 for auto-design). RMxprt Machine Types 9-39 Release 14. When this option is selected. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Aux (B) Series (C) Conductors per The number of conductors per layer in the main winding. Winding Layers The number of winding layers. Winding Type The type of stator winding for the main phase. Strands Wire Wrap The thickness of the double-sided wire wrap (0 for auto-pickup from the wire library). Main (A) End Adjustment The end length adjustment of the stator coils. End Adjustment The end length adjustment of the auxiliary winding. Conductors per The number of conductors per layer in the auxiliary winding. Click the button to open the Winding Type window and choose from Whole Coiled. Wire Size The wire diameter (0 for auto-design). . Coil Pitch The coil pitch measured in number of slots. Parallel Branches The number of parallel branches in the series winding.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. a Winding third tab.Maxwell 3D Online Help The Stator Winding Data Properties window contains the following fields: Winding tabSlot Liner The thickness of the slot liner. Strands Wire Wrap The thickness of the double-sided wire wrap (0 for auto-pickup from the wire library). and Editor. Layer Parallel Branches The number of parallel branches in the main stator winding. Number of The number of wires per conductor in the auxiliary winding (0 for auto-design). Number of The number of wires per conductor (0 for auto-design).5 . Half Coiled. Factor Include Series Select or clear to specify whether or not to include the series winding in the speed adjustment. All rights reserved. Inc. Layer Parallel Branches The number of parallel branches in the auxiliary stator winding. Series (C). Wedge Thickness The thickness of the wedge insulation Limited Fill The limited slot fill factor for the wire design.© SAS IP. appears in the Properties window. Inc. . When you are satisfied with the coil settings.5 . For a rectangular wire: • • • • Enter the Width of the wire in the table. The thickness of the double-sided wire wrap (0 for auto-pickup from the wire library). 3. Click Machine>Winding>Edit Layout. select MIXED from the Gauge pull-down menu. The Winding Editor makes this possible by enabling you to specify the number of turns for each coil. Inc. All rights reserved. 3. Enter the Fillet value in the table. Enter the appropriate wire data in the table: • • For a round wire: • • Enter the Diameter in the table. . To specify the number of turns for each coil: 1. The wire diameter (0 for auto-design). you may want to specify a multiplier by clicking the Periodic Multiplier check box and specifying a value. Select either Round or Rectangular as the Wire Type. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. In the table in the upper left. Inc. If you are working on a quarter or half model.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Select or deselect the Constant Turns or Constant Pitch check boxes. click OK to close the Winding Editor window. Enter a Number in the table to specify how many of the conductor’s wires have this data. 4. When these options are selected. .© SAS IP. Defining Different Size Wires for a Single-Phase Induction Motor Use the Gauge option if you have a conductor that is made up different size wires. 5. you cannot change the turns or pitch. Enter the Thickness of the wire in the table.Maxwell 3D Online Help Number of Strands Wire Wrap Wire Size The number of wires per conductor in the series winding (0 for auto-design). In the Wire Size window. depending on whether you want to be able to change these setting in the table above. To define different size wires: 1. Winding Editor for a SIngle-Phase Induction Motor For a single-phase induction motor. The Winding Editor window appears. you may want to specify a different number of conductors for each stator slot. Enter a Number in the table to specify how many of the conductor’s wires have this diameter. 2. set which phase you want for each coil and which slot is the “in” and “out” slot for the current in each coil. 2. 9-40 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. 5 . c.© SAS IP. Inc. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window.21mm. The rotor rotates at a slightly slower speed than the stator electromagnetic field. click OK to close the Wire Size window. Enter the stacking factor for the rotor core in the Stacking Factor field. To open the Rotor Properties window. Select a slot type (available types include 1 through 4). then the mixed wire size table will have two lines. Select the Slot Type: a. To define the general rotor data: 1. and 3 of those wires have a diameter of 0. 9. 5. . Click the button for Steel Type. When you are finished defining the wires. This value defines by how much the rotor bars are skewed.13 and Number = 2. and the other 2 have a diameter of 0. The first line will list Diameter = 0.21 and Number = 3. displaying the slot dimension variables. Inc. and conductors for the rotor. RMxprt Machine Types 9-41 Release 14.Maxwell 3D Online Help 4. Choose Add to add the new wire data. measured in rotor slot pitch. 5. and Machine-Rotor-Winding to define the physical dimensions. In the project tree. Machine-Rotor-Slot. Enter the Number of Slots in the rotor. The Select Slot Type window appears. or define a new steel type. doubleclick Machine>Rotor. wires. double-click the Machine>Rotor entry in the project tree on the desktop. All rights reserved. 4. An equivalent wire diameter is displayed as Wire Size value in the Winding tab in the Properties window. Enter the inner diameter of the rotor in the Inner Diameter field. Select a steel type from the list.) 2. Note For example. 6. 3. Defining the Rotor Data for a Single-Phase Induction Motor The rotor consists of copper bars in which current is induced from the stator windings. . if one conductor is made up of 5 wires. The second line will list Diameter = 0. Click OK to close the Select Slot Type window and return to the Properties window. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Note c. 6. slot data. b. Enter the outer diameter of the rotor in the Outer Diameter field. b. 7. The Select Definition window appears. Click the button for the Slot Type. Enter the Skew Width.13mm. Enter the length of the rotor core in the Length field.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Click OK to close the Select Definition window and return to the Properties window. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each size wire you want to add. a schematic of the selected type appears. 8. Select a Steel Type for the rotor core: a. When you place the mouse cursor over the slot type. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected). Hs01. The type of slots in the rotor core. The Rotor Data Properties window contains the following fields: Stacking Factor Number of Slots Slot Type Outer Diameter Inner Diameter Length Steel Type Skew Width Cast Rotor The stacking factor of the rotor core. Optionally.5 . 11. Bs2. Rotor Data for Single-Phase Induction Motors To access the general rotor data. The steel type of the rotor core. 9-42 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. The outer diameter of the rotor core. Click OK to close the Properties window. RMxprt assumes the slot wedge that fixes the bars is filled with insulator material in a 3D/3D geometry model. The skew width measured in slot number. Bs1. . Inc. Click the button to open the Select Slot Type window. All rights reserved.© SAS IP. The inner diameter of the rotor core. 3. A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected). Bs0. Select or clear this to specify whether the rotor squirrel-cage winding is cast or not. Rotor Slot Data for Single-Phase Induction Motors To access the rotor slot data. Click OK to close the Properties window. double-click the Machine-Rotor-Slot entry in the project tree on the desktop.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. The number of slots the rotor core contains.Maxwell 3D Online Help 10. Hs2. A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected). Enter the slot dimensions in the following fields: Hs0.) 2. Inc. . Defining the Rotor Slots for Single-Phase Induction Motors To define the rotor’s slots: 1. double-click the Machine>Rotor entry in the project tree. select Cast Rotor to allow the conductor to fill all the space available in the slot. To open the Rotor Slot Properties window. Rs. Otherwise. The Rotor Slot Data Properties window contains the following fields: Hs0 Hs01 Hs1 Hs2 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected). Click the button to open the Select Definition window. The length of the rotor core. double-click the Machine-Rotor-Slot entry in the project tree. Click the button for Bar Conductor Type. not both. double-click the Machine-Rotor-Winding entry in the project tree on the desktop. Rotor Winding Data for Single-Phase Induction Motors To access the rotor winding data. To open the Rotor Winding Properties window. The Select Definition window appears. 4. Rs is added when the slot type is 3 or 4. This field specifies the value for only one end of the gap. The Select Definition window appears. Click the button for End Ring Conductor Type. Click OK to close the Select Definition window and return to the Properties window. Inc. 6. c. b. All rights reserved. c.) 2. Enter the end ring dimension in the axial direction in the End-Ring Width field.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. or define a new conductor type. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. b. A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected). Enter the end ring dimension in the radius direction in the End-Ring Height field. Defining the Rotor Windings for Single-Phase Induction Motors To define the rotor windings: 1.5 . Inc. RMxprt Machine Types 9-43 Release 14.© SAS IP. 7. The end ring connects the bars of the rotor to one another. . (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected).Maxwell 3D Online Help Bs0 Bs1 Bs2 Rs A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected). Enter the length of the gap between the end ring and the iron core in the End Length field. Select a conductor type from the list. or define a new conductor type. The end ring’s height covers at least the cross section of the rotor conductor. Click OK to close the Select Definition window and return to the Properties window. Select a Bar Conductor Type for the rotor winding bar: a. . (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. 3. Click OK to close the Properties window. Select an End Ring Conductor Type for the rotor winding end ring: a. 5. A slot dimension. A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected). double-click the Machine-Rotor-Winding entry in the project tree. Select a conductor type from the list. . 1. The height of the end rings in the radian direction. 9-44 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. Click the button to open the Select Definition window. The Vent data for the stator includes the following fields. To remove a vent from a rotor in a three-phase induction motor. All rights reserved. The vent icon disappears in the project tree under the rotor.Maxwell 3D Online Help The Rotor Winding Data Properties window contains the following fields: Bar Conductor Type End Length End Ring Width End Ring Height End Ring Conductor Type The type of bar conductor used in the winding. To open the Shaft Data Properties window. The length of the single-side end of the extended bar. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Shaft Data for Single-Phase Induction Motors To access the shaft data. Adding or Removing a Vent from a Single-Phase Induction Motor By option. Inner hole diameter Diameter of vent holes in inner row. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. double-click the Machine>Shaft entry in the project tree. Outer hole diameter Diameter of vent holes in outer row. 3. Right-click to display the pop-up menu and select Insert Vent. Click OK to close the Properties window. Click the button to open the Select Definition window. Select the rotor icon in the project tree.5 . To add a vent:. . 2. Right-click to display the pop-up menu and select Remove Vent. Select the rotor icon in the project tree. The type of end ring conductor used in the winding. The vent icon appears in the project tree under the rotor. double-click the Machine>Shaft entry in the project tree on the desktop. Inner hole location Center to center diameter of inner hole vents Outer hole location Center to center diameter of outer hole vents. Inc. The width of one side of the end rings in the axial direction. Holes per row Number of axial vent holes per row. Defining the Shaft Data for a Single-Phase Induction Motor To define the shaft: 1.) 2. Inc. 1.© SAS IP. Select or clear the Magnetic Shaft check box to specify whether or not the shaft is to be made of magnetic material. you can add a vent to a single-phase induction motor. 2. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. In this case. Click the Single-Phase Induction Motor tab. The torque remains constant regardless of the speed. 5. RMxprt Machine Types 9-45 Release 14. 2. Enter the RMS line-to-line voltage in the Rated Voltage field. 4. and select the units. Enter the temperature at which the system functions in the Operating Temperature field. 7. Tload = Trated * (n/ nrated)2 where Trated is given by the output power divided by the given rated speed. To open the Solution Setup window.Maxwell 3D Online Help The Shaft Data Properties window contains the following fields: Magnetic Shaft Select or clear this check box to indicate whether or not the shaft is made of magnetic material. Related Topics: Solution Data for Single-Phase Induction Motors Solution Data for Single-Phase Induction Motors To access the solution data. Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Single-Phase Induction Motor To define the solution data: 1.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Select the Load Type used in the motor from the following options: Const Speed Const Power Const Torque Linear Torque Fan Load The speed remains constant in the motor. Click OK to close the Solution Setup window. Inc. Tload = Trated. 2.© SAS IP. 1. The Operation Type is automatically set to Motor for this machine type. 3.5 . The load varies nonlinearly with speed. Inc. and click Add Solution Setup. . 6. All rights reserved. In this case. Click the General tab. Enter the electrical line frequency in the Frequency field. right-click Analysis in the project tree. In this case. Enter the desired output speed of the motor at the load point in the Rated Speed field. given by the output power divided by the given rated speed. The torque increases linearly with speed. right-click Analysis in the project tree. . The output power remains constant in the motor. Tload = Trated * (n/ nrated) where Trated is given by the output power divided by the given rated speed. Enter the output power developed at the shaft of the motor in the Rated Output Power field. and click Add Solution Setup. 3. On the General tab. Select from Const Speed. On the General tab. On the General tab. Related Topics: Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Single-Phase Induction Motor 9-46 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. Inc. and select the units. Type a value for the rated speed. Type a value for the operating temperature.5 . On the Single-Phase Induction Motor tab. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . Const Torque. Inc. The operation type is automatically set to Motor for this machine type. On the General tab. and select the units. and Fan Load. Const Power. The default is Const Power. and select the units. All rights reserved. On the General tab. Type a value for the frequency.© SAS IP. Type a value for the rated voltage. and select the units. Type a value for the rated output voltage.Maxwell 3D Online Help The Solution Setup window contains the following fields: Operation Type Load Type Rated Output Power Rated Voltage Rated Speed Operating Temperature Frequency On the General tab. . and select the units. Linear Torque.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. whose number of poles is the same as that of the rotor. and stacking factor. RMxprt Machine Types 9-47 Release 14. the rotor speed is controlled by adjusting the frequency of the input voltage. the stator poly-phase winding supplies an AC source for electric loads. Analysis Approach Data for Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines In adjustable-speed permanent-magnet synchronous machines. and control circuit information.© SAS IP. The poly-phase armature winding is embedded in the stator. .Maxwell 3D Online Help Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines After you have selected Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines as your model type. Permanent magnets are mounted on the rotor of a permanent-magnet synchronous machine.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Stator data. and skew width of the stator. the stator poly-phase winding can be fed either by a sinusoidal AC source or by a DC source via a DC to AC inverter. such as the diameter. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Circuit data. this type of machine does not utilize position sensors. slot dimensions. you need to define the following: • • • • • • General data. All rights reserved. air gap. When the machine operates as a generator. When the machine operates as a motor. The machine can operate as a generator or as a motor. Inc. such as rated output voltage and frequency. . and circuit type of the model.5 . Stator Winding Rotor pole data. such as trigger pulse width. transistor drop. Inc. Solution data. Unlike standard brushless permanent-magnet DC motors. which could be either inner or outer rotor type. such as the associated permanent-magnet dimensions. speed. such as the voltage. 1 The phasor diagram for generators jI X1 M jI Xaq U jI d Xad IR1 E0 jI q Xaq N I Iq Id O Figure 6. as shown in Figure 6. .© SAS IP.1 for the generators and Figure 6. In the 9-48 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. respectively. Xad and Xaq are the d-axis armature reactance and the q-axis armature reactance. .2 The phasor diagram for motors In the figures. the performance of the machine can be analyzed in the frequency domain based on the phasor diagrams.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. All rights reserved. R1 and X1 are the resistance and the leakage reactance of the armature winding.5 .2 for the motors. Inc.Maxwell 3D Online Help Stator Winding Connected to a Sinusoidal AC Source In this case. jI Xaq M E0 jI X1 jI d Xad IR1 jI q Xaq N U I Iq Id O Figure 6. Inc. or the torque angle for a motor (the angle that E0 lags U).is for the generator. All rights reserved. . and Xaq is a linear parameter. Xad is a linearized nonlinear parameter. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Solving for Id and Iq yields ± X q ( U cos θ – E 0 ) – R 1 U sin θ I d = --------------------------------------------------------------------------2 R 1 + Xd Xq ± R 1 ( U cos θ – E 0 ) – X d U sin θ I q = --------------------------------------------------------------------------2 R 1 + Xd Xq where the plus sign + is for the motor and the minus sign . we have –1 Id ----ψ = tan Iq The power factor angle ϕ (the angle that I lags U) is ϕ = ψ±θ where the plus sign + is for the motor and the minus sign . .5 . then we have I d X d + I q R 1 = ± ( U cos θ – E 0 ) – I d R 1 + I q X q = U sin θ where the plus sign + is for the motor and the minus sign . Inc. The d-axis synchronous reactance Xd and q-axis synchronous reactance Xaq are calculated directly from X d = X 1 + X ad X q = X 1 + X aq Let ? denote the power angle for a generator (the angle that U lags E0).Maxwell 3D Online Help phasor diagram. RMxprt Machine Types 9-49 Release 14.© SAS IP.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.is for the generator. Let the angle that I lags E0 be ψ . Inc.is for the generator. Maxwell 3D Online Help For the motor operation. The input mechanical torque is P1 T 1 = -----ω where ω denotes the synchronous speed in mechanical rad/s. .© SAS IP. The output mechanical torque is P2 T 2 = -----ω where ω denotes the synchronous speed in rad/s. the output electric power is P 2 = 3UI cos ϕ The input mechanical power is P 1 = P 2 + P fw + P Cua + P Fe where Pfw. the armature copper and the iron-core losses. the armature copper and the iron-core losses. Inc. The efficiency of the motor is P2 η = -----. All rights reserved. and PFe denote the frictional and wind. PCua.× 100 P1 % 9-50 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. Inc. . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. respectively. PCua. the input electric power is P 1 = 3UI cos ϕ The output mechanical power is P 2 = P 1 – ( P fw + P Cua + P Fe ) where Pfw.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. respectively.× 100 % P1 For the generator operation. The efficiency of the generator is P2 η = -----.5 . and PFe denote the frictional and wind. if the mechanical load increases. the induced emf and the armature winding current are vd vq = C v0 T va ed vb eq = C  e0 T ea eb  ia id ib = C iq  i0 RMxprt Machine Types 9-51 Release 14. the trigger time is independent of the rotor position. Therefore. The speed of an ASSM can be changed by adjusting the frequency of the controlling signal. causing the armature current and torque increase to balance the increased mechanical load. and the analysis approach is similar to that of a brushless DC (BLDC) motor. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. the speed of a BLDC motor varies with input voltage and mechanical load. The stator poly-phase armature winding is connected to a DC power supply through a DC to AC inverter to produce the rotational magnetic field in the air-gap. the q. this adjustable-speed synchronous machine (ASSM) operates as a motor. while the speed of an ASSM does not. which causes the torque angle (the same as lead angle of trigger for a BLDC motor) increase and then torque increase to retain the synchronous speed.5 . ω e is the revolution speed in electric radians per second. Ld. The main difference between ASSM and BLDC motor is: in BLDC motor. Lq and L0 are the d-. the rotor speed decreases temporarily.© SAS IP.Maxwell 3D Online Help Stator Winding Fed by a DC to AC Inverter In this case. However. If the mechanical load of a BLDC motor increases. trigger time exactly depends on the rotor position. for an ASSM. . Inc. Using the time-domain mathematical model to analyze the characteristics of the electric machine. Inc.and the 0-axis inductances respectively. but in ASSM. which explains why it is called Adjustable-Speed Permanent-Magnet Synchronous Machine.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. the rotor speed and the induced voltage decreases. the differential operator is ρ = d dt The coordinate transformation equations for the terminal voltage. Park's voltage equation in the matrix form is as follows R1 + Ld ρ –Lq ωe 0 id vq – eq = –Ld ωe R1 + Lq ρ 0 ⋅ iq v0 e0 0 0 R1 + L0 ρ i0 vd ed where R1 is the armature winding resistance. All rights reserved. . the three.π 3 The input electric power is obtained from the voltage and the current as: T 1 p 1 = --. respectively.cos ( θ – α ) sin ( θ – α ) -----3 2 1 cos ( θ – 2α ) sin ( θ – 2α ) ------2 cos θ C3 = cos θ C 4 = sin θ – cos θ – sin θ sin θ sin θ – cos θ – sin θ cos θ 0 0 0 0 where 2 α = --.Maxwell 3D Online Help The transformation matrices for the two-. . All rights reserved. . Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.5 .© SAS IP. Inc. ( v d i d + v q i q + v 0 i 0 ) dt T 0 The output mechanical power is: P 2 = P 1 – ( P fw + P Cua + P Fe ) 9-52 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.and the four-phase systems are C2. as follows C2 = cos θ sin θ 0 sin θ cos θ 0 1 ------2 2 1 --. C3 and C4. Double-click the Machine-Rotor entry in the project tree to define the rotor geometry. Insert the adjust-speed synchronous machine into a new or existing project. Once analyzed. Inc. 7. 2. offset. 3. Double-click the Machine-Stator-Winding entry in the project tree to define the stator windings and conductors. 9. the switching and the iron-core losses. Double-click the Machine entry in the project tree to define the general data.× 100 % P1 Defining an Adjustable-Speed Synchronous Machine The general procedure for defining a adjust-speed synchronous machine is as follows: 1. 10. PCua. Note When you place the cursor over an entry field in the data windows. RMxprt Machine Types 9-53 Release 14. The efficiency of the electric machine is P2 η = -----. All rights reserved. 8. Choose File>Save to save the project. Right-click Analysis in the project tree. 6.5 .Maxwell 3D Online Help where Pfw. Double-click the Machine-Stator-Slot entry in the project tree to define the stator slot dimensions. Double-click the Machine>Stator entry in the project tree to define the stator geometry. 4. The output mechanical torque is P2 T 2 = -----ω where ω denotes the revolution speed in mechanical radians per second. the model can be viewed in the Maxwell 2D Modeler. 5. 11. and air gap data for the rotor pole. respectively. Choose RMxprt>Analyze to analyze the design. Double-click the Machine>Circuit entry in the project tree to define the control circuit. Double-click the Machine-Rotor-Pole entry in the project tree to define the pole. 12. the armature copper. . Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. .© SAS IP. embrace. and a new Maxwell 3D design. Pt and PFe denote the frictional and wind. a brief description of that field appears in the status bar at the bottom of the RMxprt window. or it can be used to create a new Maxwell 2D project. Double-click the Machine>Shaft entry in the project tree to define the magnetism of the shaft. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. and click Add Solution Setup to define the solution data. ) 2. double-click the Machine entry in the project tree on the desktop. 6. By default. C2 Cross-type. Inc. S3 Star-type. a three-phase. 4. Note 8. three-phase. an outline schematic of the circuit appears. L3 Loop-type. General Data for Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines To access the general data. rated voltage. six-status circuit. four-phase. AC: An AC excitation. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. Enter the energy loss due to friction at the given speed in the Frictional Loss field.© SAS IP. This value is the total number of poles in the stator (or the number of pole pairs multiplied by two). 5. All rights reserved. Enter the given speed in the Reference Speed field. PWM: Pulse width modulation. DC: Switched DC voltage at the given input frequency. Click OK to close the Properties window. losses. type Y3. and circuit types. . 9-54 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. To define the general data: 1.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. you must enter the following values in the Circuit Data Properties window: Modulation Index (the ratio of the sine wave amplitude to the triangular amplitude) and Carrier Frequency Times (the ratio of the triangular frequency to the sine wave frequency). Select a Circuit Type from the following types: Y3 Y-connected. two-phase. The circuit types are based on industry standards. When you place the mouse cursor over a circuit type.5 .Maxwell 3D Online Help Defining the General Data for an Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machine Use the General window to define the basic parameters of the motor. S4 Star-type. Enter the number of poles for the machine in the Number of Poles field. L4 Loop-type. double-click the Machine entry in the project tree. four-phase. . such as the motor’s rated output power. three-phase. is selected as the circuit type. To open the General Data Properties window. three-phase. 3. Select one of the following from the Control Type pull-down list: • • • 7. Inc. Enter the wind loss due to air resistance measured at the reference speed in the Windage Loss field. When you select this source type. Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 3-Phase L3: Loop-Type. Enter the voltage drop of one diode in the discharge loop in the Diode Drop field. Refer to the figures of the different circuit types in step 2. Frictional Loss The frictional energy loss (due to friction) measured at the reference speed. Click the button to open the Circuit Type window and select from the following six types: Machine Type • • • • • • Y3: Y-Type. 5. 3-Phase C2: Cross-Type. Select from DC. then enter values in the following two fields: • Modulation Index: The ratio of the sine-wave amplitude to the triangular amplitude. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 3. Reference Speed The given speed of reference. in the Trigger Pulse Width field.5 . 4-Phase Defining the Circuit Data for an Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machine Use the Circuit Data Properties window to define the circuit properties for an adjustable-speed synchronous machine.) 2. . To open the Circuit Data Properties window. 2-Phase L4: Loop-Type. double-click the Machine>Circuit entry in the project tree on the desktop. RMxprt Machine Types 9-55 Release 14. Number of Poles The number of poles the machine contains. Inc. in electrical degrees. Note No circuit data properties exist when AC is selected as the Control Type. 3-Phase S3: Star-Type.Maxwell 3D Online Help The General Data Properties window for a three-phase induction motor contains the following fields: The machine type you selected when inserting a new RMxprt design (Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machine). Inc. 4-Phase S4: Star-Type. Enter the voltage drop across one transistor when the transistor is turned on in the Transistor Drop field. PWM (pulse-width modulation). enter the total discharge voltage in this field. If you selected DC as the Control Type. All rights reserved. If you selected a star-type circuit (S3 or S4) as the Circuit Type. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. If you selected PWM as the Control Type. enter the period from on-status to off-status of a transistor. Circuit Type The drive circuit type. 1. .© SAS IP. or AC. Windage Loss The windage loss (due to air resistance) measured at the reference speed. Rotor Position Select whether the rotor is an Inner Rotor or Outer Rotor. 4. Control Type The way the circuit is controlled. © SAS IP.) Width Transistor Drop The voltage drop across one transistor when the transistor is turned on. 9-56 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. Trigger Pulse The period from on-status to off-status for a transistor.5 . 8. (PWM circuits only. c. Enter the Inner Diameter of the stator. double-click the Machine>Stator entry in the project tree on the desktop.Maxwell 3D Online Help (PWM circuits only. Diode Drop The voltage drop across one diode in the discharge loop. Modulation Index The ratio of the sine-wave amplitude to the triangular amplitude. The stator is the outer lamination stack where the polyphase voltage windings reside. Click the button for Steel Type. Frequency Times (PWM circuits only.) Defining the Stator Data for an Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machine Use the Stator Properties windows to define the stator dimensions.) Carrier The ratio of the triangular frequency to the sine-wave frequency. . Enter the stacking factor for the stator core in the Stacking Factor field. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . Enter the length of the stator core in the Length field.) • 6. Inc. (DC circuits only. 6. All rights reserved. (PWM circuits only. Circuit Data for Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines To access the Circuit Data Properties window. in electrical degrees. 4. 3.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Click the button for the Slot Type. double-click the Machine>Circuit entry in the project tree. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. Enter the Outer Diameter of the stator. b. Select the Slot Type: a. 5. Click OK to close the Select Definition window and return to the Properties window.) 2. Carrier Frequency Times: The ratio of the triangular frequency to the sine-wave frequency. or define a new steel type. No circuit data properties exist when AC is selected as the Control Type. Select a steel type from the list. 7.) Click OK to close the Properties window. Inc. slots. To open the Stator Data Properties window. To define the general stator data: 1. windings. and conductors. The Select Definition window appears. Select a Steel Type for the stator core: a. Enter the Number of Slots in the stator. double-click the Machine-Stator-Slot entry in the project tree on the desktop. this slot dimension is determined automatically. Available only when Auto Design is cleared. . (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. . Available only when Auto Design and Parallel Tooth are both cleared. and enter a value in the Tooth Width field. Select a slot type (available types include 1 through 4). this slot dimension is determined based on the value entered in the Tooth Width field. Inc. RMxprt Machine Types 9-57 Release 14.) 2. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. select the Auto Design check box. select the Parallel Tooth check box. Always available. All rights reserved. Hs0 Hs2 Bs0 Bs1 Bs2 Rs 5. Always available. Optionally. and Bs2. When Auto Design is selected. Click OK to close the Properties window. To open the Stator Slot Data Properties window. Click OK to close the Select Slot Type window and return to the Properties window.© SAS IP. Stator Data for Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines To access the general stator data. Bs1. 3.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. measured in slot number. Optionally. to automatically design the dimensions of slots Hs2. Available only when Auto Design and Parallel Tooth are both cleared. When Parallel Tooth is selected..5 .Maxwell 3D Online Help b. 10. in the Skew Width field. Rs is added when the slot type is 3 or 4. 4. displaying the slot dimension variables. Note c. Inc. When Auto Design is selected. this slot dimension is determined automatically. a schematic of the selected type appears. When Auto Design is selected. When Parallel Tooth is selected. Enter the skew width. The Select Slot Type window appears. Enter the available slot dimensions. Click OK to close the Properties window. 9. When you place the mouse cursor over the slot type. this slot dimension is determined based on the value entered in the Tooth Width field. to design dimensions of slots Bs1 and Bs2 based on the stator tooth width. double-click the Machine>Stator entry in the project tree. Defining the Stator Dimensions and Slots To define the stator slots: 1. this slot dimension is determined automatically. When this check box is selected. on which Bs1 and Bs2 are designed. Hs2 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). The skew width measured in slot number. Parallel Select this to design Bs1 and Bs2 based on the tooth width. the Bs1 and Bs2 fields are removed. Click the button to open the Select Slot Type window. The Stator Slot Data Properties window contains the following fields: Auto Design Select or clear this to enable or disable auto-design of slots Hs2. The stacking factor of the stator core. Bs2 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). The number of slots the stator core contains. When this check box is selected. Click the button to open the Select Definition window. All rights reserved. Defining the Stator Windings and Conductors for an Adjust-Speed 9-58 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14.© SAS IP. double-click the Machine-Stator-Slot entry in the project tree. The inner diameter of the stator core. . and the Tooth Tooth Width field is added.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Bs0 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). Rs A slot dimension. Inc. (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected).5 . Rs is added when the slot type is 3 or 4. Inc. and Bs2. The type of slots in the stator core. . Tooth Width The tooth width for the parallel tooth. Stator Slot Data for Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines To access the stator slot data. Hs0 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). Bs1 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). The length of the stator core. The steel type of the stator core.Maxwell 3D Online Help The Stator Data Properties window contains the following fields: Outer Diameter Inner Diameter Length Stacking Factor Steel Type Number of Slots Slot Type Skew Width The outer diameter of the stator core. Bs1. only two other fields appear in the window: Hs0 and Bs0. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Hs1 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). Click the Winding tab. Select a Winding Type: a. 4. an outline of the selected winding appears. .) 2.© SAS IP. The following table describes the six types of windings that are possible (three for one-layer and three for two-layer): Type Description A user-defined one-layer winding arrangement.Maxwell 3D Online Help Synchronous Machine To define the stator windings and conductors: 1. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 3. Enter the number of layers in the stator winding in the Winding Layers field. double-click the Machine-StatorWinding entry in the project tree on the desktop.5 . . Layer Winding Editor A one-layer whole-coiled winding: Whole Coiled Slot 123 RMxprt Machine Types 9-59 Release 14. b. Click the button for Winding Type. You need to set up the winding One arrangement for each slot. The Winding Type window appears. All rights reserved.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Select from one of the following three types of winding: • • • Whole Coiled Half Coiled Editor When you place the mouse cursor over a winding button. Inc. To open the Stator Slot Winding Properties window. Inc. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. Inc. Inc. . the Winding Editor Editor opens. . All rights reserved.© SAS IP.Maxwell 3D Online Help A one-layer concentric half-coiled winding: Half Coiled Slot 123 A user-defined two-layer winding arrangement.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 9-60 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. where you can specify a different winding arrangement for each slot. A two-layer wave winding: Whole Coiled Slot 123 The phase belt for this winding configuration is equal to 360/2m. When you select 20. where m is the phase number.5 . For a two-layer winding. Winding types 10 and 20 are user-defined.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. . the bottom layer will be determined according to the coil pitch. 5.Maxwell 3D Online Help A two-layer half-coiled winding: Half Coiled Slot 1 2 3 There is only one coil per phase per pair of poles. If you select either of these. only the top layer needs to be defined. The window closes when the user- RMxprt Machine Types 9-61 Release 14.© SAS IP. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.5 . Select the Winding Type for the stator. asking you to define the name of the winding arrangement. click OK to close the Winding Type window and return to the Properties window. Inc. if you check Constant Pitch in the Winding Editor. Note When you place the mouse cursor over the winding type. Once you have clicked a button to select a winding. . Inc. All rights reserved. Note c. a schematic of the selected winding appears. a window appears. Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Inc.© SAS IP.5 . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Select from the following winding types: One. and choose OK. When you select this type. . . All rights reserved. Winding Editor A one-layer whole-coiled winding: 11 Slot 123 9-62 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14.A user-defined single-layer winding arrangement.Maxwell 3D Online Help defined winding is entered. Inc. enter the Layer winding arrangement. .Maxwell 3D Online Help 12 A one-layer concentric half-coiled winding: Slot 123 20 21 A user-defined winding arrangement. RMxprt Machine Types 9-63 Release 14.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.© SAS IP. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.5 . . When you select this type. enter the winding arrangement. Inc. Inc. A two-layer wave winding: Slot 123 The phase belt for this winding configuration is equal to 360/2m. where m is the phase number. and choose OK. All rights reserved. Enter the number of wires per conductor in the Number of Strands field. Enter 0 to have RMxprt auto-design this value. Enter the thickness of the double-sided wire wrap in the Wire Wrap field. The coil pitch is the number of slots separating one winding. Enter the total number of conductors in each stator slot in the Conductors per Slot field. it has a coil pitch of 5. Enter the coil pitch. The Wire Size window appears. Inc. if a coil starts in slot 1 and ends in slot 6. Select or enter the number of parallel branches in one phase of the winding in the Parallel Branches field. in the Coil Pitch field. This value is the number of turns per coil multiplied by the number of layers. 10.© SAS IP. Enter 0 to automatically obtain this value from the wire library.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. All rights reserved. For example. Inc.Maxwell 3D Online Help 22 A two-layer winding: Slot 1 2 3 6. 7. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. measured in number of slots. 9. Click the button for Wire Size. 9-64 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14.5 . Select the Wire Size: a. 8. Insulation Conductor y Wire Wrap = 2*y 11. . . When you select a gauge number. d. This option sets the Wire Diameter to zero.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Inc. MIXED For example. Select or clear the Input Half-turn Length check box. . the <number> Wire Diameter field is automatically updated. then enter the half-turn length of the armature winding in the Half Turn Length field. The gauge number is based on AWG settings. All rights reserved. 13. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Do one of the following: • • If you selected Input Half-turn Length. 12. Click the End/Insulation tab. You can select from the following options: You can select a specific gauge number. This option allows you to define a conductor that is made of different size wires. If you cleared Input Half-turn Length. and then you can select this wire table using the Tools>Options>Machine Options command. then enter the end length adjustment of the stator coils in the End Adjustment field. .13mm. Select a wire gauge from the Gauge pull-down menu. Inc. and RMxprt automatically calculates AUTO the optimal value. c.© SAS IP. Select a value from the Wire Diameter pull-down list. 3 wires with a diameter of 0. This option allows you to manually enter the Wire Diameter. The end adjustment is the distance one end of the con- RMxprt Machine Types 9-65 Release 14. You can create your own wire table using Machine>Wire.5 .Maxwell 3D Online Help b. a single conductor may consist of 5 wires. When you are done setting the wire size. 14. The diameter information is then written to the output file when you analyze the design.21mm and 2 with a diameter of 0. This is useful when USER you want to enter a diameter that does not correspond to a particular wire gauge. click OK to close the Wire Size window and return to the Properties window. 18. 17. Enter the distance between two stator coils in the End Clearance field. 16. Click OK to close the Properties window. . Enter the inner diameter of the coil tip in the Tip Inner Diameter field. 9-66 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.5 . 21. . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Enter the thickness of the wedge insulation in the Wedge Thickness field. End Adjustment End of Stator Stator Coil 15.Maxwell 3D Online Help ductor extends vertically beyond the end of the stator. Enter the limited slot fill factor for the wire design in the Limited Fill Factor field. Enter the thickness of the insulation layer in the Layer Insulation field. All rights reserved. Enter the thickness of the slot liner insulation in the Slot Liner field. 22. Slot Insulation 19. Enter the inner radius of the base corner in the Base Inner Radius field. Inc. 20. Inc.© SAS IP. . 3. In the table in the upper left. select MIXED from the Gauge pull-down menu. All rights reserved. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.Maxwell 3D Online Help Winding Editor for an Adjustable-Speed Synchronous Machine For a adjustable-speed synchronous machine. Click Add to add the new wire data. 2. Enter the Fillet value in the table. Click Machine>Winding>Edit Layout. Enter a Number in the table to specify how many of the conductor’s wires have this diameter. you may want to specify a different number of conductors for each stator slot. Select either Round or Rectangular as the Wire Type. depending on whether you want to be able to change these setting in the table above.© SAS IP. you cannot change the turns or pitch. To specify the number of turns for each coil: 1. 5. 5. In the Wire Size window. Enter a Number in the table to specify how many of the conductor’s wires have this data. 6. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each size wire you want to add.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. set which phase you want for each coil and which slot is the “in” and “out” slot for the current in each coil. Defining Different Size Wires for an Adjustable Speed Synchronous Machine Use the Gauge option in the Wire Size dialog if you have a conductor that is made up different size wires. For a rectangular wire: • • • • Enter the Width of the wire in the table. If you are working on a quarter or half model. The Winding Editor makes this possible by enabling you to specify the number of turns for each coil. When these options are selected. 4. The Winding Editor window appears. When you are finished defining the wires. To define different size wires: 1. Select or deselect the Constant Turns or Constant Pitch check boxes. . 3. Inc. Inc. click OK to close the Wire Size window and return RMxprt Machine Types 9-67 Release 14. you may want to specify a multiplier by clicking the Periodic Multiplier check box and specifying a value. click OK to close the Winding Editor window. 4. When you are satisfied with the coil settings. Enter the Thickness of the wire in the table.5 . Enter the appropriate wire data in the table: • • For a round wire: • • Enter the Diameter in the table. 2. Maxwell 3D Online Help to the RMxprt Properties window. Note For example, if one conductor is made up of 5 wires, and 3 of those wires have a diameter of 0.21mm, and the other 2 have a diameter of 0.13mm, then the mixed wire size table will have two lines. The first line will list Diameter = 0.21 and Number = 3. The second line will list Diameter = 0.13 and Number = 2. An equivalent wire diameter is displayed as Wire Size value in the Winding tab in the Properties window. Stator Winding Data for Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines To access the stator winding data, double-click the Machine-Stator-Winding entry in the project tree. The Stator Winding Data Properties window contains the following fields: Winding tabWinding Layers The number of winding layers. Winding Type The type of stator winding. Click the button to open the Winding Type window and choose from Whole Coiled, Half Coiled, and Editor. Parallel Branches The number of parallel branches in the stator winding. Conductors per The number of conductors per stator slot (0 for auto-design). Slot Coil Pitch The coil pitch measured in number of slots. Number of The number of wires per conductor (0 for auto-design). Strands Wire Wrap The thickness of the double-sided wire wrap (0 to automatically obtain this value from the wire library). Wire Size The diameter of the wire (0 for auto-design). Click the button to open the Wire Size window where you can specify units, wire type, diameter, and gauge. End/ Input Half-turn Select or clear this check box to specify whether or not you want to enter the half-turn length. When this check box is selected, the Insulation Length Half Turn Length field appears the next time you open the tab Properties window. When this check box is selected, the End Adjustment field appears instead. Half Turn Length The half-turn length of the armature winding. End Adjustment The end length adjustment of the stator coils, which is the distance one end of the conductor extends vertically beyond the end of the stator. Base Inner The inner radius of the base corner. Radius Tip Inner The inner diameter of the coil tip. Diameter End Clearance The end clearance between two adjacent coils. 9-68 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14.5 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Maxwell 3D Online Help Slot Liner The thickness of the slot liner insulation. Wedge Thickness The thickness of the wedge insulation. Layer Insulation The thickness of the insulation layer. Limited Fill The limited slot fill factor for the wire design. Factor Defining the Rotor Data for an Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machine The rotor consists of copper bars in which current is induced by the magnetic fields produced by the stator windings. In the project tree, double-click Machine>Rotor and Machine-Rotor-Pole to define the rotor and the pole. To define general stator data: 1. To open the Rotor Data Properties window, double-click the Machine>Rotor entry in the project tree on the desktop. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window.) 2. Enter the outer diameter of the rotor in the Outer Diameter field. 3. Enter the inner diameter of the rotor in the Inner Diameter field. 4. Enter the length of the rotor core in the Length field. 5. Select a Steel Type for the rotor core: a. b. Click the button for Steel Type. The Select Definition window appears. Select a steel type from the list, or define a new steel type. c. Click OK to close the Select Definition window and return to the Properties window. 6. Enter the stacking factor for the rotor core in the Stacking Factor field. 7. Select a Pole Type: RMxprt Machine Types 9-69 Release 14.5 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Maxwell 3D Online Help a. b. Note c. 8. Click the button. The Select Pole Type window appears. Click a button to select the desired pole type (1, 2, 3, 4, or 5). TIP: When you run the mouse over each option, the diagram changes to show that pole type. When you place the mouse cursor over a rotor type, an outline of the selected circuit type appears. Click OK to close the Select Pole Type window and return to the Properties window. Click OK to close the Properties window. Rotor Data for Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines To access the general rotor data, double-click the Machine>Rotor entry in the project tree. The Rotor Data Properties window contains the following fields: Outer Diameter Inner Diameter Length Steel Type Stacking Factor Pole Type The outer diameter of the rotor core. The inner diameter of the rotor core. The length of the rotor core. The steel type of the rotor core. Click the button to open the Select Definition window. The stacking factor of the rotor core. The pole type for the rotor. Click this button to open the Select Pole Type window and select from the following types: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5. Defining the Rotor Pole for an Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machine The rotor pole drives the electromagnetic field which is coupled with the stator windings. Use the Rotor Pole Data Properties window to define the rotor pole. Note Some of the fields in the Rotor Pole window change, or are inactive, depending on the Rotor Type you select. To define the rotor pole: 1. To open the Rotor Pole Data Properties window, double-click the Machine-Rotor-Pole entry in the project tree on the desktop. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window.) 2. For all pole types except type 4, enter the ratio of the actual arc distance in relation to the max- 9-70 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14.5 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Maxwell 3D Online Help imum possible arc distance in the Embrace field. This value is between 0 and 1. Pole Embrace = 1.0 Pole Embrace = 0.7 3. For pole type 4, enter the shaft diameter of the rotor in the Shaft Diameter field. 4. For pole types 1, 2, and 3, enter the distance from the center of the rotor to the polar arc center in the Offset field. Enter 0 for a uniform air gap. Magnet Radius Rotor OD Radius Offset 5. For pole type 5, enter the thickness of the bridge across the two poles in the Bridge field. 6. For pole type 5, enter the width of the rib supporting the bridge in the Rib field. 7. Select the type of magnet to use in the rotor pole from the Magnet Type pull-down menu. 8. For pole types 4 and 5, enter the width of the magnet in the Magnet Width field. 9. Enter the maximum radial thickness of the magnet in the Magnet Thickness field. 10. Click OK to close the Properties window. RMxprt Machine Types 9-71 Release 14.5 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Maxwell 3D Online Help Rotor Pole Data for Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines To access the pole rotor data, double-click the Machine-Rotor-Pole entry in the project tree. The Rotor Pole Data Properties window contains the following fields: Embrace The pole embrace. For pole types 1, 2, 3, and 5. Shaft Diameter The shaft diameter of the rotor. For pole type 4. Offset The pole-arc center offset from the rotor center (0 for a uniform air gap). For pole types 1, 2, and 3. Bridge The thickness of the bridge across two adjacent poles. For pole type 5. Rib The width of the rib at the center of two adjacent poles that support the bridge. For pole type 5. Magnet Type The type of magnet. Click the button to open the Select Definition window. For all pole types. Magnet Width The maximum width of the magnet. For pole types 4 and 5. Magnet Thickness The maximum thickness of the magnet. For all pole types. Defining the Shaft Data for an Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machine To define the shaft: 1. To open the Shaft Data Properties window, double-click the Machine>Shaft entry in the project tree on the desktop. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window.) 2. Select or clear the Magnetic Shaft check box to specify whether or not the shaft is to be made of magnetic material. 3. Click OK to close the Properties window. Shaft Data for Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines To access the shaft data, double-click the Machine>Shaft entry in the project tree. The Shaft Data Properties window contains the following fields: Magnetic Shaft Select or clear this check box to indicate whether or not the shaft is made of magnetic material. Setting Up Analysis Parameters for an Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machine To define the solution data: 1. Right-click Analysis in the project tree, and click Add Solution Setup to open the Solution 9-72 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14.5 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Maxwell 3D Online Help 2. Setup window. Click the General tab. The Operation Type is automatically set to Motor for this machine type. Note a. To enable selection of Generator for Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines, the machine Control Type must be set to AC in its Properties window. If Motor was selected for the Operation Type, select the Load Type used in the motor from the following options: Const Speed The speed remains constant in the motor. Const Power The output power remains constant in the motor. Const Torque The torque remains constant regardless of the speed. In this case, Tload = Trated, given by the output power divided by the given rated speed. Linear Torque The torque increases linearly with speed. In this case, Tload = Trated * (n/ nrated) where Trated is given by the output power divided by the given rated speed. Fan Load The load varies nonlinearly with speed. In this case, Tload = Trated * (n/ nrated)2 where Trated is given by the output power divided by the given rated speed. b. 3. If Generator was selected for the Operation Type, select the Load Type used in the generator from the following options: Infinite Bus or Independent Generator. Enter the output power developed at the shaft of the motor in the Rated Output Power field. 4. Enter either the RMS line-to-line voltage (for AC control type), or the DC voltage (for DC and PWM control types) in the Rated Voltage field. 5. Enter the desired output speed of the motor at the load point in the Rated Speed field. 6. Enter the temperature at which the system functions in the Operating Temperature field. 7. Click the Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machine tab and select either Time or Frequency as the Domain for the solution. Click OK to close the Solution Setup window. 8. Related Topics: Solution Data for Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines Solution Data for Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines To access the solution data, right-click Analysis in the project tree, and click Add Solution Setup. For this machine type, there is only one tab, the General tab. RMxprt Machine Types 9-73 Release 14.5 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Maxwell 3D Online Help The Solution Setup window contains the following fields: Operation Type The operation type is automatically set to Motor for this machine type. Load Type Select from Const Speed, Const Power, Const Torque, Linear Torque, and Fan Load. The default is Const Power. Rated Output Power Type a value for the rated output voltage, and select the units. Rated Voltage Type a value for the rated voltage, and select the units. Rated Speed Type a value for the rated speed, and select the units. Operating Temperature Type a value for the operating temperature, and select the units. Related Topics: Setting Up Analysis Parameters for an Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machine 9-74 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14.5 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Maxwell 3D Online Help Permanent-Magnet DC Motors After you have selected Permanent-Magnet DC Motors as your model type, you need to define the following: • • • • • • • General data, such as the voltage, speed, and circuit type of the model. Stator data, such as the diameter, slot dimensions, and skew width of the stator. Stator pole data, such as its associated pole dimensions, type of steel, and pole magnet specifications. Rotor data, such as the slot types and dimensions, slot data, and windings. Commutator and brush data, such as the commutator dimensions and brush length. Shaft data Solution data, such as rated output voltage and frequency. Analysis Approach for PMDC Motors For a permanent-magnet DC motor, the stator is equipped with P pairs of permanent magnets, creating P pairs of alternating north and south poles. The distribution of the magnetic field produced by the permanent magnet’s field flux is fixed with respect to the stator. The rotor is equipped with a distributed winding connected to a commutator that revolves together with the rotor. A system of brushes is kept in permanent electrical contact with the commutator. When DC current is applied to the rotor winding (via the brushes and commutator), a torque is produced by the interaction of the rotor (armature) currents and the field produced by the permanent magnets. The commutator causes the armature to create a magnetic flux distribution that is fixed in space and whose axis is perpendicular to the axis of the field flux produced by the permanent magnets. For these motors, the commutator acts as a mechanical rectifier. The performance of a permanent-magnet DC (PMDC) motor is computed by DC analysis only. The voltage equation of a PMDC motor is: U = Ub + R1 * I + E where Ub is the voltage drop of one-pair brushes, R1 is the armature resistance, E = Ke * ω is the back emf with Ke the back-emf constant in Vs/rad, and ω is the speed in rad/s. For a given speed ω , armature current can be computed based on the applied voltage U, as shown below: I = (U - Ub - Ke * ω )/R1 The shaft torque T2 is computed by: T2 = Kt * I - Tfw where Kt is the torque constant in Nm/A, which is numerically the same as Ke, and Tfw is the frictional torque. The output power (mechanical power) is: P2 = T2 * ω The input power (electrical power) is: RMxprt Machine Types 9-75 Release 14.5 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Maxwell 3D Online Help P1 = P2 + Pfw + Pcua + Pb + PFe where Pfw, Pcua, Pb, and PFe are frictional and wind loss, armature copper loss, brush drop loss, and iron-core loss, respectively. The efficiency is: eff = P2/P1 * 100% Defining a Permanent-Magnet DC Motor The general procedure for defining a permanent-magnet DC motor is as follows: 1. Insert the permanent-magnet DC motor into a new or existing project. 2. Double-click the Machine entry in the project tree to define the general data. 3. Double-click the Machine>Stator entry in the project tree to define the stator geometry. 4. Double-click the Machine-Stator-Pole entry in the project tree to define the stator pole dimensions. Double-click the Machine>Rotor entry in the project tree to define the rotor geometry. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Double-click the Machine-Rotor-Slot entry in the project tree to define the rotor slot dimensions. Double-click the Machine-Rotor-Winding entry in the project tree to define the rotor windings and conductors. Double-click the Machine>Commutator entry in the project tree to define the commutator and brush data. Double-click the Machine>Shaft entry in the project tree to define the magnetism of the shaft. 10. Right-click Analysis in the project tree, and click Add Solution Setup to define the solution data. 11. Choose File>Save to save the project. 12. Choose RMxprt>Analyze to analyze the design. Note When you place the cursor over an entry field in the data windows, a brief description of that field appears in the status bar at the bottom of the RMxprt window. Once analyzed, the model can be viewed in the Maxwell 2D Modeler, or it can be used to create a new Maxwell 2D project, and a new Maxwell 3D project. Refer to the Permanent-Magnet DC Motor Problem application note, on the technical support page of the ANSYS web site, for a specific example of a permanent-magnet DC motor problem. Defining the General Data for PMDC Motors Use the General window to specify the rated output power, voltage values, circuit type, and speed of the DC motor. To define the general data: 1. To open the General Data Properties window, double-click the Machine entry in the project tree on the desktop. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without 9-76 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14.5 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Maxwell 3D Online Help 2. 3. opening a separate window.) Enter the number of poles for the machine in the Number of Poles field. This value is the total number of poles in the stator (or the number of pole pairs multiplied by two). Enter the energy loss due to friction at the given speed in the Frictional Loss field. Note 4. To use the Brush Press and Frictional Coefficient fields when you define the commutator and brush later in the Commutator/Brush Data window, enter 0 here for the Friction Loss. 5. Enter the wind loss due to air resistance measured at the reference speed in the Wind Loss field. Enter the given speed in the Reference Speed field. 6. Click OK to close the Properties window. General Data for PMDC Motors To access the general data, double-click the Machine entry in the project tree. The General Data Properties window for a three-phase induction motor contains the following fields: The machine type you selected when inserting a new RMxprt design (DC Permanent Magnet Motor). Number of Poles The number of poles the machine contains. Rotor Position Select whether the rotor is an Inner Rotor or Outer Rotor. Frictional Loss The frictional energy loss (due to friction) measured at the reference speed. Wind Loss The wind loss (due to air resistance) measured at the reference speed. Reference Speed The given speed of reference. Machine Type Defining the Stator Data for a PMDC Motor The stator is the outer lamination stack where the polyphase voltage windings reside. To define the general stator data: 1. To open the Stator Data Properties window, double-click the Machine>Stator entry in the project tree on the desktop. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window.) 2. Enter the Outer Diameter of the stator. 3. Enter the Inner Diameter of the stator. 4. Enter the length of the stator core in the Length field. 5. Enter the stacking factor for the stator core in the Stacking Factor field. This value is a ratio of the effective magnetic length of the core, and ranges from 0 to 1. It is defined as the total length minus the total insulation from the laminations, divided by the total length. A value of 1 indicates that the stator is not laminated. RMxprt Machine Types 9-77 Release 14.5 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. a pole embrace of 0. double-click the Machine>Stator entry in the project tree. double-click the Machine-Stator-Pole entry in the project tree on the desktop. . Click OK to close the Properties window.5 . Enter the ratio of the actual arc distance in relation to the maximum possible arc distance in the 9-78 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. .) Note 2.75 yields a magnet with a span of 135 degrees (based on 0. Inc. Use the s Stator Pole Data Properties window to define the stator pole. The Stator Data Properties window contains the following fields: Outer Diameter Inner Diameter Length Stacking Factor The outer diameter of the stator core.© SAS IP. The inner diameter of the stator core.75*180 degrees). Inc. The stacking factor of the stator core. To open the Stator Pole Data Properties window. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window.Maxwell 3D Online Help 6. To define the rotor pole: 1. Defining the Stator Pole for a PMDC Motor The rotor pole drives the electromagnetic field which is coupled with the stator windings. Stator Data for PMDC Motors To access the general stator data.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. The length of the stator core. For a two-pole machine. All rights reserved. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Enter 0 for a uniform air gap. Offset The pole-arc center offset from the stator center (0 for a uniform air gap). The Select Definition window appears. This value is between 0 and 1. Select or define a material for the magnet type. Enter the maximum radial thickness of the magnet at the center of the pole in the Magnet Thickness field. To control the flux. Magnet Type The type of magnet. Click the Magnet Type button. Click OK to close the Select Definition window and return to the Properties window. . RMxprt Machine Types 9-79 Release 14. All rights reserved. The Stator Pole Data Properties window contains the following fields: Embrace The pole embrace. Click the button to open the Select Definition window. 3. Enter the length of the magnet in the axial direction in the Magnet Length field. Enter the distance from the center of the stator to the magnet arc center in the Offset field. double-click the Machine-Stator-Pole entry in the project tree. the magnet’s thickness may vary. To select the type of magnet to use in the rotor pole: a. Click OK to close the Properties window. c. . Stator Pole Data for PMDC Motors To access the stator pole data. b.5 . 5. Magnet Thickness The maximum thickness of the magnet. 4. Magnet Length The maximum length of the magnet.© SAS IP. 7. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.Maxwell 3D Online Help Embrace field. 6. . double-click the Machine>Rotor entry in the project tree. Enter the length of the rotor core in the Length field. Inc. Click the button for Steel Type. or define a new steel type. measured in slot number. Enter the inner diameter of the rotor in the Inner Diameter field. 4.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Rotor Slot Data Properties. Click OK to close the Select Definition window and return to the Properties window.) Enter the stacking factor for the rotor core in the Stacking Factor field. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. c. 9-80 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. Click OK to close the Select Slot Type window and return to the Properties window. 9. Rotor Data for PMDC Motors To access the general rotor data. double-click the Machine>Rotor entry in the project tree on the desktop. The Select Slot Type window appears. Select the Slot Type: a. Enter the skew width. All rights reserved. Select a Steel Type for the rotor core: a. and dimensions.5 . 3. and Rotor Winding Data Properties windows to define the rotor slots. a schematic outline of the slot appears. b. The commutator acts as a mechanical rectifier in the motor. 10. Inc.© SAS IP. 6. Click OK to close the Properties window. When you place the mouse cursor over the slot type. 2.. Enter the outer diameter of the rotor in the Outer Diameter field. To define general rotor data: 1. . Select a slot type (available types include 1 through 4).Maxwell 3D Online Help Defining the Rotor Data for a PMDC Motor The rotor is equipped with slots containing copper conductors that are connected to the commutator. Enter the Number of Slots in the rotor. b. windings. Select a steel type from the list. To open the Rotor Data Properties window. in the Skew Width field. Note Click the button for the Slot Type. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 7. Use the Rotor Data Properties. The Select Definition window appears. 8. 5. c. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. double-click the Machine-Rotor-Slot entry in the project tree.© SAS IP. The inner diameter of the rotor core. Available only when Auto Design is cleared. double-click the Machine-Rotor-Slot entry in the project tree on the desktop. Click the button to open the Select Definition window. this slot dimension is determined automatically. Click OK to close the Properties window. Defining the Rotor Slots for a PMDC Motor To define the physical dimensions of the rotor slots: 1. and Bs2. this slot dimension is determined automatically. this slot dimension is determined based on the value entered in the Tooth Width field. to automatically design the dimensions of slots Hs2. The type of slots in the rotor core. select the Auto Design check box. Enter the available slot dimensions.Maxwell 3D Online Help The Rotor Data Properties window contains the following fields: Stacking Factor Number of Slots Slot Type Outer Diameter Inner Diameter Length Steel Type Skew Width The stacking factor of the rotor core. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. Inc. RMxprt Machine Types 9-81 Release 14. Available only when Auto Design is cleared. Rotor Slot Data for PMDC Motors To access the stator slot data. Always available. All rights reserved.5 . When Auto Design is selected. When Auto Design is selected. When Parallel Tooth is selected. Always available. The outer diameter of the rotor core. Bs1. Rs is added when the slot type is 3 or 4. The length of the rotor core. The number of slots the rotor core contains. . and its subsidiaries and affiliates.) 2. The steel type of the rotor core. To open the Rotor Slot Data Properties window. 3. When Parallel Tooth is selected. . this slot dimension is determined automatically. Available only when Auto Design is cleared. Hs0 Hs2 Bs0 Bs1 Bs2 Rs 4. Click the button to open the Select Slot Type window. Optionally. this slot dimension is determined based on the value entered in the Tooth Width field. When Auto Design is selected. The skew width measured in slot number. For a lap winding. Lap Wave Frog Leg Enter the number of windings in the Multiplex Number field (1 for a single winding. double-click the Machine-RotorWinding entry in the project tree on the desktop. For a wave winding. Hs0 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected). Rs is added when the slot type is 3 or 4. Bs2 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected). and the number of parallel branches is equal to the number of poles multiplied by the multiplex number. When this check box is selected. The Winding Type window appears. (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). Click the button for Winding Type. Inc. Rs A slot dimension. Bs1 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected).Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Bs0 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected). (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). 2 for double windings. 3 for triple windings).© SAS IP. and Bs2. Select a Winding Type: a. Inc. Click the Winding tab. Rs A slot dimension. 3. .5 . Hs2 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected). All rights reserved. Bs1. only two other fields appear in the window: Hs0 and Bs0. Defining the Rotor Windings and Conductors for a PMDC Motor To define the rotor windings. the 9-82 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. b. and conductors: 1. the multiplex number is the number of commutators between the start and end of one winding. wires. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. Select from one of the following three types of winding: • • • 4. .) 2. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. To open the Rotor Slot Winding Properties window. Rs is added when the slot type is 3 or 4.Maxwell 3D Online Help The Rotor Slot Data Properties window contains the following fields: Auto Design Select or clear this to enable or disable auto-design of slots Hs2. 5 . This value is the total number of conductors in one real full rotor slot. 5. it has a coil pitch of 5. 9.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Enter 0 to automat- RMxprt Machine Types 9-83 Release 14. an upper and a lower layer. if a coil starts in slot 1 and ends in slot 6.Maxwell 3D Online Help number of parallel branches equals the multiplex number multiplied by two. this would yield 24 commutation segments. For example. 7. which are referred to as virtual slots. measured in number of slots. Enter the total number of conductors in each rotor slot in the Conductors per Slot field.© SAS IP. Enter 0 to have RMxprt auto-design this value. in the Coil Pitch field. which would yield a virtual slot number of two. the upper and lower layer can have two windings each. The rotor is assumed to have two layers of conductors. for a 12 slot machine. 8. Each layer of conductors can have a number of windings. For example. . Note 6. Enter the number of virtual slots per each real slot in the Virtual Slots field. This value is the number of turns per coil multiplied by the number of layers. Enter the number of wires per conductor in the Number of Strands field. The coil pitch is the number of slots separating one winding. Enter the coil pitch. Inc. Enter the thickness of the double-sided wire wrap in the Wire Wrap field. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. All rights reserved. Inc. . When you select a gauge number.Maxwell 3D Online Help ically obtain this value from the wire library. This option allows you to define a conductor that is made of different size wires. then enter the half-turn length of the armature winding in the Half Turn Length field. You can select from the following options: You can select a specific gauge number.13mm. This option allows you to manually enter the Wire Diameter. 12. Select the Wire Size: a. a single conductor may consist of 5 wires. The gauge number is based on AWG settings. Inc. When you are done setting the wire size. 13. Inc. 11.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. This is useful when USER you want to enter a diameter that does not correspond to a particular wire gauge. The diameter information is then written to the output file when you analyze the design. b. . c. All rights reserved. Select a wire gauge from the Gauge pull-down menu. . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. the <number> Wire Diameter field is automatically updated. MIXED For example. The Wire Size window appears. and RMxprt automatically calculates AUTO the optimal value.© SAS IP. click OK to close the Wire Size window and return to the Properties window. Do one of the following: • If you selected Input Half-turn Length. Click the End/Insulation tab. Click the button for Wire Size. Select or clear the Input Half-turn Length check box. d. 9-84 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. Select a value from the Wire Diameter pull-down list.5 . You can create your own wire table using Machine>Wire. and then you can select this wire table using the Tools>Options>Machine Options command. Insulation Conductor y Wire Wrap = 2*y 10. 3 wires with a diameter of 0.21mm and 2 with a diameter of 0. This option sets the Wire Diameter to zero. Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 16. 17. All rights reserved. Inc. Enter the thickness of the insulation layer in the Layer Insulation field. . Enter the thickness of the wedge insulation in the Wedge Thickness field. then enter the end length adjustment of the stator coils in the End Adjustment field. Enter the inner diameter of the coil tip in the Tip Inner Diameter field. 19. End Adjustment End of Stator Stator Coil 14.5 . The end adjustment is the distance one end of the conductor extends vertically beyond the end of the stator. 15. Enter the inner radius of the base corner in the Base Inner Radius field. Enter the thickness of the slot liner insulation in the Slot Liner field. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. .Maxwell 3D Online Help • If you cleared Input Half-turn Length. Enter the distance between two rotor coils in the End Clearance field.© SAS IP. Slot Insulation 18. Inc. RMxprt Machine Types 9-85 Release 14. select MIXED from the Gauge pull-down menu. Defining Different Size Wires for a PMDC Motor Use the Gauge option if you have a conductor that is made up different size wires.13mm. Inc.21mm.© SAS IP. The first line will list Diameter = 0. In the Wire Size window. Enter the Thickness of the wire in the table. Enter the Fillet value in the table. 3. Select from None. Enter the limited slot fill factor for the wire design in the Limited Fill Factor field. To define different size wires: 1. When you are finished defining the wires. 4. All rights reserved.13 and Number = 2. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. The second line will list Diameter = 0. Select either Round or Rectangular as the Wire Type. Enter a Number in the table to specify how many of the conductor’s wires have this diameter. or Full. Enter a Number in the table to specify how many of the conductor’s wires have this data. double-click the Machine-Rotor-Winding entry in the project tree. and 3 of those wires have a diameter of 0. Enter the appropriate wire data in the table: • • For a round wire: • • Enter the Diameter in the table. Rotor Winding Data for PMDC Motors To access the stator winding data. Select the type of equalizer connection from the Equalizer Connection pull-down menu. For a rectangular wire: • • • • Enter the Width of the wire in the table. Click OK to close the Properties window. click OK to close the Wire Size window and return to the RMxprt Properties window. and the other 2 have a diameter of 0. Half. 2. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each size wire you want to add. An equivalent wire diameter is displayed as Wire Size value in the Winding tab in the Properties window. 9-86 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14.Maxwell 3D Online Help 20. 22.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 5. Inc. .21 and Number = 3. . then the mixed wire size table will have two lines. Note For example. Click Add to add the new wire data. 6. if one conductor is made up of 5 wires. 21.5 . Half Turn Length The half-turn length of the armature winding. or 3). Click the button to open the Wire Size window where you can specify units. or triple windings (1. Virtual Slots The number of virtual slots per real slot. Input Half-turn Select or clear this check box to specify whether or not you want to enter the half-turn length. Base Inner Radius The inner radius of the base corner. When this check box is selected. Inc. Diameter End Clearance The end clearance between two adjacent coils. Wire Size The diameter of the wire (0 for auto-design).© SAS IP. diameter. and gauge. Multiplex Number Single. Wave. All rights reserved. the Length Half Turn Length field appears the next time you open the Properties window. Slot Coil Pitch The coil pitch measured in number of slots. Layer Insulation The thickness of the insulation layer. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. the End Adjustment field appears instead. Conductors per The number of conductors per rotor slot (0 for auto-design). Inc. . double. and Frog Leg. Number of The number of wires per conductor (0 for auto-design).Maxwell 3D Online Help The Rotor Winding Data Properties window contains the following fields: Winding tabWinding Type End/ Insulation tab The type of rotor winding. RMxprt Machine Types 9-87 Release 14. Tip Inner The inner diameter of the coil tip.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Wedge Thickness The thickness of the wedge insulation. When this check box is selected. wire type. . 2.5 . Click the button to open the Winding Type window and choose from Lap. Slot Liner The thickness of the slot liner insulation. Strands Wire Wrap The thickness of the double-sided wire wrap (0 to automatically obtain this value from the wire library). For Cylinder commutators. Enter the Commutator Length. For Pancake commutators. Connection Defining the Commutator and Brush for a PMDC Motor The commutator allows current transfer between DC terminals or brushes and the rotor coils. When you place the mouse cursor over the commutator type. Click the Commutator tab. 6. do the following: a. 3. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. Enter the Commutator Diameter. To define the commutator and brush pairs: 1.5 . providing the current to the system as a function of rotation. Enter the thickness of the insulation between two consecutive commutator segments in the Commutator Insulation field. Half. Equalizer The connection type of the equalizer.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Select Cylinder or Pancake Type as the Commutator Type. . Select from None. double-click the Machine>Commutator entry in the project tree on the desktop. 5. Due to the action of the commutator. Inc.© SAS IP. b. an outline of the commutator appears.) 2. do the following: a. Inc. or Full. To open the Commutator Data Properties window. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Enter the Inner Diameter. . Enter the Outer Diameter. Note 4. the corresponding magnetic field has a fixed distribution with respect to the stator. b. 9-88 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14.Maxwell 3D Online Help Limited Fill FactorThe limited slot fill factor for the wire design. All rights reserved. Note The brush displacement is positive for the counter-clockwise direction. the diameter of the commutator.5 . Commutator Length For a Cylinder commutator type. 10. All rights reserved. Click the button to open the Select tab Commutator Type window and select from Cylinder or Pancake. These fields are shown only when the Friction Loss field in the General window is set to zero. Commutator Diameter For a Cylinder commutator type.Maxwell 3D Online Help 7. if the rotor turns clockwise and the brush displacement is also clockwise. 14. For a Pancake commutator type. Inc. Click OK to close the Properties window. the length of the commutator. then the angle is positive. For example. 9. The thickness of the insulation between the two commutator bars. . the Brush Press and Frictional Coefficient fields will be hidden in the Commutator/Brush window. Enter the Frictional Coefficient of the brush. Note If the Friction Loss field is used in the General window. 12. Inc. double-click the Machine>Commutator entry in the project tree. Enter the Brush Length. the inner diameter of the commutator. Enter the angle of displacement from the neutral axis. Enter the Brush Width. Click the Brush tab. 15. . then the angle is negative. in mechanical degrees. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inner Diameter Commutator Insulation RMxprt Machine Types 9-89 Release 14. the outer diameter of the commutator. in the Brush Displacement field. Outer Diameter For a Pancake commutator type. Commutator and Brush Data for PMDC Motors To access the commutator and brush data.© SAS IP. 11. Enter the mechanical pressure of the brushes as they press against the commutator in the Brush Press field. Enter the number of brush pairs when using a wave armature winding in the Brush Pairs field. Enter the voltage drop across one brush pair in the Brush Drop field. 13. The Commutator Data Properties window contains the following fields: Commutator Commutator Type The type of commutator.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. if the rotor turns clockwise but the brush displacement is counter-clockwise. 8. . in mechanical degrees (positive for anti-rotating direction). right-click Analysis in the project tree.5 .) 2. double-click the Machine>Shaft entry in the project tree on the desktop. To open the Solution Setup window. The length of the brush. The Operation Type is automatically set to Motor for this machine type. (Available only when Frictional Loss is set to zero for the machine. 3. Click OK to close the Properties window. 9-90 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14.) The frictional coefficient of the brush.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.) Defining the Shaft Data for a PMDC Motor To define the shaft: 1. Select or clear the Magnetic Shaft check box to specify whether or not the shaft is to be made of magnetic material. The brush press per unit area. The number of brush pairs. double-click the Machine>Shaft entry in the project tree. Inc. Shaft Data for PMDC Motors To access the shaft data. Click the General tab. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. All rights reserved. 3. The displacement of the brush from the neutral position.Maxwell 3D Online Help Brush tab Brush Width Brush Length Brush Pairs Brush Displacement Brush Drop Brush Press Frictional Coefficient The width of the brush. The output power remains constant in the motor. The voltage drop across a one-pair brush. 2. Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a PMDC Motor To define the solution data: 1. Inc. and click Add Solution Setup. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. To open the Shaft Data Properties window. .© SAS IP. (Available only when Frictional Loss is set to zero for the machine. The Shaft Data Properties window contains the following fields: Magnetic Shaft Select or clear this check box to indicate whether or not the shaft is made of magnetic material. Select the Load Type used in the motor from the following options: Const Speed Const Power The speed remains constant in the motor. Tload = Trated * (n/ nrated)2 where Trated is given by the output power divided by the given rated speed. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. In this case. 8. The Solution Setup window contains the following fields: Operation Type Load Type Rated Output Power Rated Voltage Rated Speed Operating Temperature The operation type is automatically set to Motor for this machine type. For this machine type. right-click Analysis in the project tree. In this case. and select the units. Type a value for the rated speed. and Fan Load. Select from Const Speed. 6. All rights reserved.5 . Type a value for the rated voltage. 4. Const Power. Enter the desired output speed of the motor at the load point in the Rated Speed field. In this case. The load varies nonlinearly with speed. given by the output power divided by the given rated speed. and click Add Solution Setup. Enter the output power developed at the shaft of the motor in the Rated Output Power field. and select the units. and select the units. Enter the temperature at which the system functions in the Operating Temperature field. Inc. . Type a value for the operating temperature. The torque increases linearly with speed. the General tab. Enter the RMS line-to-line voltage in the Rated Voltage field. . Click OK to close the Solution Setup window.Maxwell 3D Online Help Const Torque Linear Torque Fan Load The torque remains constant regardless of the speed. there is only one tab.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Tload = Trated. Linear Torque. Inc. Tload = Trated * (n/ nrated) where Trated is given by the output power divided by the given rated speed. 7. Type a value for the rated output voltage.© SAS IP. Const Torque. Related Topics: Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a PMDC Motor RMxprt Machine Types 9-91 Release 14. 5. Related Topics: Solution Data for PMDC Motors Solution Data for PMDC Motors To access the solution data. and select the units. The default is Const Power. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. All rights reserved. Inc.© SAS IP.5 . Inc. . .Maxwell 3D Online Help 9-92 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. commercial. Their basic structures are the same. and rated output voltage and frequency.Maxwell 3D Online Help Three-Phase Synchronous Machines After you have selected Three-Phase Synchronous Machines as your model type. such as its associated pole-body dimensions and air gaps. such as the damper dimensions. The frequency of the voltage induced in the stator is given by f=pv. All rights reserved. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Also see the Analysis Approach for Three-Phase Synchronous Machines. conductors.5 . The rotor is equipped with a multi-pole winding excited by a DC source. Their basic structures are the same. Analysis Approach for Three-Phase Synchronous Machines The three-phase salient-pole synchronous electric machine has two types: the generator and the motor. The three-phase salient-pole synchronous electric machine has two types: the generator and the motor. Three-phase synchronous generators are the main source of electrical energy for industrial. and laminations. The machine is capable of producing both active and reactive power as required by the load connected at the stator phasor. such as the parallel branches. and private use. Rotor winding data and the winding control parameters. Optional Rotor damper data.© SAS IP. Winding data. and wire dimensions. stator diameter. and v is the velocity of the rotor. . Rotor pole data. They receive mechanical energy at the shaft and transform it into electrical energy. power. Shaft Data Solution data. and material properties. Optional stator Vent data. you need to define the following: • • • • • • • • • General data. Inc. The spinning rotor produces a rotating magnetic field in the air gap of the machine. skew width. rings. . Inc. and voltage. such as the unit system. where p is the number of pairs of poles.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. The stator is equipped with a three-phase winding that has a sinusoidal spatial distribution. such as specifying motor or generator application. Usually the frequency-domain phasor diagram is RMxprt Machine Types 9-93 Release 14. such as the slot types and dimensions. Stator data. Taking the power angle. jI X1 M jI Xaq U jI d Xad IR1 E0 jI q Xaq N I Iq Id O Generator Motor In the figure. while a linearized value is used in the phasor diagram. The phasor diagram for a generator is shown on the left and and that for a motor is shown on the right. as θ . Inc.Maxwell 3D Online Help adopted to analyze the characteristics. then the angle that I legs E0 is: ψ = θ+ϕ The d. Then a frozen method is applied to derive E0. The output power (electric power) is directly computed from voltage and current as: 9-94 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. . d-axis armature reactance.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. a phasor represented by OM can be derived by: U + I(R1 + jX1 + jXaq) The direction of E0 can. Taking the input voltage U as the reference phasor. Xad is nonlinear. respectively. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. the angle that U legs E0. Inc. and exciting current If.5 . . R1.and q-axis currents are then represented by the following: Id = I * sin( ψ ) Iq = I * cos( ψ ) The phasor length ON represents the d-axis back EMF from d-axis resultant flux linkage and is used to determine the d-axis field saturation. for a given current: I = I ∠– ϕ where ϕ is the power factor angle. and Xaq are armature resistance. be obtained. armature leakage reactance. Xad.© SAS IP. therefore. Xad. All rights reserved. and q-axis armature reactance. X1. but their phasor relationships and the computation methods are slightly different. it is possible to design single. armature copper loss.and double-layer winding arrangement for any purposes. All rights reserved.© SAS IP. Winding Editor Supporting Any Single. as long as it is physically possible. Auto Arrangement of Three-phase Windings Almost all commonly used three-phase single. Pcua. winding distribution. odd. This is specified in the solution setup. ironcore loss. When asymmetric three-phase windings are used. skew slot. users can also specify any special winding by using of the Winding Editor function. Analyze Air-Gap Magnetic Field Distribution For both uniform and non-uniform air gaps. Pcuf and Pex are frictional and wind loss. field winding copper loss. even. The input mechanical shaft torque is: T1 = P1/ ω where SYMBOL is synchronous speed in rad/s. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. When a designer adopts single-layer whole-coiled windings. winding arrangement is optimized in such a way that minimum negativesequence and zero-sequence components are achieved. Padd. RMxprt also supports a double-layer winding with half-turn coils which are auto-arranged in the order of even. additional loss. Analyze EMF Waveform and Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) Based on the analysis of the air-gap magnetic field waveform. RMxprt will perform winding arrangement optimization to minimize the average coil pitch. through modification of phase belonging.5 . taking into account coil short pitch.and double-layer. the emf waveforms in the coils and the windings are analyzed to solve for the emf distortion facRMxprt Machine Types 9-95 Release 14. Schwarz-Christopher Transformation is adopted to solve for the air-gap magnetic field distribution. odd.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. In Winding Editor. …. and even. The efficiency is computed by: eff = P2/P1 * 100% Main Features • • • • • Adapted to both Synchronous Motor and Generator The structures of the salient-pole synchronous motor and the generator are basically the same. respectively. load effects and other factors.and Double-Layer Windings Besides taking advantage of the winding auto-arrangement function in RMxprt. number of turns. their output characteristics data are also different. . PFe.and whole-type ac windings (including fractional-pitch windings) can be automatically arranged. in-slot and outslot number of each coil.Maxwell 3D Online Help P2 = 3*U*I*cos( ϕ ) The input power (mechanical power) is defined as: P1 = P2 + Pfw + Pcua + PFe + Padd + Pcuf + Pex where Pfw. Inc. and exciter loss. half. winding connection. . Users do not need to define coils one by one. odd. To add a damper. Right-click Analysis in the project tree. Double-click the Machine-Rotor-Winding entry in the project tree to define the rotor conductors and windings. Note When you place the cursor over an entry field. Defining a Three-Phase Synchronous Machine The general procedure for defining a three-phase synchronous machine is as follows: 1. you can add a vent to. 11. . All the bars could be connected together.5 . 4. and click Add Solution Setup to define this solution data. but not connected with those under other poles. You must then specify the slot type and other properties for the damper. RMxprt can deal with all those complicated situations and give the dynamic parameters for the damping winding. or remove an existing vent from the rotor. . use Machine-Insert Damper. Double-click the Machine-Shaft entry in the project tree to define the magnetism of the shaft. Choose RMxprt>Analyze to analyze the design. Optionally. 13. This inserts the damper in the project tree under the rotor. 7. 2. The bars could be connected through end-plate. the damping winding of the salient-pole synchronous machine is located in the surface of magnetic field poles.Maxwell 3D Online Help tors. • Analyze Dynamic Parameters of Damping Winding Different from the squirrel-cage winding of the induction machine. 3. 9-96 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. 12. 10. or remove an existing vent from the stator. conductors. 8. and right-click to display the pop-up menu. and insulation data. To add a vent select the rotor. Double-click the Machine-Stator-Winding entry in the project tree to define the stator windings. you can add a vent to. the connection of damping bars has several forms. Double-click the Machine-Stator-Slot entry in the project tree to define the stator slot dimensions. select the stator. Inc. the pole data. 5. 6. you can add a damper to the design or remove an existing damper. and the insulation data. All rights reserved. a brief description of that field appears in the status bar at the bottom of the RMxprt window. 14. Double-click the Machine-Stator entry in the project tree to define the stator geometry. and right-click to display the pop-up menu for Insert Vent. Optionally. 9. Double-click the Machine-Rotor entry in the project tree to define the general rotor geometry. Use Insert Vent. Inc.© SAS IP.and the q-axes. Furthermore. Double-click the Machine entry in the project tree to define the general data. To add a vent. Optionally. The bars under each pole could be connected. which deviates greatly along the d. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Choose File>Save to save the project. Insert a three-phase synchronous machine into a existing or new project.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. To define general stator data: 1. 5. Frictional Loss The frictional energy loss (due to friction) measured at the reference speed. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. Reference Speed The given speed of reference.) 2. Click OK to close the Properties window. Number of Poles The number of poles the machine contains. the model can be viewed in the Maxwell 2D Modeler. 3. Defining the General Data for a Three-Phase Synchronous Machine Use the General Data Properties window to define the power settings. air ducts. and losses. such as power. stacking factors. Enter the Outer Diameter of the stator. double-click the Machine entry in the project tree on the desktop. double-click the Machine entry in the project tree. Machine Type Defining the Stator for a Three-Phase Synchronous Machine Use the Stator windows to define the slot dimensions. To open the General Data Properties window. To open the Stator Data Properties window. Enter the number of poles for the machine in the Number of Poles field. 6.) 2. All rights reserved. Enter the Inner Diameter of the stator.Maxwell 3D Online Help Once the design is analyzed. Enter the given speed in the Reference Speed field. or it can be used to create a new Maxwell 2D project. and efficiency of the generator. Inc. .5 . This window allows you to define the basic parameters of the synchronous generator. RMxprt Machine Types 9-97 Release 14. Enter the power lost through frictional forces in the Frictional Loss field. . The stator is the outer lamination stack where the three-phase windings reside. speed.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. voltage. Inc. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. General Data for Three-Phase Synchronous Machines To access the general data. This value is the total number of poles in the stator (or the number of pole pairs multiplied by two). double-click the Machine>Stator entry in the project tree on the desktop. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. winding connections. Enter the wind loss measured at the reference speed in the Wind Loss field. 4. To define the general data: 1.© SAS IP. and insulation of the stator. Wind Loss The wind loss (due to air resistance) measured at the reference speed. The General Data Properties window for a three-phase induction motor contains the following fields: The machine type you selected when inserting a new RMxprt design (Three Phase Synchronous Machine). 3. and a Maxwell 3D design. 11. 8. The Stator Data Properties window contains the following fields: Outer Diameter Inner Diameter Length Stacking Factor Steel Type Number of Slots Slot Type The outer diameter of the stator core. Slot types 5 and 6 are filled with rectangular wire. Click the button for the Slot Type. and the software determines the slot width accordingly. Select a slot type (available types include 1 through 6). . Enter the skew width. The Select Slot Type window appears. 6. Select a Steel Type for the stator core: a. b. Enter 0 for a non-magnetic pressboard. The steel type of the stator core. The Select Definition window appears. The inner diameter of the stator core. The type of slots in the stator core. the software designs an optimum slot geometry. you can input the tooth width dimension. Enter the stacking factor for the stator core in the Stacking Factor field. measured in slot number. If Auto Design is enabled.5 . Click OK to close the Select Definition window and return to the Properties window. double-click the Machine>Stator entry in the project tree. a schematic of the selected type appears. When you place the mouse cursor over the slot type. displaying the slot dimension variables. in the Skew Width field. 9-98 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. Enter the number of sectors in the Lamination Sectors field. The stacking factor of the stator core. or define a new steel type. Enter the length of the stator core in the Length field. b. Click the button to open the Select Definition window. . The length of the stator core. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Click the button for Steel Type. Note c. Select the Slot Type: a. Slot types 1 though 4 are filled with round wire. Inc. Click the button to open the Select Slot Type window. 10. Enter the thickness of the magnetic pressboard in the Pressboard Thickness field. 5. c. Select a steel type from the list. Enter the Number of Slots in the stator. The number of slots the stator core contains. 7. 9.Maxwell 3D Online Help 4. 12. Stator Data for Three-Phase Synchronous Machines To access the general stator data.© SAS IP. Click OK to close the Select Slot Type window and return to the Properties window. Inc. in this case. All rights reserved. Click OK to close the Properties window.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. The skew width measured in slot number. this slot dimension is determined automatically. to design dimensions of slots Bs1 and Bs2 based on the stator tooth width. When Auto Design is selected. All rights reserved. select the Parallel Tooth check box. double-click the Machine-Stator-Slot entry in the project tree on the desktop. and Bs2. and enter a value in the Tooth Width field. Available only when Auto Design is cleared. select the Auto Design check box. double-click the Machine-Stator-Slot entry in the project tree.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. this slot dimension is determined automatically. When Parallel Tooth is selected.Maxwell 3D Online Help Lamination Sectors Pressboard Thickness Skew Width The number of lamination sectors. To open the Stator Slot Data Properties window. When Parallel Tooth is selected. . Hs0 Hs2 Bs0 Bs1 Bs2 5. Inc. Bs1. Stator Slot Data for Three-Phase Synchronous Machines To access the stator slot data.© SAS IP. Always available. Defining Stator Slots for a Three-Phase Synchronous Machine To define the slot dimensions: 1. this slot dimension is determined based on the value entered in the Tooth Width field. Enter the available slot dimensions. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. Optionally. this slot dimension is determined automatically. 3.) 2.5 . Click OK to close the Properties window. The magnetic press board thickness (0 for a non-magnetic press board). and its subsidiaries and affiliates. When Auto Design is selected. this slot dimension is determined based on the value entered in the Tooth Width field. Available only when Auto Design and Parallel Tooth are both cleared. Available only when Auto Design and Parallel Tooth are both cleared. Optionally. to automatically design the dimensions of slots Hs2. . 4. When Auto Design is selected. Always available. Inc. RMxprt Machine Types 9-99 Release 14. Bs1 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). Hs2 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). . Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. and the Tooth Tooth Width field is added. only two other fields appear in the window: Hs0 and Bs0. All rights reserved. and Bs2. Bs1. Bs0 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected).5 . Defining Stator Windings and Insulation for a Three-Phase Synchronous 9-100 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.© SAS IP. . Rs A slot dimension. on which Bs1 and Bs2 are designed. the Bs1 and Bs2 fields are removed. (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). When this check box is selected. Bs2 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). Rs is added when the slot type is 3 or 4.Maxwell 3D Online Help The Stator Slot Data Properties window contains the following fields: Auto Design Select or clear this to enable or disable auto-design of slots Hs2. Inc. Parallel Select this to design Bs1 and Bs2 based on the tooth width. Tooth Width The tooth width for the parallel tooth. When this check box is selected. Hs0 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). .) 2.© SAS IP. . Click the Winding tab. The Winding Type window appears. such as the coils. 4.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Inc. 3. number of parallel branches.5 . (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. To open the Stator Slot Winding Properties window. insulation. Inc. and physical dimensions of the windings. End Clearance Base-End Inner Radius End Adjustment Top-End Inner Diameter End of Stator Stator Coil The stator winding data defines the configuration of one phase of the three-phase windings. double-click the Machine-StatorWinding entry in the project tree on the desktop. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Select a Winding Type: a. Select from one of the following three types of winding: • • • Whole Coiled Half Coiled Editor RMxprt Machine Types 9-101 Release 14. b.Maxwell 3D Online Help Machine Use the Stator Winding window to define the stator winding data. To define the stator windings and insulation: 1. Click the button for Winding Type. wires. All rights reserved. Enter the number of layers in the stator winding in the Winding Layers field. 5 .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. You need to set up the winding arrangement for each slot. Inc.Maxwell 3D Online Help When you place the mouse cursor over a winding button. . Phase C/C return uses C/Z. Phase B/B return uses B/Y. . an outline of the selected winding appears. The following table describes the six types of windings that are possible (three for one-layer and three for two-layer): Type Description A user-defined one-layer winding arrangement. All rights reserved. Inc. For this winding type.© SAS IP. the following letters are used for the phase windings: Editor • • • Phase A/A return uses A/X. A one-layer whole-coiled winding: Whole Coiled Slot 123 9-102 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. When you select 20.5 . All rights reserved. Inc. where m is the phase number.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.© SAS IP. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. RMxprt Machine Types 9-103 Release 14. . where you can specify a different winding arrangement for each slot.Maxwell 3D Online Help A one-layer concentric half-coiled winding: Half Coiled Slot 123 A user-defined two-layer winding arrangement. the Winding Editor Editor opens. . A two-layer wave winding: Whole Coiled Slot 123 The phase belt for this winding configuration is equal to 360/2m. . Select a Winding Type. the bottom layer will be determined according to the coil pitch. Inc.Maxwell 3D Online Help A two-layer half-coiled winding: Half Coiled Slot 1 2 3 There is only one coil per phase per pair of poles. Note Example 1: A one layer winding arranged in 12 slots should be defined as type 10. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. an outline of the 9-104 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. c. . All rights reserved. 5.5 . with the following arrangement: AAZZBBXXCCYY Only the top layer needs to be defined. Inc. with the following arrangement: AAZZBBXXCCYY Example 2: A two layer winding arranged in 12 slots should be defined as type 20. Once you have clicked a button to select a winding.© SAS IP. When you place the mouse cursor over a winding. click OK to close the Winding Type window and return to the Properties window.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. enter the winding arrangement. For this winding type.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. All rights reserved. When you select this type.Maxwell 3D Online Help selected winding appears. Inc. enter the winding arrangement. RMxprt Machine Types 9-105 Release 14. .© SAS IP. and choose OK. A one-layer whole-coiled winding: 12 A one-layer concentric half-coiled winding: Slot 123 Slot 123 20 A user-defined winding arrangement. 11 phase C/C return uses C/Z. phase B/B return uses B/Y. the following letters are used for the phase windings: • • • phase A/A return uses A/X. When you select it.5 . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. The following winding types are available: 10 A user-defined single-layer winding arrangement. and choose OK. Inc. . the bottom layer will be determined according to the coil pitch.5 . Inc. 6.© SAS IP.Maxwell 3D Online Help 21 A two-layer wave winding: Slot 123 The phase belt for this winding configuration is equal to 360/2m. Enter the total number of conductors in each stator slot in the Conductors per Slot field. 22 A two-layer winding: Slot 1 2 3 Note Example 1: A one layer winding arranged in 12 slots should be defined as type 10. Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . Select or enter the number of parallel branches in one phase of the winding in the Parallel Branches field. . 7. This 9-106 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. where m is the phase number. All rights reserved. with the following arrangement: AAZZBBXXCCYY Example 2: A two layer winding arranged in 12 slots should be defined as type 20.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. with the following arrangement: AAZZBBXXCCYY Only the top layer needs to be defined. 3 wires with a diameter of 0. Click the button for Wire Size. c. and RMxprt automatically calculates AUTO the optimal value. The gauge number is based on AWG settings. 10.21mm and 2 with a diameter of 0.© SAS IP. it has a coil pitch of 5. When you select a gauge number. if a coil starts in slot 1 and ends in slot 6. Enter the thickness of the double-sided wire wrap in the Wire Wrap field. Inc. The diameter information is then written to the output file when you analyze the design. You can select from the following options: You can select a specific gauge number. MIXED For example. Enter the coil pitch. b. Insulation Conductor y Wire Wrap = 2*y 11. Inc.Maxwell 3D Online Help 8. .13mm. All rights reserved. Select a value from the Wire Diameter pull-down list. a single conductor may consist of 5 wires. Enter the number of wires per conductor in the Number of Strands field. The Wire Size window appears. Select the Wire Size: a. Enter 0 to automatically obtain this value from the wire library. When you are done setting the wire size. . This option sets the Wire Diameter to zero. in the Coil Pitch field. measured in number of slots. For example. Enter 0 to have RMxprt auto-design this value. This option allows you to manually enter the Wire Diameter. This is useful when USER you want to enter a diameter that does not correspond to a particular wire gauge.5 . value is the number of turns per coil multiplied by the number of layers. You can create your own wire table using Machine>Wire. the <number> Wire Diameter field is automatically updated. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 9. Select a wire gauge from the Gauge pull-down menu. The coil pitch is the number of slots separating one winding. This option allows you to define a conductor that is made of different size wires. and then you can select this wire table using the Tools>Options>Machine Options command. d. click OK to close the Wire Size window and RMxprt Machine Types 9-107 Release 14.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Enter the inner radius of the base corner in the Base Inner Radius field. The end adjustment is the distance one end of the conductor extends vertically beyond the end of the stator. All rights reserved. . End Adjustment End of Stator Stator Coil 15. Do one of the following: • • If you selected Input Half-turn Length. 22. Inc. 13. Enter the limited slot fill factor for the wire design in the Limited Fill Factor field. If you cleared Input Half-turn Length.© SAS IP. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Enter the thickness of the wedge insulation in the Wedge Thickness field. 16. . 20. Click OK to close the Properties window. Enter the thickness of the insulation layer in the Layer Insulation field. 18.Maxwell 3D Online Help return to the Properties window. Select or clear the Input Half-turn Length check box. Click the End/Insulation tab.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 12. double-click the Machine-Stator-Winding entry in the project tree. then enter the end length adjustment of the stator coils in the End Adjustment field. 19. Stator Winding and Insulation for Three-Phase Synchronous Machines To access the stator winding and insulation data. Enter the distance between two stator coils in the End Clearance field. 17. then enter the half-turn length of the armature winding in the Half Turn Length field. 9-108 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. Inc. Enter the inner diameter of the coil tip in the Tip Inner Diameter field.5 . Enter the thickness of the slot liner insulation in the Slot Liner field. 14. 21. wire type.© SAS IP. Parallel Branches The number of parallel branches in the stator winding. diameter. Slot Coil Pitch The coil pitch measured in number of slots.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. the Insulation Length7 Half Turn Length field appears the next time you open the tab Properties window. Inc. Slot Liner The thickness of the slot liner insulation.5 . Click the button to open the Wire Size window where you can specify units. Conductors per The number of conductors per stator slot (0 for auto-design). Wire Size The diameter of the wire (0 for auto-design). the End Adjustment field appears instead. Half Turn Length The half-turn length of the armature winding. Radius Tip Inner The inner diameter of the coil tip. Wedge Thickness The thickness of the wedge insulation. . and gauge. Number of The number of wires per conductor (0 for auto-design). End Adjustment The end length adjustment of the stator coils. . Base Inner The inner radius of the base corner. RMxprt Machine Types 9-109 Release 14. Inc. and Editor. When this check box is selected. Half Coiled. All rights reserved. Click the button to open the Winding Type window and choose from Whole Coiled. When this check box is selected. Strands Wire Wrap The thickness of the double-sided wire wrap (0 to automatically obtain this value from the wire library). End/ Input Half-turn Select or clear this check box to specify whether or not you want to enter the half-turn length.Maxwell 3D Online Help The Stator Winding Data Properties window contains the following fields: Winding tabWinding Layers The number of winding layers. which is the distance one end of the conductor extends vertically beyond the end of the stator. Diameter End Clearance The end clearance between two adjacent coils. Winding Type The type of stator winding. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Defining Different Size Wires for a Three-Phase Synchronous Machine Use the Gauge option if you have a conductor that is made up different size wires. 4. The Winding Editor window appears. Factor Winding Editor for a Three-Phase Synchronous Machine For a three-phase synchronous machine.5 . 3. you may want to specify a different number of conductors for each stator slot. click OK to close the Winding Editor window. you cannot change the turns or pitch. Select either Round or Rectangular as the Wire Type. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.© SAS IP. Limited Fill The limited slot fill factor for the wire design. To specify the number of turns for each coil: 1. All rights reserved. In the table in the upper left. Click Machine>Winding>Edit Layout. .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 5. Inc. In the Wire Size window. set which phase you want for each coil and which slot is the “in” and “out” slot for the current in each coil. 9-110 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. When these options are selected. . select MIXED from the Gauge pull-down menu. 2. When you are satisfied with the coil settings. you may want to specify a multiplier by clicking the Periodic Multiplier check box and specifying a value. The Winding Editor makes this possible by enabling you to specify the number of turns for each coil. depending on whether you want to be able to change these setting in the table above. If you are working on a quarter or half model. Inc.Maxwell 3D Online Help Layer Insulation The thickness of the insulation layer. 2. Select or deselect the Constant Turns or Constant Pitch check boxes. To define different size wires: 1. Click Insert Vent.21mm. Enter a Number in the table to specify how many of the conductor’s wires have this diameter. Enter a Number in the table to specify how many of the conductor’s wires have this data. 4. Click Remove Vent. Right click on the stator icon in the project tree to display the shortcut menu. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each size wire you want to add. Stator Vent Data for Three-Phase Synchronous Machines To insert a vent on a stator for a three phase synchronous machine: 1. double click on a vent item. Enter the appropriate wire data in the table: • • For a round wire: • • Enter the Diameter in the table. Vent Ducts The number of radial vent ducts. Magnetic spacer width Width of magnetic spacer which holds vent ducts. Duct pitch. . Center-to-Center distance between two adjacent Vent ducts RMxprt Machine Types 9-111 Release 14. then the mixed wire size table will have two lines. The second line will list Diameter = 0. click OK to close the Wire Size window.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. . 6.© SAS IP. The first line will list Diameter = 0. The vent icon appears in the project tree under the stator.21 and Number = 3. This removes the vent item from the project tree. 5.13mm. For a rectangular wire: • • • • Enter the Width of the wire in the table.5 . Note For example. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 2. 1. Choose Add to add the new wire data. To remove an existing vent item. Enter the Thickness of the wire in the table. Right-click on the stator icon in the project tree to display the shortcut menu. An equivalent wire diameter is displayed as Wire Size value in the Winding tab in the Properties window. Inc. 2. To access the Vent properties for a vent.Maxwell 3D Online Help 3. Enter the Fillet value in the table. All rights reserved. O for non-magnetic spacer. and the other 2 have a diameter of 0. and 3 of those wires have a diameter of 0. if one conductor is made up of 5 wires. When you are finished defining the wires. The Vent Properties window contains the following fields. Duct Width The width of the radial vent ducts. Inc.13 and Number = 2. 8. Enter the pole-arc center offset from the rotor center in the Pole Arc Offset field. b. All rights reserved.Maxwell 3D Online Help Defining the Rotor for a Three-Phase Synchronous Machine The rotor consists of copper bars in which current is induced by the magnetic fields produced by the stator windings. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. Enter the stacking factor for the rotor core in the Stacking Factor field. Enter the inner diameter of the rotor in the Inner Diameter field. 5. Click the button for Steel Type. or define a new steel type.5 . 9. The Select Definition window appears. 3. To open the Rotor Data Properties window. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 2. 4. Enter the length of the rotor core in the Length field. Radius Offset 9-112 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 7. Inc. double-click Machine-Rotor and Machine-Rotor-Winding to define the rotor. double-click the Machine-Rotor entry in the project tree on the desktop. To define the general rotor data: 1. Inc. Enter the outer diameter of the rotor in the Outer Diameter field. Select a Steel Type for the rotor core: a. Select a steel type from the list. Click OK to close the Select Definition window and return to the Properties window. c. 6. Click the Pole tab. . .© SAS IP. In the project tree.) Click the Rotor tab. All rights reserved. Enter the height of the pole shoe in the Pole Shoe Height field. Enter the offset of the second arc parallel with the pole-center line in the Off2_y field. Rotor. 13. 12. Enter the offset of the second arc perpendicular to the pole-center line in the Off2_x field. 17. 18. The stacking factor of the rotor core. The height of the pole shoe. The inner diameter of the rotor core. 15. The Rotor Data Properties window contains the following fields: Rotor tab Pole tab Outer Diameter Inner Diameter Length Steel Type Stacking Factor Pole Arc Offset Pole Shoe Width Pole Shoe Height Pole Body Width Pole Body Height Second Air Gap The outer diameter of the rotor core. Click the button to open the Select Definition window. The width of the pole body. To include the two arcs in the half-pole range. Enter the thickness of the press board in the Press Board Thickness field. Enter the width of the pole shoe in the Pole Shoe Width field. 19. . Click the Insulation tab. The width of the pole shoe. c. 16.5 . Enter the thickness of the insulating material on the side of the pole body in the Pole Insulation field. Click OK to close the Properties window.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Enter the height of the pole body in the Pole Body Height field. do the following: a. Inc. Enter the width between the rotor pole and rotor yoke in the Second Air Gap field. . 20. The width of the second air gap. 22. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Rotor Pole. Enter the width of the pole body in the Pole Body Width field. The pole-arc center offset from the rotor center. between the rotor pole and rotor yoke. and insulation data double-click the Machine>Rotor entry in the project tree. The steel type of the rotor core. 11. Inc. Enter the clearance distance between the windings in the Winding Clearance field. and Insulation for Three-Phase Synchronous Machines To access the general rotor data. b. The length of the rotor core. pole data. RMxprt Machine Types 9-113 Release 14. The height of the pole body. Select the Select Pole Arc check box. 21. Enter the thickness of the insulating material beneath the shoe pole in the Shoe Insulation field. Select or clear the Magnetic PressBoard check box to specify whether or not the press board is made of magnetic material.Maxwell 3D Online Help 10. 14.© SAS IP. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Click the button to open the Select Definition window.5 . All rights reserved. Defining the Rotor Pole for a Three-Phase Synchronous Machine The rotor pole drives the electromagnetic field that is coupled with the stator windings. Off2_x The offset of the second arc perpendicular to the pole-center line. PressBoard Press Board The thickness of the press board. Off2_y The offset of the second arc parallel with the pole-center line. This field is only available when Second Pole Arc is selected. Stacking Factor The stacking factor of the rotor pole. Magnetic Select or clear this option to specify whether or not the press board is made of magnetic material. The following figure shows a partial diagram of a rotor pole: 9-114 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14.Maxwell 3D Online Help Insulation tab Second Pole Arc Select or clear this option to specify whether or not the pole surface includes the two arcs in the half-pole range. Default value is the same as the rotor core. This field is only available when Second Pole Arc is selected. The clearance distance between the windings. . Inc. two additional fields appear: Off2_x and Off2_y.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Thickness Steel Type The steel type of the rotor pole. Inc. Default value is the same as the rotor core. Pole Insulation Winding Clearance The thickness of the insulating material on the side of the pole body. Shoe Insulation The thickness of the insulating material beneath the pole shoe. When you select this check box.© SAS IP. . All rights reserved. Slot pitch Center slot pitch Pole shoe width Pole insulation Overall height Shoe insulation Wire width Pole body width Wire thickness Second air-gap RMxprt Machine Types 9-115 Release 14. .© SAS IP. The rotor winding provides the excitation for the electromagnetic field that produces the rotor pole.Maxwell 3D Online Help The following figure shows a diagram of an entire rotor: Defining the Rotor Winding Data for a Three-Phase Synchronous Machine Use the Rotor Winding window to define the wires and physical dimensions of the rotor winding. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. .5 . Inc. Inc. All rights reserved.) 2. double-click the Machine-Rotor-Winding entry in the project tree on the desktop. When you place the mouse cursor over the winding type. Interturn Insulation Enter the gauge of the wire in the Wire Size field. 5. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Cylinder.5 .© SAS IP. Enter the Axial Clearance to specify the axial distance between the core and the coil at the end of the lamination stack. from Round. Winding Fillet Axial Clearance Rotor winding Radial Duct Width Rotor length 10. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. 8. c. To open the Rotor Winding Properties window.Maxwell 3D Online Help To define the rotor windings: 1. Click OK to close the Properties window. Limited Cross Height 12. 9.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. The Winding Type window appears. Click OK to return to the Properties window. . Inc. 9-116 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. Enter the width of the insulating wire wrap in the Wire Wrap field. Inc. 4. Click to select the type of winding. Limited Cross Width 11. Click the button. b. or EdgeWise. Enter the number of parallel branches for the winding in the Parallel Branches field. 7. Select the Winding Type for the rotor: a. 6. a schematic of the selected winding appears 3. Conductors per Pole Enter the number of wires in each conductor in the Number of Strands field. . Winding Fillet 13. The slot type. Damper Data for Three-Phase Synchronous Machines By option. Winding Type Defining the Rotor Damper Data To define a rotor damper for a machine that permits one: 1. Click the button to open the Winding Type window and choose from Whole Coiled. Axial Clearance The axial gap between the field winding and the pole body or inner coil. Width Limited Cross The limited cross-section height for the winding design or arrangement (0 for available maximum area). Pole Number of The number of wires per conductor (0 for auto-design). Inc. you can add a damper to or remove damper from the rotor of a three phase machine. 4.Maxwell 3D Online Help Rotor Winding Data for Three-Phase Synchronous Machines To access the rotor winding data. and gauge. RMxprt Machine Types 9-117 Release 14.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. and end conductor type are entered by clicking on buttons that open other windows. Strands Wire Wrap The thickness of the double-sided wire wrap (0 to automatically obtain this value from the wire library). . Click OK to close the properties window. Parallel Branches The number of parallel branches in the rotor winding. Insulation Wire Size The diameter of the wire (0 for auto-design). Click Machine>Insert Damper. wire type. Half Coiled. 3. Height Winding Fillet The size of the winding fillet. Interturn The thickness of the inter-turn insulation of an edgewise winding. Click the button to open the Wire Size window where you can specify units. The Rotor Winding Data Properties window contains the following fields: The type of rotor winding. double-click the Machine-Rotor-Winding entry in the project tree. and Editor. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. diameter. the bar conductor type. . Enter the appropriate values for the damper.5 . This field only appears when EdgewiseCoil is selected as the Winding Type. Conductors per The number of conductors per rotor pole (0 for auto-design).© SAS IP. All rights reserved. A slot icon appears in the hierarchy under the damper. Limited Cross The limited cross-section width for the winding design or arrangement (0 for available maximum area). Inc. 2. The Damper icon appears in the project tree under the rotor icon. Double click on the Damper icon to display the properties window for the damper. The damper also includes an associated slot. Bar conductor type. 2. Inc. double-click the Machine>Shaft entry in the project tree on the desktop. 1. Cast Rotor.5 . End length Single side end extended bar length/ End ring width Axial width of end ring. All rights reserved. right-click on the rotor icon in the project tree to display the short cut menu. The damper and associated slot are removed from the project tree. To open the Shaft Data Properties window. Click Insert Damper on the menu. Inc. Specify this by clicking the button in the properties field and using the Select Definition window to find and assign the material. The damper data contains the following fields. Whether the rotor squirrel cage winding is cast. Specify this by clicking the button in the properties field and selecting from the Select Slot Type window. . 2. The damper appears in the project tree under the rotor. . and its subsidiaries and affiliates.) 2. pole Slot type Damper slot type. Select or clear the Magnetic Shaft check box to specify whether or not the shaft is to be made 9-118 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. To remove a damper. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. End ring height Radial height of end ring.© SAS IP.Maxwell 3D Online Help To add a damper: 1. Damper slots per Number of damper slots per pole. and using the Select Definition window to find and assign materials. Specify this by clicking the button in the properties field and use the Select Pole type window to select from the available types. Center slot pitch Center slot pitch in mechanical degrees End Ring type Type of end ring for the damper. Slot pitch Slot pitch in mechanical degrees. Click Remove Damper on the menu. Right-click on the rotor icon in the project tree to display the short cut menu. Defining the Shaft Data for a Three-Phase Synchronous Machine To define the shaft: 1. Specify this by clicking the button in the properties field. End ring conductor type. Maxwell 3D Online Help 3. Enter the output power developed at the shaft of the machine in the Rated Output Power field. Enter the temperature at which the system functions in the Operating Temperature field. Enter the desired output speed of the motor at the load point in the Rated Speed field. Tload = Trated. RMxprt Machine Types 9-119 Release 14. For Motors. In this case. 2. of magnetic material. The torque increases linearly with speed. . Tload = Trated * (n/nrated) where Trated is given by the output power divided by the given rated speed. For Motors. Shaft Data for Three-Phase Synchronous Machines To access the shaft data. double-click the Machine>Shaft entry in the project tree. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. The torque remains constant regardless of the speed. 4.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 6. Click the Three-Phase Synchronous Machine tab. right-click Analysis in the project tree. For Motors. Select Motor or Generator from the Operation Type pull-down list. . All rights reserved. 9. given by the output power divided by the given rated speed. The load varies nonlinearly with speed. The output power remains constant in the motor. and click Add Solution Setup. In this case. The Shaft Data Properties window contains the following fields: Magnetic Shaft Select or clear this check box to indicate whether or not the shaft is made of magnetic material. In this case. Inc. 8. Select the Load Type used in the motor from the following options: Infinite Bus Independent Generator Const Speed Const Power Const Torque Linear Torque Fan Load 5. Inc. The speed remains constant in the motor. Click OK to close the Properties window.5 . For Motors. 7. For Generators. For Motors. Tload = Trated * (n/nrated)2 where Trated is given by the output power divided by the given rated speed. For Generators. Click the General tab. Enter the RMS line-to-line voltage in the Rated Voltage field. To open the Solution Setup window. 3.© SAS IP. Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Three-Phase Synchronous Machine To define the solution data: 1. 5 . Type a value for the rated output voltage.Maxwell 3D Online Help 10. Input Exciting On the Three-Phase Synchronous Machine tab. Enter a value in the Rated Power Factor field. If you select this check box. Type a value for the rated power factor. select the check box. The default is Const Power. enter the efficiency of the exciter used to supply the rotor winding with DC current if it is mechanically connected to the shaft of the generator. Related Topics: Solution Data for Three-Phase Synchronous Machines Solution Data for Three-Phase Synchronous Machines To access the solution data. Factor Winding On the Three-Phase Synchronous Machine tab. Connection Exciter Efficiency On the Three-Phase Synchronous Machine tab. Click OK to close the Solution Setup window. then enter the exciting current. For a motor. Select from Motor or Generator. 11. 12. and select the units. 14. . All rights reserved. select from Infinite Bus and Independent Generator. Const Torque. Rated Output On the General tab. select from Const Speed. Inc. Power Rated Voltage On the General tab. Type a percent for the exciter efficiency. and select the units. For a generator. and select the units. Operating On the General tab. Type a value for the rated voltage. In the Exciter Efficiency field. and click Add Solution Setup. and select the units. Type a value for the operating temperature. . right-click Analysis in the project tree. To enter an Input Exciting Current.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Select Wye or Delta from the Winding Connection pull-down list. On the General tab. and select the units. Current Operation Type Load Type Related Topics: Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Three-Phase Synchronous Machine 9-120 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. Select from Wye or Delta.© SAS IP. enter a value. 13. Linear Torque. Inc. Temperature Rated Power On the Three-Phase Synchronous Machine tab. Type a value for the rated speed. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. The efficiency value ranges between 0 and 1 and will only affect the total efficiency result. The Solution Setup window contains the following fields: On the General tab. and select the units. Rated Speed On the General tab. and Fan Load. Const Power. the stator produces a rotating magnetic field. Lq. All rights reserved. ω e is rotor speed in electrical rad/s. In brushless permanent-magnet DC (BLDC) motors. Ld. Rotor data Rotor pole data. and skew width of the stator. The transformations for terminal voltages. . creating a structure with the same number of poles at the stator. and control circuit information. The rotor is equipped with permanent magnets. Inc. q-axis synchronous inductance. Circuit data.Maxwell 3D Online Help Brushless Permanent-Magnet DC Motors After you have selected Brushless Permanent-Magnet DC Motors as your model type. Shaft data Solution data. Stator data. The switching sequence is controlled so that it is synchronized with the position of the rotor. such as the voltage. and 0-axis inductance.© SAS IP. winding data. induced voltages. The phases are connected to the DC bus through a switching circuit. respectively. or from induced voltages for sensor-less control system. such as the magnet dimensions and stacking factor. The performance of BLDC motors is analyzed via a time-domain simulation. The signal of rotor position may be obtained from a position sensor. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. such as lead trigger angle. As a result. . such as the diameter. Analysis Approach for Brushless PMDC Motors The stator of a brushless DC motor is equipped with a polyphase winding. slot dimensions. The voltage equation in the time domain is: R1 + Ld p –Lq ωe 0 id ⋅ iq vq – eq = –Ld ωe R1 + Lq p 0 e0 0 0 R1 + L0 p i0 v0 vd ed where R1. transistor drop. and winding currents are given by the following three equations: RMxprt Machine Types 9-121 Release 14. you need to define the following: • • • • • • • General data. and ρ represents for d/dt. speed. The stator switches act like a commutator in a classic DC motor. and circuit type of the model. and L0 are armature resistance. such as rated output voltage and frequency. d-axis synchronous inductance. the armature currents are commutated exactly according to rotor position.5 . 3-phase.(Pfw + PCua + Pt + PFe) where Pfw.© SAS IP. .cos ( θ – α ) sin ( θ – α ) 1 ⁄ ( 2 ) 3 cos ( θ – 2α ) sin ( θ – 2α ) 1 ⁄ ( 2 ) cos θ C 4 = sin θ – cos θ – sin θ sin θ – cos θ – sin θ cos θ 0 0 0 0 where α = 2 π /3. and 4-phases systems. Pt. are as follows: C2 = C3 = cos θ sin θ 0 sin θ cos θ 0 cos θ sin θ 1 ⁄ ( 2) 2 --. and PFe are frictional and wind loss.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. and iron-core loss. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.5 . .Maxwell 3D Online Help vd va T vq = C ⋅ v b  v0 ed ea ia T eq = C ⋅ e b  e0 id ib = C ⋅ iq  i0 The transformation matrices for 2-phase. The input power (electric power) can now be computed from the voltage and current as: T 1 p 1 = --. 9-122 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. armature copper loss. respectively. Inc. All rights reserved. C3. ( v d i d + v q i q + v 0 i 0 ) dt t 0 The output power (mechanical power) is: P2 = P1 . transistor/diode loss. PCua. and C4. noted as C2. Inc. Double-click the Machine-Stator-Slot entry in the project tree to define the stator slot dimensions. 5. All rights reserved. 7. 11. and a new Maxwell 3D design Please refer to the Brushless Permanent-Magnet DC Motor Problem application note. 8.© SAS IP. double-click the Machine entry in the project tree on the desktop. Double-click the Machine entry in the project tree to define the general data.5 . 6. 3. a brief description of that field appears in the status bar at the bottom of the RMxprt window. Inc. for a specific example of a brushless permanent-magnet DC motor problem. . Double-click the Machine-Rotor-Pole entry in the project tree to define the pole. and click Add Solution Setup to define the solution data. 12. Once analyzed. . and air gap data for the rotor pole. offset.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. To open the General Data Properties window. Choose RMxprt>Analyze to analyze the design. Choose File>Save to save the project. circuit type. voltage values. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without RMxprt Machine Types 9-123 Release 14. The efficiency is computed by: eff = P2/P1 * 100% Defining a Brushless Permanent-Magnet DC Motor The general procedure for defining a brushless permanent-magnet DC motor is as follows: 1. embrace. Right-click Analysis in the project tree. or it can be used to create a new Maxwell 2D project. To define the general data: 1. 4. the model can be viewed in the Maxwell 2D Modeler. Double-click the Machine-Rotor entry in the project tree to define the rotor geometry. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 2. on the technical support page of the ANSYS web site. Defining the General Data for a Brushless PMDC Motor Use the General window to specify the rated output power. and speed of the brushless DC motor. Double-click the Machine-Circuit entry in the project tree to define the control circuit. 10. Double-click the Machine-Shaft entry in the project tree to define the magnetism of the shaft. Insert the permanent magnet brushless DC motor into a new or existing project. Double-click the Machine-Stator-Winding entry in the project tree to define the stator windings and conductors. Inc. Note When you place the cursor over an entry field in the data windows. 9. Double-click the Machine-Stator entry in the project tree to define the stator geometry.Maxwell 3D Online Help The output mechanical shaft torque T2 is: T2 = P2 / ω where ω is the rotor speed in mechanical rad/s. Enter the energy loss due to friction at the given speed in the Frictional Loss field. 3. L4 Loop-type. four-phase. Click OK to close the Properties window. double-click the Machine entry in the project tree.Maxwell 3D Online Help 2. L3 Loop-type.5 . The circuit types are based on industry standards. Note 8. . All rights reserved. 4. Number of Poles The number of poles the machine contains. type Y3. C2 Cross-type. Inc. opening a separate window. . Wind Loss The wind loss (due to air resistance) measured at the reference speed. By default. three-phase. a three-phase. Frictional Loss The frictional energy loss (due to friction) measured at the reference speed. Machine Type 9-124 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. Inc. Enter the wind loss due to air resistance measured at the reference speed in the Wind Loss field. 6. an outline schematic of the circuit appears. The General Data Properties window for a three-phase induction motor contains the following fields: The machine type you selected when inserting a new RMxprt design (Brushless Permanent-Magnet DC Motor). four-phase. General Data for Brushless PMDC Motors To access the general data. 5. Select DC or CCC from the Control Type pull-down list. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Enter the given speed in the Reference Speed field.) Enter the number of poles for the machine in the Number of Poles field. This value is the total number of poles in the stator (or the number of pole pairs multiplied by two).© SAS IP. Select a Circuit Type from the following types: Y3 Y-connected. six-status circuit. two-phase. S4 Star-type. three-phase. When you place the mouse cursor over a circuit type. 7. is selected as the circuit type. three-phase. Rotor Position Select whether the rotor is an Inner Rotor or Outer Rotor.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. S3 Star-type. Inc. 1. 3-Phase C2: Cross-Type.© SAS IP. The trigger’s lead angle is shown in the following plot of the open circuit induced voltage versus position. 4-Phase Defining the Circuit Data for a Brushless PMDC Motor Use the Circuit Data Properties window to define the circuit data for a brushless PMDC Motor. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 4-Phase S4: Star-Type. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window.5 . 2-Phase L4: Loop-Type. Inc. RMxprt Machine Types 9-125 Release 14. Select from DC or CCC (chopped current control).) 2. double-click the Machine>Circuit entry in the project tree on the desktop. . An angle of 0 means that the induced voltage in the triggered phase is at a maximum: Note A positive value represents a lead angle. . Enter the trigger’s lead angle in electrical degrees in the Lead Angle of Trigger field. Control Type The way the circuit is controlled. Circuit Type The drive circuit type. Click the button to open the Circuit Type window and select from the following six types: • • • • • • Y3: Y-Type.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 3-Phase S3: Star-Type.Maxwell 3D Online Help Reference Speed The given speed of reference. All rights reserved. 3-Phase L3: Loop-Type. and a negative value represents a lag angle. To open the Circuit Data Properties window. Defining the Stator Data for a Brushless PMDC Motor The stator is the outer lamination stack where the polyphase voltage windings reside. The minimum current for the chopped current control. in the Trigger Pulse Width field. This field is not available for a DC circuit. 4. The Select Definition window appears. Circuit Data for Brushless PMDC Motors To access the Circuit Data Properties window. 5. Enter the Outer Diameter of the stator. in electrical degrees. double-click the Machine>Stator entry in the project tree on the desktop. Click OK to close the Properties window. Inc. To define the general stator data: 1. Lead Angle of Trigger Trigger Pulse Width Transistor Drop Diode Drop Maximum Current Minimum Current The trigger’s lead angle. 7. Inc. Enter the stacking factor for the stator core in the Stacking Factor field. in electrical degrees. The voltage drop across one diode in the discharge loop. in electrical degrees. The period from on-status to off-status for a transistor. enter the total discharge voltage in this field. . Enter the voltage drop of one diode in the discharge loop in the Diode Drop field. then enter the maximum and minimum current values in the Maximum Current and Minimum Current fields. 6. 5.Maxwell 3D Online Help 3. Select a Steel Type for the stator core: a. . The maximum current for the chopped current control. Refer to the figures of the different circuit types in step 2.5 . 9-126 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14.© SAS IP. 4. 3. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window.) 2. If you selected a star-type circuit (S3 or S4) as the Circuit Type. Enter the Inner Diameter of the stator. double-click the Machine>Circuit entry in the project tree. Enter the period from on-status to off-status of a transistor. Click the button for Steel Type. The voltage drop across one transistor when the transistor is turned on. This field is not available for a DC circuit. 6. Enter the length of the stator core in the Length field. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. All rights reserved.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. To open the Stator Data Properties window. If you selected CCC (chopped current control) as the Control Type. Enter the voltage drop across one transistor when the transistor is turned on in the Transistor Drop field. The stacking factor of the stator core.© SAS IP. Optionally. 3. Click OK to close the Select Slot Type window and return to the Properties window. . The Stator Data Properties window contains the following fields: Outer Diameter Inner Diameter Length Stacking Factor Steel Type Number of Slots Slot Type Skew Width The outer diameter of the stator core. Enter the Number of Slots in the stator. Inc. measured in slot number. Inc. 8. The steel type of the stator core.5 . Stator Data for Brushless PMDC Motors To access the general stator data. and enter a value in the Tooth Width field. Select the Slot Type: a. Click OK to close the Properties window. Click OK to close the Select Definition window and return to the Properties window. To open the Stator Slot Data Properties window. b. The type of slots in the stator core. double-click the Machine-Stator-Slot entry in the project tree on the desktop. The Select Slot Type window appears. The length of the stator core. select the Parallel Tooth check box.Maxwell 3D Online Help b. Bs1.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. in the Skew Width field.) 2. Optionally. and Bs2. The number of slots the stator core contains. . or define a new steel type. The skew width measured in slot number. to design dimensions of slots Bs1 and Bs2 based on the stator tooth width. Click the button for the Slot Type. When you place the mouse cursor over the slot type. 9. to automatically design the dimensions of slots Hs2. Select a steel type from the list. a schematic of the selected type appears. Enter the skew width. double-click the Machine>Stator entry in the project tree. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. displaying the slot dimension variables. All rights reserved. Defining the Stator Slots for a Brushless PMDC Motor To define the physical dimensions of the stator slots: 1. c. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. RMxprt Machine Types 9-127 Release 14. select the Auto Design check box. 7. The inner diameter of the stator core. Select a slot type (available types include 1 through 4). 10. Note c. Click the button to open the Select Slot Type window. Click the button to open the Select Definition window. Bs1 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected).© SAS IP. Always available. When Auto Design is selected. this slot dimension is determined automatically. the Bs1 and Bs2 fields are removed. only two other fields appear in the window: Hs0 and Bs0. Always available. Click OK to close the Properties window. this slot dimension is determined automatically. and the Tooth Tooth Width field is added. on which Bs1 and Bs2 are designed. Available only when Auto Design and Parallel Tooth are both cleared. All rights reserved. Inc. Bs2 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). Enter the available slot dimensions. . Tooth Width The tooth width for the parallel tooth. double-click the Machine-Stator-Slot entry in the project tree. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. When Auto Design is selected. Hs0 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). 9-128 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. When Auto Design is selected. Available only when Auto Design and Parallel Tooth are both cleared.Maxwell 3D Online Help 4. this slot dimension is determined based on the value entered in the Tooth Width field. Hs2 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected).Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Rs is added when the slot type is 3 or 4. Parallel Select this to design Bs1 and Bs2 based on the tooth width. Hs0 Hs2 Bs0 Bs1 Bs2 5. Bs1. When Parallel Tooth is selected. this slot dimension is determined automatically. Available only when Auto Design is cleared. When this check box is selected. Rs A slot dimension. Inc. When Parallel Tooth is selected. this slot dimension is determined based on the value entered in the Tooth Width field. and Bs2. . Bs0 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). The Stator Slot Data Properties window contains the following fields: Auto Design Select or clear this to enable or disable auto-design of slots Hs2.5 . Stator Slot Data for Brushless PMDC Motors To access the stator slot data. When this check box is selected. (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). Hs1 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). 4. Inc. Select a Winding Type: a. For this winding type. Select from one of the following three types of winding: • • • Whole Coiled Half Coiled Editor When you place the mouse cursor over a winding button. Inc. A one-layer whole-coiled winding: Whole Coiled Slot 123 RMxprt Machine Types 9-129 Release 14. 3. The Winding Type window appears. . All rights reserved. and conductors: 1. Phase C/C return uses C/Z. Click the Winding tab. You need to set up the winding arrangement for each slot. Click the button for Winding Type.Maxwell 3D Online Help Defining the Stator Windings and Conductors for a Brushless PMDC Motor To define the stator windings.5 . wires.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. . (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. b. double-click the Machine-StatorWinding entry in the project tree on the desktop. an outline of the selected winding appears.© SAS IP.) 2. To open the Stator Slot Winding Properties window. Phase B/B return uses B/Y. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. The following table describes the six types of windings that are possible (three for one-layer and three for two-layer): Type Description A user-defined one-layer winding arrangement. Enter the number of layers in the stator winding in the Winding Layers field. the following letters are used for the phase windings: Editor • • • Phase A/A return uses A/X. When you select 20. . where you can specify a different winding arrangement for each slot.© SAS IP. where m is the phase number.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Inc.5 . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 9-130 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. A two-layer wave winding: Whole Coiled Slot 123 The phase belt for this winding configuration is equal to 360/2m. the Winding Editor Editor opens. . Inc. All rights reserved.Maxwell 3D Online Help A one-layer concentric half-coiled winding: Half Coiled Slot 123 A user-defined two-layer winding arrangement. click OK to close the Winding Type window and return to the Properties window. Inc. . only the top layer needs to be defined.Maxwell 3D Online Help A two-layer half-coiled winding: Half Coiled Slot 1 2 3 There is only one coil per phase per pair of poles. Inc. Note When you place the mouse cursor over a winding. Note c. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.© SAS IP. Select a Winding Type.5 . an outline of the selected winding appears. 5. RMxprt Machine Types 9-131 Release 14. For a two layer winding. . Once you have clicked a button to select a winding. All rights reserved. the bottom layer will be determined according to the coil pitch. if you check Constant Pitch in the Winding Editor.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. and choose OK. A one-layer whole-coiled winding: Slot 123 9-132 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14.Maxwell 3D Online Help The following winding types are available: 10 A user-defined single-layer winding arrangement. When you select this type. . Inc. the following letters are used for the phase windings: • • • 11 Phase A/A return uses A/X.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. For this winding type. Phase B/B return uses B/Y.5 . Phase C/C return uses C/Z. Inc.© SAS IP. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. All rights reserved. . enter the winding arrangement. where m is the phase number. RMxprt Machine Types 9-133 Release 14. Inc.© SAS IP. Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. .5 . and choose OK. All rights reserved. When you select this type. enter the 21 winding arrangement. .Maxwell 3D Online Help 12 A one-layer concentric half-coiled winding: Slot 123 20 A user-defined two-layer winding arrangement. A two-layer wave winding: Slot 123 The phase belt for this winding configuration is equal to 360/2m. The Wire Size window appears.5 . in the Coil Pitch field.© SAS IP. 9. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Enter the thickness of the double-sided wire wrap in the Wire Wrap field. Enter 0 to automatically obtain this value from the wire library.Maxwell 3D Online Help 22 A two-layer winding: Slot 1 2 3 6. Select the Wire Size: a. Enter the total number of conductors in each stator slot in the Conductors per Slot field. Click the button for Wire Size. Inc. 9-134 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. if a coil starts in slot 1 and ends in slot 6. Enter the coil pitch. Enter the number of wires per conductor in the Number of Strands field. Enter 0 to have RMxprt auto-design this value. measured in number of slots. All rights reserved. For example. Insulation Conductor y Wire Wrap = 2*y 11. This value is the number of turns per coil multiplied by the number of layers. it has a coil pitch of 5. 10. 7. . Select or enter the number of parallel branches in one phase of the winding in the Parallel Branches field. 8. Inc. . The coil pitch is the number of slots separating one winding. All rights reserved. Click the End/Insulation tab. Select a value from the Wire Diameter pull-down list. then enter the end length adjustment of the stator coils in the End Adjustment field.Maxwell 3D Online Help b. Inc. You can create your own wire table using Machine>Wire. MIXED For example. . Inc. If you cleared Input Half-turn Length. The end adjustment is the distance one end of the con- RMxprt Machine Types 9-135 Release 14. c.21mm and 2 with a diameter of 0.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. This option sets the Wire Diameter to zero. This option allows you to manually enter the Wire Diameter. a single conductor may consist of 5 wires. This option allows you to define a conductor that is made of different size wires. 12. 13. Select or clear the Input Half-turn Length check box. The gauge number is based on AWG settings. This is useful when USER you want to enter a diameter that does not correspond to a particular wire gauge. the <number> Wire Diameter field is automatically updated. d. .5 . Do one of the following: • • If you selected Input Half-turn Length. When you are done setting the wire size. Select a wire gauge from the Gauge pull-down menu. and RMxprt automatically calculates AUTO the optimal value. When you select a gauge number. 14. and then you can select this wire table using the Tools>Options>Machine Options command.© SAS IP. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. then enter the half-turn length of the armature winding in the Half Turn Length field. The diameter information is then written to the output file when you analyze the design. 3 wires with a diameter of 0.13mm. You can select from the following options: You can select a specific gauge number. click OK to close the Wire Size window and return to the Properties window. © SAS IP. . and its subsidiaries and affiliates.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Click OK to close the Properties window. Enter the thickness of the insulation layer in the Layer Insulation field. Inc. . 17. Enter the thickness of the wedge insulation in the Wedge Thickness field. Slot Insulation 19. 18. 20. Enter the thickness of the slot liner insulation in the Slot Liner field. All rights reserved.5 . 22. 21. 16. 9-136 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. Enter the limited slot fill factor for the wire design in the Limited Fill Factor field. Inc. Enter the distance between two stator coils in the End Clearance field. Enter the inner radius of the base corner in the Base Inner Radius field.Maxwell 3D Online Help ductor extends vertically beyond the end of the stator. End Adjustment End of Stator Stator Coil 15. Enter the inner diameter of the coil tip in the Tip Inner Diameter field. For a rectangular wire: • • • • Enter the Width of the wire in the table. 6. 3.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. The Winding Editor makes this possible by enabling you to specify the number of turns for each coil. In the Wire Size window. Select or deselect the Constant Turns or Constant Pitch check boxes. depending on whether you want to be able to change these setting in the table above. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . Enter the Thickness of the wire in the table. 5. Enter the appropriate wire data in the table: • • For a round wire: • • Enter the Diameter in the table. Enter a Number in the table to specify how many of the conductor’s wires have this data. 2. 4. click OK to close the Wire Size window and return RMxprt Machine Types 9-137 Release 14. When these options are selected. In the table in the upper left. When you are satisfied with the conductor settings. 2. If you are working on a quarter or half model. Inc.5 . To define different size wires: 1. you may want to specify a multiplier by clicking the Periodic Multiplier check box and specifying a value.© SAS IP. The Winding Editor window appears. set which phase you want for each coil and which slot is the “in” and “out” slot for the current in each coil.Maxwell 3D Online Help Winding Editor for a Brushless DC Motor For a brushless DC motor. 5. All rights reserved. Click Add to add the new wire data. you cannot change the turns or pitch. Click Machine>Winding>Edit Layout. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each size wire you want to add. To specify the number of turns for each coil: 1. . Inc. Enter the Fillet value in the table. 3. Select either Round or Rectangular as the Wire Type. you may want to specify a different number of conductors for each stator slot. select MIXED from the Gauge pull-down menu. When you are finished defining the wires. Defining Different Size Wires for a Brushless DC Motor Use the Gauge option in the Wire Size dialog if you have a conductor that is made up different size wires. click OK to close the Winding Editor window. 4. Enter a Number in the table to specify how many of the conductor’s wires have this diameter. . and gauge. The Stator Winding Data Properties window contains the following fields: Winding tabWinding Layers The number of winding layers. wire type. Click the button to open the Winding Type window and choose from Whole Coiled. which is the distance one end of the conductor extends vertically beyond the end of the stator. Half Coiled. Number of The number of wires per conductor (0 for auto-design). Slot Coil Pitch The coil pitch measured in number of slots.21mm. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. the End Adjustment field appears instead. Parallel Branches The number of parallel branches in the stator winding. . Stator Winding Data for Brushless PMDC Motors To access the stator winding data. Conductors per The number of conductors per stator slot (0 for auto-design). then the mixed wire size table will have two lines. Strands Wire Wrap The thickness of the double-sided wire wrap (0 to automatically obtain this value from the wire library). End/ Input Half-turn Select or clear this check box to specify whether or not you want to enter the half-turn length. Inc. and Editor. An equivalent wire diameter is displayed as Wire Size value in the Winding tab in the Properties window. Half Turn Length The half-turn length of the armature winding. Radius Tip Inner The inner diameter of the coil tip. 9-138 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14.13 and Number = 2. and 3 of those wires have a diameter of 0.13mm. Note For example. and the other 2 have a diameter of 0. When this check box is selected.5 . End Adjustment The end length adjustment of the stator coils. Click the button to open the Wire Size window where you can specify units.© SAS IP. Inc. Diameter End Clearance The end clearance between two adjacent coils. All rights reserved. Base Inner The inner radius of the base corner. if one conductor is made up of 5 wires. Wire Size The diameter of the wire (0 for auto-design).Maxwell 3D Online Help to the RMxprt Properties window. When this check box is selected. The second line will list Diameter = 0. double-click the Machine-Stator-Winding entry in the project tree. the Insulation Length Half Turn Length field appears the next time you open the tab Properties window. diameter.21 and Number = 3.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. The first line will list Diameter = 0. Winding Type The type of stator winding. 3. double-click Machine>Rotor and Machine-Rotor-Pole to define the rotor and the pole. Select a steel type from the list. Enter the length of the rotor core in the Length field.) 2.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 6. Click the button for Steel Type. Factor Defining the Rotor Data for a Brushless PMDC Motor The rotor consists of copper bars in which current is induced by the magnetic fields produced by the stator windings. . . or define a new steel type.© SAS IP. Enter the stacking factor for the rotor core in the Stacking Factor field. Enter the inner diameter of the rotor in the Inner Diameter field. In the project tree. Select a Steel Type for the rotor core: a. To define general rotor data: 1. Limited Fill The limited slot fill factor for the wire design.5 . Enter the outer diameter of the rotor in the Outer Diameter field. Select a Pole Type: RMxprt Machine Types 9-139 Release 14. Layer Insulation The thickness of the insulation layer. The Select Definition window appears. double-click the Machine>Rotor entry in the project tree on the desktop. 5. Inc. To open the Rotor Data Properties window. c.Maxwell 3D Online Help Slot Liner The thickness of the slot liner insulation. b. 7. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. Inc. Click OK to close the Select Definition window and return to the Properties window. 4. Wedge Thickness The thickness of the wedge insulation. All rights reserved. Maxwell 3D Online Help a. Click a button to select the desired pole type (1. Defining the Rotor Pole for a Brushless PMDC Motor The rotor pole drives the electromagnetic field which is coupled with the stator windings. 2. Rotor Data for Brushless PMDC Motors To access the general rotor data. Click OK to close the Select Pole Type window and return to the Properties window. 3.© SAS IP. 8. or 5). For all pole types except type 4. double-click the Machine-Rotor-Pole entry in the project tree on the desktop. or are inactive. the diagram changes to show that pole type. Click the button to open the Select Definition window. The Rotor Data Properties window contains the following fields: Outer Diameter Inner Diameter Length Steel Type Stacking Factor Pole Type The outer diameter of the rotor core. The stacking factor of the rotor core. Note Some of the fields in the Rotor Pole window change. double-click the Machine>Rotor entry in the project tree.5 .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. depending on the Rotor Type you select. 2. 3. Inc. Inc. All rights reserved. The pole type for the rotor. To define the rotor pole: 1. The inner diameter of the rotor core. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Click OK to close the Properties window. Note c. The length of the rotor core. Click this button to open the Select Pole Type window and select from the following types: 1. To open the Rotor Pole Data Properties window. an outline of the selected circuit type appears. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. 4. 5. Use the Rotor Pole Data Properties window to define the rotor pole. Click the button. .) 2. b. TIP: When you run the mouse over each option. 4. When you place the mouse cursor over a pole type. The Select Pole Type window appears. The steel type of the rotor core. enter the ratio of the actual arc distance in relation to the max- 9-140 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. . Enter the maximum radial thickness of the magnet in the Magnet Thickness field. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. All rights reserved. For pole type 5. 7.© SAS IP. 10. . Enter 0 for a uniform air gap. 6. Inc. enter the width of the magnet in the Magnet Width field.7 3. enter the shaft diameter of the rotor in the Shaft Diameter field. 8. For pole types 4 and 5. Inc. enter the width of the rib supporting the bridge in the Rib field. enter the thickness of the bridge across the two poles in the Bridge field. Magnet Radius Rotor OD Radius Offset 5.5 . and 3.Maxwell 3D Online Help imum possible arc distance in the Embrace field. This value is between 0 and 1. For pole type 4. For pole types 1. . 4. For pole type 5.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. RMxprt Machine Types 9-141 Release 14. 2. Select the type of magnet to use in the rotor pole from the Magnet Type pull-down menu. Pole Embrace = 1.0 Pole Embrace = 0. enter the distance from the center of the rotor to the polar arc center in the Offset field. Click OK to close the Properties window. 9. The shaft diameter of the rotor. For pole type 5. For pole types 1. . To open the Shaft Data Properties window. All rights reserved. The Rotor Pole Data Properties window may contain the following fields. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.) 2. Bridge The thickness of the bridge across two adjacent poles. depending on the pole type specified. and 5. Magnet Type The type of magnet. For pole types 4 and 5. . Click OK to close the Properties window.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. right-click Analysis in the project tree. and 3. Click the button to open the Select Definition window.Maxwell 3D Online Help Rotor Pole Data for Brushless PMDC Motors To access the pole rotor data. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. Embrace Shaft Diameter Offset Defining the Shaft Data for a Brushless PMDC Motor To define the shaft: 1. 2. double-click the Machine>Shaft entry in the project tree on the desktop. The pole-arc center offset from the rotor center (0 for a uniform air gap). Inc. Shaft Data for Brushless PMDC Motors To access the shaft data. The Shaft Data Properties window contains the following fields: Magnetic Shaft Select or clear this check box to indicate whether or not the shaft is made of magnetic material. Rib The width of the rib at the center of two adjacent poles that support the bridge. Magnet Width The maximum width of the magnet.© SAS IP. Click the General tab. 9-142 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. For pole type 4. Inc. Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Brushless PMDC Motor To define the solution data: 1. For pole types 1. 3. Magnet Thickness The maximum thickness of the magnet. To open the Solution Setup window. Select or clear the Magnetic Shaft check box to specify whether or not the shaft is to be made of magnetic material. 2. double-click the Machine>Shaft entry in the project tree.5 . 2. The Operation Type is Motor for this machine type. For all pole types. 3. and click Add Solution Setup. For pole type 5. The pole embrace. double-click the Machine-Rotor-Pole entry in the project tree. For all pole types. . Users do not need to define coils one by one. Click OK to close the Solution Setup window. Enter the output power developed at the shaft of the motor in the Rated Output Power field. Tload = Trated * (n/ nrated) where Trated is given by the output power divided by the given rated speed. Enter the temperature at which the system functions in the Operating Temperature field. given by the output power divided by the given rated speed. Tload = Trated * (n/ nrated)2 where Trated is given by the output power divided by the given rated speed. All rights reserved. 2. In this case. Therefore. odd. Tload = Trated. In this case. odd. ….and Double-Layer Windings Besides taking the great advantage of the winding auto-arrangement function in RMxprt. even. RMxprt also supports a double-layer winding with half-turn coils which are auto-arranged in the order of even. RMxprt Machine Types 9-143 Release 14. winding arrangement is optimized in such a way that minimum negativesequence and zero-sequence components are achieved. 3. In this case. Enter the RMS line-to-line voltage in the Rated Voltage field. RMxprt will perform winding arrangement optimization to minimize the average coil pitch. The torque remains constant regardless of the speed. 5. RMxprt divides the synchronous machine into two design modules: Synchronous Motor and Synchronous Generator. Inc. When a designer adopts single-layer whole-coiled windings. . The output power remains constant in the motor.and double-layer. Auto Arrangement of Three-phase Windings Almost all commonly used three-phase single.© SAS IP. Related Topics: Solution Data for Brushless PMDC Motors Analysis Offered Analysis Offered • • • Adapted to both Synchronous Motor and Generator The structures of the salient-pole synchronous motor and the generator are basically the same. and even.Maxwell 3D Online Help 3. half.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. their output characteristics data are also different.and whole-type ac windings (including fractional-pitch windings) can be automatically arranged.5 . odd. 4. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. The load varies nonlinearly with speed. Enter the desired output speed of the motor at the load point in the Rated Speed field. 1. Inc. The torque increases linearly with speed. Winding Editor Supporting Any Single. When asymmetric three-phase windings are used. but their phasor relationships and the computation methods are slightly different. users can also specify any special winding by using of the Winding Editor function. Select the Load Type used in the motor from the following options: Const Speed Const Power Const Torque Linear Torque Fan Load The speed remains constant in the motor. as long as it is physically possible. which deviates greatly along the d.Maxwell 3D Online Help In Winding Editor. Analyze Dynamic Parameters of Damping Winding Different from the squirrel-cage winding of the induction machine. the General tab. Const Torque. All rights reserved. • • • Analyze Air-Gap Magnetic Field Distribution For both uniform and non-uniform air gaps. number of turns. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. taking into account coil short pitch. the connection of damping bars has several forms. and click Add Solution Setup. the emf waveforms in the coils and the windings are analyzed to solve for the emf distortion factors. and select the units. in-slot and outslot number of each coil. it is possible to design single.5 . load effects and other factors. Related Topics: Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Brushless PMDC Motor 9-144 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. Const Power. through modification of phase belonging. Analyze EMF Waveform and Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) Based on the analysis of the air-gap magnetic field waveform. Type a value for the rated speed. but not connected with those under other poles. winding distribution. For this machine type. Type a value for the rated voltage. The bars under each pole could be connected.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. skew slot.© SAS IP. and Fan Load. and select the units. Inc. The Solution Setup window contains the following fields: Operation Type Load Type Rated Output Power Rated Voltage Rated Speed Operating Temperature The operation type is automatically set to Motor for this machine type. Related Topics: Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Brushless PMDC Motor Solution Data for Brushless PMDC Motors To access the solution data. Schwarz-Christopher Transformation is adopted to solve for the air-gap magnetic field distribution. the damping winding of the salient-pole synchronous machine is located in the surface of magnetic field poles. Inc. The bars could be connected through end-plate. All the bars could be connected together. Select from Const Speed. The default is Const Power.and the q-axes. Furthermore. right-click Analysis in the project tree. Type a value for the rated output voltage. . Linear Torque. winding connection. Type a value for the operating temperature. and select the units. . and select the units.and double-layer winding arrangement for any purposes. there is only one tab. RMxprt can deal with all those complicated situations and give the dynamic parameters for the damping winding. and yoke thickness. such as the slot liner thickness. number of parallel branches. Inc. Analysis Approach for Switched Reluctance Motors This motor type operates with shaft position feedback to synchronize the commutation of the phase currents with precise rotor position. Therefore. as is shown in Figure 8. The task of energizing the stator windings is performed by a complex electronic system. The signal of the rotor position is obtained from a position sensor. The stator phase windings are energized at precise moments synchronized with the position of the rotor.5 . Stator coil data. In switched reluctance motors (SRM). Stator core data. . Ψ ( θ . and number of wires in each conductor. Rotor core data.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. i ) u = u T + R S ⋅ i + --------------------dt where uT is the transistor or diode voltage drop. The number of phases in the winding is the ratio of the stator number of poles to the smallest common divider of the stator and the rotor number of poles. i) is the flux linkage of the winding at rotor position θ and winding current i. Inc. voltage. In these motors. and normally the current in a winding has finished or almost finished freewheeling when the next winding is triggered. The voltage equation of one phase is: dΨ ( θ. the stator and rotor have different numbers of poles. such as the power. the torque is produced by the alignment tendency of the rotor to the stator so that the stator flux linkage is maximized. and Rs is the stator winding resistance. All rights reserved. and the stator currents are commutated exactly according to rotor position. the stator and the rotor have a different number of poles. the mutual effects between two phases can be neglected. Typically. Solution data. both the stator and the rotor are salient to increase the torque-producing characteristics of the motor. Shaft data. The rotor has no windings. and speed of the motor. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . RMxprt Machine Types 9-145 Release 14. such as the air gap dimensions and number of poles in the rotor.© SAS IP. diameter.Maxwell 3D Online Help Switched Reluctance Motors After you have selected Switched Reluctance Motors as your model type. such as the number of poles. define the following: • • • • • • • General data. Circuit data. The stator windings are triggered one by one. Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. . All rights reserved.= --------∂θ ∂θ Then u = u T + R S ⋅ i + L ˜ pi + Gω e i 9-146 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. Figure 8 Let ∂Ψ ( θ .© SAS IP. i ) L ˜ = -------------------∂i and ∂L ˜ ∂( Ψ ⁄ i ) G = -----------------. Inc.5 . .Maxwell 3D Online Help where the rotor position when the center of the rotor slot is aligned to the winding axis is defined as 0. transistor/diode loss. All rights reserved. Inc. 3. ( u ⋅ i ⋅ dt ) T 0 The output mechanical power is: P 2 = P 1 – ( P fw + P Cua + P t + P Fe ) where Pfw. Double-click the Machine-Stator entry in the project tree to define the stator geometry. Double-click the Machine-Stator-Winding entry in the project tree to define the stator windRMxprt Machine Types 9-147 Release 14. 2.© SAS IP. PCua. and PFe are frictional and wind loss. and p is the differential operator as given by: p = d dt The instant electromagnetic torque t2 is: 1 2 t 2 = --. Inc. Insert a Switched Reluctance motor into a new or existing project. . Double-click the Machine entry in the project tree to define the general data. and iron-core loss.Gi 2 The input electric power is computed from voltage and current as: T 1 P 1 = --. respectively. Double-click the Machine-Circuit entry in the project tree to define the control circuit.5 . 5. The efficiency of the electric machine is computed by: P2 η = -----. armature copper loss. 4. Pt. The average output mechanical shaft torque T2 is: P2 T 2 = -----ω where ω is the rotor angular speed in mechanical rad/s.× 100 P1 % Defining a Switched Reluctance Motor The general procedure for defining a switched reluctance motor is as follows: 1.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. .Maxwell 3D Online Help where ω e is the rotor speed in electrical rad/s. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. To define the general data: 1. Once analyzed. 5. Defining the General Data for a Switched Reluctance Motor Use the General window to define the power settings. ings and conductors. type Full-Voltage. a brief description of that field appears in the status bar at the bottom of the RMxprt window. Select a Circuit Type from the following types: • • • Full-Voltage Half-Voltage Coupled-Coil The circuit types are based on industry standards. and click Add Solution Setup to define the solution data. Enter the energy loss due to friction at the given speed in the Frictional Loss field. and a new Maxwell 3D project. or it can be used to create a new Maxwell 2D project. the model can be viewed in the Maxwell 2D Modeler. Enter the given speed in the Reference Speed field.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. To open the General Data Properties window. Please refer to the Switched Reluctance Motor Problem application note. Double-click the Machine-Shaft entry in the project tree to define the magnetism of the shaft. and period of the motor. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 6. 3. 8.Maxwell 3D Online Help 6. Choose File>Save to save the project. on the technical support page of the ANSYS web site. Inc. 10. speed. . Inc. Enter the wind loss due to air resistance measured at the reference speed in the Wind Loss field. Choose RMxprt>Analyze to analyze the design.5 . (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. double-click the Machine entry in the project tree on the desktop. By default. Click OK to close the Properties window. an outline schematic of the circuit appears. All rights reserved. Double-click the Machine-Rotor entry in the project tree to define the rotor geometry. 7.© SAS IP. 9. Note 7. Select DC or CCC from the Control Type pull-down list. Note When you place the cursor over an entry field in the data windows. When you place the mouse cursor over a circuit type. Right-click Analysis in the project tree. 4. for a specific example. is selected as the circuit type.) 2. . 9-148 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. Control Type The way the circuit is controlled. Inc. double-click the Machine entry in the project tree. An angle of 0 means that each phase is triggered when its axis is aligned with the rotor slot center. To open the Circuit Data Properties window. Enter the trigger’s lead angle in electrical degrees in the Lead Angle of Trigger field. The trigger angle is the point at which the magnetic poles interact to begin the motion of the motor. Frictional Loss The frictional energy loss (due to friction) measured at the reference speed. Reference Speed The given speed of reference. double-click the Machine-Circuit entry in the project tree on the desktop. The trigger’s lead angle is shown in the following plot of the open circuit induced voltage versus position.Maxwell 3D Online Help General Data for Switched Reluctance Motors To access the general data. Inc. Circuit Type The drive circuit type. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Click the button to open the Circuit Type window and select from the following three types: Machine Type • • • Full-Voltage Half-Voltage Coupled-Coil Defining the Circuit Data for a Switched Reluctance Motor Use the Circuit Data Properties window to specify the rated output power. circuit type. Select from DC or CCC (chopped current control. .5 . The General Data Properties window for a three-phase induction motor contains the following fields: The machine type you selected when inserting a new RMxprt design (Switched Reluctance Motor).) 2. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. Wind Loss The wind loss (due to air resistance) measured at the reference speed.© SAS IP. An angle of 0 means that the induced voltage in the triggered phase is at a RMxprt Machine Types 9-149 Release 14. . All rights reserved. To define the general data: 1. voltage values.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. and speed of the brushless DC motor. which forces the current to fall between the minimum and maximum values specified). This value is over one conduction path when the transistors are triggered. then enter the maximum and minimum current values in the Maximum Current and Minimum Current fields. in the Trigger Pulse Width field. Enter the period from on-status to off-status of a transistor. 3. If you selected a star-type circuit (S3 or S4) as the Circuit Type. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 7. The trigger pulse width is the width of the energizing pulse applied to the winding. in electrical degrees. The maximum ‘on’ period is given by 180 degrees plus the value for the lead angle of trigger. 9-150 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. If you selected CCC (chopped current control) as the Control Type.5 . Inc. 4. Enter the voltage drop across one transistor when the transistor is turned on in the Transistor Drop field. Enter the voltage drop on all anti-parallel diodes in the discharge path in the Diode Drop field. and a negative value represents a lag angle. All rights reserved. 6. Click OK to close the Properties window. enter the total discharge voltage in this field. Inc. Refer to the figures of the different circuit types in step 2. .© SAS IP. or the period for an ‘on’ status of the transistors. . 5.Maxwell 3D Online Help maximum: Note A positive value represents a lead angle.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Click the button for Steel Type. double-click the Machine>Circuit entry in the project tree. Enter the effective magnetic length of the core in the Stacking Factor field. Enter the total length of the stator core in the Length field. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. This field is not available for a DC circuit. divided by the total length. b. Enter the Outer Diameter of the stator. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. and is defined as the total length minus the total lamination insulation. Defining the Stator Data for a Switched Reluctance Motor The stator is the outer lamination stack where the polyphase voltage windings reside. Select a Steel Type for the stator core: 6. double-click the Machine>Stator entry in the project tree on the desktop. Lead Angle of Trigger Trigger Pulse Width Transistor Drop Diode Drop Maximum Current Minimum Current The trigger’s lead angle. 4. The maximum current for the chopped current control. All rights reserved. Click OK to close the Properties window. The Select Definition window appears. now circuit data properties exist. To define the general stator data: 1. Inc. c. This value ranges from between 0 and 1. in electrical degrees. 7. or define a new steel type. . The voltage drop across one transistor when the transistor is turned on. . The pole embrace is the ratio of the actual pole arc angle to the maximum possible pole angle in the field. 9. The minimum current for the chopped current control. Enter the thickness of the stator coil yoke in the Yoke Thickness field. RMxprt Machine Types 9-151 Release 14.0. When AC is selected at the Control Type.Maxwell 3D Online Help Circuit Data for Switched Reluctance Motors To access the Circuit Data Properties window.5 . This value typically ranges from between 0. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. The period from on-status to off-status for a transistor. 5. 3. Enter the Inner Diameter of the stator. To open the Stator Data Properties window. in electrical degrees. Select a steel type from the list. This field is not available for a DC circuit. Click OK to close the Select Definition window and return to the Properties window.93 and 1. Enter the pole embrace in the Embrace field.© SAS IP. a. The voltage drop across one diode in the discharge loop. 8.) 2. Enter the number of poles the stator core contains in the Number of Poles field. 10. The stacking factor of the stator core.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. The end adjustment is the distance one end of the conductor extends vertically beyond the end of the 9-152 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. All rights reserved. double-click the Machine-StatorWinding entry in the project tree on the desktop. Use the Stator Coil window to define the parallel branches. Inc. To open the Stator Slot Winding Properties window. The steel type of the stator core. The length of the stator core. Enter the end length adjustment of the stator coils in the End Adjustment field.) 2. Number of Poles The number of poles the stator core contains. Inc. . wire specifications. Enter the thickness of the insulation between the stator core and the field winding in the Insulation Thickness field. Outer Diameter Inner Diameter Length Stacking Factor Steel Type Defining the Stator Winding Data for a Switched Reluctance Motor The stator coils provide the excitation for the rotating magnetic poles.Maxwell 3D Online Help Stator Data for Switched Reluctance Motors To access the general stator data.© SAS IP. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. double-click the Machine>Stator entry in the project tree. . Click the button to open the Select Definition window. and slot liner for the stator coil. The Stator Data Properties window contains the following fields: The outer diameter of the stator core. Yoke Thickness The thickness of the yoke at the stator core. 3. Embrace The stator pole embrace.5 . The inner diameter of the stator core. To define the stator coils: 1. Enter the number of turns per stator pole in the Turns per Pole field. You can select from the following RMxprt Machine Types 9-153 Release 14. 5. Select a value from the Wire Diameter pull-down list. Click the button for Wire Size. . 6.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.Maxwell 3D Online Help stator. . b. c. The Wire Size window appears.5 . Inc. Inc. Enter 0 to have RMxprt auto-design this value. Select the Wire Size: a. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.© SAS IP. Enter the thickness of the double-sided wire wrap in the Wire Wrap field. Select a wire gauge from the Gauge pull-down menu. Insulation Conductor y Wire Wrap = 2*y 8. Enter 0 to automatically obtain this value from the wire library. Select or enter the number of parallel branches in one phase of the winding in the Parallel Branches field. Enter the number of wires per conductor in the Number of Strands field. All rights reserved. End Adjustment End of Stator Stator Coil 4. 7. the <number> Wire Diameter field is automatically updated. and RMxprt automatically calculates AUTO the optimal value. a single conductor may consist of 5 wires.5 . 2. When you are done setting the wire size. d. The gauge number is based on AWG settings. For a rectangular wire: • • • • Enter the Width of the wire in the table. All rights reserved. The diameter information is then written to the output file when you analyze the design. Inc. .21mm and 2 with a diameter of 0. This is useful when USER you want to enter a diameter that does not correspond to a particular wire gauge. Enter the appropriate wire data in the table: • • 4.© SAS IP. Enter the conductor area ratio of the coupled circuit to the main circuit in the Coupled Ratio field. 9-154 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. You can create your own wire table using Machine>Wire. Enter the Fillet value in the table. Click Add to add the new wire data. For a round wire: • • Enter the Diameter in the table.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Enter a Number in the table to specify how many of the conductor’s wires have this diameter. This option allows you to manually enter the Wire Diameter. 10. 3 wires with a diameter of 0. 3. Inc. To define different size wires: 1. click OK to close the Wire Size window and return to the Properties window. Enter a Number in the table to specify how many of the conductor’s wires have this data. and then you can select this wire table using the Tools>Options>Machine Options command. Enter the Thickness of the wire in the table. When you select a gauge number. In the Wire Size window. Click OK to close the Properties window. select MIXED from the Gauge pull-down menu. This option sets the Wire Diameter to zero. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. .13mm. 9.Maxwell 3D Online Help options: You can select a specific gauge number. Defining Different Size Wires for a Switched Reluctance Motor Use the Gauge option in the Wire Size window if you have a conductor that is made up different size wires. MIXED For example. Select either Round or Rectangular as the Wire Type. This option allows you to define a conductor that is made of different size wires. The Stator Winding Data Properties window contains the following fields: Insulation The thickness of the insulation between the stator core and the field winding. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop RMxprt Machine Types 9-155 Release 14.Maxwell 3D Online Help 5. rotor dimensions.5 . Defining the Rotor Data for a Switched Reluctance Motor The rotor core channels the flux generated by stator windings and provides shaft torque. In the project tree. An equivalent wire diameter is displayed as Wire Size value in the Winding tab in the Properties window. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each size wire you want to add. then the mixed wire size table will have two lines.21 and Number = 3. Inc. Number of The number of wires per conductor (0 for auto-design). Thickness End Adjustment The end length adjustment of the stator coils. and the other 2 have a diameter of 0. All rights reserved. The second line will list Diameter = 0.© SAS IP. and gauge. Stator Winding Data for Switched Reluctance Motors To access the stator winding data. which is the distance one end of the conductor extends vertically beyond the end of the stator. double-click the Machine-Stator-Winding entry in the project tree.13mm. if one conductor is made up of 5 wires. Strands Wire Wrap The thickness of the double-sided wire wrap (0 to automatically obtain this value from the wire library). Inc. Parallel Branches The number of parallel branches in the stator winding. and type of steel used in the rotor core. To define general rotor data: 1.13 and Number = 2. To open the Rotor Data Properties window. click OK to close the Wire Size window and return to the RMxprt Properties window. The rotor consists of copper bars in which current is induced by the magnetic fields produced by the stator windings.21mm. double-click Machine>Rotor to define the rotor. The first line will list Diameter = 0. wire type. Coupled Ratio The conductor area ratio of the coupled circuit to the main circuit.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Click the button to open the Wire Size window where you can specify units. 6. diameter. Note For example. . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. When you are finished defining the wires. Wire Size The diameter of the wire (0 for auto-design). . Turns per Pole The number of turns per stator pole (0 for auto-design). and 3 of those wires have a diameter of 0. Use the Rotor Data Properties window to define the air gaps. double-click the Machine>Rotor entry in the project tree on the desktop. 10.© SAS IP. Select or clear the Magnetic Shaft check box to specify whether or not the shaft is to be made 9-156 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. Select a steel type from the list. 5. The Select Definition window appears. 8. The value ranges from 0 to 1. double-click the Machine-Rotor entry in the project tree. Inc. Inc. The Rotor Data Properties window contains the following fields: The outer diameter of the rotor core. Enter the inner diameter of the rotor in the Inner Diameter field. 9.Maxwell 3D Online Help 2.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 3. This value ranges from 0 to 1. 7. b. c. double-click the Machine>Shaft entry in the project tree on the desktop. All rights reserved. . Click the button to open the Select Definition window. Yoke Thickness The thickness of the rotor core yoke.5 . Click OK to close the Properties window. without opening a separate window.) Enter the outer diameter of the rotor in the Outer Diameter field. Stacking Factor The stacking factor of the rotor core. Click OK to close the Select Definition window and return to the Properties window.) 2. Outer Diameter Inner Diameter Length Steel Type Defining the Shaft Data for a Switched Reluctance Motor To define the shaft: 1. Select a Steel Type for the rotor core: a. Click the button for Steel Type. The inner diameter of the rotor core. Enter the ratio of the actual pole angle in relation to the maximum possible pole angle in the Embrace field. 4. To open the Shaft Data Properties window. Rotor Data for Switched Reluctance Motors To access the general rotor data. Embrace The rotor pole embrace. Enter the length of the rotor core in the Length field. divided by the total length. The steel type of the rotor core. Number of Poles The number of poles the rotor core contains. and is defined as the total length minus the total lamination insulation. . (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. or define a new steel type. Enter the thickness of the rotor yoke in the Yoke Thickness field. The length of the rotor core. Enter the effective magnetic length of the core in the Stacking Factor field. 6. Enter the number of poles the rotor core contains in the Number of Poles field. 1. The Operation Type is automatically set to Motor for this machine type. right-click Analysis in the project tree. Tload = Trated. Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Switched Reluctance Motor To define the solution data: 1.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Click OK to close the Properties window. double-click the Machine-Shaft entry in the project tree. Related Topics: Solution Data for Switched Reluctance Motors Solution Data for Switched Reluctance Motors To access the solution data.5 . and click Add Solution Setup. . Inc. Tload = Trated * (n/ nrated)2 where Trated is given by the output power divided by the given rated speed. Select the Load Type used in the motor from the following options: Const Speed Const Power Const Torque Linear Torque Fan Load The speed remains constant in the motor. there is only one tab. For this machine type. All rights reserved. Click OK to close the Solution Setup window. The torque remains constant regardless of the speed. the General tab. The output power remains constant in the motor.Maxwell 3D Online Help 3. Shaft Data for Switched Reluctance Motors To access the shaft data. The Shaft Data Properties window contains the following fields: Magnetic Shaft Select or clear this check box to indicate whether or not the shaft is made of magnetic material. In this case. Enter the temperature at which the system functions in the Operating Temperature field. 2. Enter the RMS line-to-line voltage in the Rated Voltage field. 2. Tload = Trated * (n/ nrated) where Trated is given by the output power divided by the given rated speed. 3. 5. 3. In this case. RMxprt Machine Types 9-157 Release 14. Click the General tab. and click Add Solution Setup. Inc. of magnetic material. . 4. Enter the output power developed at the shaft of the motor in the Rated Output Power field. right-click Analysis in the project tree. given by the output power divided by the given rated speed. In this case. To open the Solution Setup window. The torque increases linearly with speed. Enter the desired output speed of the motor at the load point in the Rated Speed field. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. The load varies nonlinearly with speed.© SAS IP. Inc. Type a value for the rated voltage. Type a value for the rated speed.Maxwell 3D Online Help The Solution Setup window contains the following fields: Operation Type Load Type Rated Output Power Rated Voltage Rated Speed Operating Temperature The operation type is automatically set to Motor for this machine type. Inc. . Type a value for the rated output voltage. and select the units. All rights reserved. Linear Torque. Type a value for the operating temperature. The default is Const Power.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. and select the units. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.5 . and Fan Load. Related Topics: Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Switched Reluctance Motor 9-158 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14.© SAS IP. and select the units. Const Power. and select the units. . Const Torque. Select from Const Speed. winding connection. .5 . number of poles. Figure 6 RMxprt Machine Types 9-159 Release 14. All rights reserved. such as the slot type and dimensions. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Applying this three-phase sinusoidal voltage source to the stator winding of a synchronous motor yields the rotational magnetic field in the air gap. and magnet type. Upon starting. stator diameter. Shaft data. and voltage. Analysis Approach for Line-Start PM Synchronous Motors Synchronous motors use a three-phase sinusoidal voltage source to induce a rotating magnetic field in the stator. producing a synchronous torque on the rotor.© SAS IP.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. such as the frequency. The permanent magnet poles mounted on the rotor try to align in this rotating field. you can: • • add a vent to or remove an existing vent from a stator. By option. and winding data. creating a self-starting feature. add a damper to or remove a damper from a rotor. the damping winding on the rotor generates the asynchronous starting torque. stacking factor. The phasor diagram for the line-start permanent-magnet synchronous motor (LSSM) in the frequency domain is shown in Figure 6. Inc. Solution data. such as its associated dimensions. you can define the following: • • • • • General data. Stator data.Maxwell 3D Online Help Line-Start Permanent-Magnet Synchronous Motors Once you have selected Line-Start Permanent-Magnet Synchronous Motors as your motor type. . Rotor pole data. Inc. Xd. R1. and Xq are armature resistance.Maxwell 3D Online Help In Figure 6. . respectively. . and Xq is the sum of X1 and q-axis armature reactance Xaq: X d = X 1 + X ad X q = X 1 + X aq For a given torque angle θ . and q-axis synchronous reactance. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. we have the following: I d X d + I q R 1 = U cos θ – E 0 – I d R 1 + I q X q = U sin θ Solving for Id and Iq yields: X q ( U cos θ – E 0 ) – R 1 U sin θ I d = ---------------------------------------------------------------------2 R 1 + Xd Xq R 1 ( U cos θ – E 0 ) – X d U sin θ I q = ---------------------------------------------------------------------2 R 1 + Xd Xq The angle that I legs E0 is: Id Ψ = tanh ----Iq The power factor angle (or torque angle) that I legs U. Xd is the sum of leakage reactance.© SAS IP. is: ϕ = Ψ+θ 9-160 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. Inc.5 . d-axis synchronous reactance. All rights reserved. the angle that E0 lags U. X1 and d-axis armature reactance Xad. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. that is mounted on the rotor.called a damper winding in this case -. and iron-core loss. Double-click the Machine-Rotor-Pole entry in the project tree to define the pole.× 100 % P1 The motor is started the same way as for an induction motor. 4. 3. 2. embrace.© SAS IP. 6. and PFe are frictional and wind loss. 5. The output mechanical power (torque) T2 is: P2 T 2 = -----ω where ω is the synchronous speed in rad/s. armature copper loss. 9. offset. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Double-click the Machine-Stator-Slot entry in the project tree to define the stator slot dimensions.5 . The efficiency is computed by: P2 η = -----.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. All rights reserved. respectively. PCu. Double-click the Machine-Shaft entry in the project tree to define the magnetism of the shaft. 8. Right-click Analysis in the project tree. . Double-click the Machine-Rotor entry in the project tree to define the rotor geometry. Double-click the Machine entry in the project tree to define the general data. producing the starting torque. Insert a line-start synchronous motor into a new or existing project. 7. by using a squirrel-cage-type winding -.Maxwell 3D Online Help The input power (electric power) can now be computed from voltage and current as: P 1 = 3UI cos ϕ The output power (mechanical power) is: P 2 = P 1 – ( P fw + P Cu + P Fe ) where Pfw. and click Add Solution Setup to define the solution RMxprt Machine Types 9-161 Release 14. . Inc. Double-click the Machine-Stator-Winding entry in the project tree to define the stator windings and conductors. Defining a Line-Start Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motor The general procedure for defining a line-start synchronous motor is as follows: 1. and air gap data for the rotor pole. Double-click the Machine-Stator entry in the project tree to define the stator geometry. Inc. Inc. Choose RMxprt>Analyze to analyze the design. Enter the energy loss due to friction at the given speed in the Frictional Loss field. . and connection type. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. To open the General Data Properties window. and a new Maxwell 3D design. double-click the Machine entry in the project tree. Enter the number of poles for the machine in the Number of Poles field. the model can be viewed in the Maxwell 2D Modeler. Number of Poles The number of poles the machine contains. 10. Enter the given speed in the Reference Speed field. All rights reserved. 5. 9-162 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. To define the general data: 1. or it can be used to create a new Maxwell 2D project.5 . General Data for Line-Start PM Synchronous Motors To access the general data. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window.Maxwell 3D Online Help data. losses. 6. Defining the General Data for a Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor Use the General window to define the basic parameters of the motor.) 2. Inc. Wind Loss The wind loss (due to air resistance) measured at the reference speed. 3. Once analyzed. such as the motor’s rated output power. . Machine Type Defining the Stator Data for a Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor The stator is the outer lamination stack where the polyphase voltage windings reside.© SAS IP. This value is the total number of poles in the stator (or the number of pole pairs multiplied by two). Frictional Loss The frictional energy loss (due to friction) measured at the reference speed. Note When you place the cursor over an entry field in the data windows. The General Data Properties window for a three-phase induction motor contains the following fields: The machine type you selected when inserting a new RMxprt design (LineStart PM Synchronous Motor). a brief description of that field appears in the status bar at the bottom of the RMxprt window. 11. Choose File>Save to save the project. Click OK to close the Properties window. Enter the wind loss due to air resistance measured at the reference speed in the Wind Loss field.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. rated voltage. Reference Speed The given speed of reference. 4. double-click the Machine entry in the project tree on the desktop. Select a steel type from the list. 6. Enter the skew width. Select a Steel Type for the stator core: a. in the Skew Width field. The Select Definition window appears. Stator Slot Data. Inc. Enter the effective magnetic length of the core in the Stacking Factor field. Click the button for Steel Type. The length of the stator core. Click the button to open the Select Definition window. double-click the Machine>Stator entry in the project tree. Enter the Outer Diameter of the stator. b. Note Click the button for the Slot Type. Stator Data for Line-Start PM Synchronous Motors To access the general stator data. To define the general stator data: 1. 4.Maxwell 3D Online Help Use the Stator Data. Enter the length of the stator core in the Length field. Click OK to close the Select Definition window and return to the Properties window. Click OK to close the Properties window. The steel type of the stator core. 8. The inner diameter of the stator core. . Enter the Inner Diameter of the stator. To open the Stator Data Properties window. 10. Inc. RMxprt Machine Types 9-163 Release 14. The stacking factor of the stator core. . 9. The Stator Data Properties window contains the following fields: Outer Diameter Inner Diameter Length Stacking Factor Steel Type The outer diameter of the stator core. or define a new steel type. c. 7. windings. Click OK to close the Select Slot Type window and return to the Properties window. 3.) 2. Enter the Number of Slots in the stator. such as physical dimensions of the lamination. b. measured in slot number. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. 5. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. When you place the mouse cursor over the slot type. All rights reserved. and conductors. c.© SAS IP. and Stator Winding Data windows to define the stator data.5 . double-click the Machine>Stator entry in the project tree on the desktop. The Select Slot Type window appears. a schematic of the selected type appears.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Select the Slot Type: a. Select a slot type (available types include 1 through 4). displaying the slot dimension variables. Stator Slot Data for Line-Start PM Synchronous Motors To access the stator slot data. To open the Stator Slot Data Properties window. Click the button to open the Select Slot Type window. When Parallel Tooth is selected. this slot dimension is determined automatically. Click OK to close the Properties window. When Auto Design is selected. The skew width measured in slot number. this slot dimension is determined based on the value entered in the Tooth Width field. Hs0 Hs2 Bs0 Bs1 Bs2 Rs 5. this slot dimension is determined automatically. Enter the available slot dimensions. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. . and Bs2. 9-164 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. Optionally. Optionally. Bs1. and enter a value in the Tooth Width field. When Auto Design is selected.5 . Defining the Stator Slots for a Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor To define the slot type: 1. When Parallel Tooth is selected.© SAS IP. Always available.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. this slot dimension is determined automatically. to design dimensions of slots Bs1 and Bs2 based on the stator tooth width. Rs is added when the slot type is 3 or 4. When Auto Design is selected. Inc. Available only when Auto Design is cleared. double-click the Machine-Stator-Slot entry in the project tree on the desktop. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. The type of slots in the stator core. Always available. double-click the Machine-Stator-Slot entry in the project tree. Available only when Auto Design and Parallel Tooth are both cleared. this slot dimension is determined based on the value entered in the Tooth Width field. 3.Maxwell 3D Online Help Number of Slots Slot Type Skew Width The number of slots the stator core contains. 4. to automatically design the dimensions of slots Hs2. select the Parallel Tooth check box.) 2. Available only when Auto Design and Parallel Tooth are both cleared. Inc. select the Auto Design check box. All rights reserved. . 4. 3. All rights reserved. Inc. and Bs2. . Defining the Stator Windings and Conductors for a Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor To define the stator windings and conductors: 1. Bs1. Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Hs1 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). double-click the Machine-StatorWinding entry in the project tree on the desktop. b. Parallel Select this to design Bs1 and Bs2 based on the tooth width. Select from one of the following three types of winding: • • Whole Coiled Half Coiled RMxprt Machine Types 9-165 Release 14. Enter the number of layers in the stator winding in the Winding Layers field. The Winding Type window appears. Hs0 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). Bs2 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). Tooth Width The tooth width for the parallel tooth. When this check box is selected. Select the Winding Type for the stator: a.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Hs2 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected).) 2. the Bs1 and Bs2 fields are removed. . Click the button for Winding Type.5 . When this check box is selected. Rs A slot dimension. on which Bs1 and Bs2 are designed.© SAS IP. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. and the Tooth Tooth Width field is added. (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). only two other fields appear in the window: Hs0 and Bs0. To open the Stator Slot Winding Properties window. Bs1 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). Click the Winding tab. Bs0 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected).Maxwell 3D Online Help The Stator Slot Data Properties window contains the following fields: Auto Design Select or clear this to enable or disable auto-design of slots Hs2. Rs is added when the slot type is 3 or 4. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Enter 0 to have RMxprt auto-design this value. All rights reserved. The Wire Size window appears. it has a coil pitch of 5. Select the Wire Size: a. c.5 . in the Coil Pitch field. Click the button for Wire Size. You can select from the following 9-166 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. Select or enter the number of parallel branches in one phase of the winding in the Parallel Branches field. Enter the number of wires per conductor in the Number of Strands field. Editor When you place the mouse cursor over the winding type. Select a wire gauge from the Gauge pull-down menu.© SAS IP. b. measured in number of slots. The coil pitch is the number of slots separating one winding. Enter the thickness of the double-sided wire wrap in the Wire Wrap field. For example. 8. if a coil starts in slot 1 and ends in slot 6. Enter the coil pitch. 6.Maxwell 3D Online Help • Note 5. Insulation Conductor y Wire Wrap = 2*y 10. Enter the total number of conductors in each stator slot in the Conductors per Slot field. Click OK to close the Winding Type window and return to the Properties window. Inc. This value is the number of turns per coil multiplied by the number of layers. . 9. Enter 0 to automatically obtain this value from the wire library. Select a value from the Wire Diameter pull-down list. a schematic of that type appears. . Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 7. c. 3 wires with a diameter of 0. 11. The end adjustment is the distance one end of the conductor extends vertically beyond the end of the stator.Maxwell 3D Online Help options: You can select a specific gauge number. When you are done setting the wire size. Select or clear the Input Half-turn Length check box. then enter the end length adjustment of the stator coils in the End Adjustment field. When you select a gauge number. a single conductor may consist of 5 wires. All rights reserved. d. click OK to close the Wire Size window and return to the Properties window. 15. and RMxprt automatically calculates AUTO the optimal value. The diameter information is then written to the output file when you analyze the design.13mm. The gauge number is based on AWG settings. If you cleared Input Half-turn Length. MIXED For example. You can create your own wire table using Machine>Wire. This option allows you to define a conductor that is made of different size wires.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.21mm and 2 with a diameter of 0. Do one of the following: • • If you selected Input Half-turn Length. Click the End/Insulation tab. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc.© SAS IP. This option allows you to manually enter the Wire Diameter. . 12. 13. then enter the half-turn length of the armature winding in the Half Turn Length field. Inc. End Adjustment Stator Coil End of Stator Stator Pole 14. . the <number> Wire Diameter field is automatically updated. This is useful when USER you want to enter a diameter that does not correspond to a particular wire gauge. and then you can select this wire table using the Tools>Options>Machine Options command. 16. This option sets the Wire Diameter to zero. Enter the distance between two stator coils in the End Clearance field.5 . Enter the inner diameter of the coil tip in the Tip Inner Diameter field. Enter the inner radius of the base corner in the Base Inner Radius field. RMxprt Machine Types 9-167 Release 14. . click OK to close the Winding Editor window. you cannot change the turns or pitch. 3. depending on whether you want to be able to change these setting in the table above. Slot Insulation 18. 2. When these options are selected. To specify the number of turns for each coil: 1.© SAS IP. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Winding Editor for a Line-Start Synchronous Motor For a line-start synchronous motor. If you are working on a quarter or half model. The Winding Editor makes this possible by enabling you to specify the number of turns for each coil. 20.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Enter the limited slot fill factor for the wire design in the Limited Fill Factor field. Enter the thickness of the wedge insulation in the Wedge Thickness field. Click OK to close the Properties window.Maxwell 3D Online Help 17. . All rights reserved. Defining Different Size Wires for a Line-Start Synchronous Motor Use the Gauge option in the Wire Size window if you have a conductor that is made up different size wires. Enter the thickness of the insulation layer in the Layer Insulation field. 21. The Winding Editor window appears. Click Machine>Winding>Edit Layout. Inc. Enter the thickness of the slot liner insulation in the Slot Liner field. 19. 5. you may want to specify a different number of conductors for each stator slot. Select or deselect the Constant Turns or Constant Pitch check boxes. When you are satisfied with the coil settings.5 . In the table in the upper left. set which phase you want for each coil and which slot is the “in” and “out” slot for the current in each coil. 4. 9-168 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. Inc. you may want to specify a multiplier by clicking the Periodic Multiplier check box and specifying a value. and the other 2 have a diameter of 0. Enter a Number in the table to specify how many of the conductor’s wires have this data. 2.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Number of The number of wires per conductor (0 for auto-design). Enter the Fillet value in the table. select MIXED from the Gauge pull-down menu. The first line will list Diameter = 0. . click OK to close the Wire Size window and return to the RMxprt Properties window.Maxwell 3D Online Help To define different size wires: 1. if one conductor is made up of 5 wires. Slot Coil Pitch The coil pitch measured in number of slots. Stator Winding Data for Line-Start PM Synchronous Motors To access the stator winding data. . Enter the appropriate wire data in the table: • • For a round wire: • • Enter the Diameter in the table.13 and Number = 2. 6. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each size wire you want to add. Inc. double-click the Machine-Stator-Winding entry in the project tree.© SAS IP. Parallel Branches The number of parallel branches in the stator winding. When you are finished defining the wires. Conductors per The number of conductors per stator slot (0 for auto-design). In the Wire Size window. Enter a Number in the table to specify how many of the conductor’s wires have this diameter. Click the button to open the Winding Type window and choose from Whole Coiled. and Editor. An equivalent wire diameter is displayed as Wire Size value in the Winding tab in the Properties window. 5. Winding Type The type of stator winding. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. then the mixed wire size table will have two lines. All rights reserved.5 . The Stator Winding Data Properties window contains the following fields: Winding tabWinding Layers The number of winding layers. Half Coiled. Enter the Thickness of the wire in the table. The second line will list Diameter = 0. 3. Select either Round or Rectangular as the Wire Type. and 3 of those wires have a diameter of 0.13mm. Strands RMxprt Machine Types 9-169 Release 14.21 and Number = 3. Click Add to add the new wire data.21mm. Inc. For a rectangular wire: • • • • Enter the Width of the wire in the table. Note For example. 4. When this check box is selected. Click the button to open the Wire Size window where you can specify units. Radius Tip Inner The inner diameter of the coil tip. When this check box is selected.Maxwell 3D Online Help The thickness of the double-sided wire wrap (0 to automatically obtain this value from the wire library). which is the distance one end of the conductor extends vertically beyond the end of the stator. the End Adjustment field appears instead. Factor Wire Wrap End/ Insulation tab 9-170 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. All rights reserved. Input Half-turn Select or clear this check box to specify whether or not you want to enter the half-turn length. diameter. Limited Fill The limited slot fill factor for the wire design. Inc. Layer Insulation The thickness of the insulation layer. Wedge Thickness The thickness of the wedge insulation. . and gauge. Wire Size The diameter of the wire (0 for auto-design).Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. the Length Half Turn Length field appears the next time you open the Properties window. End Adjustment The end length adjustment of the stator coils.© SAS IP.5 . wire type. . Slot Liner The thickness of the slot liner insulation. Half Turn Length The half-turn length of the armature winding. Inc. Base Inner The inner radius of the base corner. Diameter End Clearance The end clearance between two adjacent coils. Enter the outer diameter of the rotor in the Outer Diameter field. select the stator icon and right-click to display the pop-up menu with Insert Vent.5 . b. or 8). This value ranges from 0 to 1 and is defined as the total length minus the total lamination insulation. Enter the inner diameter of the rotor in the Inner Diameter field. . To remove an existing Vent. Click the button. 3. Defining the Rotor Data for a Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor The rotor consists of copper bars in which current is induced by the magnetic fields produced by the stator windings. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 4. A value of 1 indicates that the rotor is not laminated. All rights reserved. 0 for non-magnetic spacer. 7. or define a new steel type. Enter the length of the rotor core in the Length field. Select a Steel Type for the rotor core: a. Click a button to select the desired pole type (1.Maxwell 3D Online Help Optional Vent for Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor Stator To add a Vent to the stator. b. . Enter the effective magnetic length of the rotor core in the Stacking Factor field. In the project tree.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 3.© SAS IP. select the stator and right-click to display the up-up menu with Remove Vent. TIP: When you run RMxprt Machine Types 9-171 Release 14. Vent Ducts Number of radial vent ducts Duct Width Width of radial vent ducts Magnetic spacer width Width of magnetic spacer which hold vent ducts. 6. 7. The Select Pole Type window appears. Inc. To define general rotor data: 1. The vent is shown in the project tree under the stator. double-click the Machine>Rotor entry in the project tree on the desktop. Inc. 5. To open the Rotor Data Properties window. c. 2. The Select Definition window appears.) 2. 6. Click OK to close the Select Definition window and return to the Properties window. 4. 5. Click the button for Steel Type. Select a steel type from the list. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. double-click Machine-Rotor and Machine-Rotor-Pole to define the rotor and the pole. Duct pitch Vent ducts. divided by the total length. Select a Pole Type: a. The Vent Data properties window contains the following fields. Note c. Rotor Data for Line-Start PM Synchronous Motors To access the general rotor data. enter the width of the rib supporting the bridge in the Rib field. 2. The Rotor Data Properties window contains the following fields: Outer Diameter Inner Diameter Length Steel Type Stacking Factor Pole Type The outer diameter of the rotor core. Enter one or more of the following magnet duct dimensions. The length of the rotor core. 5. depending on the Rotor Type you select. 6.© SAS IP. depending on the pole type selected: O1. or are inactive. Click Magnet Type button. The pole type for the rotor. Use the Rotor Pole Data Properties window to define the rotor pole. Select the type of magnet to use in the rotor pole: a. 3. a diagram appears for that pole type. Inc. B1. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. The stacking factor of the rotor core. Enter the limited diameter for the magnet ducts in the D1 field. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window.5 . Click this button to open the Select Pole Type window and select from the following types: 1. 5. Click OK to close the Properties window. 8.Maxwell 3D Online Help the mouse over each option. 8. For all pole types except number 8. When you mouse over each button. When you place the mouse cursor over a pole type. 3. The inner diameter of the rotor core. . . Inc. 9-172 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14.) 2. Click OK to close the Select Pole Type window and return to the Properties window. The steel type of the rotor core. double-click the Machine>Rotor entry in the project tree. All rights reserved. an outline of the selected circuit type appears. 4. O2. double-click the Machine-Rotor-Pole entry in the project tree on the desktop. the diagram changes to show that pole type. 4. showing the arrangement and dimensions. 7. Click the button to open the Select Definition window. Defining the Rotor Pole for a Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor The rotor pole drives the electromagnetic field which is coupled with the stator windings. To define the rotor pole: 1.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Note Some of the fields in the Rotor Pole window change. To open the Rotor Pole Data Properties window. Magnet Thickness The maximum thickness of the magnet. For all pole types. Click OK to close the Select Definition window and return to the Properties window.5 . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. right-click on the rotor item in the project tree to display the pop-up menu with Insert Damper. 7. 6. . See the diagrams in the Select Pole Type window for the location of each dimension and which pole types require which dimensions. RMxprt Machine Types 9-173 Release 14. B1 A magnet duct dimension. Click OK to close the Properties window. Enter the maximum radial thickness of the magnet in the Magnet Thickness field. 8. O1 A magnet duct dimension.Maxwell 3D Online Help b.© SAS IP. . Rotor Pole Data for Line-Start PM Synchronous Motors To access the pole rotor data. For all pole types. See the diagrams in the Select Pole Type window for the location of each dimension and which pole types require which dimensions. All rights reserved. Inc. D1 Optional Rotor Damper for Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor To add a damper. For all pole types. The Rotor Pole Data Properties window contains the following fields: The limited diameter for the magnet ducts.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. See the diagrams in the Select Pole Type window for the location of each dimension and which pole types require which dimensions. For pole types except number 8. To remove an existing damper. Rib The width of the rib at the center of two adjacent poles that support the bridge. The Select Definition window appears. See the diagrams in the Select Pole Type window for the location of each dimension and which pole types require which dimensions. Inc. Magnet Width The maximum width of the magnet. double-click the Machine-Rotor-Pole entry in the project tree. Enter the total width of all magnets per pole in the Magnet Width field. right-click on the rotor icon in the project tree to display the shortcut menu with Remove Damper. O2 A magnet duct dimension. Select a material. Click the button to open the Select Definition window. c. Magnet Type The type of magnet. 2. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor To define the solution data: 1. Bar conductor type Click the field button to open the Materials Selection window to specify the material for the bar conductor. .Maxwell 3D Online Help The Damper Data properties window contains the following fields. Shaft Data for Line-Start PM Synchronous Motors To access the shaft data. To open the Shaft Data Properties window. The Shaft Data Properties window contains the following fields: Magnetic Shaft Select or clear this check box to indicate whether or not the shaft is made of magnetic material.© SAS IP. Inc. 9-174 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. double-click the Machine-Shaft entry in the project tree. . Defining the Shaft Data for a Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor To define the shaft: 1. Click the field button open the Slot selection window and select one of the four types. 3. Pole Slot Type Damper slot type. To open the Solution Setup window. Select or clear the Magnetic Shaft check box to specify whether or not the shaft is to be made of magnetic material. Specify whether the rotor squirrel cage winding is cast. and click Add Solution Setup. Inc.) 2. End Length Single side end extended bar length End Ring Width Axial width of end ring.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Cast Rotor.5 . Click OK to close the Properties window. double-click the Machine-Shaft entry in the project tree on the desktop. End Ring Height Radial height of end ring End Ring Conductor type Click the field button to open the Materials Selection window to specify the material for the end ring conductor. The Operation Type is automatically set to Motor for this machine type. Click the General tab. Damper Slots per Number of damper slots per pole. All rights reserved. right-click Analysis in the project tree. In this case. Enter the RMS line-to-line voltage in the Rated Voltage field. Click the Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor tab. Select Wye or Delta from the Winding Connection pull-down list. and select the units. Type a value for the rated voltage. The Solution Setup window contains the following fields: Operation Type Load Type Rated Output Power Rated Voltage Rated Speed Operating Temperature Winding Connection General tab. Inc. and select the units. 5. Related Topics: Solution Data for Line-Start PM Synchronous Motors Solution Data for Line-Start PM Synchronous Motors To access the solution data. and click Add Solution Setup. there is only one tab. All rights reserved. Select the Load Type used in the motor from the following options: Const Speed Const Power Const Torque Linear Torque Fan Load The speed remains constant in the motor. The load varies nonlinearly with speed. In this case. and Fan Load. Tload = Trated * (n/ nrated) where Trated is given by the output power divided by the given rated speed. Tload = Trated. and select the units.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Enter the desired output speed of the motor at the load point in the Rated Speed field.© SAS IP. Type a value for the operating temperature. The output power remains constant in the motor. Tload = Trated * (n/ nrated)2 where Trated is given by the output power divided by the given rated speed. Inc. 4. 10. 9. The torque remains constant regardless of the speed. Type a value for the rated output voltage. 7. General tab. Enter the temperature at which the system functions in the Operating Temperature field. Related Topics: RMxprt Machine Types 9-175 Release 14. General tab. Const Torque. General tab. Select from Const Speed. given by the output power divided by the given rated speed. . right-click Analysis in the project tree. The operation type is automatically set to Motor for this machine type. Const Power. Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor tab. the General tab. The default is Const Power. For this machine type. The torque increases linearly with speed.5 . 6. and select the units. 8. Enter the output power developed at the shaft of the motor in the Rated Output Power field. Type a value for the rated speed. Click OK to close the Solution Setup window. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Linear Torque. Select Wye or Delta from the Winding Connection pull-down list. General tab.Maxwell 3D Online Help 3. In this case. . General tab. Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.Maxwell 3D Online Help Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor 9-176 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14.5 . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. . Inc. .© SAS IP. All rights reserved. The coil excitation may be either AC or DC. When AC or DC current is applied to the rotor winding (via the brushes and commutator) a torque is produced by the interaction of the rotor (armature) currents and the field produced by the stator poles. field winding resistance. such as its associated pole dimensions. enter the motor data to define the following: • • • • • • General data. laminations. ω is the radian frequency. and windings and conductors. field winding self inductance. and wire definitions. the commutator acts as a mechanical rectifier. and ω e the RMxprt Machine Types 9-177 Release 14. That means the motor can operate not only with a DC source but also with an AC source. . Analysis Approach for Universal Motors For a DC motor. frictional loss. Rf. The commutator causes the armature to create a magnetic flux distribution whose axis is perpendicular to the axis of the field flux produced by the permanent magnets.© SAS IP. Ra. and Rb are the armature resistance. Inc. respectively. Stator pole and winding data. respectively. and are also linearized nonlinear parameters.Maxwell 3D Online Help Universal Motors After you have selected Universal Motors as your model type. Because it can operate with both DC and AC sources.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. All rights reserved. Commutator and brush data. it becomes a series motor. and reference speed. the direction of the produced electromagnetic torque does not change because the armature and the exciting currents alternate their directions at the same time. a series motor is also called universal motor (UniM). Gaa and Gaf are the coefficients of motion induced voltages by the armature and field winding currents.5 . and Maf are the armature self inductance. La. Shaft data. Rotor data. Solution data. The voltage equation of a universal motor is: U = ZI = ( R a + R f + R b )I + jω ( L a + L f + 2M af )I + ω e ( G aa + G af )I where. type of steel. . For these motors. and are linearized nonlinear parameters. For a universal motor. such as the number of poles. rotor diameter. A system of brushes is kept in permanent electrical contact with the commutator. such as the commutator dimensions and brush length. The rotor is equipped with a distributed winding connected to a commutator that revolves together with the rotor. and their mutual inductance. if its field winding is connected in series with its armature winding. such as the slot types and dimensions. the stator is equipped with p pairs of coil-wound poles. Lf. The performance of a universal motor is analyzed in the frequency domain. When the polarity of the terminal voltage changes. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. creating P pairs of alternating north and south poles. and the brush contact resistance. respectively. © SAS IP.5 . Z is equivalent input impedance. and iron-core loss. Double-click the Machine-Stator entry in the project tree to define the stator geometry. respectively. and PFe are frictional and wind loss. Pcua. Insert a universal motor into a new or existing project. Double-click the Machine-Stator-Pole entry in the project tree to define the stator pole dimensions. Pcuf. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. armature copper loss. When the brush axis is aligned with q-axis: M af = G aa = 0 For a given rotor speed ω e. 2. brush drop loss. armature current can be computed based on the applied voltage U. 9-178 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. . All rights reserved. Inc. .Maxwell 3D Online Help rotor speed in electric rad/s. The output mechanical shaft torque T2 is: P2 T 2 = -----ω The efficiency is computed by: P2 eff = -----.× 100 P1 % Defining a Universal Motor The general procedure for defining a universal motor is as follows: 1. Double-click the Machine entry in the project tree to define the general data. Pb. as: U I = ---Z The input power (electric power) is directly computed from voltage and current as: P 1 = UI cos ϕ The output power (mechanical power) is: P 2 = P 1 – ( P fw + P b + P + P Fe ) cuf where Pfw. field winding copper loss. 3. 4. This value is the total number of poles in the stator (or the number of pole pairs multiplied by two). 6. All rights reserved. Choose RMxprt>Analyze to analyze the design. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. RMxprt Machine Types 9-179 Release 14. 8. To open the General Data Properties window. Double-click the Machine-Commutator entry in the project tree to define the commutator and brush data. Inc. General Data for Universal Motors To access the general data. To define the general data: 1. 13. Enter the given speed in the Reference Speed field. 6. Right-click Analysis in the project tree. Double-click the Machine-Rotor-Winding entry in the project tree to define the rotor windings and conductors. Once analyzed. double-click the Machine entry in the project tree. 9. and rated voltage. Inc. Refer to the Universal Motor Problem application note. for a specific example.5 .) 2. and click Add Solution Setup to define the solution data.Maxwell 3D Online Help 5.© SAS IP. . Double-click the Machine-Stator-Winding entry in the project tree to define the stator windings and conductors. or it can be used to create a new Maxwell 2D project. 3.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Defining the General Data for a Universal Motor Use the General window to define the basic parameters of the universal motor such as the power settings. Note When you place the cursor over an entry field in the data windows. double-click the Machine entry in the project tree on the desktop. 11. Click OK to close the Properties window. Enter the energy loss due to friction at the given speed in the Frictional Loss field. Choose File>Save to save the project. a brief description of that field appears in the status bar at the bottom of the RMxprt window. 5. and a new Maxwell 3D design. Double-click the Machine-Shaft entry in the project tree to define the magnetism of the shaft. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 12. 4. 7. . Double-click the Machine-Rotor entry in the project tree to define the rotor geometry. on the technical support page of the ANSYS web site. speed. Enter the number of poles for the machine in the Number of Poles field. the model can be viewed in the Maxwell 2D Modeler. Enter the wind loss due to air resistance measured at the reference speed in the Wind Loss field. 10. Double-click the Machine-Rotor-Slot entry in the project tree to define the rotor slot dimensions. c.© SAS IP. Select a Steel Type for the stator core: a. double-click the Machine>Stator entry in the project tree on the desktop. Click the button for Steel Type. 7. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. The inner diameter of the stator core. Stator Data for Universal Motors To access the general stator data. Enter the stacking factor for the stator core in the Stacking Factor field. Select a steel type from the list. . and conductors. double-click the Machine>Stator entry in the project tree. Enter the Outer Diameter of the stator. The stator is the outer lamination stack where the polyphase voltage windings reside. b.5 . Frictional Loss The frictional energy loss (due to friction) measured at the reference speed. The Stator Data Properties window contains the following fields: Outer Diameter Overall Width Inner Diameter The outer diameter of the stator core. 9-180 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. windings. To open the Stator Data Properties window. Enter the length of the stator core in the Length field.Maxwell 3D Online Help The General Data Properties window for a three-phase induction motor contains the following fields: The machine type you selected when inserting a new RMxprt design (Switched Reluctance Motor). Enter the overall width of the stator outer profile in the Overall Width field.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. . 3. Inc. Click OK to close the Properties window. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Reference Speed The given speed of reference. Machine Type Defining the Stator Data for a Universal Motor Use the Stator Properties windows to define the stator dimensions. Number of Poles Number of poles for this machine. 4. Inc. or define a new steel type. Wind Loss The wind loss (due to air resistance) measured at the reference speed. Click OK to close the Select Definition window and return to the Properties window. 6. The overall width of the stator outer profile.) 2. The Select Definition window appears. 8. To define the general stator data: 1. slots. All rights reserved. 5. Enter the Inner Diameter of the stator. 2.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.75 yields a magnet with a span of 135 degrees (based on 0. . To open the Stator Pole Data Properties window.75*180 degrees). The steel type of the stator core. Use the s Stator Pole Data Properties window to define the stator pole. Click the button to open the Select Definition window. Enter the ratio of the actual arc distance in relation to the maximum possible arc distance in the Embrace field. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. RMxprt Machine Types 9-181 Release 14. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.5 . All rights reserved. This value is between 0 and 1. double-click the Machine-Stator-Pole entry in the project tree on the desktop. The effective magnetic length of the stator core.) Note For a two-pole machine. a pole embrace of 0. .© SAS IP. Inc. 3. Defining the Stator Pole for a Universal Motor The rotor pole drives the electromagnetic field which is coupled with the stator windings.Maxwell 3D Online Help Length Stacking Factor Steel Type The length of the stator core. To define the rotor pole: 1. Inc. Enter the distance from the center of the stator to the magnet arc center in the Offset field. Inc. Enter the yoke thickness in the Ty field. 10. . 7. To auto-design this dimension. enter 0. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. All rights reserved. Enter the pole’s hole radius in the R1 field. For a linear connection. 6.5 . Enter the radius of the shoe connecting arc in the R4 field. 5. Enter the pole’s side fillet radius in the R2 field.Maxwell 3D Online Help Enter 0 for a uniform air gap.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.© SAS IP. 9-182 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. Enter the shoe-tip thickness in the Ts field. enter 0. Enter the radius of the pole’s center side fillet arcs in the R3 field. Enter the minimum pole width in the PoleWidth field. Magnet Radius Rotor OD Radius Offset 4. enter 0. 8. . 9. If there is no hole in the design. Enter the outer radius of the screw hole between the two poles in the R6 field. The Stator Pole Data Properties window contains the following fields: Embrace Offset PoleWidth Ty Ts R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 The pole embrace. The radius of the pole side fillet. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. The radius of the center of the pole side fillet arcs. The inner radius of the screw hole between two poles (0 for no hole).Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Defining the Stator Windings and Conductors for a Universal Motor To define the stator windings and conductors: 1. The radius of the shoe connecting arc (0 for auto-design or for a linear connection). 13. Inc. The hole radius in the pole (0 for no hole).) 2. double-click the Machine-Stator-Winding entry in the project tree on the desktop.5 . 3. Click OK to close the Properties window. The shoe-tip thickness. Enter the end length adjustment of the stator coils in the End Adjustment field.Maxwell 3D Online Help 11. If there is no hole in the design. The minimum pole width. Enter the thickness of the insulation between the stator core and the field winding in the Insulation Thickness field. Enter the inner radius of the screw hole between the two poles in the R5 field. enter 0. 12. All rights reserved. Inc. Stator Pole Data for Universal Motors To access the stator pole data. If there is no hole in the design. The end adjustment is the distance one end of the conductor extends vertically beyond the end of the RMxprt Machine Types 9-183 Release 14. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. enter 0. . To open the Stator Winding Properties window. The outer radius of the screw hole between two poles (0 for no hole). The pole-arc center offset from the stator center (0 for a uniform air gap). . double-click the Machine-Stator-Pole entry in the project tree. The yoke thickness.© SAS IP. The Wire Size window appears. 5. Click the button for Wire Size. 6. Enter the number of turns per stator pole in the Turns per Pole field. Select a wire gauge from the Gauge pull-down menu. b. Select a value from the Wire Diameter pull-down list. Enter the number of wires per conductor in the Number of Strands field.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Enter 0 to automatically obtain this value from the wire library.5 . Inc.Maxwell 3D Online Help stator. To auto-design the number of turns. End Adjustment Stator Coil End of Stator Stator Pole 4.© SAS IP. c. Inc. Select the Wire Size: a. Enter the thickness of the double-sided wire wrap in the Wire Wrap field. You can select from the following 9-184 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. 7. . Enter 0 to have RMxprt auto-design this value. Insulation Conductor y Wire Wrap = 2*y 8. enter 0. All rights reserved. Enter the number of parallel branches in the stator winding in the Parallel Branches field. 13mm. 11. Defining Different Size Wires for a Universal Motor Stator Winding To define different size wires: 1. Enter the thickness of the insulation layer in the Layer Insulation field. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. You can create your own wire table using Machine>Wire. The diameter information is then written to the output file when you analyze the design. Enter the limited slot fill factor for the wire design in the Limited Fill Factor field.5 . and then you can select this wire table using the Tools>Options>Machine Options command. select MIXED from the Gauge pull-down menu. Enter the Thickness of the wire in the table. 2. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each size wire you want to add. When you select a gauge number. . . d. Enter the thickness of the wedge insulation in the Wedge Thickness field.Maxwell 3D Online Help options: You can select a specific gauge number. the <number> Wire Diameter field is automatically updated. This option sets the Wire Diameter to zero. 3 wires with a diameter of 0. a single conductor may consist of 5 wires. 5. click OK to close the Wire Size window and return to the Properties window.© SAS IP. For a rectangular wire: • • • • Enter the Width of the wire in the table. 4. Enter the Fillet value in the table. Enter the appropriate wire data in the table: • • For a round wire: • • Enter the Diameter in the table. Click Add to add the new wire data. RMxprt Machine Types 9-185 Release 14. All rights reserved. Enter a Number in the table to specify how many of the conductor’s wires have this diameter. Inc. 3. Select either Round or Rectangular as the Wire Type. In the Wire Size window. 10. MIXED For example. The gauge number is based on AWG settings. 9. Click OK to close the Properties window. This option allows you to manually enter the Wire Diameter.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Inc. When you are done setting the wire size. and RMxprt automatically calculates AUTO the optimal value. 12.21mm and 2 with a diameter of 0. This is useful when USER you want to enter a diameter that does not correspond to a particular wire gauge. Enter a Number in the table to specify how many of the conductor’s wires have this data. This option allows you to define a conductor that is made of different size wires. double-click the Machine-Stator-Winding entry in the project tree. The rotor consists of copper bars in which current is induced by the magnetic fields produced by the stator windings.21mm. and the other 2 have a diameter of 0. if one conductor is made up of 5 wires. To define general stator data: 1. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window.13mm. The Stator Winding Data Properties window contains the following fields: Insulation The thickness of the insulation between the stator core and the field winding. which is the distance one end of the conductor extends vertically beyond the end of the stator.5 . . wire type. Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. The commutator acts as a mechanical rectifier in the motor. When you are finished defining the wires. then the mixed wire size table will have two lines. Parallel Branches The number of parallel branches in the stator winding. Note For example. and ranges from 0 to 1. Number of The number of wires per conductor (0 for auto-design). Thickness End Adjustment The end length adjustment of the stator coils.Maxwell 3D Online Help 6. To open the Rotor Data Properties window. double-click Machine>Rotor and Machine-Rotor-Pole to define the rotor and the pole. . Stator Winding Data for Universal Motors To access the stator winding data. Inc.) 2. click OK to close the Wire Size window and return to the RMxprt Properties window. Strands Wire Wrap The thickness of the double-sided wire wrap (0 to automatically obtain this value from the wire library). It is defined as the total length 9-186 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. Enter the stacking factor for the rotor core in the Stacking Factor field.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Turns per Pole The number of turns per stator pole (0 for auto-design).© SAS IP. The second line will list Diameter = 0. and gauge. Click the button to open the Wire Size window where you can specify units. In the project tree.21 and Number = 3. An equivalent wire diameter is displayed as Wire Size value in the Winding tab in the Properties window. double-click the Machine>Rotor entry in the project tree on the desktop. diameter. This value relates to the effective magnetic length of the core. Defining the Rotor Data for a Universal Motor The rotor is equipped with slots containing copper conductors that are connected to the commutator. All rights reserved. The first line will list Diameter = 0. Wire Size The diameter of the wire (0 for auto-design).13 and Number = 2. and 3 of those wires have a diameter of 0. Select a Slot Type: a. 3. 7. or define a new steel type. 4. Click the button for Steel Type. Click OK to close the Properties window. Slot 4 has a rounded edge at the same location. double-click the Machine>Rotor entry in the project tree. Click the button to open the Select Definition window. c. The steel type of the rotor core. 8.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Select a Steel Type for the rotor core: a. where the quantity Hr1 defines the radius of the corner slot. 3. 6. 6. Inc. c. Enter the number of slots in the skew width in the Skew Width field. Enter the inner diameter of the rotor core in the Inner Diameter field. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. b. 2. 9. 2. Inc.Maxwell 3D Online Help 3. Enter the outer diameter of the rotor core in the Outer Diameter field. . Though slots 3 and 4 are visually similar. Click the button. Click OK to close the Select Slot Type window and return to the Properties window. Rotor Data for Universal Motors To access the general rotor data. The Rotor Data Properties window contains the following fields: Stacking Factor Number of Slots Slot Type Outer Diameter Inner Diameter Length Steel Type Skew Width The effective magnetic length of the rotor core. The rotor core slot type. The outer diameter of the rotor core. . The number of slots in the rotor core. they differ in how the edges are constructed. b. 4.5 . The inner diameter of the rotor core. 5. Enter the number of slots in the rotor core in the Number of Slots field. The skew width measured in slot number. Click OK to close the Select Definition window and return to the Properties window. Click the button to open the Select Slot Type window and select from the following types: 1. the diagram changes to show that pole type. All rights reserved. Optionally. Select a steel type from the list. The Select Slot Type window appears. Click a button to select the desired pole type (1. 5. minus the total insulation from the laminations. TIP: When you run the mouse over each option. check User Defined Slot if you wish to define the slot dimensions using the Slot Editor. RMxprt Machine Types 9-187 Release 14.© SAS IP. 4. or 6). 10. A value of 1 indicates that the rotor is not laminated. 5. Enter the length of the rotor core in the Length field. The length of the rotor core. Slot 3 has a tapered edge leading from the slot opening to the main slot body. The Select Definition window appears. divided by the total length. ) 2. Available only when Auto Design is cleared. . Always available. Always available. When Parallel Tooth is selected. this slot dimension is determined automatically. double-click the Machine-Rotor-Slot entry in the project tree. and the Tooth Tooth Width field is added. When this check box is selected. Tooth Width The tooth width for the parallel tooth.© SAS IP. Click OK to close the Properties window. Bs1. Optionally. When Auto Design is selected. Inc. . and Bs2. Available only when Auto Design is cleared. double-click the Machine-Rotor-Slot entry in the project tree on the desktop. Parallel Select this to design Bs1 and Bs2 based on the tooth width. 3. When this check box is selected. to automatically design the dimensions of slots Hs2. Always available. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Enter the available slot dimensions. Hs0 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected). When Parallel Tooth is selected.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.: Hs0 Hs1 Hs2 Bs0 Bs1 Bs2 Rs 4. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. The following dimensions may be listed. and Bs2. Bs1. When Auto Design is selected. To open the Rotor Slot Data Properties window. The Rotor Slot Data Properties window contains the following fields: Auto Design Select or clear this to enable or disable auto-design of slots Hs2. this slot dimension is determined based on the value entered in the Tooth Width field.5 Tesla in the rotor teeth. Rs is added when the slot type is 3 or 4. only two other fields appear in the window: Hs0 and Bs0. this slot dimension is determined automatically. Inc.5 . select the Auto Design check box. this slot dimension is determined based on the value entered in the Tooth Width field. on which Bs1 and Bs2 are designed. this slot dimension is determined automatically. the Bs1 and Bs2 fields are removed. Available only when Auto Design is cleared.Maxwell 3D Online Help Defining the Rotor Slots for Universal Motors To define the physical dimensions of the rotor slots: 1. 9-188 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. All rights reserved. Rotor Slot Data for Universal Motors To access the rotor slot data. Hs1 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected). depending on the Slot Type selected and depending on whether or not Auto Design is selected. Always available. When Auto Design is selected. Using this option causes the software to converge to a flux density value of 1. © SAS IP. Inc. double-click the Machine-RotorWinding entry in the project tree on the desktop. All rights reserved.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.) 2. Rs is added when the slot type is 3 or 4. Inc. the multiplex number is the number of commutators between the start and end of one winding. A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected). The Winding Type window appears. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Select a Winding Type: a. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. A slot dimension. and conductors: 1. . To open the Rotor Slot Winding Properties window. 2 for double windings. 3. and the number of parallel branches is equal to the number of poles multiplied by the multiplex number. For a wave winding. Lap Wave Frog Leg Enter the number of windings in the Multiplex Number field (1 for a single winding.5 . Click the button for Winding Type. 3 for triple windings). Click the Winding tab. b. A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected). the RMxprt Machine Types 9-189 Release 14. (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected). A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected). wires. . Hs2 Bs0 Bs1 Bs2 Rs Rs Defining the Rotor Windings and Conductors for a Universal Motor To define the rotor windings. For a lap winding.Maxwell 3D Online Help A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected). Select from one of the following three types of winding: • • • 4. . The coil pitch is the number of slots separating one winding. Enter 0 to automat- 9-190 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. which are referred to as virtual slots. The rotor is assumed to have two layers of conductors. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. 5. Enter the coil pitch. For example.5 . an upper and a lower layer. Enter the number of wires per conductor in the Number of Strands field. 9. Enter 0 to have RMxprt auto-design this value. . the upper and lower layer can have two windings each. measured in number of slots. Each layer of conductors can have a number of windings. for a 12 slot machine. All rights reserved. 8. this would yield 24 commutation segments. This value is the number of turns per coil multiplied by the number of layers. in the Coil Pitch field. which would yield a virtual slot number of two. Inc. Enter the total number of conductors in each rotor slot in the Conductors per Slot field.Maxwell 3D Online Help number of parallel branches equals the multiplex number multiplied by two. Note 6. 7.© SAS IP. it has a coil pitch of 5. if a coil starts in slot 1 and ends in slot 6. This value is the total number of conductors in one real full rotor slot. Enter the thickness of the double-sided wire wrap in the Wire Wrap field. Enter the number of virtual slots per each real slot in the Virtual Slots field.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. For example. a single conductor may consist of 5 wires. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.5 . the <number> Wire Diameter field is automatically updated. All rights reserved. When you are done setting the wire size. Click the button for Wire Size.13mm. Inc. click OK to close the Wire Size window and return to the Properties window. 13. . and RMxprt automatically calculates AUTO the optimal value. Select a wire gauge from the Gauge pull-down menu. 11. You can create your own wire table using Machine>Wire. MIXED For example. 12. This is useful when USER you want to enter a diameter that does not correspond to a particular wire gauge. 3 wires with a diameter of 0. This option allows you to manually enter the Wire Diameter. b. Select the Wire Size: a.Maxwell 3D Online Help ically obtain this value from the wire library.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. This option allows you to define a conductor that is made of different size wires. This option sets the Wire Diameter to zero. The gauge number is based on AWG settings.21mm and 2 with a diameter of 0. Do one of the following: • If you selected Input Half-turn Length. Click the End/Insulation tab. . RMxprt Machine Types 9-191 Release 14. and then you can select this wire table using the Tools>Options>Machine Options command. The diameter information is then written to the output file when you analyze the design. c. Select a value from the Wire Diameter pull-down list. The Wire Size window appears. Insulation Conductor y Wire Wrap = 2*y 10. Select or clear the Input Half-turn Length check box. then enter the half-turn length of the armature winding in the Half Turn Length field. When you select a gauge number. You can select from the following options: You can select a specific gauge number. Inc.© SAS IP. d. Enter the thickness of the slot liner insulation in the Slot Liner field.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 19. Enter the inner diameter of the coil tip in the Tip Inner Diameter field. . 9-192 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. Inc. Enter the thickness of the insulation layer in the Layer Insulation field.5 . Slot Insulation 18. . Inc. End Adjustment End of Stator Stator Coil 14. 16.Maxwell 3D Online Help • If you cleared Input Half-turn Length. Enter the distance between two rotor coils in the End Clearance field. The end adjustment is the distance one end of the conductor extends vertically beyond the end of the stator.© SAS IP. 15. All rights reserved. 17. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Enter the thickness of the wedge insulation in the Wedge Thickness field. then enter the end length adjustment of the stator coils in the End Adjustment field. Enter the inner radius of the base corner in the Base Inner Radius field. 3. click OK to close the Wire Size window and return to the RMxprt Properties window.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 22. All rights reserved. and 3 of those wires have a diameter of 0. and the other 2 have a diameter of 0. Enter the Thickness of the wire in the table. The second line will list Diameter = 0.21mm.13 and Number = 2. Enter the limited slot fill factor for the wire design in the Limited Fill Factor field. An equivalent wire diameter is displayed as Wire Size value in the Winding tab in the Properties window.Maxwell 3D Online Help 20. Enter a Number in the table to specify how many of the conductor’s wires have this data. 6. or Full.21 and Number = 3.13mm. RMxprt Machine Types 9-193 Release 14. For a rectangular wire: • • • • Enter the Width of the wire in the table. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Half. Enter the Fillet value in the table. Select either Round or Rectangular as the Wire Type. double-click the Machine-Rotor-Winding entry in the project tree. To define different size wires: 1. Enter the appropriate wire data in the table: • • For a round wire: • • Enter the Diameter in the table. Inc. The first line will list Diameter = 0. Click Add to add the new wire data. Enter a Number in the table to specify how many of the conductor’s wires have this diameter. 2. Defining Different Size Wires for a Universal Motor Rotor Winding Use the Gauge option if you have a conductor that is made up different size wires. . In the Wire Size window. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each size wire you want to add. if one conductor is made up of 5 wires. then the mixed wire size table will have two lines. Select the type of equalizer connection from the Equalizer Connection pull-down menu.5 . select MIXED from the Gauge pull-down menu. Inc. Click OK to close the Properties window. Select from None. Note For example. . 5. When you are finished defining the wires. Rotor Winding Data for Universal Motors To access the stator winding data. 4. 21.© SAS IP. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. and gauge. Input Half-turn Select or clear this check box to specify whether or not you want to enter the half-turn length. double. Click the button to open the Wire Size window where you can specify units. Base Inner Radius The inner radius of the base corner. Inc. Virtual Slots The number of virtual slots per real slot. Diameter End Clearance The end clearance between two adjacent coils. When this check box is selected. diameter. or 3). Slot Coil Pitch The coil pitch measured in number of slots. When this check box is selected. the Length Half Turn Length field appears the next time you open the Properties window.5 . Inc. All rights reserved. Number of The number of wires per conductor (0 for auto-design). Click the button to open the Winding Type window and choose from Lap. Tip Inner The inner diameter of the coil tip.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. the End Adjustment field appears instead. or triple windings (1. Multiplex Number Single. Layer Insulation The thickness of the insulation layer. . Wire Size The diameter of the wire (0 for auto-design). and Frog Leg. Wedge Thickness The thickness of the wedge insulation. Slot Liner The thickness of the slot liner insulation. End Adjustment The end length adjustment of the rotor coils. .© SAS IP. Conductors per The number of conductors per rotor slot (0 for auto-design). Half Turn Length The half-turn length of the armature winding. 9-194 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. wire type. Wave. Strands Wire Wrap The thickness of the double-sided wire wrap (0 to automatically obtain this value from the wire library).Maxwell 3D Online Help The Rotor Winding Data Properties window contains the following fields: Winding tabWinding Type End/ Insulation tab The type of rotor winding. 2. . Enter the thickness of the insulation between two consecutive commutator segments in the Commutator Insulation field. For Cylinder commutators. All rights reserved. do the following: a. When you place the mouse cursor over the commutator type. 6. To define the commutator and brush pairs: 1. Enter the Inner Diameter. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. Enter the Commutator Diameter. For Pancake commutators.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. the corresponding magnetic field has a fixed distribution with respect to the stator. or Full. Inc. Connection Defining the Commutator and Brush for a Universal Motor The commutator allows current transfer between DC terminals or brushes and the rotor coils.© SAS IP. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. providing the current to the system as a function of rotation. Equalizer The connection type of the equalizer. an outline of the commutator appears.) 2. 3. Inc. b.5 .Maxwell 3D Online Help Limited Fill FactorThe limited slot fill factor for the wire design. Enter the Commutator Length. . do the following: a. double-click the Machine>Commutator entry in the project tree on the desktop. b. Due to the action of the commutator. RMxprt Machine Types 9-195 Release 14. Click the Commutator tab. Select Cylinder or Pancake Type as the Commutator Type. Select from None. Note 4. To open the Commutator Data Properties window. Enter the Outer Diameter. 5. Half. 12. Enter the angle of displacement from the neutral axis. if the rotor turns clockwise but the brush displacement is counter-clockwise. Enter the voltage drop across one brush pair in the Brush Drop field. in the Brush Displacement field. The Commutator Data Properties window contains the following fields: Commutator Commutator Type The type of commutator. 10. the diameter of the commutator. if the rotor turns clockwise and the brush displacement is also clockwise. . Click OK to close the Properties window. These fields are shown only when the Friction Loss field in the General window is set to zero. Click the button to open the Select tab Commutator Type window and select from Cylinder or Pancake. in mechanical degrees.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 11. Commutator Length For a Cylinder commutator type. All rights reserved.5 . Note The brush displacement is positive for the counter-clockwise direction. the outer diameter of the commutator. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inner Diameter Commutator Insulation 9-196 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. Outer Diameter For a Pancake commutator type.© SAS IP. Enter the number of brush pairs when using a wave armature winding in the Brush Pairs field. Click the Brush tab. double-click the Machine>Commutator entry in the project tree. Enter the Brush Width. 8. The thickness of the insulation between the two commutator bars. For a Pancake commutator type. 13. Enter the Brush Length. then the angle is positive. Enter the mechanical pressure of the brushes as they press against the commutator in the Brush Press field. the inner diameter of the commutator.Maxwell 3D Online Help 7. then the angle is negative. For example. Note If the Friction Loss field is used in the General window. Commutator Diameter For a Cylinder commutator type. the Brush Press and Frictional Coefficient fields will be hidden in the Commutator/Brush window. Enter the Frictional Coefficient of the brush. Inc. 9. 15. Commutator and Brush Data for Universal Motors To access the commutator and brush data. Inc. . the length of the commutator. 14. The output power remains constant in the motor. The number of brush pairs.) Defining the Shaft Data for a Universal Motor To define the shaft: 1. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. Inc. To open the Shaft Data Properties window. in mechanical degrees (positive for anti-rotating direction).) 2. RMxprt Machine Types 9-197 Release 14. The Operation Type is automatically set to Motor for this machine type. The Shaft Data Properties window contains the following fields: Magnetic Shaft Select or clear this check box to indicate whether or not the shaft is made of magnetic material. double-click the Machine>Shaft entry in the project tree on the desktop. The length of the brush. (Available only when Frictional Loss is set to zero for the machine. Select the Load Type used in the motor from the following options: Const Speed Const Power The speed remains constant in the motor. The voltage drop across a one-pair brush.5 . (Available only when Frictional Loss is set to zero for the machine. .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Shaft Data for Universal Motors To access the shaft data. Select or clear the Magnetic Shaft check box to specify whether or not the shaft is to be made of magnetic material. Click OK to close the Properties window. Inc. Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Universal Motor To define the solution data: 1.) The frictional coefficient of the brush. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. To open the Solution Setup window. Click the General tab. . The displacement of the brush from the neutral position. 2. and click Add Solution Setup. All rights reserved. right-click Analysis in the project tree. The brush press per unit area.Maxwell 3D Online Help Brush tab Brush Width Brush Length Brush Pairs Brush Displacement Brush Drop Brush Press Frictional Coefficient The width of the brush. double-click the Machine>Shaft entry in the project tree. 3. 3.© SAS IP. 7. Inc. General tab. 8. Tload = Trated * (n/ nrated) where Trated is given by the output power divided by the given rated speed. Enter the desired output speed of the motor at the load point in the Rated Speed field. Related Topics: Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Universal Motor 9-198 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. Const Torque. The operation type is automatically set to Motor for this machine type. The load varies nonlinearly with speed. For this machine type. Type a value for the operating temperature. right-click Analysis in the project tree. Inc. General tab. and select the units.5 . and select the units. and select the units. Type a value for the rated speed. Click OK to close the Solution Setup window. Enter a frequency in the Frequency field. . General tab. All rights reserved. 4. 10. The Solution Setup window contains the following fields: Operation Type Load Type Rated Output Power Rated Voltage Rated Speed Operating Temperature Frequency General tab. Enter the output power developed at the shaft of the motor in the Rated Output Power field. Enter the RMS line-to-line voltage in the Rated Voltage field. In this case. Linear Torque. Enter the Frequency. Tload = Trated. In this case. there is only one tab. In this case. and select the units.© SAS IP. Type a value for the rated output voltage. General tab. 5. The torque increases linearly with speed. Related Topics: Solution Data for Universal Motors Solution Data for Universal Motors To access the solution data. Enter the temperature at which the system functions in the Operating Temperature field. 6. The default is Const Power. the General tab. and select the units. and Fan Load. General tab. 9. . Select from Const Speed. and click Add Solution Setup. Type a value for the rated voltage. Click the Universal Motor tab.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Universal Motor tab. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Tload = Trated * (n/ nrated)2 where Trated is given by the output power divided by the given rated speed.Maxwell 3D Online Help Const Torque Linear Torque Fan Load The torque remains constant regardless of the speed. and select the units. given by the output power divided by the given rated speed. Const Power. All rights reserved. enter the motor data to define the following: • • • • • • • General data. lamination. In order to RMxprt Machine Types 9-199 Release 14. The armature reaction field causes poor commutating and poor voltage distribution along commutator bars. such as the output power. rotor diameter. . such as the commutator type and dimensions and brush length. dimensions. By option you can insert or remove the following to a DC machine. If both self-excited shunt and series windings are mounted on the stator poles. Stator field data. such as its associated pole dimensions.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. and winding information. When DC current is applied to the rotating armature winding via the brushes and commutator. A system of brushes is kept in permanent electrical contact with the commutator. RMxprt assumes that the armature winding connects the series winding in series first. The separately excited shunt winding is excited by a separate DC voltage source. speed. As a result. added under the stator field. a stationary magnetic field distribution is created with the axis electrically perpendicular to the axis of the field produced by the shunt and/or series windings. and machine type (motor or generator). such as shoe and pole insulation. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. which are excited by p pairs of shunt and/or series windings. The self-excited shunt winding is excited by the terminal voltage of the armature winding and is connected in parallel with the armature winding. The stator is equipped with p pairs of poles. rated voltage. Rotor data. type of steel. A series winding is connected in series with the armature winding.Maxwell 3D Online Help General DC Machines After you have selected DC Machine as your model type. Inc. Analysis Approach for General DC Machines For a Direct-Current (DC) Electric Machine Design.5 .© SAS IP. added under the rotor Shunt data. The field produced by the armature current is called armature reaction field. Stator data. such as the slot types and dimensions. A shunt winding may be separately excited or self-excited. and pole magnet specifications. Series data. Commutator and brush data. and wire specifications.called armature winding -. . Solution data. Inc. added under the stator field. added under the stator Vent data. either a generator or motor.that is connected to a commutator revolving together with the rotor. For these brush commutating machines. • • • • • Compensating data. added under the stator Commutating data. the rotor is equipped with a distributed winding -. the commutator together with the brushes acts as a mechanical rectifier. a torque is produced by the interaction of the fields produced by the armature and exciting currents. Shaft data. then connects the shunt winding in parallel. commutating poles and winding can be equipped between two adjacent main poles and compensating winding can be equipped under main poles. E is the back emf as given below: E = C Ef ⋅ ω ⋅ I f + C Es ⋅ ω ⋅ I a where CEf and CEs. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Tfw is the frictional and wind torque. is the rotor speed in mechanical rad/s. R1 is the total series resistance of the armature branch. Inc. All rights reserved. . are the back-emf coefficients in ohm. DC Machine Operating as a Motor The voltage equation of a DC motor is U = E + ( Ub + R1 ⋅ Ia ) where. respectively.s/rad. Inc.© SAS IP. respectively. and If and Ia are the exciting currents of the shunt and series windings. .5 . as shown below: U – U b – C Ef ⋅ ω ⋅ I f I a = -------------------------------------------------R 1 + C Es ⋅ ω The shaft torque is computed from: T 2 = ( C Tf ⋅ I f + C Ts ⋅ I a ) ⋅ I a – T fw where CTf and CTs are the torque coefficients in Nm/A^2 which are numerically the same as CEf and CEs. Ub is the voltage drop of one-pair brushes. armature current can be computed based on the terminal voltage U. The output power (mechanical power) is P2 = T2 ⋅ ω The input power (electrical power) is P 1 = P 2 + ( P fw + P Cua + P b + P Fe ) 9-200 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. The performance of a DC machine is computed by DC analysis. which depend on the saturation of the magnetic field. For a given speed.Maxwell 3D Online Help improve commutating.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. and PFe are the frictional and wind loss. All rights reserved. PCua. The efficiency is: P2 η = -----. Pb. armature branch copper loss.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.× 100 % P1 RMxprt Machine Types 9-201 Release 14. . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. iron-core loss and shunt winding copper loss.× 100 % P1 DC Machine Operating as a Generator For a DC generator. . Inc. Inc.© SAS IP.Maxwell 3D Online Help where Pfw. brush drop loss.5 . respectively. the voltage equation is U = E – ( Ub + R1 ⋅ Ia ) E = C Ef ⋅ ω ⋅ I f + C Es ⋅ ω ⋅ I a The performance is analyzed as follows U + U b – C Ef ⋅ ω ⋅ I f I a = – --------------------------------------------------R 1 – C Es ⋅ ω T 1 = ( ( C Tf ⋅ I f + C Ts ⋅ I a ) ⋅ I a ) + T fw P1 = T1 ⋅ ω P 2 = P 1 – ( P fw + P Cua + P b + P Fe ) P2 η = -----. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. conductors. 7. This value is the total number of poles in the stator (or the number of pole pairs multiplied by two). Insert a DC machine into a new or existing project. Right-click Analysis in the project tree. To open the General Data Properties window. Double-click the Machine-Rotor-Winding entry in the project tree to define the rotor conductors and windings. Double-click the Machine-Stator entry in the project tree to define the stator geometry. Double-click the Machine-Rotor entry in the project tree to define the general rotor geometry. All rights reserved. 4. and click Add Solution Setup to define the solution data. and rated voltage. Choose File>Save to save the project.5 . Once analyzed. Inc. Double-click the Machine entry in the project tree to define the general data. Enter the number of poles for the machine in the Number of Poles field.© SAS IP. and the insulation data. for a specific example of a problem using a DC machine. . the pole data. 10. 8. a brief description of that field appears in the status bar at the bottom of the RMxprt window. Double-click the Machine-Rotor-Slot entry in the project tree to define the rotor slot dimensions. 5. and insulation data. Inc. Double-click the Machine-Shaft entry in the project tree to define the magnetism of the shaft. double-click the Machine entry in the project tree on the desktop.) 2. To define the general data: 1. 9.Maxwell 3D Online Help Defining a General DC Machine The general procedure for defining a a general DC machine is as follows: 1. . Note When you place the cursor over an entry field. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Double-click the Machine-Stator-Field entry in the project tree to define the stator windings. Double-click the Machine-Stator-Pole entry in the project tree to define the stator pole dimensions. 13. (IS THERE ONE?) Defining the General Data for a General DC Machine Use the General window to define the basic parameters of the DC motor. speed. such as the power settings. 6. or it can be used to create a new Maxwell 2D project. and a new Maxwell 3D design. Choose RMxprt>Analyze to analyze the design. 12. 11. on the technical support page of the ANSYS web site. 2. Double-click the Machine-Commutator entry in the project tree to define the commutator and brush data. 3. Refer to the DC Machine application note. the model can be viewed in the Maxwell 2D Modeler. 9-202 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. b. The Select Definition window appears. 3.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 7. Inc. 4. Click OK to close the Properties window. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. To define the general stator data: 1. The Select Pole Type window appears.Maxwell 3D Online Help 3. Number of Poles The number of poles the machine contains. Reference Speed The given speed of reference. and conductors. The General Data Properties window for a three-phase induction motor contains the following fields: The machine type you selected when inserting a new RMxprt design (DC Machine). Select a steel type from the list. c. slots. Enter the Frame Thickness. a.) 2.© SAS IP. Select a steel type for the frame: 6. To open the Stator Data Properties window. Enter the given speed in the Reference Speed field. Machine Type Defining the Stator Data for a General DC Machine Use the Stator Properties windows to define the stator dimensions. Enter the wind loss due to air resistance measured at the reference speed in the Wind Loss field. All rights reserved. Click the button. Frictional Loss The frictional energy loss (due to friction) measured at the reference speed. or define a new steel type. Enter the Frame Length. RMxprt Machine Types 9-203 Release 14. General Data for General DC Machines To access the general data. 5. 6. 4. Enter the energy loss due to friction at the given speed in the Frictional Loss field. 5. double-click the Machine entry in the project tree. . Enter the minimum outer width for a polygon-type frame in the Frame Overall Width field. Click the button for Frame Material. .5 . Inc. The stator is the outer lamination stack where the polyphase voltage windings reside. double-click the Machine>Stator entry in the project tree on the desktop. Wind Loss The wind loss (due to air resistance) measured at the reference speed. Select a Pole Type: a. Enter the maximum diameter for a polygon-type frame in the Frame Outer Diameter field. windings. Click OK to close the Select Definition window and return to the Properties window. Whether or not the pole press board is made of magnetic material. Select a steel type from the list. Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 11. Enter the effective magnetic length for the stator main pole in the Pole Stacking Factor field. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. c. Click the button to open the Select Definition window. Enter the thickness of the pole press boards in the Press Board Thickness field. c. Click OK to close the Select Pole Type window and return to the Properties window. then select the Magnetic Press Board check box. Enter the length of the stator main pole in the Pole Length field. b. The pole type of the stator. The Stator Data Properties window contains the following fields: Frame Outer Diameter Frame Overall Width Frame Thickness Frame Length Frame Material Pole Type Pole Length Pole Stacking Factor Pole Material Press Board Thickness Magnetic Press Board The maximum diameter for a polygon-type frame. Stator Data for General DC Machines To access the general stator data. . The Select Definition window appears. Click OK to close the Properties window. Click a button to specify the desired field type (either 1 or 2). 13. The thickness of the frame. 9-204 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14.Maxwell 3D Online Help b.© SAS IP. double-click the Machine>Stator entry in the project tree. Click OK to close the Select Definition window and return to the Properties window. The length of the stator main pole. . 8. 10.5 . The thickness of the pole press boards. Click the button for Pole Material. Select a steel type for the stator main pole: a. 12. The steel type of the frame. 9. The stacking factor of the stator main pole. The steel type of the stator main pole. If the pole press board is made of magnetic material. The length of the frame. The minimum outer width for a polygon-type frame. Click the button to open the Select Pole Type window and select from the following two types: 1 and 2. All rights reserved. or define a new steel type. Click the button to open the Select Definition window. For an eccentric air gap. For a two-pole machine.Maxwell 3D Online Help Defining the Stator Pole for a General DC Machine The rotor pole drives the electromagnetic field which is coupled with the stator windings. FOr pole type 1. 3. The minimum width of the pole shoe. For pole type 1. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Enter the fillet between the pole shoe and the pole body in the Rp1 field. 5. . The width of the pole arc with a uniform air gap (0 for an eccentric air gap). Click OK to close the Properties window. 12. 11. 6. Enter the width of the pole tip in the Bp1 field.© SAS IP.5 . (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. The Rotor Pole Data Properties window contains the following fields: Dmin Dmax Bp0 Bp1 Bp2 Bp3 Rp0 The inner diameter at the pole center. enter 0. Enter the diameter at the pole tip in the Dmax field. Enter the size of the pole shoe fillet in the Rp0 field. This field is only available for a Pole Type of 1. . Enter the maximum width of the pole shoe in the Bp2 field. Inc. The pole shoe fillet. 4. To define the rotor pole: 1. All rights reserved.75 yields a magnet with a span of 135 degrees (based on 0. double-click the Machine-Stator-Pole entry in the project tree. The maximum width of the pole shoe. Enter the minimum width of the pole shoe in the Bp3 field.) Note 2. Enter the pole shoe height in the Hp field. Enter the inner diameter at the pole center in the Dmin field. This field is only available for a Pole Type of 1. 7. double-click the Machine-Stator-Pole entry in the project tree on the desktop. Enter the width of the pole arc with a uniform air gap in the Bp0 field. a pole embrace of 0. 9. The width of the pole tip. Use the s Stator Pole Data Properties window to define the stator pole. 10. To open the Stator Pole Data Properties window. RMxprt Machine Types 9-205 Release 14. 8. Inc. For pole type 2. Stator Pole Data for General DC Machines To access the stator pole data.75*180 degrees). The diameter at the pole tip. THis field is only available for a Pole Type of 2.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Enter the pole body width in the Bm field. THis field is only available for a Pole Type of 2. or the minimum gap between a field winding and a commutating winding. Enter the thickness of the insulation at the pole body side in the Pole Insulation field. The thickness of the insulation at the pole body side. 2. For pole type 2. Click Insert Shunt. Defining the Stator Field Data for a General DC Machine To define the stator windings and insulation data: 1. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. Inc. 7. Click OK to close the Properties window. Enter the thickness of the insulation between the shunt winding and the series winding in the Winding Insulation field. Enter the thickness of the insulation under the pole shoe in the Shoe Insulation field. The Stator Field Data Properties window contains the following fields: Shoe Insulation Pole Insulation Winding Clearance Winding Insulation Compound Exciting Mode The thickness of the insulation under the pole shoe.5 . 1. Enter the minimum gap in the Winding Clearance field. All rights reserved. Right click on the Field icon under the stator in the project tree to display the popup menu. . To insert a shunt. 4. . double-click the Machine-Stator-Field entry in the project tree on the desktop. Shunt Data for General DC Machines By option you can insert or remove a shunt from a General DC Machine. The height of the pole shoe. Select the type of exciting of the series winding to the shunt winding from the Compound Exciting Mode pull-down list. If you insert a shunt. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. The width of the pole body. Inc. The options are Cumulative and Differential. double-click the Machine-Stator-Field entry in the project tree.Maxwell 3D Online Help Rp1 Hp Bm The fillet between the pole shoe and the pole body. 6. 5. The cumulative exciting or differential exciting of the series winding to the shunt winding.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. To open the Stator Field Properties window. 9-206 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. Stator Field Data for General DC Machines To access the stator field data. 3. The winding clearance is one of the following: the minimum gap between two field windings.© SAS IP. it appears in the project tree under the stator field data. The minimum air gap between two field windings. or the minimum gap between a field winding and a commutating winding.) 2. The thickness of the insulation between the shunt winding and the series winding. Select Cumulative or Differential from the pull-down list. Axial Clearance Axial gap between field winding and pole body on the inner coil. Right click on the Field icon under the stator in the project tree to display the popup menu. 0 for auto-design. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Click Remove Series. 0 for available maximum area. Wire wrap Double side wire wrap thickness. Winding type Specified as Round. RMxprt Machine Types 9-207 Release 14. The Shunt data for a General DC Machine contains the following fields. Limited cross width Limited cross section width for winding design or arrangement. 0 for auto-design. To insert a series: 1. Number of strands Number of strands (number of wires per conductor). The Series icon appears under the field icon. If you insert a series. Right click on the Field icon under the stator in the project tree to display the popup menu. . Series Data for General DC Machines By option. To Remove an existing shunt: 1. . Click Insert Series. 2. Limited cross height Limited cross section height for winding design or arrangement. or Edgewise coil. Inc. Click the button to display the Wire Size selection window. 2.© SAS IP.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. by clicking the button to display the Winding Type selection window.Maxwell 3D Online Help The Shunt icon appears under the field icon. Click Remove Shunt.5 . Parallel branches Number of parallel branches. Wire size. To Remove an existing series: 1. Inc. Odd number of strands for the case where the input and output leads are on different sides. it appears in the project tree under the stator field data. All rights reserved. The series is removed from the project tree. you can insert or remove a series from a General DC Machine. 0 for available maximum area. Conductors per pole Number of conductors per pole. Right click on the Field icon under the stator in the project tree to display the popup menu. 0 for auto-pickup in the wire library. The shut is removed from the project tree. Cylinder coil. 2. Winding fillet. Inc. Hc2 Height of the compensating slots. Limited cross height Limited cross section height for winding design or arrangement. by clicking the button to display the Winding Type selection window. 9-208 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. . Bc0 Opening width of the compensating slots. Compensating Data for General DC Machines By option. 0 for auto-design. . Bc2 Width of the compensating slots. Parallel branches Number of parallel branches. To access the data for compensating inserted to a General DC Machine. Inc. All rights reserved. Number of strands Number of strands (number of wires per conductor). 2.© SAS IP. To insert compensating: 1. Limited cross width Limited cross section width for winding design or arrangement. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Winding type Specified as Round. Wire wrap Double side wire wrap thickness.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 0 for auto-pickup in the wire library. Right-click on the Stator icon to display the pop-up menu. Winding fillet. Odd number of strands for the case where the input and output leads are on different sides. Right click on the Stator icon to display the pop-up menu. Slots per pole Number of slots per pole for the compensating winding.5 . To remove an existing Compensating: 1. Click the button to display the Wire Size selection window. Click Insert Compensating. Conductors per pole Number of conductors per pole. Hc0 Opening height of the compensating slots. double click on the Machine-Rotor-Compensating item in the project tree.Maxwell 3D Online Help The Series data for a General DC Machine contains the following fields. Parallel branches Number of parallel branches. or Edgewise coil. 0 for available maximum area. Click Remove Compensating. Wire size. The Compensating properties window contains the following fields. 0 for auto-design. you can insert or remove Compensating for a General DC Machine. 2. Cylinder coil. Axial Clearance Axial gap between field winding and pole body on the inner coil. 0 for available maximum area. Wire wrap Double-side wire wrap thickness. right-click on the stator icon to display the pop-up menu and click Remove Commutating. Second air gap Length of the second air gap between the commutating pole and the frame. Wire size Click the button to display the Wire Size window to specify the wire diameter and gauge. Inc. Pole stacking factor Stacking factor for the commutating poles. 0 for auto-design. This removes the commutating and the associated winding.5 . and click Insert Commutating command. To remove an existing Commutating (and associated winding). Pole length Length of the commutating poles Shoe width Shoe width of the commutating poles Shoe height Shoe height of the commutating poles. Pole material Steel type of the commutating poles. Commutating Data for General DC Machines Commutating must be inserted under the stator by right-clicking on the stator icon to display the pop-up menu.© SAS IP. Pole insulation Thickness of insulation on the pole body side. Pole width Width of the commutating poles Pole height Height of the commutating poles.Maxwell 3D Online Help Conductors per slot Number of conductors per slot for the compensating windings Number of strands Number of strands (number of wires per conductor). Slot liner Insulation slot liner thickness End adjustment one side end length adjustment of a conductor. 0 for auto pickup in the wire library Rectangle wire Whether to use round (the default) or rectangle wire. . Note: This is distinct from the general Commutator data associated with rotor. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. All rights reserved. This command also inserts an icon in the project tree for an associated winding. . Click the button to display the Select Definition window. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. RMxprt Machine Types 9-209 Release 14. 0 for auto-pickup in the wire library. Number of strands Number of strands (number of wires per conductor).5 . 9-210 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. Limited cross width Limited cross section width for winding design or arrangement. by clicking the button to display the Winding Type selection window. Winding type Specified as Round. In the project tree.Maxwell 3D Online Help Winding Data for Commutating If you have inserted commutating for a General DC machine. Odd number of strands for the case where the input and output leads are on different sides. 0 for available maximum area. or Edgewise coil. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. . 3. 4.© SAS IP. Wire size. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 0 for auto-design. 0 for auto-design. Select a Slot Type: a. Parallel branches Number of parallel branches. double-click Machine>Rotor and Machine-Rotor-Pole to define the rotor and the pole. It is defined as the total length minus the total insulation from the laminations. Conductors per pole Number of conductors per pole. The commutator acts as a mechanical rectifier in the motor. divided by the total length. To open the Rotor Data Properties window.) 2. Inc. This value relates to the effective magnetic length of the core. Enter the number of slots in the rotor core in the Number of Slots field. Axial Clearance Axial gap between field winding and pole body on the inner coil. A value of 1 indicates that the rotor is not laminated. Cylinder coil. Click the button to display the Wire Size selection window. Limited cross height Limited cross section height for winding design or arrangement. Click the button. an additional winding icon appears in the project tree for the associated winding. The rotor consists of copper bars in which current is induced by the magnetic fields produced by the stator windings. To define general stator data: 1. All rights reserved. Defining the Rotor Data for a General DC Machine The rotor is equipped with slots containing copper conductors that are connected to the commutator. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 0 for available maximum area. . Wire wrap Double side wire wrap thickness. Winding fillet. and ranges from 0 to 1. double-click the Machine>Rotor entry in the project tree on the desktop. Enter the stacking factor for the rotor core in the Stacking Factor field. The inner diameter of the rotor core. The type of slots in the rotor core. 7. RMxprt Machine Types 9-211 Release 14. The Select Slot Type window appears. Slot 4 has a rounded edge at the same location. Click OK to close the Properties window. All rights reserved. Enter the length of the rotor core in the Length field. Click OK to close the Select Definition window and return to the Properties window. Inc. check User Defined Slot if you wish to define the slot dimensions using the Slot Editor. Slot 3 has a tapered edge leading from the slot opening to the main slot body. b. or define a new steel type.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Enter the number of slots in the skew width in the Skew Width field. 5. 10.Maxwell 3D Online Help b. or 6). Optionally. c. c. 3. The Select Definition window appears. Enter the number of lamination sectors in the Lamination Sectors field. double-click the Machine>Rotor entry in the project tree. 5. Enter the thickness of the pole press boards in the Press Board Thickness field. TIP: When you run the mouse over each option. where the quantity Hr1 defines the radius of the corner slot. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. The length of the rotor core. Though slots 3 and 4 are visually similar. Enter the inner diameter of the rotor core in the Inner Diameter field. Click the button to open the Select Slot Type window. 4. Select a Steel Type for the rotor core: a. Click OK to close the Select Slot Type window and return to the Properties window. 2. . Click a button to select the desired slot type (1. The Rotor Data Properties window contains the following fields: Stacking Factor Number of Slots Slot Type Lamination Sectors Outer Diameter Inner Diameter Length The effective magnetic length of the rotor core. . 11. Enter the outer diameter of the rotor core in the Outer Diameter field. Click the button for Steel Type. The number of lamination sectors. Rotor Data for General DC Machines To access the general rotor data. 6. the diagram changes to show that pole type. The outer diameter of the rotor core.5 . Select a steel type from the list. The number of slots the rotor core contains. Inc. 8. 12. they differ in how the edges are constructed.© SAS IP. 9. double-click the Machine-Rotor-Slot entry in the project tree on the desktop.: Hs0 Hs1 Hs2 Bs0 Bs1 Bs2 Rs 4. Inc. Always available. Always available. Always available. Inc. Available only when Auto Design is cleared. All rights reserved. Click the button to open the Select Definition window. to automatically design the dimensions of slots Hs2. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. . depending on the Slot Type selected and depending on whether or not Auto Design is selected. When Auto Design is selected. The skew width measured in slot number. Click OK to close the Properties window. select the Auto Design check box. Defining the Rotor Slots for a General DC Machine To define the physical dimensions of the rotor slots: 1. The following dimensions may be listed. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.Maxwell 3D Online Help Steel Type Press Board Thickness Skew Width The steel type of the rotor core. When Auto Design is selected. this slot dimension is determined automatically. this slot dimension is determined automatically. this slot dimension is determined based on the value entered in the Tooth Width field. Available only when Auto Design is cleared. The thickness of the pole press boards. Enter the available slot dimensions. Rotor Slot Data for General DC Machines To access the rotor slot data.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 9-212 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. Always available. Using this option causes the software to converge to a flux density value of 1. 3. this slot dimension is determined based on the value entered in the Tooth Width field. To open the Rotor Slot Data Properties window. When Auto Design is selected.5 Tesla in the rotor teeth. Optionally. .5 . Bs1. and Bs2. When Parallel Tooth is selected.) 2. Available only when Auto Design is cleared. double-click the Machine-Rotor-Slot entry in the project tree. this slot dimension is determined automatically. When Parallel Tooth is selected.© SAS IP. Bs1 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected).Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. and Bs2. Bs1. The Winding Type window appears. Hs0 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected). double-click the Machine-RotorWinding entry in the project tree on the desktop.) 2. Hs2 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected). Select from one of the following three types of winding: • • • Lap Wave Frog Leg RMxprt Machine Types 9-213 Release 14. To open the Rotor Slot Winding Properties window. Tooth Width The tooth width for the parallel tooth. b.Maxwell 3D Online Help The Rotor Slot Data Properties window contains the following fields: Select or clear this to enable or disable auto-design of slots Hs2. . Rs is added when the slot type is 3 or 4. Auto Design Defining the Rotor Windings and Conductors for a General DC Machine To define the rotor windings. Rs A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected). When this check box is selected. wires.5 . Rs A slot dimension. . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. Inc. Select a Winding Type: a. 3. Bs0 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected). Click the button for Winding Type. When this check box is selected. on which Bs1 and Bs2 are designed. Hs1 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected). Click the Winding tab. Parallel Tooth Select this to design Bs1 and Bs2 based on the tooth width. the Bs1 and Bs2 fields are removed. All rights reserved. and the Tooth Width field is added. and conductors: 1.© SAS IP. Bs2 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected). (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). only two other fields appear in the window: Hs0 and Bs0. 7. Each layer of conductors can have a number of windings. which are referred to as virtual slots. All rights reserved. 8. measured in number of slots. the upper and lower layer can have two windings each. The rotor is assumed to have two layers of conductors. For example. Enter the number of virtual slots per each real slot in the Virtual Slots field. 6. in the Coil Pitch field. For a lap winding. Enter 0 to automat- 9. 9-214 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. For a wave winding. 5. an upper and a lower layer. Enter 0 to have RMxprt auto-design this value. if a coil starts in slot 1 and ends in slot 6. Enter the total number of conductors in each rotor slot in the Conductors per Slot field. Inc. Enter the coil pitch. it has a coil pitch of 5. Inc. the multiplex number is the number of commutators between the start and end of one winding. and the number of parallel branches is equal to the number of poles multiplied by the multiplex number. the number of parallel branches equals the multiplex number multiplied by two.© SAS IP. Enter the number of wires per conductor in the Number of Strands field. 2 for double windings. This value is the number of turns per coil multiplied by the number of layers. for a 12 slot machine. Enter the number of windings in the Multiplex Number field (1 for a single winding. Note For example.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.5 . which would yield a virtual slot number of two. . 3 for triple windings). The coil pitch is the number of slots separating one winding. . This value is the total number of conductors in one real full rotor slot. Enter the thickness of the double-sided wire wrap in the Wire Wrap field.Maxwell 3D Online Help 4. this would yield 24 commutation segments. The diameter information is then written to the output file when you analyze the design. Select a wire gauge from the Gauge pull-down menu. Select a value from the Wire Diameter pull-down list.Maxwell 3D Online Help ically obtain this value from the wire library. a single conductor may consist of 5 wires. the <number> Wire Diameter field is automatically updated. 3 wires with a diameter of 0. RMxprt Machine Types 9-215 Release 14. 11. 12. and RMxprt automatically calculates AUTO the optimal value. Click the End/Insulation tab. When you are done setting the wire size. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. The Wire Size window appears. c. . d. Select the Wire Size: a.21mm and 2 with a diameter of 0. Select or clear the Input Half-turn Length check box. This is useful when USER you want to enter a diameter that does not correspond to a particular wire gauge. Insulation Conductor y Wire Wrap = 2*y 10.5 . All rights reserved.13mm. click OK to close the Wire Size window and return to the Properties window. and then you can select this wire table using the Tools>Options>Machine Options command. This option allows you to manually enter the Wire Diameter. Inc. You can create your own wire table using Machine>Wire. Click the button for Wire Size. b. then enter the half-turn length of the armature winding in the Half Turn Length field. You can select from the following options: You can select a specific gauge number.© SAS IP. When you select a gauge number.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. This option allows you to define a conductor that is made of different size wires. . 13. Inc. This option sets the Wire Diameter to zero. MIXED For example. The gauge number is based on AWG settings. Do one of the following: • If you selected Input Half-turn Length. Inc. Enter the thickness of the insulation layer in the Layer Insulation field. . 19. .© SAS IP. Inc.5 . 16. Enter the inner radius of the base corner in the Base Inner Radius field.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 9-216 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. End Adjustment End of Stator Stator Coil 14.Maxwell 3D Online Help • If you cleared Input Half-turn Length. Enter the thickness of the wedge insulation in the Wedge Thickness field. Slot Insulation 18. Enter the distance between two rotor coils in the End Clearance field. 17. All rights reserved. Enter the thickness of the slot liner insulation in the Slot Liner field. 15. Enter the inner diameter of the coil tip in the Tip Inner Diameter field. then enter the end length adjustment of the stator coils in the End Adjustment field. The end adjustment is the distance one end of the conductor extends vertically beyond the end of the stator. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Enter the appropriate wire data in the table: • • For a round wire: • • Enter the Diameter in the table. Click OK to close the Properties window.© SAS IP.21 and Number = 3. For a rectangular wire: • • • • Enter the Width of the wire in the table. Click Add to add the new wire data. Select from None.13mm.13 and Number = 2. 6. 5. 3. . and its subsidiaries and affiliates.Maxwell 3D Online Help 20. Enter a Number in the table to specify how many of the conductor’s wires have this diameter. Rotor Winding Data for General DC Machines To access the rotor winding data. select MIXED from the Gauge pull-down menu. double-click the Machine-Rotor-Winding entry in the project tree. Enter the Thickness of the wire in the table. The first line will list Diameter = 0. To define different size wires: 1.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. or Full. if one conductor is made up of 5 wires. and the other 2 have a diameter of 0. Inc.5 . 2. and 3 of those wires have a diameter of 0. Enter a Number in the table to specify how many of the conductor’s wires have this data. . Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each size wire you want to add. The second line will list Diameter = 0. All rights reserved. Note For example. Enter the Fillet value in the table. In the Wire Size window. 22. When you are finished defining the wires. An equivalent wire diameter is displayed as Wire Size value in the Winding tab in the Properties window. Defining Different Size Wires for a General DC Machine Rotor Winding Use the Gauge option if you have a conductor that is made up different size wires.21mm. Select the type of equalizer connection from the Equalizer Connection pull-down menu. click OK to close the Wire Size window and return to the RMxprt Properties window. 21. then the mixed wire size table will have two lines. 4. RMxprt Machine Types 9-217 Release 14. Enter the limited slot fill factor for the wire design in the Limited Fill Factor field. Inc. Half. Select either Round or Rectangular as the Wire Type. and gauge. Tip Inner The inner diameter of the coil tip. Number of The number of wires per conductor (0 for auto-design). Wire Size The diameter of the wire (0 for auto-design). When this check box is selected. wire type. Strands Wire Wrap The thickness of the double-sided wire wrap (0 to automatically obtain this value from the wire library). Half Turn Length The half-turn length of the armature winding. Base Inner Radius The inner radius of the base corner.5 . Slot Coil Pitch The coil pitch measured in number of slots. or triple windings (1. Layer Insulation The thickness of the insulation layer. Virtual Slots The number of virtual slots per real slot.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Conductors per The number of conductors per rotor slot (0 for auto-design). Input Half-turn Select or clear this check box to specify whether or not you want to enter the half-turn length. Click the button to open the Wire Size window where you can specify units. End Adjustment The end length adjustment of the rotor coils. Wave. When this check box is selected. Multiplex Number Single. or 3). double. the End Adjustment field appears instead. Wedge Thickness The thickness of the wedge insulation. Inc. the Length Half Turn Length field appears the next time you open the Properties window. Click the button to open the Winding Type window and choose from Lap. . diameter. Slot Liner The thickness of the slot liner insulation.© SAS IP. 9-218 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14.Maxwell 3D Online Help The Rotor Winding Data Properties window contains the following fields: Winding tabWinding Type End/ Insulation tab The type of rotor winding. 2. and Frog Leg. Diameter End Clearance The end clearance between two adjacent coils. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . Inc. All rights reserved. 5 . Right click on the Stator icon to display the pop-up menu.© SAS IP. Right-click on the rotor icon to display the pop-up menu. If you have inserted a Vent. Half. Outer Hole Diameter Diameter of vent holes in outer row. Equalizer The connection type of the equalizer. The Vent Data Properties window contains the following fields. All rights reserved. Inc. Click Remove Vent. 2. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.Maxwell 3D Online Help Limited Fill FactorThe limited slot fill factor for the wire design.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. you can insert or remove Vent data for general DC machines. To insert a vent: 1. Inc. Vent Ducts Number of radial vent ducts Duct Width Width of radial vent ducts Magnetic Spacer Width of magnetic spacer which hold vent ducts. Width Duct Pitch Vent ducts Holes per Row Number of axial vent holes per row Inner Hole Diameter Diameter of vent holes in inner row. To remove an existing vent: 1. 0 for non-magnetic spacer. Select from None. 2. Connection Vent Data for General DC Machines By option. RMxprt Machine Types 9-219 Release 14. . . the icon appears under the rotor winding in the project tree. Click Insert Vent. or Full. All rights reserved. 3. Width of Banding Width of axial banding slots Slots Depth of Banding Depth of axial banding slots Slots Defining the Commutator and Brush for a General DC Machine The commutator allows current transfer between DC terminals or brushes and the rotor coils. b. Enter the thickness of the insulation between two consecutive commutator segments in the Commutator Insulation field. 5. Banding Slots Number of axial banding slots to tight the rotor winding. Enter the Brush Length.Maxwell 3D Online Help Inner Hole Location Center-to-center diameter of inner row hole vents. 8. 7. Outer Hole Location Center-to-center diameter of outer row hole vents. . providing the current to the system as a function of rotation. 11. in mechanical degrees. When you place the mouse cursor over the commutator type. 9. Click the Commutator tab. Due to the action of the commutator. do the following: a. . b. 10. Select Cylinder or Pancake Type as the Commutator Type.© SAS IP. Click the Brush tab. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. To open the Commutator Data Properties window. the corresponding magnetic field has a fixed distribution with respect to the stator. Enter the Outer Diameter. do the following: a. Enter the Brush Width. Enter the number of brush pairs when using a wave armature winding in the Brush Pairs field. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. For Cylinder commutators. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. For Pancake commutators. 6. To define the commutator and brush pairs: 1. Enter the angle of displacement from the neutral axis. Enter the Inner Diameter. Enter the Commutator Diameter. Enter the Commutator Length. an outline of the commutator appears. double-click the Machine>Commutator entry in the project tree on the desktop. in the Brush Dis9-220 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. Inc.5 . Note 4.) 2. Click OK to close the Properties window. the diameter of the commutator.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. the outer diameter of the commutator. the Brush Press and Frictional Coefficient fields will be hidden in the Commutator/Brush window. For example. Note The brush displacement is positive for the counter-clockwise direction. For a Pancake commutator type. Enter the mechanical pressure of the brushes as they press against the commutator in the Brush Press field. Enter the voltage drop across one brush pair in the Brush Drop field. 13. 12. then the angle is positive. The number of brush pairs. The thickness of the insulation between the two commutator bars. if the rotor turns clockwise but the brush displacement is counter-clockwise. . RMxprt Machine Types 9-221 Release 14.© SAS IP. double-click the Machine>Commutator entry in the project tree. in mechanical degrees (positive for anti-rotating direction).5 . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. the length of the commutator. Inc. then the angle is negative. Inner Diameter Brush tab Commutator Insulation Brush Width Brush Length Brush Pairs Brush Displacement The width of the brush. The displacement of the brush from the neutral position. Inc. the inner diameter of the commutator. Commutator and Brush Data for General DC Machines To access the commutator and brush data. These fields are shown only when the Friction Loss field in the General window is set to zero. Enter the Frictional Coefficient of the brush. The Commutator Data Properties window contains the following fields: Commutator Commutator Type The type of commutator. if the rotor turns clockwise and the brush displacement is also clockwise. . The length of the brush. Commutator Diameter For a Cylinder commutator type.Maxwell 3D Online Help placement field. 14. Click the button to open the Select tab Commutator Type window and select from Cylinder or Pancake. Commutator Length For a Cylinder commutator type. 15. Outer Diameter For a Pancake commutator type. Note If the Friction Loss field is used in the General window. All rights reserved. ) Defining the Shaft Data for a General DC Machine To define the shaft: 1. b. To open the Solution Setup window.5 . If you cleared the No Fan check box.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. All rights reserved. right-click Analysis in the project tree. Select or clear this check box to indicate whether or not the shaft has a ventilation fan.) The frictional coefficient of the brush. the shaft is magnetic. 2. The outer diameter of the ventilation fan. Shaft Data for General DC Machines To access the shaft data. The Shaft Data Properties window contains the following fields: Magnetic Shaft No Fan Fan Diameter Blade Width Select or clear this check box to indicate whether or not the shaft is made of magnetic material. Click OK to close the Properties window. double-click the Machine>Shaft entry in the project tree on the desktop. (Available only when Frictional Loss is set to zero for the machine. Inc. Select or clear the No Fan check box to specify whether or not the machine contains a ventilation fan. The width of the ventilation fan’s blades. Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a General DC Machine To define the solution data: 1. (Available only when Frictional Loss is set to zero for the machine. Enter the width of the fan blades in the Blade Width field. The brush press per unit area. . and two additional fields appear: Fan Diameter and Blade Width. double-click the Machine>Shaft entry in the project tree. Select or clear the Magnetic Shaft check box to specify whether or not the shaft is to be made of magnetic material. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. The Operation Type is automatically set to Motor for this machine 9-222 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. To open the Shaft Data Properties window.Maxwell 3D Online Help Brush Drop Brush Press Frictional Coefficient The voltage drop across a one-pair brush. and click Add Solution Setup. the design uses a fan. no fan is being used. Inc. a. When it is cleared. When it is selected. then do the following: 5.© SAS IP. 4. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 3.) 2. . Click the General tab. When it is selected. Enter the outer diameter of the ventilation fan in the Fan Diameter field. Enter the applied or output rated DC voltage in the Rated Voltage field. For this machine type. Click OK to close the Solution Setup window. Enter the Exciting Voltage. type. 6. Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. then select the Determined by Rated Speed check box. 9. Tload = Trated * (n/ nrated)2 where Trated is given by the output power divided by the given rated speed. 4. Enter the given rated speed in the Rated Speed field. Select one of the following from the Field Exciting Type pull-down list: • • Separately Excited Self Excited 10. To automatically obtained the Exciting Voltage and Series Resistance via the Rated Speed. 7. Related Topics: Solution Data for General DC Machines Solution Data for General DC Machines To access the solution data. The torque remains constant regardless of the speed.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. The load varies nonlinearly with speed.Maxwell 3D Online Help 3. 13. given by the output power divided by the given rated speed. Tload = Trated. RMxprt Machine Types 9-223 Release 14. the General tab. 8. Click the DC Machine tab. and select the units. . 12. right-click Analysis in the project tree. The torque increases linearly with speed. Enter the temperature at which the system functions in the Operating Temperature field. Tload = Trated * (n/ nrated) where Trated is given by the output power divided by the given rated speed.© SAS IP. All rights reserved. The output power remains constant in the motor. . rather than entering their values.5 . In this case. 11. In this case. In this case. Enter the output power in the Rated Output Power field. 5. Enter the Series Resistance. Select the Load Type used in the motor from the following options: Const Speed Const Power Const Torque Linear Torque Fan Load The speed remains constant in the motor. Inc. and click Add Solution Setup. and select the units. there is only one tab. and select the units. Linear Torque. select from Const Speed. Const Torque.Maxwell 3D Online Help The Solution Setup window contains the following fields: Operation Type Load Type Rated Output Power Rated Voltage Rated Speed Operating Temperature Field Exciting Type Determined by Rated Speed General tab. General tab. All rights reserved. Related Topics: Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a General DC Machine 9-224 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. Type a value for the rated speed. Type a value for the rated voltage. Type a value for the operating temperature. Select Motor or Generator from the pull-down list. Exciting Voltage Enter a voltage value in the field. General tab.5 . Select Separately Excited or Self Excited from the pulldown list. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. and select the units. For a motor. Const Power. For a generator. and Fan Load. . Inc. and select the units.© SAS IP.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. The default is Const Power. General tab. and select the units from the pull-down list. On the General tab. . select from Infinite Bus and Independent Generator. Series Resistance Enter a resistance value in the field. Select this check box to automatically calculate the Exciting Voltage and the Series Resistance from the Rated Speed. and select the units. Inc. General tab. and select the units from the pull-down list. DC Machine tab. Type a value for the rated output voltage. rather than entering the values. The claw poles of the rotor are magnetized by a cylinder winding and/or a cylinder permanent magnet. Analysis Approach for Claw-Pole Alternators Claw-pole alternators (or claw-pole synchronous generators) are widely used in auto industry. Stator winding data. The spinning rotor creates a rotating magnetic field in the air gap. the d-axis armature reactance Xad and q-axis armature reactance Xaq are about constant. as shown in the figure below. rotor diameter. . Inc. Xad is a linearized nonlinear RMxprt Machine Types 9-225 Release 14. The rotor is comprised of claw poles with the same pole number as the stator winding. The stator of a claw-pole alternator is equipped with a polyphase winding. rated voltage. enter the motor data to define the following: • • • • • • • • General data. Stator slot data. and speed. Stator data. Solution data. which produces induced voltage in the stator winding. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Rotor data. The performance of a claw-pole alternator is analyzed based on the frequency-domain phasor diagram.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.Maxwell 3D Online Help Claw-Pole Alternators After you have selected Claw-Pole Alternators as your model type. Inc. Otherwise. such as the output power. such as the slot types and dimensions. They receive mechanical energy at the shaft and transform it into electrical energy. . Rotor pole data.5 . All rights reserved.© SAS IP. jI Xaq M E0 N jI X1 jI d Xad jI q Xaq IR1 U I Iq Id O If a claw-pole alternator is equipped with a permanent magnet. and lamination. Shaft data. E0. From the no-load characteristic curve of the magnetic circuit. the phasor length ON represents the d-axis back emf due to the d-axis resultant flux linkage and is used to determine the d-axis field saturation. and the d. .Maxwell 3D Online Help parameter.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. All rights reserved. . then the current phasor is The phasor represented by OM can be expressed as OM = U + I ( R 1 + jX q ) The phasor represented by OM can be used to determine the direction of E0.and the q-axis currents are obtained as follows I d = I sin ψ I q = I cos ψ In the phasor diagrams. and Xaq is a linear parameter. Rotor Equipped with a Permanent Magnet Only If the rotor is equipped with a permanent magnet only. let the power factor angle be f. 9-226 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. Take the input voltage U as the reference phasor. then the angle that I lags E0 is Let Ψ = ϕ+θ The d.5 . the field excitation can not be adjusted. Xad and the excitation current If can be determined based on the frozen method. θ denote the power angle (the angle that U lags E0). and its subsidiaries and affiliates.© SAS IP. Inc. and the dand the q-axis currents are obtained based on the following process. Inc.and the q-axis currents are obtained based on the following process. the exciting current can be adjusted. The d-axis synchronous reactance Xd and q-axis synchronous reactance Xq are calculated directly from the following: X d = X 1 + X ad X q = X 1 + X aq Rotor Equipped with an Excitation Winding If the rotor is equipped with an excitation winding. Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.© SAS IP. we have Id Ψ = tanh ----Iq The power factor angle f (the angle that I lags U) is ϕ = Ψ–θ Power and Efficiency The output electric power is P 2 = 3UI cos ϕ RMxprt Machine Types 9-227 Release 14. . we have I d X d + I q R 1 = – ( U cos θ – E 0 ) – I d R 1 + I q X q = U sin θ Solving for Id and Iq yields. . X q ( U cos θ – E 0 ) – R 1 U sin θ I d = – ---------------------------------------------------------------------2 R 1 + Xd Xq R 1 ( U cos θ – E 0 ) + X d U sin θ I q = ----------------------------------------------------------------------2 R 1 + Xd Xq Let the angle that I lags E0 be ω .Maxwell 3D Online Help For a given power angle θ (the angle that U lags E0). Inc. All rights reserved.5 .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. a brief description of that field appears in the status bar at the bottom of the RMxprt window. Right-click Analysis in the project tree. offset. 9-228 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. . the armature copper. Note When you place the cursor over an entry field in the data windows. Double-click the Machine-Stator-Slot entry in the project tree to define the stator slot dimensions. Double-click the Machine-Stator-Winding entry in the project tree to define the stator windings and conductors. the excitation winding copper (if an excitation winding is equipped) losses. The efficiency of the generator is: P2 η = -----. Double-click the Machine entry in the project tree to define the general data. PCua.5 . the iron-core. PFe. All rights reserved. 9. Double-click the Machine-Rotor entry in the project tree to define the rotor geometry. 4. Create the alternator project. The input mechanical torque is P1 T 1 = -----ω where ω denotes the synchronous speed in rad/s. 6. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.× 100 % P1 Defining a Claw-Pole Alternator The general procedure for defining a claw-pole alternator is as follows: 1. and PCuf are the frictional and wind. 5. and air gap data for the rotor pole. Double-click the Machine-Stator entry in the project tree to define the stator geometry. 7. Choose File>Save to save the project. Inc. . 8. 2. Choose RMxprt>Analyze to analyze the design. respectively. embrace. Double-click the Machine-Rotor-Pole entry in the project tree to define the pole. Double-click the Machine-Shaft entry in the project tree to define the magnetism of the shaft.© SAS IP. 3. and click Add Solution Setup to define the solution data. Inc. .Maxwell 3D Online Help The input mechanical power is P 1 = P 2 + P fw + P Cua + P Fe + P Cuf where Pfw. 10.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 11. slots. This value is the total number of poles in the stator (or the number of pole pairs multiplied by two). 5. Click OK to close the Properties window. Enter the given speed in the Reference Speed field. for a specific example of a permanent-magnet DC motor problem. Enter the wind loss due to air resistance measured at the reference speed in the Wind Loss field. double-click the Machine entry in the project tree on the desktop. on the technical support page of the ANSYS web site. Refer to the Claw-Pole Alternator Problem application note. double-click the Machine entry in the project tree. Inc. speed. Reference Speed The given speed of reference. Enter the energy loss due to friction at the given speed in the Frictional Loss field. the model can be viewed in the Maxwell 2D Modeler. Enter or select the Number of Phases (2. Enter the number of poles for the machine in the Number of Poles field. . Frictional Loss The frictional energy loss (due to friction and air resistance) measured at the reference speed. and rated voltage.© SAS IP. such as the power settings. All rights reserved. General Data for Claw-Pole Alternators To access the general data. Number of Poles The number of poles the machine contains. and conductors. The stator is the outer lamination stack where the polyphase voltage windings reside. Defining the General Data for a Claw-Pole Alternator Use the General window to define the basic parameters of the alternator.5 .) 2. or 4). 7. Machine Type Defining the Stator Data for a Claw-Pole Alternator Use the Stator Properties windows to define the stator dimensions. 4. 3. . The General Data Properties window for a three-phase induction motor contains the following fields: The machine type you selected when inserting a new RMxprt design (Claw-Pole Synchronous Machine).Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. windings. RMxprt Machine Types 9-229 Release 14. 3.Maxwell 3D Online Help Once analyzed. To define the general data: 1. Wind Loss The wind loss measured at the reference speed. Inc. 6. Number of Phases The number of phases. and new Maxwell 3D design. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. or it can be used to create a new Maxwell 2D project. To open the General Data Properties window. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. 9. measured in slot number. check User Defined Slot if you wish to define the slot dimensions using the Slot Editor. The Select Definition window appears. b. 3. The Stator Data Properties window contains the following fields: Outer Diameter Inner Diameter Length Stacking Factor The outer diameter of the stator core. displaying the slot dimension variables. . Stator Data for Claw-Pole Alternators To access the general stator data. Inc. b. a schematic of the selected type appears. The inner diameter of the stator core.© SAS IP. Click OK to close the Properties window. Enter the length of the stator core in the Length field. A value of 1 indicates that the rotor is not laminated. divided by the total length. The stacking factor of the stator core. The stacking factor is defined as the total length minus the total insulation from the laminations. 8. Inc. Click OK to close the Select Slot Type window and return to the Properties window.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Enter the Number of Slots in the stator. a. This value is a ratio of he effective magnetic length of the core. The length of the stator core. When you place the mouse cursor over the slot type. or define a new steel type.5 . Enter the stacking factor for the stator core in the Stacking Factor field. .) 2. double-click the Machine>Stator entry in the project tree. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. All rights reserved. Enter the Outer Diameter of the stator. Enter the Inner Diameter of the stator. Note Click the button for the Slot Type. 10. 4. 5. Click OK to close the Select Definition window and return to the Properties window. c. Optionally. c. 9-230 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. double-click the Machine>Stator entry in the project tree on the desktop. Click the button for Steel Type. Select the Slot Type: a. Select a Steel Type for the stator core: 6. The Select Slot Type window appears. Select a steel type from the list. 7. Select a slot type (available types include 1 through 4).Maxwell 3D Online Help To define the general stator data: 1. Enter the skew width. in the Skew Width field. To open the Stator Data Properties window. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. and ranges from 0 to 1. Hs0 Hs2 Bs0 Bs1 Bs2 Rs 5. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Click the button to open the Select Slot Type window. All rights reserved. Available only when Auto Design is cleared. Enter the available slot dimensions. double-click the Machine-Stator-Slot entry in the project tree on the desktop. 4. When Parallel Tooth is selected. and Bs2. Always available. RMxprt Machine Types 9-231 Release 14. to automatically design the dimensions of slots Hs2. The skew width measured in slot number. and enter a value in the Tooth Width field.Maxwell 3D Online Help Steel Type Number of Slots Slot Type Skew Width The steel type of the stator core. To open the Stator Slot Data Properties window.5 . Optionally. Defining the Stator Slot Data for a Claw-Pole Alternator To define the stator slots: 1. this slot dimension is determined automatically. double-click the Machine-Stator-Slot entry in the project tree. Optionally. The number of slots the stator core contains. Available only when Auto Design and Parallel Tooth are both cleared. select the Auto Design check box. . Click the button to open the Select Definition window. Rs is added when the slot type is 3 or 4. select the Parallel Tooth check box.) 2. this slot dimension is determined based on the value entered in the Tooth Width field. Always available. Available only when Auto Design and Parallel Tooth are both cleared. Inc. to design dimensions of slots Bs1 and Bs2 based on the stator tooth width. this slot dimension is determined automatically. Inc. The type of slots in the stator core. Bs1. Stator Slot Data for Claw-Pole Alternators To access the stator slot data.© SAS IP. . 3. When Auto Design is selected. this slot dimension is determined based on the value entered in the Tooth Width field. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. When Auto Design is selected. this slot dimension is determined automatically. When Parallel Tooth is selected.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Click OK to close the Properties window. When Auto Design is selected. © SAS IP. Defining the Stator Winding Data for a Claw-Pole Alternator To define the stator windings and conductors: 1. To open the Stator Slot Winding Properties window. Hs2 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). Select from one of the following three types of winding: • • • 5. Tooth Width The tooth width for the parallel tooth. Select a Winding Type: a. only two other fields appear in the window: Hs0 and Bs0. b. 3. and the Tooth Tooth Width field is added. Parallel Select this to design Bs1 and Bs2 based on the tooth width. Bs1. All rights reserved. Enter the number of layers in the stator winding in the Winding Layers field. Inc. 4. Hs1 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). the Bs1 and Bs2 fields are removed. . Bs0 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). When this check box is selected.) 2. double-click the Machine-StatorWinding entry in the project tree on the desktop. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. When this check box is selected. and Bs2. Bs1 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). Inc. .5 .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Click the Winding tab. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. on which Bs1 and Bs2 are designed.Maxwell 3D Online Help The Stator Slot Data Properties window contains the following fields: Auto Design Select or clear this to enable or disable auto-design of slots Hs2. Rs is added when the slot type is 3 or 4. Bs2 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). Hs0 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). Whole Coiled Half Coiled Editor Select or enter the number of parallel branches in one phase of the winding in the Parallel 9-232 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). Click the button for Winding Type. The Winding Type window appears. Rs A slot dimension. The coil pitch is the number of slots separating one winding. Select a value from the Wire Diameter pull-down list. 8. Inc. MIXED For example. For example. measured in number of slots. RMxprt Machine Types 9-233 Release 14. . The Wire Size window appears. Enter 0 to have RMxprt auto-design this value. b. This option sets the Wire Diameter to zero. This value is the number of turns per coil multiplied by the number of layers.21mm and 2 with a diameter of 0.© SAS IP. 7. This option allows you to define a conductor that is made of different size wires. Inc. the <number> Wire Diameter field is automatically updated. Enter the coil pitch. 9. Select the Wire Size: a. .13mm. All rights reserved. a single conductor may consist of 5 wires.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Enter the thickness of the double-sided wire wrap in the Wire Wrap field.5 . and RMxprt automatically calculates AUTO the optimal value. Enter the total number of conductors in each stator slot in the Conductors per Slot field. This option allows you to manually enter the Wire Diameter. You can select from the following options: You can select a specific gauge number. When you select a gauge number. 6. Enter 0 to automatically obtain this value from the wire library. c. Select a wire gauge from the Gauge pull-down menu. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. it has a coil pitch of 5. Click the button for Wire Size. 3 wires with a diameter of 0. if a coil starts in slot 1 and ends in slot 6. Insulation Conductor y Wire Wrap = 2*y 10. Enter the number of wires per conductor in the Number of Strands field. in the Coil Pitch field.Maxwell 3D Online Help Branches field. The diameter information is then written to the output file when you analyze the design. This is useful when USER you want to enter a diameter that does not correspond to a particular wire gauge. . click OK to close the Wire Size window and return to the Properties window. Enter the inner diameter of the coil tip in the Tip Inner Diameter field. Inc. The end adjustment is the distance one end of the conductor extends vertically beyond the end of the stator.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. End Adjustment End of Stator Stator Coil 14. Enter the distance between two stator coils in the End Clearance field. 11. If you cleared Input Half-turn Length. Select or clear the Input Half-turn Length check box. 12. You can create your own wire table using Machine>Wire. and then you can select this wire table using the Tools>Options>Machine Options command. 9-234 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14.© SAS IP.5 . Do one of the following: • • If you selected Input Half-turn Length. All rights reserved. Enter the inner radius of the base corner in the Base Inner Radius field.Maxwell 3D Online Help The gauge number is based on AWG settings. then enter the end length adjustment of the stator coils in the End Adjustment field. Click the End/Insulation tab. Inc. . 16. 13. 15. When you are done setting the wire size. then enter the half-turn length of the armature winding in the Half Turn Length field. d. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. To specify the number of turns for each coil: 1. When you are satisfied with the coil settings. Inc. When these options are selected. depending on whether you want to be able to change these setting in the table above. Enter the limited slot fill factor for the wire design in the Limited Fill Factor field. Slot Insulation 18. RMxprt Machine Types 9-235 Release 14. Select or deselect the Constant Turns or Constant Pitch check boxes.© SAS IP. 5. Enter the thickness of the slot liner insulation in the Slot Liner field. 3. you cannot change the turns or pitch.Maxwell 3D Online Help 17. All rights reserved. click OK to close the Winding Editor window. Click Machine>Winding>Edit Layout. Enter the thickness of the insulation layer in the Layer Insulation field. Click OK to close the Properties window. you may want to specify a multiplier by clicking the Periodic Multiplier check box and specifying a value. Enter the thickness of the wedge insulation in the Wedge Thickness field. you may want to specify a different number of conductors for each stator slot. 20. The Winding Editor makes this possible by enabling you to specify the number of turns for each coil. In the table in the upper left. . Winding Editor for a Claw-Pole Alternator For a claw-pole alternator.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Inc. set which phase you want for each coil and which slot is the “in” and “out” slot for the current in each coil. . If you are working on a quarter or half model. The Winding Editor window appears. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 19. 21.5 . 2. 4. Select either Round or Rectangular as the Wire Type. select MIXED from the Gauge pull-down menu. 2.21 and Number = 3. Parallel Branches The number of parallel branches in the stator winding. Inc.13 and Number = 2. In the Wire Size window. and Editor. Enter the appropriate wire data in the table: • • For a round wire: • • Enter the Diameter in the table. An equivalent wire diameter is displayed as Wire Size value in the Winding tab in the Properties window. The Stator Winding Data Properties window contains the following fields: Winding tabWinding Layers The number of winding layers. 5. click OK to close the Wire Size window and return to the RMxprt Properties window. All rights reserved. Half Coiled. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each size wire you want to add. . 3. Click the button to open the Winding Type window and choose from Whole Coiled. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Click Add to add the new wire data. 4.© SAS IP. The second line will list Diameter = 0. Enter a Number in the table to specify how many of the conductor’s wires have this diameter.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Enter a Number in the table to specify how many of the conductor’s wires have this data. Inc. 9-236 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. To define different size wires: 1. Note For example. double-click the Machine-Stator-Winding entry in the project tree. Enter the Thickness of the wire in the table. .Maxwell 3D Online Help Defining Different Size Wires for a Claw-Pole Alternator Use the Gauge option in the Wire Size window if you have a conductor that is made up different size wires.21mm. if one conductor is made up of 5 wires. The first line will list Diameter = 0. For a rectangular wire: • • • • Enter the Width of the wire in the table. Stator Winding Data for Claw-Pole Alternators To access the stator winding data. and the other 2 have a diameter of 0. When you are finished defining the wires.13mm. Enter the Fillet value in the table. 6.5 . and 3 of those wires have a diameter of 0. Winding Type The type of stator winding. then the mixed wire size table will have two lines. RMxprt Machine Types 9-237 Release 14. Slot Liner The thickness of the slot liner insulation.5 .Maxwell 3D Online Help Conductors per Slot Coil Pitch Number of Strands Wire Wrap End/ Insulation tab The number of conductors per stator slot (0 for auto-design). Click the button to open the Wire Size window where you can specify units. Wedge Thickness The thickness of the wedge insulation. Diameter End Clearance The end clearance between two adjacent coils.© SAS IP. The thickness of the double-sided wire wrap (0 to automatically obtain this value from the wire library). Half Turn Length The half-turn length of the armature winding. the Length Half Turn Length field appears the next time you open the Properties window. Radius Tip Inner The inner diameter of the coil tip. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. which is the distance one end of the conductor extends vertically beyond the end of the stator. . . and gauge. Wire Size The diameter of the wire (0 for auto-design). The number of wires per conductor (0 for auto-design). diameter. When this check box is selected. Inc. Base Inner The inner radius of the base corner. All rights reserved.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. the End Adjustment field appears instead. When this check box is selected. Input Half-turn Select or clear this check box to specify whether or not you want to enter the half-turn length. End Adjustment The end length adjustment of the stator coils. The coil pitch measured in number of slots. wire type. Inc. Select a Steel Type for the rotor core: a. To define general rotor data: 1. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window. . Click the button for Steel Type. The Select Definition window appears. double-click Machine-Rotor and Machine-Rotor-Pole to define the rotor and the pole. . Select a steel type from the list. 4. Click OK to close the Select Definition window and return to the Properties window. The rotor consists of copper bars in which current is induced by the magnetic fields produced by the stator windings. In the project tree.© SAS IP. or define a new steel type.5 . Factor Defining the Rotor Data for a Claw-Pole Alternator The rotor is equipped with slots containing copper conductors that are connected to the commutator. b. Enter the diameter of the rotor yoke in the Yoke Diameter field. 5. Enter the inner diameter of the rotor in the Inner Diameter field. c. The commutator acts as a mechanical rectifier in the motor. Limited Fill The limited slot fill factor for the wire design. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Enter the outer diameter of the rotor in the Outer Diameter field. Click OK to close the Properties window. Enter the length of the rotor core in the Length field. double-click the Machine>Rotor entry in the project tree on the desktop. All rights reserved. Inc. 7. 3. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.) 2. 6.Maxwell 3D Online Help Layer Insulation The thickness of the insulation layer. 9-238 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. To open the Rotor Data Properties window. Maxwell 3D Online Help Rotor Data for Claw-Pole Alternators To access the general rotor data, double-click the Machine>Rotor entry in the project tree. The Rotor Data Properties window contains the following fields: Outer Diameter Inner Diameter Length Steel Type Yoke Diameter The outer diameter of the rotor core. The inner diameter of the rotor core. The length of the rotor core. The steel type of the rotor core. Click the button to open the Select Definition window. The diameter of the rotor yoke. Defining the Rotor Pole for a Claw-Pole Alternator The rotor pole drives the electromagnetic field which is coupled with the stator windings. Use the Rotor Pole Data Properties window to define the rotor pole. Note Some of the fields in the Rotor Pole window change, or are inactive, depending on the Rotor Type you select. To define the rotor pole: 1. To open the Rotor Pole Data Properties window, double-click the Machine-Rotor-Pole entry in the project tree on the desktop. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window.) 2. Enter the pole embrace at the pole tip in the Tip Embrace field. This value must be between 0 and 1, exclusive. 3. Enter the pole embrace at the pole root in the Root Embrace field. This value must be between 0 and 2, exclusive. 4. Enter the pole thickness at the pole tip in the Tip Thickness field. 5. Enter the pole thickness at the pole root in the Root Thickness field. 6. Enter the Pole Length. 7. Enter the Slot Depth. 8. Enter the Shoe Thickness. 9. Select the type of magnet to use in the rotor pole from the Magnet Type pull-down menu. 10. If a magnet is being used, enter its length in the Magnet Length field. 11. Enter the width of the second air gap in the Second Air Gap field. 12. Click OK to close the Properties window. Rotor Pole Data for Claw-Pole Alternators To access the pole rotor data, double-click the Machine-Rotor-Pole entry in the project tree. RMxprt Machine Types 9-239 Release 14.5 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Maxwell 3D Online Help The Rotor Pole Data Properties window contains the following fields: Tip Embrace Root Embrace Tip Thickness Root Thickness Pole Length Slot Depth Shoe Thickness Magnet Type Magnet Length Second Air Gap The pole embrace at the pole tip. Must be > 0 and < 1. The pole embrace at the pole root. Must be > 0 and < 2. The pole thickness at the pole tip. The pole thickness at the pole root. The length of the pole. The slot depth. The shoe thickness. The type of magnet. Click the button to open the Select Definition window. For all pole types. The length of the magnet (if a magnet is used). The width of the second air gap. Defining the Shaft Data for a Claw-Pole Alternator To define the shaft: 1. To open the Shaft Data Properties window, double-click the Machine>Shaft entry in the project tree on the desktop. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window.) 2. Select or clear the Magnetic Shaft check box to specify whether or not the shaft is to be made of magnetic material. 3. Click OK to close the Properties window. Shaft Data for Claw-Pole Alternators To access the shaft data, double-click the Machine>Shaft entry in the project tree. The Shaft Data Properties window contains the following fields: Magnetic Shaft Select or clear this check box to indicate whether or not the shaft is made of magnetic material. Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Claw-Pole Alternator To define the solution data: 1. To open the Solution Setup window, right-click Analysis in the project tree, and click Add Solution Setup. 2. Click the General tab. The Operation Type is automatically set to General for this machine type. 9-240 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14.5 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Maxwell 3D Online Help 3. Select the Load Type used in the machine from the following options: Infinite Bus Independent Generator 4. 5. Enter the output power developed at the shaft of the generator in the Rated Output Power field. Enter the RMS line-to-line voltage in the Rated Voltage field. 6. Enter the desired output speed of the alternator at the load point in the Rated Speed field. 7. Enter the temperature at which the system functions in the Operating Temperature field. 8. Click the Claw-Pole Synchronous Machine tab. 9. Enter a value in the Rated Power Factor field. 10. To enter an Input Exciting Current, select the check box, enter a value, and select the units. 11. Click OK to close the Solution Setup window. Related Topics: Solution Data for Claw-Pole Alternators Solution Data for Claw-Pole Alternators To access the solution data, right-click Analysis in the project tree, and click Add Solution Setup. For this machine type, there is only one tab, the General tab. The Solution Setup window contains the following fields: Operation Type Load Type Rated Output Power Rated Voltage Rated Speed Operating Temperature Rated Power Factor Input Exciting Current General tab. Select Motor or Generator from the pull-down list. Generator is automatically selected for this machine type On the General tab. Select from Infinite Bus and Independent Generator. General tab. Type a value for the rated output voltage, and select the units. General tab. Type a value for the rated voltage, and select the units. General tab. Type a value for the rated speed, and select the units. General tab. Type a value for the operating temperature, and select the units. Claw-Pole Synchronous Machine tab. Type a value in the field. Select this check box, enter a value, and select the units. If this check box is cleared, the value will be calculated automatically rather than entered. Related Topics: Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Claw-Pole Alternator RMxprt Machine Types 9-241 Release 14.5 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Maxwell 3D Online Help Three-Phase Non-Salient Synchronous Machines (NSSM) After you have selected Three-Phase Non-Salient Synchronous Machine as your model type, enter the data to define the following: • • General data, such as the number of poles, frictional loss, and reference speed. • Rotor data, such as the slot types and dimensions, rotor diameter, laminations, and windings and conductors. • • • Commutator and brush data, such as the commutator dimensions and brush length. Stator pole and winding data, such as its associated pole dimensions, type of steel, and wire definitions. Shaft data. Solution data. Also see Analysis Approach for the Three-Phase Non-Salient Synchronous Machine Analysis Approach for Three-Phase Non-Salient Synchronous Machines The three-phase non-salient-pole synchronous electric machine has two types: the generator and the motor. Their basic structures are the same. The three-phase non-salient-pole synchronous generators are the main Thrat the shaft and transform it into the electrical energy. The rotor is equipped with a non-salient-pole winding excited by a DC source. The stator is equipped with a three-phase winding that has a sinusoidal spatial distribution. The spinning rotor produces a rotating magnetic field in the air gap of the machine. The frequency of the voltage induced in the stator is given by: f = ( pn ) ⁄ 60 where p is the number of pairs of poles, and n is the mechanical speed of the rotor in rpm, which is called the synchronous speed. The machine is capable of producing both the active and the reactive power as required by the load connected at the stator terminal. 9-242 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14.5 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Maxwell 3D Online Help Usually the frequency-domain phasor diagram is adopted to analyze the characteristics. The phasor diagrams for a generator and a motor are shown. Generator Motor In the figure, R1, X1, and Xa are the armature resistance, the armature leakage reactance, and the armature reactance, respectively. In a non-salient-pole synchronous machine, Xad ≅ Xaq and they are both expressed by Xa. Taking the input voltage U as the reference phasor, for a given current: I = I ∠– ϕ where ϕ is the angle I lags U , which is called the power factor angle. RMxprt Machine Types 9-243 Release 14.5 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Maxwell 3D Online Help The internal back EMF induced by the resultant air gap field considering the effects of armature reaction Ei can be derived from: U + ( R 1 + jX 1 ) ⋅ I  Ei =   U – ( R 1 + jX 1 ) ⋅ I for Generator for motor Based on Ei, the resultant air gap flux considering the effects of armature reaction can be computed, and therefore, the magnetic circuit can be solved. With solved magnetic saturation factor, saturated Xa is derived, and therefore, the no-load induced voltage E0 with the same magnetic saturation (frozen magnetic circuit) can be calculated from: E + ( jX a ) ⋅ I  i E0 =   E i – ( jX a ) ⋅ I for Generator for motor Let the angle U legs E0 be θ, which is called the power angle for the generator or the torque angle for the motor, then the angle I lags E0 is ψ = ϕ+θ The d- and the q-axis currents can be obtained respectively as follows: I = Id = I sin ψ Iq cos ψ Based on the magnetic circuit solution and E0, Xa and the excitation current If can be determined based on the frozen method. 1. For the generator: The output power (electric power) is directly computed from the voltage and the current as: P 2 = 3UI cos ϕ 9-244 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14.5 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Maxwell 3D Online Help The input power (mechanical power) is defined as: P 1 = P 2 + P fw + P Cua + P Fe + P add + P cuf + P ex where Pfw, PCua, PFe, Padd, Pcuf and Pex are the frictional and wind loss, the armature copper loss, the iron-core loss, the additional loss, the field winding copper loss, and the exciter loss, respectively. The input mechanical shaft torque is: P1 T 1 = -----ω where ω denotes the synchronous speed in rad/s. 2. For the motor: The input power (electric power) is directly computed from the voltage and the current as: P 1 = 3UI cos ϕ The output power (mechanical power) is defined as: P 2 = P 1 – ( P fw + P Cua + P Fe + P add + P cuf + P ex ) where Pfw, PCua, PFe, Padd, Pcuf and Pex are the frictional and wind loss, the armature copper loss, the iron-core loss, the additional loss, the field winding copper loss, and the exciter loss, respectively. The output mechanical shaft torque is: P2 T 2 = -----ω RMxprt Machine Types 9-245 Release 14.5 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Maxwell 3D Online Help The efficiency is computed for both the generator and the motor by: P2 η = ------ ⋅ 100 % P1 Related Topics: Defining Three-Phase Non-Salient Synchronous Machines Defining Three-Phase Non-Salient Synchronous Machines The general procedure for defining a three-phase non-salient synchronous machine is as follows: 1. Create the non-salient synchronous machine project. 2. After you have selected Three-Phase Non-Salient Synchronous Machine as your model type, you must define the following: • • • • • • • • General data, such as number of poles, losses, and reference speed. Stator data, such as dimensions, slot type, skew, and laminations. Define the Stator slot dimensions. Winding data, such as the parallel branches, conductors, and wire dimensions and insulation. Rotor data, such as the rotor dimensions, lamination and slot type. Define the Rotor slot data. Define the Shaft Data. Solution data, such as specifying motor or generator application, and rated output voltage and frequency. You may also use the following options: • • Add a damper to or remove an existing damper from the rotor; Add vents to and remove existing vents from the stator. Defining the General Data for a Three-Phase NSSM To access the general data, double-click the Machine entry in the project tree. 9-246 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14.5 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Maxwell 3D Online Help The Properties window for a three-phase non-salient synchronous machine contains the following fields to be entered: The machine type you selected when inserting a new RMxprt design (Three Phase Non-Salient Synchronous Machine). Number of Poles The number of poles the machine contains. This value is the total number of poles in the stator (or the number of pole pairs multiplied by two). Frictional Loss The frictional energy loss (due to friction) measured at the reference speed. Windage Loss The windage loss (due to air resistance) measured at the reference speed. Reference Speed The given speed of reference. Machine Type Related Topics: Defining the Stator for Three-Phase NSSM Defining the Stator for Three-Phase NSSM The stator is the outer lamination stack where the three-phase windings reside. Double-click the icon Machine>Stator in the project tree to display the Properties dialog box. The Properties window contains the following fields: Outer Diameter Inner Diameter Length Stacking Factor Steel Type Number of Slots Slot Type Lamination Sectors Pressboard Thickness Skew Width The outer diameter of the stator. The inner diameter of the stator. The length of the stator core. The stacking factor of the stator core. The steel type of the stator core. Click the button to open the Select Definition window. The number of slots the stator core contains. The type of slots in the stator core. Click the button to open the Select Slot Type window. The number of lamination sectors. The magnetic press board thickness (enter 0 for a non-magnetic press board). The skew width measured in slot number. To define general stator data: 1. To open the Stator Data Properties window, double-click the Machine>Stator entry in the project tree on the desktop. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window.) 2. Enter the Outer Diameter of the stator. 3. Enter the Inner Diameter of the stator. 4. Enter the length of the stator core in the Length field. RMxprt Machine Types 9-247 Release 14.5 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Maxwell 3D Online Help 5. 6. Enter the stacking factor for the stator core in the Stacking Factor field. Select a Steel Type for the stator core: a. b. Click the button for Steel Type. The Select Definition window appears. Select a steel type from the list, or define a new steel type. c. Click OK to close the Select Definition window and return to the Properties window. 7. Enter the Number of Slots in the stator. 8. Select the Slot Type: a. b. Note c. Click the button for the Slot Type. The Select Slot Type window appears. Select a slot type (available types include 1 through 6). Slot types 1 though 4 are filled with round wire. Slot types 5 and 6 are filled with rectangular wire. If Auto Design is enabled, the software designs an optimum slot geometry; in this case, you can input the tooth width dimension, and the software determines the slot width accordingly. When you place the mouse cursor over the slot type, a schematic of the selected type appears, displaying the slot dimension variables. Optionally, check User Defined Slot if you wish to define the slot dimensions using the Slot Editor. Click OK to close the Select Slot Type window and return to the Properties window. 9. Enter the number of sectors in the Lamination Sectors field. 10. Enter the thickness of the magnetic pressboard in the Pressboard Thickness field. Enter 0 for a non-magnetic pressboard. 11. Enter the skew width, measured in slot number, in the Skew Width field. 12. Click OK to close the Properties window. Related Topics: Defining Stator Slots for a Three-Phase NSSM Defining Stator Slots for a Three-Phase NSSM To define the slot dimensions: 1. To open the Stator Slot Data Properties window, double-click the Machine>Stator>Slot entry in the project tree on the desktop. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window.) 2. Optionally, to automatically design the dimensions of slots Hs2, Bs1, and Bs2, select the Auto Design check box. 9-248 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14.5 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. When Auto Design is selected. . Hs0 Hs2 Bs0 Bs1 Bs2 4. Click OK to close the Properties window. this slot dimension is determined automatically. Always available. Enter 0 to automatically obtain this value from the wire library. if a coil starts in slot 1 and ends in slot 6. Set the winding type to Editor to use the Winding Editor dialog to design the coil windings The number of parallel branches in one phase of the stator winding. Inc. The total number of conductors in each stator slot. Related Topics: RMxprt Machine Types 9-249 Release 14. this slot dimension is determined automatically. Wire size (0 for auto-design). and its subsidiaries and affiliates. round wires are used. Available only when Auto Design is cleared. Conductors and Windings of NSSM Stator In the Winding tab. Enter 0 to have RMxprt auto-design this value.5 . which has two tab sheets: Winding and End/Insulation. All rights reserved. The number of wires per conductor. Enter the available slot dimensions. this slot dimension is determined automatically. This value is the number of turns per coil multiplied by the number of layers. Related Topics: Defining Stator Windings and Insulation for a Three-Phase NSSM Defining Stator Windings and Insulation for a Three-Phase NSSM Double-click the icon Machine>Stator>Winding in the project tree to display the Properties dialog box. You can assign wire size of round wires or rectangle wires. When the slot type you selected is 5 or 6. When Auto Design is selected. Available only when Auto Design is cleared. Enter 0 to have RMxprt autodesign this value. Inc. Always available. The coil pitch is the number of slots separating one winding. Winding Layers Winding Type Parallel Branches Conductors per Slot Coil Pitch Number of Strands Wire Wrap Wire Size The number of layers in the stator winding. The coil pitch measured in number of slots. it has a coil pitch of 5.Maxwell 3D Online Help 3. rectangle wires are used. Available only when Auto Design is cleared.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Define Wires. For example. . Select the winding layers from the pull-down list (available choices 1 and 2). When Auto Design is selected. define the wire. The thickness of the double-sided wire wrap. conductor and winding of the stator. When the slot type you selected is 1 to 4. The type of the stator winding.© SAS IP. 1. Click Insert Vent. Right-click on the stator icon in the project tree to display the shortcut menu. define the end winding and the insulation of the stator. Tip Inner Diameter The inner diameter of the coil tip. Bottom Insulation Bottom insulation thickness. Coil Wrap Single-side coil wrap insulation thickness. Wedge Thickness The thickness of the wedge insulation. .5 . you must have set the Winding Property for the Winding Type to Editor. Related Topics: Define Wires. End Adjustment The end length adjustment of the stator coils. To remove an existing vent item. 2. Right click on the stator icon in the project tree to display the shortcut menu. Stator Vent Data for Three-Phase NSSM To insert a vent on a stator for a three phase synchronous machine: 1. It is available when Input Half-turn Length is cleared. Layer Insulation The thickness of the insulation layer.© SAS IP. 9-250 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. . When this check box is selected. Click Remove Vent. the row End Adjustment appears instead. Conductors. Inc. 2. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Half-turn Length The half-turn length of the armature winding. When this check box is cleared.Maxwell 3D Online Help Define End Windings and Insulation of NSSM Stator Winding Editor Define End Windings and Insulation of NSSM Stator In the tab sheet End/Insulation. End Clearance The end clearance between two adjacent stator coils. The Winding Editor makes this possible by enabling you to specify the number of turns for each coil. you may want to specify a different number of conductors for each stator slot. To enable the Winding Editor. All rights reserved.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. and Windings of NSSM Stator Winding Editor For a non-salient synchronous motor. Input Half-turn Length Select or clear this check box to specify whether or not you want to enter the half-turn length. the row Half Turn Length appears the next time you open the Properties dialog box. The vent icon appears in the project tree under the stator. It is available when Input Half-turn Length is selected. Inc. which is the distance of one end of the conductor extending vertically beyond the end of the stator. Slot Liner The thickness of the slot liner insulation. Base Inner Radius The inner radius of the base corner. Center-to-Center distance between two adjacent Vent ducts Define NSSM Rotor Data Double-click the icon Machine>Rotor in the project tree to display the Properties dialog box.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. O for non-magnetic spacer. The Vent Properties window contains the following fields. Magnetic press board thickness. Number of indexing slots of the rotor core used to determine slot pitch. Define NSSM Rotor Slot Double-click the icon Machine>Rotor>Slot in the project tree to display the Properties dialog box. Duct Width The width of the radial vent ducts. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. double click on a vent item. 0 for non-magnetic press board. All rights reserved. . Inc. Outer Diameter Inner Diameter Length Stacking Factor Steel Type Press Board Thickness Indexing Slots Real Slots Slot Type The outer diameter of the rotor core. . Stacking factor of the rotor core.Maxwell 3D Online Help This removes the vent item from the project tree. Select a steel type for the rotor core material. which has one tab sheet: Rotor. Duct pitch. Vent Ducts The number of radial vent ducts. Slot type of the rotor core. Number of Slots of the rotor core. There are six types of rotor slots. define the rotor general data. In the Rotor tab. Magnetic spacer width Width of magnetic spacer which holds vent ducts. RMxprt Machine Types 9-251 Release 14. To access the Vent properties for a vent.© SAS IP. The inner diameter of the rotor core.5 . Inc. The length of the rotor core. 5 . . There are in total six types of slots that are available: Type 1 Slot Type 2 Slot Type 5 Slot Type 3 Slot Type 6 Slot Type 4 Slot Related Topics: Define NSSM Rotor Winding Define NSSM Rotor Winding The rotor winding is equipped on the rotor pole to provide the excitation for the magnetic field. define the available rotor slot dimensions as illustrated . Double click the icon Machine>Rotor>Winding in the project tree to display the Properties dialog box.Maxwell 3D Online Help In the Slot tab. Inc. . where you define the wires and physical dimensions of the rotor winding. 9-252 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14.© SAS IP. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. All rights reserved. Right-click to display the pop-up menu and select Insert Vent. You can assign wire size of round wires or rectangle wires. Wire size (0 for auto-design). Winding Fillet The size of the winding fillet.2 Assign Rectangular Wire Size). rectangle wires are used (refer to section 8. When this check box is cleared. round wires are used ((refer to section 8. Wedge Thickness Insulation: wedge thickness. Half-turn Length The half-turn length of the armature winding.12 (0 for available maximum area).© SAS IP.4. 2. the row End Adjustment appears instead. The number of wires per conductor (0 for auto-design). All rights reserved. When this check box is selected. When you select Round Wire for Winding Type. Otherwise. you can add vents to a rotor in a three-phase NSSM. the row Half Turn Length appears the next time you open the Properties dialog box. Parallel Branches Conductors per Slot Number of Strands Wire Wrap Wire Size The number of parallel branches in the rotor winding. End Adjustment One-side end extended length. the following are defined:. Select the rotor icon in the project tree. Related Topics: Define NSSM Shaft Data Rotor Vent Data for NSSMs By option. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.4. Coil Wrap Insulation: single-side coil wrap thickness. To add a vents to the rotor: 1.Maxwell 3D Online Help In the Winding tab. The number of conductors per slot (0 for auto-design). Slot Liner Insulation: slot liner thickness.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.5 . . Limited Cross Height The limited cross-section height for the winding design or arrangement. or Overall Height as shown in Figure 12. Inner Fillet Radius Inner fillet radius at the span corner. RMxprt Machine Types 9-253 Release 14. It is available when Input Half-turn Length is selected.1 Assign Round Wire Sizes). Bottom Insulation Insulation: bottom insulation thickness. The thickness of the double-sided wire wrap (0 to automatically obtain this value from the wire library). In the End/Insulation tab the following are defined: Input Half-turn Length Select or clear this check box to specify whether or not you want to enter the half-turn length. . Inc. Inc. End Clearance End clearance between two adjacent coils. Surface Ducts Number of surface tangential vent ducts Surface Duct Width Width of surface tangential vent ducts Surface Duct Depth Depth of surface tangential vent ducts Surface Duct Pitch Pitch of surface tangential vent ducts Axial Ducts Number of axial vent ducts per pole Axial Duct Width Width of axial vent ducts in main teeth Axial Duct Depth Depth of axial vent ducts in main teeth Define NSSM Shaft Data To define the shaft: 1. . Right click the icon Analysis in the project tree. On the General tab. There are two tab sheets. Click OK to close the Properties dialog box. In the tab sheet Shaft. Rated Apparent Power The output electric apparent power in kVA developed at the terminal for the generator.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. or Operation Type Load Type Rated Output Power: The output mechanical power in kW developed at the shaft for the motor. 3. 2. Select the rotor icon in the project tree. The vent icon disappears in the project tree under the stator. 9-254 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. Select a load type for the motor or generator from the pull-down list (refer to section 7.8 Assign Load Types). . Inc.© SAS IP. The Vent data for the NSSM rotor includes the following fields. Inc. All rights reserved. 1. 2. Analysis Setup for Three-Phase Non-Salient Synchronous Machines Add Solution Setup for NSSM To set up the solution data: 1. select or clear the check box Magnetic Shaft to specify whether or not the shaft is to be made of the magnetic material. then click Add Solution Setup from the shortcut menu to display the dialog box Properties.5 . Right-click to display the pop-up menu and select Remove Vent. To remove a vent to stator in a three-phase induction motor. Two options from the pull-down list: Generator and Motor. define the solution setup data.Maxwell 3D Online Help The vent icon appears in the project tree under the rotor. 2. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Click the icon Machine>Shaft in the project tree to display the Properties dialog box. as shown in Figure 12. which can be used to define Output Variables for design optimization: RMxprt Machine Types 9-255 Release 14. 3. Click OK to close the pop-up dialog box Validate NSSM Solution Setup 1. . use the diagnostic information in the window to resolve any issues. On the NSSM tab. you can display and analyze the results in the following ways: View Performance To view the solutions: Click RMxprt>Results>Solution Data to display the information box Solutions. Operating Temperature The temperature at which the system functions. and select the units. . Click Close to close the information box Validation Check. from the pull-down list Data. The analysis progress is shown in the Progress window and the analysis message is shown in the Message Manager. Exciting Current Exciting current for rated operation. For generators. Design Output for Non-Salient Synchronous Machines When RMxprt has completed a solution. Exciter Efficiency The percentage efficiency of the exciter used to supply the rotor winding with the DC current if it is mechanically connected to the shaft of the generator. Winding Connection Select Wye or Delta from the pull-down list. It has three tab sheets. If any items do not pass validation. the rated output power is determined by the rated apparent power mutiplying the rated power factor. Input Exciting Current If the check box is selected.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Inc. you have 13 different data tables for the line start permanent magnet motor. 4. Rated Power Factor 4. click RMxprt>Analyze All. the companying edit box is enabled. define the connection data: The rated power factor. All rights reserved.Maxwell 3D Online Help Rated Voltage The RMS line-to-line voltage. Click RMxprt>Validation Check to display the information box Validation Check. When the design has been validated. The efficiency value ranges between 0% and 100% and will only affect the total efficiency result. Rated Speed The desired synchronous speed. Inc. 3. 5. In the tab sheet Performance. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.15. You need to input the exciting current value and select the units if needed. 2.5 .© SAS IP. The Operating Temperature will affect all winding resistances and therefore affect all ohmic losses. . you have 12 sets of information.© SAS IP.5 . as follows: • • • • • • • • • • • • General Data Stator Data Stator Winding Data Rotor Data Field Winding Data Some Factors and Material Consumption Unsaturated Steady State Parameters No Load Magnetic Data Full Load Magnetic Data Full Load Electric Data Transient Parameters and Time Constants Transient FEA Input Data Note To print the Design Sheet: Right click the Design Sheet.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. and click OK to print. Inc. All rights reserved. select the printer and other parameters from the dialog box Print.Maxwell 3D Online Help • • • • • • • • • • • • • FEA input Data Field Winding Full-load Magnetic Variables Important Factors Material Consumption No-load Magnetic Variables Rated Operation Stator Slot Stator Winding Steady State Parameters per Unit Transient Data Transient Data per Unit Unsaturated Steady State Parameters View Design Sheet In the tab sheet Design Sheet. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . select Print from the shortcut menu. 9-256 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. Inc. you have 10 curves as shown: Phase Voltage vs Exciting Current Power Factor vs Torque Angle RMxprt Machine Types 9-257 Release 14.5 . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . from the pull-down list Name.Maxwell 3D Online Help View Curves In the tab sheet Curves. .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.© SAS IP. Inc. Inc. All rights reserved. . . All rights reserved. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Inc.Maxwell 3D Online Help Armature Phase Current vs Torque Angle Efficiency vs Torque Angle Output Power vs Torque Angle 9-258 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14.5 .© SAS IP. . Inc.5 .Maxwell 3D Online Help Armature Current vs Exciting Current Cogging Torque in Two Teeth Induced Coil Voltages at No Load RMxprt Machine Types 9-259 Release 14.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Inc. . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. All rights reserved.© SAS IP. select Print from the shortcut menu. Inc. 9-260 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. and click OK to print.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. select the printer and other parameters from the dialog box Print.Maxwell 3D Online Help Air-Gap Flux Density at No-Load Induced Winding Voltages at No-Load Note To print the plots from the Curve: Right click on the plot. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc. . .© SAS IP.5 . All rights reserved. The dialog box Report appears as shown: 2.sm2 geometry file and then import the . Under the tab sheet Trace. Current. RMxprt can create a Maxwell2D design with all setups completed. and click OK to print. Click RMxprt>Results>Create RMxprt Report>Rectangular Plot. RMxprt Machine Types 9-261 Release 14. Misc.Maxwell 3D Online Help Create Reports 1. Transient FEA of the Non-Salient Synchronous Machines If you expect to continue the transient or electromagnetic-field FEA with Maxwell2D. . All rights reserved. You can always add additional curves to the same plot by repeating the process. To get a screen shot of from the Curves: Right click ont the plot. Output Variables. Note To print the plots from the Curves: Right click on the plot. 3. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Finally click the button New report to create the plot.5 . select the printer and other parameters from the dialog box Print. or export Maxwell2D project based on the . For transient FEA.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Select one from the Category column. there are Variables. and click the button Add Trace to add them one by one. select Copy Image. select Print from the shortcut menu. select the traces that belong to it from the Quantity column. Double click the icon Results>XY Plot1 to display the graph with multiple traces in a new window.© SAS IP. Inc. . then paste to a destination file. you can create Maxwell2D design directly from RMxprt. and Power under the Category column. Inc.sm2 file to a Maxwell2D design. Percentage. . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. In the Type tab you can review the Motion Type being set as Rotation. Model Depth Click Maxwell 2D>Design Setting… in Maxwell2D and click Set Model Depth… tab to review the Model Depth: 3590 mm. All setups are automatically completed by RMxprt.© SAS IP. you can review that the Solution Type is set as Magnetic Transient. Review Maxwell2D Design Setups This section reviews all setups automatically completed by RMxprt. All rights reserved. Inc. . A Maxwell2D design called Maxwell2DDesign1 is created with the displayed geometry as shown below.5 .2. Solution Type Setup Click Maxwell 2D>Solution Type… in Maxwell2D. Motion Type Double click on Maxwell2DDesign1>Model>MotionSetup1 in the Project Manager window.Maxwell 3D Online Help Create Maxwell 2D Design Click the command RMxprt>Analysis Setup>Create Maxwell Design… in RMxprt to create a Maxwell2D design with Auto setup checked (refer to subsection 5. 2. Inc. please refer to APPENDIX Setup Maxwell 2D Designs.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. and the Moving Vector as Positive Global: Z. 9-262 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. For detailed setup process.1 Create Maxwell 2D Design). Model Setup 1. Boundary Setup 1. All rights reserved. . and its value is set as 0. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. you can review that the highlighted outer half circle in the geometry is set as the Vector Potential Boundary. you can review that the highlighted arrowhead line from right to left in the geometry is set as the Slave Boundary. and select Set Geometry Multiplier in the pop-up panel. 2. you can review that the Symmetry Multiplier is set as 2. . Inc. and the relation of the slave boundary to the master boundary is set as Bs = -Bm. 3. you can review that the highlighted arrowhead line from left to right in the geometry is set as the Master Boundary.Maxwell 3D Online Help 3. The rotor initial position is set to such a position that the initial flux linkage of the phase-A winding is at its negative maximum value. Initial Position In the Data tab of the Motion Setup panel you can review the Initial Position being set as 100 deg with Rotate Limit unchecked. Slave Boundary Double click on Maxwell2DDesign1>Boundaries>Slave1 in the Project Manager window. RMxprt Machine Types 9-263 Release 14. This is because the geometry includes only 1 magnetic pole of the machine. Vector Potential Boundary Double click on Maxwell2DDesign1>Boundaries>VectorPotential1 in the Project Manager window. 5. Master Boundary Click on Maxwell2DDesign1>Boundaries>Master1 in the Project Manager window. Mechanical Load In the Mechanical tab of the Motion Setup panel you can review the Angular Velocity being set as 3000 rpm with Consider Mechanical Transient unchecked.5 . Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 4. Symmetry Multiplier Right click on Maxwell2DDesign1>Model in the Project Manager window.© SAS IP. and DW540_50_SF0. Therefore. In the Properties window.946. Windings Click on Maxwell2DDesign1>Excitations>PhaseA in the Project Manager window.946 are automatically created for Stator and Rotor. By using sin function instead of cos function. 43. Excitation Setup 1. Band.4944*pi/180) for Voltage. 8.5 .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. because the shaft is defined as magnetic in RMxprt.© SAS IP. All rights reserved. you can see that all stator and rotor coil terminals are assigned to material copper by default. 0.00226117 ohms for Resistance. 1 for Number of Parallel Branches. a phase shift in the applied voltage source will be the power angle of the motor.932. pi is a predefined constant.932 and 0.7 is the phase peak voltage in Volts. 11267. Inc. you can review all winding properties: Voltage for Winding Type.7 * sin(2*pi*50*time-43. Stranded for IsSolid. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . Shaft is also assigned as DW540_50_SF0. the applied voltage and back EMF are in phase. 11267. InnerRegion and OuterRegion are assigned as vacuum as shown: Two new materials called DW540_50_SF0. .4944 degrees is the power angle at full load 9-264 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. and time is a predefined variable for time.87325e-005 H for Inductance. all objects assigned to this phase are highlighted in the modeler window. Inc.946.Maxwell 3D Online Help Material Assignment In the Maxwell2D modeler windows history tree. where 50 is the frequency in Hz. based on the original material of DW540_50 used in RMxprt and the equivalent stacking factors of 0. and C coil terminals is assigned as 1. you can review the object corresponding to this coil terminal in the modeler window and all coil terminal properties in the Properties window.© SAS IP. Number of Conductors of A. In this example. Clicking on PhaseB. and winding properties in the Properties window. Inc. Click on PhaseB. inductance and number of parallel branches are obtained from the TRANSIENT FEA INPUT DATA section in RMxprt design sheet. PhaseC. and it is equal to the Number of Turns given in RMxprt divided by number of coils per phase. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. it can be either positive or negative.Maxwell 3D Online Help operation. Expand a winding and click on a coil terminal.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Since we are working with only one-half of the motor structure. RMxprt Machine Types 9-265 Release 14. . one coil terminal can represent one complete coil with master/slave boundary conditions provided. Polarity Type defines the direction of the current in the coil. you can review all objects assigned to this winding in the modeler window. Coil Terminals A winding consists of several coil terminals. Number of Conductors is the number of turns per coil. 2. All rights reserved. A coil terminal has properties of Number of Conductors and Polarity Type. and two coil terminals represent a coil in a complete 2D model. Inc.5 . or Field. The values for resistance. . B. and it is 12 for the Field windings. 5 . Inc. you can review all objects assigned to this winding in the modeler window.0002s for Time step with 100 steps per period. All rights reserved. . 9-266 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. you can review its properties in the Properties window: 0. Click on one of the mesh operations under Maxwell2DDesign1>Mesh Operations in the Project Manager window. Inc.175 mm and the limited Normal Deviation as 30 deg for all parts with true-surface arcs). Length_Main (set the maximum mesh length as 135 mm for all other parts). 3. Mesh Operation Setup Maxwell2D mesh maker can create meshes according to predefined mesh operations. Solution Setup Click on Maxwell2DDesign1>Analysis>Setup1 in the Project Manager window. A mesh operation defines one or more conditions for some selected objects for mesh maker to create meshes that satisfy the conditions. that is 10 periods. and click Setup Y Connection… in the pop-up panel.2s for Stop time.© SAS IP. mesh operations include Length_Coil (set maximum mesh length as 18 mm for all coils).Maxwell 3D Online Help PhaseC. you can review the Y -connection setup. or Field. . 0. you can review its properties in the Properties window. and winding properties in the properties window. Length_Field (set maximum mesh length as 19 mm for field winding coils). and its subsidiaries and affiliates.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. SurfApprox_Main (set the limited Surface Deviation as 1. RMxprt automatically sets up some mesh operations for different machine parts based on geometry sizes. Y Connection for Three-Phase Windings Right click on Maxwell2DDesign1>Excitations in the Project Manager Window. For this example. For this example. and select Update Report. Inc. you may want to Apply Mesh Operations and Plot Mesh . Inc. respectively. and click Analyze. and select Update All Reports.25. and pick up Marker>Add X Marker in the pop-up panel. To view all traces of a report: when you double click on the report under Maxwell2DDesign1>Results in the project tree. . and all traces (a curve in a report is a trace) of the selected reports are displayed in the Results window. and pick up Clean Stop in the pop-up panel. You may also want to create several Quick Reports to display results. To update all reports: right click on Maxwell2DDesign1>Results in the project tree. To view a trace of a report: when you click on a trace of a report under Maxwell2DDesign1>Results in the project tree. While the design is being analyzed. the Modeler window changes to the Results window.Maxwell 3D Online Help Analyze Maxwell 2D Design Before analyzing the Maxwell2D design.© SAS IP. To analyze the Maxwell2D design: right click on Maxwell2DDesign1>Analysis>Setup1 in the project tree. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. All rights reserved.24 and 12. you can update one or all result reports and view the reports. Right click on the Winding Quick Report in the Results window.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. the selected trace is highlighted in the Results window. the simulated three-phase currents and the electro-magnetic torque are shown in Figure 12. To cancel the simulation: right click on the progress bar in the progress window. To stop the simulation so that you can continue the simulation later: right click on the progress bar in the progress window. To update one report: right click on the report under Maxwell2DDesign1>Results in the project tree. yellow-shaded boxes are added in the report to indicate X and all Y RMxprt Machine Types 9-267 Release 14. . and pick up Abort in the pop-up panel.5 . 5 . All rights reserved.0 0 .2 36 6 . Click on the X box (or the vertical line).0 0 2 00 . 00 50 .7.0 0 0.© SAS IP.30 .7 7 17 Y 1 [ A] 10 . .Maxwell 3D Online Help values.00 10 0 . and its subsidiaries and affiliates.0 0 T im e [m s ] 15 0. Inc.0 0 M a xw e ll2 D D e s ig n 1 C u rve I n fo C u rr en t (P h as e A ) S e t u p 1 : T r an s i e nt C u rr en t (P h as e B ) S e t u p 1 : T r an s i e nt C u rr en t (P h as e C ) S e t u p 1 : T r an s i e nt 20 .0 0 .10 .0 0 0 . Inc.0 0 M X 1: 1 50 . . and drag it to some place where you see the steadystate peak value of a phase current as shown: W i nd i ng Q u i c k R e p o r t A n s o ft C o rp o ra t io n 30 .0 0 13 .1 10 0 .86 0 7 9-268 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14.20 .9.0 0 .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 00 MX1: 127.Torque [NewtonMeter] 15.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.63 + 7.4241 RMxprt Machine Types 9-269 Release 14.00 100.00 Moving1.00 7.6253 10.© SAS IP. .00 0.5 . .98 Nm.00 -5. All rights reserved.00 10. Inc.00 0.00 -15. Inc.00 200.3317 5.33) / 2 = 8.3865 MX2: 111.Maxwell 3D Online Help Add X makers in Torque Quick Report to indicate the steady-state maximum and minimum values of torque as shown below.00 Maxwell2DDesign1 Curve Info 20.00 -10.00 50. The average torque can be approximately obtained from the maximum and minimum values as Tav = (Tmax + Tmin) / 2 = (10. Torque Ansoft Corporati on 25.00 -20.00 Time [ms] 150. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. and other physical characteristics. Stator and rotor data. • • • Vent data.5 . and thickness. and wire and insulation specifications. length. Shaft data. such as numbers of poles and slots. such as dimensions. such as winding type. Stator and rotor pole data. . Circuit data. structure (inner or outer rotor). Stator and rotor slot design dimensions. Solution data. lamination. Stator and rotor core data. Inc. . number of layers and branches.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. added under an Axial AC rotor structure. composition. added under a stator or rotor for DC source type machines.Maxwell 3D Online Help Generic Rotating Machines After you have selected Generic Rotating Machine as your model type. Stator and rotor winding data. Brush data. Inc. added under a stator or rotor. and circuit and slot types.© SAS IP. All rights reserved. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. conductor and coil data. the following machine data must be defined to configure the machine: • • • • • • • • General data. such as the source type (AC or DC). Optionally you can insert or remove the following for a Generic Rotating Machine. and rotor and stator types. Analysis Approach for Generic Rotating Machines Generic Rotating Machines can be configured to operate as any of the following types: • Generator 9-270 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. such as magnet type. have the same number of phases. All rights reserved.Maxwell 3D Online Help Generic Rotating Machine Operating as a Generator Doubly-fed induction generators (DFIGs) are widely used in wind power systems. In order to track the maximum power point. the phase sequence of the rotor currents is different from that of the stator currents. as shown below. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. where the wind turbine transforms wind energy into mechanical energy. For a DFIG. but they must have the same number of poles p. The stator and rotor windings may. For a given wind turbine. the tip speed ratio must keep constant . The input mechanical power with Maximum Power Point Tracking (MPPT) must satisfy: P mech = P m_ref ⋅ ( ω m ⁄ ω ref ) 3 RMxprt Machine Types 9-271 Release 14. However. and n0 is the synchronous speed as given below: n 0 = 60 f ⁄ p When the rotor speed is lower than the synchronous speed. the rotor winding must be excited by balanced poly-phase currents with the slip frequency sf via an AC-DC-AC convert. both the stator and the rotor are equipped with poly-phase AC windings. the power coefficient (the ratio of turbine power to the wind power). and the DFIG transforms mechanical energy into electrical energy. and the rotor winding gets power from the converter. Inc.5 . the rotor currents have the same phase sequence as the stator currents.at its optimal value. . is a function of the tip speed ratio (the ratio of the blade tip speed to the wind speed). In order to produce terminal voltages with desired frequency f in the stator winding. A DFIG works as a component of a wind power system. when the rotor speed is higher than the synchronous speed.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. or may not.© SAS IP. Inc. Slip s is defined as: s = 1 – n ⁄ n0 where n is the rotor speed. and the rotor winding outputs power to the converter. . Inc. V1 is the stator rated phase voltage. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. and ω m is the rotor speed in rad/s. All rights reserved. Inc. R1 is the stator phase resistance. based on the equivalent circuit shown below. The electro-magnetic power in the air gap is: P em = ( P mech – P f ) ⁄ ( 1 – s ) Therefore. the stator output electrical power at rated operation is: 2 P 1 = P em – m 1 I 1 R 1 = m 1 V 1 I 1 cos ϕ where m1 is the number of phases of the stator winding. and cos ϕ is the rated power factor. .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.© SAS IP.5 . The rotor mechanical loss is: P f = P f_ref ⋅ ( ω m ⁄ ω ref ) 3 where Pf_ref is mechanical loss measured at a reference speed of ω ref . one obtains: V 1 = V 1 ∠0 I 1 = I 1 ∠– ϕ E m = V1 + I 1 ( R 1 + jX 1 ) Im = ( Em ⁄ Xm ( Em ) ) I 2 = I 2 ∠– ϕ 2 = I 1 + I m 9-272 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. one obtains: 2 P em ⁄ m 1 I 1 = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2 V 1 cos ϕ + ( V 1 cos ϕ ) + 4 R 1 P em ⁄ m 1 Then. . I1 is the rated stator phase current to be determined. Solving for I1 .Maxwell 3D Online Help where Pm_ref is the turbine power with MPPT at a reference speed of ω ref based on the optimal tip speed ratio. Maxwell 3D Online Help Now.5 . Inc. The total electrical output power is: P elec = P 1 – P 2 – p Fe where pFe is the core loss. . Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. rotor input electrical power can be computed as: 2 P 2 = sP em + m 2 I 2 R 2 where m2 is the number of phases of the rotor winding. The input mechanical torque on the shaft is: T mech = T em + T f where Tf denotes the frictional torque.× 100% η = ------------- RMxprt Machine Types 9-273 Release 14. All rights reserved. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. The efficiency is defined as: P P mech elec .© SAS IP. . The electromagnetic torque Tem is: P em T em = -------ω where ω ? denotes the synchronous speed in rad/s. and circuit type. 6. 5.) For AXIAL_PM stator type. 19. Double-click the Machine>Shaft entry in the project tree to define the magnetism. double-click the Machine>Stator>Core>Pole entry in the project tree to define the AXIAL_PM stator core pole properties. you can insert or remove Vent data. Double-click the Machine>Rotor>Core>Slot entry in the project tree to define the rotor slot dimensions. All rights reserved. 2. Double-click the Machine>Stator>Core>Slot entry in the project tree to define the stator slot dimensions. 12. Optionally. and insulation data. double-click the Machine>Stator>Circuit entry in the project tree to define the stator circuit properties. double-click the Machine>Rotor>Core>Pole entry in the project tree to define either the AXIAL_PM rotor core pole properties or the PM_INTERIOR rotor core pole properties. Inc. composition. 13. composition.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Double-click the Machine>Rotor>Winding entry in the project tree to define the rotor conductors.) Double-click the Machine>Rotor entry in the project tree to define the rotor geometry. (Not applicable to AXIAL_PM or PM_INTERIOR rotor types. (Not applicable to AXIAL_PM or PM_INTERIOR rotor types.) For DC Source Type machines. 3. conductors.© SAS IP. and other material characterisitcs. (Not applicable to PM_INTERIOR rotor type.5 . Double-click the Machine>Stator>Winding entry in the project tree to define the stator windings. Inc. . Double-click the Machine>Stator entry in the project tree to define the stator geometry. Double-click the Machine>Stator>Core entry in the project tree to define the stator core dimensions. Double-click the Machine>Rotor>Core entry in the project tree to define the rotor core dimensions. and other material characterisitcs. (Not applicable to AXIAL_PM stator type. 14. and insulation data. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. the pole data. 9-274 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. 11.) For DC Source Type machines (Inner and Outer Structure only). double-click the Machine>Rotor>Circuit entry in the project tree to define the rotor circuit properties. Insert a Generic Rotating Machine into a new or existing project. pole data. 9. (Not applicable to AXIAL_PM stator type. . 17. you can insert or remove Brush data for generic rotating machines that have an Axial AC rotor defined. Optionally. 4. 10. Right-click Analysis in the project tree. 16. Choose File>Save to save the project. 8.) 15. (Not applicable to AXIAL_PM stator type. 7.) For AXIAL_PM or PM_INTERIOR rotor types. and click Add Solution Setup to define the solution data. Double-click the Machine entry in the project tree to define the general data. 18. and circuit type.Maxwell 3D Online Help Defining a Generic Rotating Machine The general procedure for defining a a generic rotating machine is as follows: 1.and reference speed of the shaft. windings. frictional and windage losses. (You can also enter values in the Properties window of the desktop without opening the dialog box. and rotor and stator types. Refer to the Generic Rotating Machine application note. Optionally. The default value is AC. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. The General Data Properties window for a generic rotating machine contains the following fields: Source Type Structure Stator Type The source to deliver electric power. the model can be viewed in the Maxwell 2D Modeler. or neither is to be Double-Sided. • The stator core type. If Structure type is Inner Rotor or Outer Rotor. To define the general data: 1. Choose RMxprt>Analyze All to analyze the design. 5. or it can be used to create a new Maxwell 2D project. such as the source type. on the technical support page of the ANSYS web site. . or Axial-Flux Rotor) Default is Inner Rotor. Optionally. double-click the Machine entry in the project tree. Default is AXIAL_AC. The type of rotor structure for the machine. Defining the General Data for a Generic Rotating Machine Use the Machine tab in the Properties dialog box (or Propertieswindow) to define the basic parameters of the Generic Rotating Machine. b. stator type is SLOT_AC. Inc. Select the source type for the machine from the drop-down list in the Source Type Value field.5 .© SAS IP. Note When you place the cursor over an entry field. and a new Maxwell 3D design. double-click the Machine entry in the project tree on the desktop. (AXIAL_AC. a. Outer Rotor. set the Air Gap Length. if the selected Structure is Axial-Flux Rotor. All rights reserved. stator. for a specific example of a problem using a Generic Rotating Machine. then stator can be either AXIAL_AC or AXIAL_PM. Select the stator type for the machine from the drop-down list in the Stator Type Value field. To open the Properties dialog box. 4. General Data for Generic Rotating Machines To access the general data. Select the structure for the machine from the drop-down list in the Structure Value field. or SLOT_AC) • • If Structure type is Axial-Flux Rotor. AXIAL_PM. . a brief description of that field appears in the status bar at the bottom of the RMxprt window. choose if either the rotor. (AC or DC) Default is AC. The default value is Inner Rotor. structure. Select the rotor type for the machine from the drop-down list in the Rotor Type Value field. 6.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Once analyzed. The default value is None.) 2. RMxprt Machine Types 9-275 Release 14. (Inner Rotor.Maxwell 3D Online Help 20. 3. if the selected Structure is Axial-Flux Rotor. Click OK to close the Properties dialog box. Inc. and optional position control. 6.© SAS IP. Present only if Structure type is Axial-Flux. Enter the number of poles in the Number of Poles field. • Set the air gap length. Select a circuit type for the stator (or rotor): a. SLOT_AC. Enter the number of slots in the Number of Slots field. then rotor type is SLOT_AC. there are no additional settings. • Double-Sided If Structure type is Inner Rotor. Depending on the rotor or stator type being used. (You can also enter values in the corresponding Properties window of the desktop without opening a separate dialog box. . Present only if Structure type is Axial-Flux. there are no additional settings. then rotor type can be either AXIAL_AC or AXIAL_PM. do one of the following: a. then rotor type can be either SLOT_AC or PM_INTERIOR. Click the button for Circuit Type. The Circuit Type dialog box appears. continue with step 4. AXIAL_PM. Click OK to close the Circuit Type dialog box and return to the Properties dialog box. c. All rights reserved. b. Inc. Click OK to close the dialog. If Structure type is Axial-Flux Rotor. Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. c. .5 . Stator. If the rotor or stator type is AXIAL_PM. Click a button to specify the desired circuit type. If the rotor or stator type is AXIAL_AC or SLOT_AC. b. • • Air Gap Length Choose Rotor.Maxwell 3D Online Help Rotor Type • • • The rotor core type. If the rotor type is PM_INTERIOR. Click the Slot Type button. 9-276 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. 3. Select a Slot Type: a. or PM_INTERIOR) If Structure type is Outer Rotor. slots. double-click the Machine>Stator (or Machine>Rotor) entry in the project tree on the desktop.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Default is 0. Defining the Stator and Rotor Data for a Generic Rotating Machine Use the Stator Properties and Rotor Properties dialog boxes to define the stator and rotor poles. To define the general stator and rotor data: 1. (AXIAL_AC. The Select Slot Type dialog box appears. or None. windings. Click OK to close the dialog.) 2. Default is None. To open the Stator or Rotor Properties dialog box. 4. 5. Invisible for AXIAL_PM and PM_INTERIOR core types. Defining Stator and Rotor Core Data for a Generic Rotating Machine 1. .Maxwell 3D Online Help b. Stator and Rotor Data for Generic Rotating Machines To access the general stator or rotor data. Position Control Determines if the drive circuit is controlled by postion signals from a position sensor.© SAS IP. For AXIAL_PM core type: the number of permanent magnet poles. Optionally. 3. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.5 . All rights reserved. Note 7. For PM_INTERIOR rotor core type: the number of permanent magnet poles. double-click the Machine>Rotor>Core or Machine>Stator>Core entry in the project tree on the desktop. Select a slot type (available types may include 1 through 6). Slot Type The slot type of the iron core. Invisible for AXIAL_PM and PM_INTERIOR core types. Circuit Type The drive circuit type. double-click the Machine>Stator or Machine>Rotor entry in the project tree. Default is Y3. check User Defined Slot if you wish to define the slot dimensions using the Slot Editor. When you place the mouse cursor over the slot type. If the drive circuit is to be controlled by position signals from a position sensor. displaying the slot dimension variables. Default is Type 1. a schematic of the selected type appears. Number of Slots The number of slots of the iron core. Default is 2. RMxprt Machine Types 9-277 Release 14. To open the stator or rotor core Properties dialog box. . Inc. Invisible for AXIAL_PM and PM_INTERIOR core types. Default is 4. Inc. Invisible for AXIAL_PM and PM_INTERIOR core types. Click OK to close the Select Slot Type dialog box and return to the Properties dialog box.) 2. Default is 18. 8. Enter the inner diameter of the core in the Inner Diameter field. Default is unchecked (not controlled by signals from a position sensor. Click OK to close the Properties dialog box. The Stator (or Rotor) Properties window contains the following fields: Number of Poles The number of poles on which the winding is wound. c. (You can also enter values in the corresponding Properties windor of the desktop without opening a separate dialog box.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. select the Position Control check box. Enter the outer diameter of the core in the Outer Diameter field. Default is 2. 9-278 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. or define a new steel type. b. Click the button for Steel Type. This value relates to the effective magnetic length of the core. Enter the skew width (measured in degrees) in the Skew Width field.© SAS IP. Inc. If the Machine Structure type is either Inner Rotor or Outer Rotor and the Stator or Rotor Type is SLOT_AC: a. d. The default type is 3. All rights reserved. If the Machine Rotor Type is PM_INTERIOR. Enter the stacking factor for the core in the Stacking Factor field. c. Select the desired pole type (1 through 6). Click the button for Pole Type. It is defined as the total length minus the total insulation from the laminations. There are no additional settings for the PM_INTERIOR rotor type. Continue with step 11. Click OK to close the Select Pole Type window. Note The Skew Width field is not available if the Machine Rotor Type is PM_INTERIOR. 10. The Main tab also shows the pole drawing. Select a Steel Type for the core: a. . You can hover over the numbered buttons to view the pole type configuration in the window. The above settings are not available if the Machine Rotor Type is PM_INTERIOR. The Select Pole Type window appears. check the Magnetic Press Board checkbox. c. the selected pole type diagram displays on the machine editor window Diagram tab. b. When Machine>Rotor>Core>Pole is selected in the Project Manager tree. Select a steel type from the list. and ranges from 0 to 1. select a Pole Type for the core: a.5 . 8. Enter the number of lamination sectors in the Lamination Sectors field. Click OK to close the Select Definition dialog box and return to the Properties dialog box. do one of the following: a. b. divided by the total length. . continue with step 8. 5. continue with step 9. Note If the press board is made of magnetic material. The Select Definition dialog box appears. c. AXIAL_AC. Inc.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. A value of 1 indicates that the rotor is not laminated. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Enter the thickness of the press boards in the Press Board Thickness field. b. which is dynamically updated as the pole properties are defined. Enter the length of the core in the Length field. 6. 7. If the Machine Rotor Type is PM_INTERIOR.Maxwell 3D Online Help 4. Depending on the rotor or stator type being used. Note 9. or AXIAL_PM. If the Machine Rotor or Stator Type is SLOT_AC. . Default type is 3. double-click the Machine>Rotor>Core or Machine>stator>Core entry in the project tree. Inc. Skew Width The skew width measured in degrees. Click the button to open the Select Definition window. PM_INTERIOR type rotors. To open the stator or rotor core slot data Properties dialog box. Invisible for PM_INTERIOR rotor type.Maxwell 3D Online Help 11. Press Board Thickness The thickness of the pole press boards.© SAS IP. The inner diameter of the core. Click OK to close the Properties dialog box. Inc. All rights reserved. . Invisible for all other stator and rotor core types. Invisible for AXIAL_PM and AXIAL_AC rotor and stator types. The core data Properties dialog box contains the following fields: The outer diameter of the core. Magnetic Press Board Defines if the press board is made of magnetic material. (You can also enter values in the Properties window of the desktop without opening RMxprt Machine Types 9-279 Release 14. Invisible for PM_INTERIOR rotor type. Stator and Rotor Core Data for Generic Rotating Machines To access the stator or rotor core data. double-click theMachine>Stator>Core>Slot or Machine>Rotor>Core>Slot entry in the project tree on the desktop. To define the physical dimensions of the stator and rotor core slots: 1. The length of the core. Invisible for AXIAL_PM and AXIAL_AC rotor and stator types. The effective magnetic length of the core.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Outer Diameter Inner Diameter Length Stacking Factor Steel Type Defining the Stator and Rotor Core Slots for a Generic Rotating Machine Note This section is not applicable to: • • AXIAL_PM type stators or rotors. Invisible for AXIAL_AC rotor and stator types. Pole Type The pole type for PM_INTERIOR rotor type only. Invisible for AXIAL_PM and AXIAL_AC rotor and stator types.5 . The steel type of the core. Lamination Sectors The number of lamination sectors. Invisible for PM_INTERIOR rotor type. Invisible for PM_INTERIOR rotor type. this slot dimension is determined automatically. 3. Selecting Parallel Tooth also enables the Tooth Width field. or 6. The core slot data Properties dialog box contains the following fields: Select or clear this to enable or disable auto-design of slots Hs2. a separate dialog box. the Bs1 and Bs2 fields are removed. depending on the Slot Type selected and depending on whether or not Auto Design or Parallel Tooth is selected. Inc. on which Bs1 and Bs2 are designed. When Auto Design is selected. Parallel Tooth Select this to design Bs1 and Bs2 based on the tooth width. 4. and Bs2. Bs0 and Rs are present. to automatically design Bs1 and Bs2 based on Tooth Width. and the Tooth Width field is added.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 2. When Auto Design is selected. Always available. this slot dimension is determined based on the value entered in the Tooth Width field. only Hs0 . this slot dimension is determined based on the value entered in the Tooth Width field. 3. Core Slot Data for Generic Rotating Machines To access the core slot data. 3. Optionally. When Parallel Tooth is selected. When Parallel Tooth is selected. . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Selecting Auto Design also disables the Parallel Tooth option. 5. Tooth Width The tooth width for the parallel tooth. Inc. Available only when Auto Design is cleared. Bs1. 4.) Optionally.5 . to automatically design the dimensions of slots Hs2. When this check box is selected. Bs1. Available only when Auto Design is cleared. Available only when Auto Design is cleared. When Auto Design is selected. Hs1. this slot dimension is determined automatically. this slot dimension is determined automatically. All rights reserved. and Bs2. double-click either the Machine>Rotor>Core>Slot or the Machine>Rotor>Core>Slot entry in the project tree. Auto Design 9-280 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14.© SAS IP. Available only when the slot type is 1. select the Parallel Tooth check box. Hs2 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine>Stator (or Rotor)>Core>Slot is selected). or 5.: Hs0 Hs1 Hs2 Bs0 Bs1 Bs2 Rs 5. Enter the available slot dimensions. Hs1 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine>Stator (or Rotor)>Core>Slot is selected). The following dimensions may be listed. Click OK to close the Properties window. When this check box is selected.Maxwell 3D Online Help 2. select the Auto Design check box. Available only when the slot type is 3 or 4. 4. . Hs0 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine>Stator (or Rotor)>Core>Slot is selected). Available only when the slot type is 2. To define core poles for PM_INTERIOR type rotors. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. A slot dimension. Rs is added when the slot type is 3 or 4. To define the properties of AXIAL_PM type stator and rotor core poles: 1. To open the stator or rotor core pole data Properties dialog box. Inc. . (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine>Stator (or Rotor)>Core>Slot is selected). A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine>Stator (or Rotor)>Core>Slot is selected). double-click theMachine>Stator>Core>Pole or Machine>Rotor>Core>Pole entry in the project tree on the desktop. . (You can also enter values in the Properties window of the desktop without opening RMxprt Machine Types 9-281 Release 14.5 .© SAS IP.Maxwell 3D Online Help Bs0 Bs1 Bs2 Rs Rs A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine>Stator (or Rotor)>Core>Slot is selected). A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine>Stator (or Rotor)>Core>Slot is selected). Inc. A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine>Stator (or Rotor)>Core>Slot is selected).Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Defining AXIAL_PM Type Stator and Rotor Core Poles for a Generic Rotating Machine Note This section is applicable only to core poles for AXIAL_PM type stators or rotors. refer to Defining PM_INTERIOR Type Rotor Core Poles for a Generic Rotating Machine. All rights reserved. Click the button to open the Select Definition window and select the magnet material type from the list. To define the properties of PM_INTERIOR type rotor core poles: – Either open the rotor core pole data Properties dialog box by double-clicking the Machine>Rotor>Core>Pole entry in the project tree on the desktop.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Select the Magnet Type. .) 9-282 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. Inc. refer to Defining AXIAL_PM Type Stator and Rotor Core Poles for a Generic Rotating Machine. AXIAL_PM Core Pole Data for Generic Rotating Machines To access the core pole data for AXIAL_PM type stators and rotors. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.Maxwell 3D Online Help 2.© SAS IP. 4. 3. . Inc. To define core poles for AXIAL_PM type stators and rotors. – or simply select the Pole entry to enter values directly in the Properties window of the desktop without opening a separate dialog box. Magnet Length The Radial length of the magnet. Magnet Thickness Axial thickness of the magnet. Defining PM_INTERIOR Type Rotor Core Poles for a Generic Rotating Machine Note 1.5 . 5. double-click either the Machine>Stator>Core>Pole or the Machine>Rotor>Core>Pole entry in the project tree. per side.) Set the pole Embrace value. a separate dialog box. This section is applicable only to core poles for PM_INTERIOR type rotors. The core pole data Properties dialog box contains the following fields: Embrace Pole embrace value. Magnet Type Magnet material type. Click OK to close the Properties window. All rights reserved. Set the Magnet Thickness and Magnet Length. select the Machine>Rotor>Core entry in the project tree. Click OK to close the Properties window. Select the desired pole type (1 through 6). Rib. The core pole data Properties dialog box contains the following fields: D1 O1 O2 B1 Rib HRib Limited diameter for magnet ducts. Set the Magnet Thickness value. 4. PM_INTERIOR Rotor Core Pole Data for Generic Rotating Machines To access the core pole data for PM_INTERIOR type rotors. Click OK to close the window. B1.Maxwell 3D Online Help Note • • • • The currently selected pole type diagram displays on the machine editor window Diagram tab. Magnet duct dimension. Note • • Dimension O1 is invisible for pole types 1 and 2. then click the Pole Type button in its Properties window to open the Select Pole Type window. Set the O1. which is dynamically updated as the pole properties are defined. . 8. 9. Magnet duct dimension. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. The Main tab also shows the pole drawing.2. The default type is 3. Click OK to close the Select Pole Type window Set the D1 diameter for magnet ducts. Set the Magnet Width value (total width of all magnets per pole). and HRib magnet duct dimensions. 3. • 2. RMxprt Machine Types 9-283 Release 14. double-click the Machine>Rotor>Core>Pole entry in the project tree. Select the Magnet Type by clicking the button to open the Select Definition window Materials tab and selecting the desired magnet material type. Invisible when pole type is 1 or 2. 5. Invisible when pole type is 1. Inc. O2. Use the Material Filter tab settings to filter for Magnet materials. Set the number of duct Layers. 7. Inc. Set the Layer Pitch value (pitch value between two layers). 6. Dimension HRib is invisible for pole types 1. Magnet duct dimension. If you wish to change the pole type. All rights reserved.© SAS IP.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. or 6. Magnet duct dimension. Default value is 1.5 . Magnet duct dimension. You can hover over the numbered buttons to view the pole type configuration in the window. and 6. 2. . Undo and Redo of property changes is supported. Magnet Thickness Magnet thickness.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. PM_INTERIOR Rotor Core Pole Types The PM_INTERIOR rotor core type supports six pole types. Use the Material Filter tab settings to filter for Magnet materials. All rights reserved. or duct thickness. You can choose the pole type by selecting the Machine>Rotor>Core entry in the project tree. Magnet Width Total width of all magnets per pole. 9-284 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. Layer Pitch Pitch between two duct layers. Click the button to open the Select Definition window and select the magnet material type from the list. Inc.5 . Inc. . Magnet Type Magnet material type. .© SAS IP. then clicking the Pole Type button in its Properties window to open the Select Pole Type window. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.Maxwell 3D Online Help Layers Number of duct layers. Maxwell 3D Online Help The six available pole types are shown below. Refer to Defining PM_INTERIOR Type Rotor Core Poles for a Generic Rotating Machine for details on defining the various pole properties. Pole Type 1 Pole Type 3 Pole Type 2 Pole Type 4 RMxprt Machine Types 9-285 Release 14.5 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Maxwell 3D Online Help Pole Type 5 Pole Type 6 Defining the Stator and Rotor Windings for a Generic Rotating Machine Note This section is not applicable to: • • AXIAL_PM type stators or rotors. PM_INTERIOR type rotors. To define the wires, conductors, insulation, and windings of a stator or rotor: 1. To open the rotor or stator slot winding Properties dialog box, double-click the Machine>Stator>Winding or Machine>Rotor>Winding entry in the project tree on the desktop. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate dialog box.) 2. Click the Winding tab. 3. Choose the desired number of layers in the winding from the drop-down list in the Winding Layers field. 4. Select a Winding Type: a. Click the button for Winding Type. The Winding Type window appears. b. Select from one of the following three types of winding: • • • Whole Coiled Half Coiled Editor 9-286 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14.5 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Maxwell 3D Online Help When you place the mouse cursor over a winding button, an outline of the selected winding appears. The following table describes the six types of windings that are possible (three for one-layer and three for two-layer): Type Description A user-defined one-layer winding arrangement. You need to set up the Winding Editor winding arrangement for each slot in the Winding Editor. (one-layer) Whole-Coiled A one-layer whole-coiled winding: (one-layer) Slot 123 Half-Coiled A one-layer concentric half-coiled winding: (one-layer) Slot 123 RMxprt Machine Types 9-287 Release 14.5 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Maxwell 3D Online Help Winding Editor (two-layer) Whole-Coiled A user-defined two-layer winding arrangement. When you select for winding layers you can specify a different winding arrangement for each slot in the Winding Editor. A two-layer whole-coiled winding: (two-layer) Slot 123 Half-Coiled The phase belt for this winding configuration is equal to 360/2m, where m is the phase number. A two-layer half-coiled winding: (two-layer) Slot 1 2 3 There is only one coil per phase per pair of poles. Note c. For a two-layer winding, if you check Constant Pitch in the Winding Editor, only the top layer needs to be defined; the bottom layer is determined according to the coil pitch. Once you have clicked a button to select a winding, click OK to close the Winding Type 9-288 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14.5 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Maxwell 3D Online Help 5. 6. 7. dialog box and return to the Properties window. Enter the number of parallel branches in one phase of the winding in the Parallel Branches field. Enter the total number of conductors in each slot in the Conductors per Slot field. This value is the number of turns per coil multiplied by the number of layers. Enter 0 to have RMxprt auto-design this value. Enter the coil pitch, measured in number of slots, in the Coil Pitch field. The coil pitch is the number of slots separating one winding. For example, if a coil starts in slot 1 and ends in slot 6, it has a coil pitch of 5. This field is not displayed when the number of Winding Layers is 1. 8. 9. Enter the number of wires per conductor in the Number of Strands field. Enter 0 to have RMxprt auto-design this value. Enter the thickness of the double-sided wire wrap in the Wire Wrap field. Enter 0 to automatically obtain this value from the wire library. Insulation Conductor y Wire Wrap = 2*y 10. Select the Wire Size: a. Click the button for Wire Size. The Wire Size dialog box appears. b. Select a value from the Wire Diameter pull-down list. c. Select a wire gauge from the Gauge pull-down menu. You can select from the following options: <number> You can select a specific gauge number. When you select a gauge number, the Wire Diameter field is automatically updated. RMxprt Machine Types 9-289 Release 14.5 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Maxwell 3D Online Help USER AUTO MIXED This option allows you to manually enter the Wire Diameter. This is useful when you want to enter a diameter that does not correspond to a particular wire gauge. This option sets the Wire Diameter to zero, and RMxprt automatically calculates the optimal value. The diameter information is then written to the output file when you analyze the design. This option allows you to define a conductor that is made of different size wires. For example, a single conductor may consist of 5 wires, 3 wires with a diameter of 0.21mm and 2 with a diameter of 0.13mm. The gauge number is based on AWG settings. You can create your own wire table using Machine>Wire, and then you can select this wire table using the Tools>Options>Machine Options command. d. When you are done setting the wire size, click OK to close the Wire Size dialog box and return to the Properties dialog box. 11. Click the End/Insulation tab. 12. Select or clear the Input Half-turn Length check box. 13. Do one of the following: • • If you selected Input Half-turn Length, then enter the half-turn length of the armature winding in the Half Turn Length field. If you cleared Input Half-turn Length, then enter the end length adjustment of the stator/ rotor coils in the End Extension field. The end extension is the distance one end of the conductor extends vertically beyond the end of the stator or rotor. End Extension End of Stator/Rotor Stator/Rotor Coil 14. Enter the inner radius of the base corner in the Base Inner Radius field. 15. Enter the inner diameter of the coil tip in the Tip Inner Diameter field. 16. Enter the distance between two adjacent coils in the End Clearance field. 9-290 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14.5 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Maxwell 3D Online Help 17. Enter the thickness of the single-side coil wrap insulation in the Coil Wrap field. This field is applicable and displayed only for slot types 5 and 6. 18. Enter the thickness of the slot liner insulation in the Slot Liner field. 19. Enter the thickness of the wedge insulation in the Wedge Thickness field. 20. Enter the thickness of the insulation layer in the Layer Insulation field. This field is applicable and displayed only when the Winding Layers value is 2. 21. Enter the bottom insulation thickness in the Bottom Insulation field. This field is applicable and displayed only for slot types 5 and 6. 22. Enter the limited slot fill factor for the wire design in the Limited Fill Factor field. This field is applicable and displayed only for slot types 1, 2, 3, and 4. 23. Enter the span lenght correction factor to scale the end span length in the Correction Factor field. 24. Enter the top spare slot space for a dual-winding machine in the Top Spare Space field. 25. Enter the bottom spare slot space for a dual-winding machine in the Bottom Spare Space field. 26. Click OK to close the Properties dialog box. Stator and Rotor Winding Data for Generic Rotating Machines Note This section is not applicable to: • • AXIAL_PM type stators or rotors. PM_INTERIOR type rotors. To access the core slot data, double-click either the Machine>Rotor>Core>Slot or the Machine>Rotor>Core>Slot entry in the project tree. The winding data Properties dialog box contains the following fields: Winding tab Winding Layers The number of winding layers. (The bottom layer is for another side slot if the core is double-sided.) Select 1 or 2 in the pull-down list. Default value is 2. Winding Layers is always 2 if the core is doublesided. Winding Type The type of stator winding. Click the button to open the Winding Type window and choose from WholeCoiled, Half-Coiled, and Editor. Default value is Whole-Coiled. Parallel Branches The number of parallel branches in the winding. Default value is 1. RMxprt Machine Types 9-291 Release 14.5 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Maxwell 3D Online Help Conductors per Slot The number of conductors per slot (0 for auto-design). Coil Pitch The coil pitch measured in number of slots. This field is displayed only when the number of Winding Layers is 2. Coil Pitch is always 0 if the core is double-sided. Number of Strands The number of wires per conductor (0 for autodesign). Default value is 1. Wire Wrap The thickness of the double-sided wire wrap (0 to automatically obtain this value from the wire library). Wire Size The diameter of the wire (0 for auto-design). Click the button to open the Wire Size dialog box where you can specify units, wire type, diameter, and gauge. End/Insulation Input Half-turn Length Select or clear this check box to specify whether or not you want to enter the half-turn length. When this tab check box is selected, the Half Turn Length field appears the next time you open the Properties window. When this check box is selected, the End Extension field appears instead. Default value is unchecked. Half Turn Length The average half-turn length of the armature winding. Visible only when Input Half Turn Length is checked. End Extension The end length adjustment of the coils, which is the distance one end of the conductor extends vertically beyond the end of the stator or rotor. Invisible when Input Half Turn Length is checked. Correction Factor End span length correction factor to scale the end span length. Must be > 0. Defaul value is 1.0. Invisible when Input Half Turn Length is checked Base Inner Radius The inner radius of the base corner. Tip Inner Diameter The inner diameter of the coil tip. Invisible if the core is double-sided. End Clearance The end clearance between two adjacent coils. Coil Wrap The thickness of the single-side coil wrap. This field is displayed only when the Slot Type is 5 or 6. Slot Liner The thickness of the slot liner insulation. 9-292 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14.5 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Maxwell 3D Online Help Wedge Thickness The thickness of the wedge insulation. Layer Insulation The thickness of the insulation layer. Invisible when number of winding layers is 1 or the core is double-sided. Bottom Insulation Thickness of the bottom insulation. This field is displayed only when the Slot Type is 5 or 6. Limited Fill Factor The limited slot fill factor for the wire design. This field is displayed only for Slot Types 1, 2, 3, or 4. Top Spare Space The top spare slot space for a dual-winding machine. The value must be greater-than or equal-to 0 and lessthan 1. Bottom Spare Space The bottom spare slot space for a dual-winding machine. The value must be greater-than or equal-to 0. Also, the sum of the Top Spare Space and Bottom Spare Space values must less-than 1. Conductor Type Conductor material type of the Stator/Rotor Winding. Winding Editor for a Generic Rotating Machine For a generic rotating machine, you may want to specify a different number of conductors for each stator or rotor slot. The Winding Editor enables you to specify the number of turns for each coil. To enable the Winding Editor, you must have set the Winding Property for the Winding Type to Editor. To specify the number of turns for each coil: RMxprt Machine Types 9-293 Release 14.5 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Maxwell 3D Online Help 1. Click Machine>Winding>Edit Layout. The Winding Editor dialog box appears. 2. In the table in the upper left, set which Phase you want for each coil and which slot is the “In” and “Out” slot for the current in each coil. If you are working on a quarter or half model, you may want to specify a multiplier by selecting a value from the Periodic Multiplier drop-down menu. Select or deselect the Constant Turns or Constant Pitch check boxes, depending on whether you want to be able to change these setting in the table above. When these options are selected, you cannot change the turns or pitch. 3. 4. 5. When you are satisfied with the coil settings, click OK to close the Winding Editor dialog box. Defining Different Size Wires for a Generic Rotating Machine Use the Gauge option if you have a conductor that is made up different size wires. To define different size wires: 1. In the Wire Size window, select MIXED from the Gauge pull-down menu. 2. Select either Round or Rectangular as the Wire Type. 3. Enter the appropriate wire data in the table: • • For a round wire: • • • Note Enter the Diameter in the table. Enter a Number in the table to specify how many of the conductor’s wires have this diameter. For a rectangular wire: • • • • • 4. 5. Click Add to add the new wire datat. Click Add to add the new wire data. Enter the Width of the wire in the table. The width should be greater thatn the thickness. Enter the Thickness of the wire in the table. Enter the Fillet value in the table. Enter a Number in the table to specify how many of the conductor’s wires have this data. Repeat step 3 for each size wire you want to add. When you are finished defining the wires, click OK to close the Wire Size window. For example, if one conductor is made up of 5 wires, and 3 of those wires have a diameter of 0.21mm, and the other 2 have a diameter of 0.13mm, then the mixed wire size table will have two lines. The first line will list Diameter = 0.21 and Number = 3. The second line will list Diameter = 0.13 and Number = 2. An equivalent wire diameter is displayed as Wire Size value in the Winding tab in the Properties window. 9-294 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14.5 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Maxwell 3D Online Help Defining the Stator and Rotor Circuits for a Generic Rotating Machine You can define stator and rotor Circuit parameters for generic rotating machines whose Source Type is DC. Note This procedure is not applicable to: • • • AXIAL_PM type stators or rotors. AXIAL_AC type rotors. PM_INTERIOR type rotors. To define the circuit parameters of a stator or rotor: 1. To define the circuit parameters click either the stator or rotor Circuit icon in the project tree. You can then edit the brush parameters directly in the Properties window. (You can also open the rotor or stator circuit Properties dialog box by double-clicking the Machine>Stator>Circuit or Machine>Rotor>Circuit entry in the project tree on the desktop.) 2. Select the Control Type from the drop down menu. Choices are: DC, CCC, PWM, and HCC. 3. 5. If the stator or rotor Position Control has been enabled, set the Lead Angle of Trigger value. If the Control Type chosen is either DC or CCC, set the Trigger Pulse Width. The default value is 120. Set the Transistor Drop (voltage drop of one transistor). 6. Set the Diode Drop. 7. If the Control Type is CCC, set the Maximum Current and Minimun Current values. 8. If the Control Type is PWM, set the Modulation Index and Carrier Frequency Times. 9. If the Control Type is HCC, set the Reference Amplitutde and Hysteresis Band. 4. Stator and Rotor Circuit Data for Generic Rotating Machines To access the stator or rotor circuit data, double-click either the Machine>Stator>Circuit or the Machine>Rotor>Circuit entry in the project tree. The circuit data Properties dialog box contains the following fields: Control Type: DC, CCC (chopping current control ), PWM, HCC (hysteresis current control). Default is DC. Lead Angle of Trigger Lead angle of trigger in electrical degrees. Visible only when Position Control is enabled. Trigger Pulse Width Trigger pulse width in electrical degrees. Visible only when Control Type is DC or CCC. Default value is 120. Transistor Drop Voltage drop of one transistor. Diode Drop Voltage drop of one diode, or the total voltage for star-type circuits in the discharge loop. Control Type RMxprt Machine Types 9-295 Release 14.5 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Maxwell 3D Online Help Maximum current for chopping current control. Visible only when Control Type is CCC. Minimum Current Minimum current for chopping current control. Visible only when Control Type is CCC. Modulation Index Modulation index (the ratio of the sine-wave amplitude to the triangular amplitude). Visible only when Control Type is PWM. Carrier Frequency Carrier frequency times (the ratio of the triangular frequency to the sinewave frequency). Times Visible only when Control Type is PWM. Reference Amplitude The amplitude of the sine-wave reference current. Visible only when Control Type is HCC. Hysteresis Band The difference between the upper and lower hysteresis limits. Visible only when Control Type is HCC. Maximum Current Defining the Axial AC Rotor Brush for a Generic Rotating Machine Optionally, you can insert or remove brush data for generic rotating machines that have an Axial AC Rotor Structure. If you have inserted a brush, the icon appears under the core slot in the project tree. To insert a brush: 1. Right-click on the rotor core icon to display the pop-up menu. 2. Click Insert Brush. 3. To edit the brush data, double-click the brush icon to open the brush properties dialog. The brush data Properties dialog box contains the following fields: Diameter Brush Width Brush Lenght Brush Drop Contact Resistance Brush Press Frictional Coefficient Brush surface diameter. Brush width. Brush lenght. Voltage drop of a brush. Contact resistance of a brush. Brush pressure per unit area. Frictional coefficient of a brush. To remove an existing brush: 1. 2. Right click on the rotor icon to display the pop-up menu. Click Remove Brush. 9-296 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14.5 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Maxwell 3D Online Help Vent Data for Generic Rotating Machines Optionally, you can insert or remove Vent data for generic rotating machines that have either an Inner Rotor or Outer Rotor Structure. If you have inserted a Vent, the icon appears under the core slot in the project tree. To insert a vent: 1. Right-click on the stator or rotor core icon to display the pop-up menu. 2. Click Insert Vent. To remove an existing vent: 1. 2. Right click on the stator or rotor icon to display the pop-up menu. Click Remove Vent. The vent data Properties dialog box contains the following fields. Vent Ducts Number of radial vent ducts. Default is 0. Duct Width Width of radial vent ducts. Magnetic Spacer Width Width of magnetic spacer which hold vent ducts. 0 for non-magnetic spacer. Duct Pitch Vent ducts Holes per Row Number of axial vent holes per row Inner Hole Diameter Diameter of vent holes in inner row. Outer Hole Diameter Diameter of vent holes in outer row. Inner Hole Location Center-to-center diameter of inner row hole vents. Outer Hole Location Center-to-center diameter of outer row hole vents. Defining the Shaft Data for a Generic Rotating Machine To define the shaft: 1. To open the shaft data Properties dialog box, double-click the Machine>Shaft entry in the project tree on the desktop. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window.) 2. Select or clear the Magnetic Shaft check box to specify whether or not the shaft is to be made of magnetic material. 3. Enter the frictional loss in the Frictional Loss field. 4. Enter the windage loss (or power for wind power generators) measured at the Reference Speed in the Windage Loss or Power field. 5. Enter the reference speed at which frictional and windage losses are measured in the Reference Speed field. 6. Click OK to close the Properties window. RMxprt Machine Types 9-297 Release 14.5 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Maxwell 3D Online Help Shaft Data for General DC Machines To access the shaft data, double-click the Machine>Shaft entry in the project tree. The Shaft Data Properties window contains the following fields: Select or clear this check box to indicate whether or not the shaft is made of magnetic material. When selected, the shaft is magnetic. Default is unchecked for PM_INTERIOR rotor type. Frictional Loss The frictional loss measured at the Reference Speed. Windage Loss or The Windage Loss (or Power for wind power generators) measured at the Reference Speed. Power Reference Speed The speed at which the friction and windage losses are measured. Default is 3600 rpm for PM_INTERIOR rotor type. Magnetic Shaft Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Generic Rotating Machine To define solution parameters for a generic rotating machine: 1. Right-click Analysis in the project tree, and click Add Solution Setup. The Solution Setup dialog box appears. 2. Click the General tab. a. b. c. d. If you wish to change the automatically assigned setup name, enter a name for the setup in the Setup Name field. The solution setup is enabled by default. Un-check the Enabled box to disable the setup, if desired. Select an operation type from the Operation Type pull-down list. The Operation Type is set to Motor by default. Select the Load Type used in the machine. • If the Operation Type is Motor, select one of the following Load Type options: Const Speed Const Power Const Torque Linear Torque Fan Load • The speed remains constant in the motor. The output power remains constant in the motor. The torque remains constant regardless of the speed. In this case, Tload = Trated, given by the output power divided by the given rated speed. The torque increases linearly with speed. In this case, Tload = Trated * (n/ nrated) where Trated is given by the output power divided by the given rated speed. The load varies nonlinearly with speed. In this case, Tload = Trated * (n/ nrated)2 where Trated is given by the output power divided by the given rated speed. If the Operation Type is either Generator or Wind Generator, select one of the fol- 9-298 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14.5 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. d. The solution setup Properties contains the following fields: RMxprt Machine Types 9-299 Release 14. Click the Revert to Standard Defaults button to clear existing user-defined defaults and revert to the standard settings. . e. g. The default value is 0. Optionally. Related Topics: Solution Data for Generic Rotating Machines Solution Data for Generic Rotating Machines To access the solution data.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. Click the Generic Rotating Machine tab. enable the Capacitive Power Factor check box. if you wish to determine load impedance when the phase current leads the phase voltage. For AC source type machines.5 . Solution data is also accessible in the desktop Properties window for the selected setup. Enter the applied or output rated voltage in the Rated Voltage field. • 5. Click OK to close the Solution Setup window. Inc. Inc. For AC source type machines. c. Enter the output power in the Rated Output Power field. you can click the Use Defaults button to restore the tab settings to default values.8 b. 4. This tab contains two buttons: • Click the Save Defaults button to save the currently-defined settings as defaults for future setups. Enter the temperature at which the system functions in the Operating Temperature field.© SAS IP.Maxwell 3D Online Help lowing Load Type options: Infinite Bus Independent Generator 3. The speed remains constant in the motor. a. . enter the rated power factor in the Rated Power Factor field. Enter the source frequency in the Frequency field and select the appropriate unit of measure. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. All rights reserved. double-click the solution setup located under Analysis in the project tree to open the solution Properties dialog box. The default value is 60 Hz. Enter the given rated speed in the Rated Speed field. click the Defaults tab. The output power remains constant in the motor. f. Optionally. h. Default is Const Power. Enter a value for the frequency. and select the unit. Type a value for the operating temperature. GRM tab: Rated Power Factor Capacitive Power Factor Frequency Enter the rated power factor for AC Source Type. Used together with the Rated Power Factor when the phase current leads the phase voltage. Check box that enables/disables use of a capacitive power factor. Default is Motor. Inc. to determine load impedance. Default is checked (enabled) Set the type of operation for the machine analysis. Enter the rated mechanical or electrical output (apparent) power. Generator. .Maxwell 3D Online Help General tab: Name Enabled Operation Type Load Type Rated Output Power Rated Voltage Rated Speed Operating Temperature The name of the setup. and select the unit. Related Topics: Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Generic Rotating Machine 9-300 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. . Pull-down list selections are: Motor. Wind Generato.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. and select the unit. Const Power. For Generator and Wind Generator Operation Type the selections are: Infinite Bus and Independent Generator. Not editable. Enter a value for the rated voltage and select the unit. Inc. Fan Load. Default value is 0. Default is unchecked. Linear Torque. Const Torque. All rights reserved. Type a value for the rated speed.8. This field is displayed only for AC Source Type. Select the mechanical or electrical load type from the pull-down list. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.© SAS IP.5 . Check box that enables/disables the solution setup. For Motor Operation Type the selections are: Const Speed. Default is Infinite Bus. and select the unit. Maxwell 3D Online Help Stator Vent Data Select a Machine Type to get more information of Stator Vents: • • • Three-Phase Induction Motors Three-Phase Synchronous Machines Three-Phase Non-Salient Synchronous Machines RMxprt Machine Types 9-301 Release 14. .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.5 . Inc. . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. Inc.© SAS IP. All rights reserved. Inc.© SAS IP. . . All rights reserved.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.Maxwell 3D Online Help Rotor Vent Data Select a Machine Type to get more information of Rotor Vents: • • Three-Phase Induction Motors Three-Phase Non-Salient Synchronous Machines 9-302 RMxprt Machine Types Release 14. Inc.5 . 9-140. Inc. 9-127. 9-189. 9-139. 9-124. 9-126.Index A B aborting analyses 6-2 add array variables 2-39 adjustable-speed permanentmagnet synchronous motors general data 9-54 general procedure 9-53 stator data 9-56. 9129.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 9148 general data 9-123. 9-142. 9-195. 9203 winding type 9-61 adjust-speed synchronous machine general data 9-55 adjust-speed synchronous machines transistor drop 9-55 analyses re-solving 6-3 starting 6-1 stopping 6-2 auto-save file 1-5 BH-curve for permanent magnets 418 brush data DC motors 9-88. 9-172. 9Index-1 Release 14. 9124. 9-205 pole embrace 9-70. . Inc. 9-149 general procedure 9-123 rotor pole data 9-70.5 . and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 9140 stator data 9-126. All rights reserved. 9220 brushless permanent-magnet DC motors available circuits 9-54. 9129. 9-125. 9-180. . 9-151 conductors 9-82. 9-78. 9181. 9-140.© SAS IP. 9-148 circuit type 9-54. 9-195. 9220 D data tables creating 7-10 dataset expressions using 2-45 dependent variables definition 2-38 Design Settings in RMxprt 2-5 design variables See local variables 2-37 designs in project tree 1-15 setting up 8-1 desktop menu bar 1-10 overview 1-8 status bar 1-13 toolbars 1-12 display types of reports 7-8 E exciter efficiency 9-120 exporting winding data 8-42 expressions dataset 2-45 defining 2-41 including in functions 2-41 intrinsic functions in 2-42 piecewise linear functions in 2-44 valid operators 2-42 F file formats .5 . Inc. . 9-129. 9-195.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 9216. 9-168. 9-195. 9-85.q3dx 1-7 . 9-235 stator windings 9-82. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 9-150 trigger angle 9-125. Inc. 9-220 commutator type cylinder 9-88. All rights reserved.q3dxresults 1-7 files auto-save 1-5 Q3D Extractor 1-7 functions defining 2-41 reserved names in Q3D Extractor 2-41 selecting for a quantity 7-13 valid operators 2-42 G generic rotating machine rotor core data 9-277 rotor data 9-276 stator core data 9-277 stator data 9-276 winding type 9-286 generic rotating machines core data Index-2 Release 14. 9-220 creating a quick report 7-19 creating motor or generator models models 2-2 creating new projects 1-3 cylinder commutator type 9-88. 9-213 winding types 9-131 transistor drop 9-126. .Maxwell Online Help 213 end length adjustment 9-66. 9-195.© SAS IP. 9-149 C changing motor or generator machine type 2-3 clean stop 6-2 commutator 9-88. 9-220 pancake 9-88. 9-136. 9-189. 9-192. Inc. . 9-195.© SAS IP. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . nonlinear 4-18 nonlinear 4-18 permanent-magnet DC motors Index-3 Release 14. All rights reserved. Inc.5 .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.Maxwell Online Help inner diameter 9-277 outer diameter 9-277 general data motor speed 9-299 output power 9-299 rated voltage 9-299 type of load 9-298 winding end clearance 9-290 winding data conductor length adjustment 9-290 parallel branches 9-289 wire diameter 9-289 wire gauge 9-289 wire wrap 9-289 I intrinsic functions 2-42 L line-start permanent-magnet synchronous motors 9-159 defining motors 9-161 functionality 9-159 general data 9-162 general procedure 9-161 stator data 9-162 stator data windings 9-165 stator windings 9-165 local variables adding 2-37 units in definition 2-37 M magnetic coercivity in permanent magnets 4-18 magnetic retentivity in permanent magnets 4-18 material browser accessing 4-1 materials assigning to objects 4-1 mathematical functions See functions 2-41 menu bar overview 1-10 menus shortcut menus 1-11 Message window about 1-17 displaying 1-17 N new projects creating 1-3 notes saving with project 1-7 O opening existing projects 1-4 recent projects 1-4 opening projects in RMxprt 1-3 optimization analysis choosing variables to optimize 2-45 P pancake commutator type 9-88. 9220 parameterizing See variables 2-35 parameters assigning variables to 2-45 permanent magnets linear vs. 9-220 commutator insulation 9-88. Inc. 9-238 rotor slots 9-239 piecewise linear functions dataset expressions in 2-45 using in expressions 2-44 pole embrace (DC motors) 9-70. 242. 2-45. 2-41. 2-3 setting up a model 2-2 RMxprt projects 1-3 Index-4 Release 14. 2-47 projects creating new 1-3 default names 2-1 managing 2-1 opening existing 1-4 opening recent 1-4 saving 1-4 saving active 1-5 saving automatically 1-5 saving copies 1-5 saving new 1-4 saving notes 1-7 Q quantities plotting S-parameter 7-17 quick report 7-19 R rectangular plots creating 2D 7-8 creating 3D 7-9 reports adding traces 7-11 creating 7-7 creating 2D rectangular plots 7-8 creating 3D rectangular plots 7-9 creating data tables 7-10 creating quick reports 7-19 display types 7-8 modifying data in 7-7 overview 7-7 selecting a function 7-13 sweeping variables 7-12 re-solving a problem 6-3 RMxprt changing the machine type 2-3 general procedure 2-2.Maxwell Online Help brush displacement 9-89. 9-221 commutator and brush data 9-88. 2-44. 9-196. 9-195. 2-37. 2-42. 2-45. 9-221 general data 9-76. 2-37. 2-41. 2-47 units in definition 2-35. 2-46. 2-37. . 9-220 brush voltage drop 9-89.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 2-44. 9-195. 9-229 rotor data 9-80. . 9-220 brush width 9-89. 2-46. All rights reserved. 245.© SAS IP. 9-196. 2-42. 9-140 post processing overview of options 7-1 primary sweep modifying the variable 7-12 specifying for 2D rectangular plots 7-8 specifying for 3D rectangular plot 7-10 specifying for data tables 7-10 Project Manager window overview 1-15 showing 1-15 project tree auto expanding 1-15 showing 1-15 project variables adding 2-35. 9-195. 2-44. 9-220 commutator diameter 9-88. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.5 . 9195. 2-47 naming conventions 2-35. Inc. 9220 mechanical pressure of brushes 989. 9220 commutatorlength 9-88. 9-196. 2-46. 9-220 commutator type 9-88. 9-195. 9-220 brush pairs 9-89. 2-41. 9-196. 9-196. 9-119. 9-241 motor voltage 9-21. 9-179. 9-157. 9-73. 9-26. 9-198. 9-143. 9-73. 9-143. Inc. 9175. 9175. 9-45. 9-157. 9-223. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 9-223. 9-241 output power 9-21. 9-119. 9-45. 9-229 motor speed 9-21. 9-73.Maxwell Online Help rotor pole diagram 9-114 S saving projects 1-4 active projects 1-5 automatically 1-5 new projects 1-4 saving copies 1-5 secondary sweep modifying the variable 7-12 specifying for 3D rectangular plot 7-9 selecting a machine type 1-3 sensitivity analysis choosing variables to include 2-46 SetMachineType 2-3 setting up designs 8-1 setting up projects 8-1 Settings Design 2-5 setups solution 5-1 shortcut menus overview 1-11 simulations re-solving 6-3 starting 6-1 stopping 6-2 single-phase induction motors defining the motor 9-25 general data 9-26 rotor data 9-41. 9-90. 9-119. 9175. 9162. 9-124. 9-223. .© SAS IP. 991. 9-241 type of load 9-21. 9-198. . 9-148. Index-5 Release 14. 991.5 . 991. 9-157. 9-203. 9-44 rotor slots 9-42 stator data 9-28 stator slots 9-29 stator windings 9-31 solution data viewing 7-2 solution settings specifying 5-1 solution setups adding 5-1 solutions after modifying the model 6-3 re-solving 6-3 starting 6-1 stopping 6-2 solving 6-1 S-parameters plotting quantities 7-17 statistical analysis choosing variables to include 2-47 status bar overview 1-13 stopping an analysis 6-2 sweep variables in reports modifying values 7-12 switched reluctance motors defining reluctance motors 9-147 general data 9-148 stator coil data 9-152 T three-phase induction motors defining rotor slots 9-18 defining rotor vents 9-19 defining stator conductors 9-8 defining stator windings 9-8 defining the motor 9-4 general data 9-4 friction and wind loss 9-5. 9-73. 9-45. 954. 9-45. Inc. 9-143. All rights reserved. 9-198. 9-77.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 9-240 end ring 9-19. 9-127. 9-166. 9108. 9-59. 9-142. 9-186. 9-191. . 980. 9-69. 9-37. 9153. 9-238 outer diameter 9-5. 9-230. 9-38. 9-80. 9-215. 9-214. 9-189. 9-90. 9-41. 9-152. 9-151. 9-184. 9-84. 9215. 9-197. 9-101. 9-151. 9-184. 9-56. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. . 9-166. 9-65. 9-143. 941. 9-230. 9-38. 9-234 Index-6 Release 14. 9-153. Inc. 9-216.Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS. 9-134. 9-65. 9-234 conductors 9-8 inner diameter 9-5. 9-163. 9-139. 9-153. 9-28. 9-41. 9-232 slot type 9-6. 9-157. 9197.© SAS IP. 9-171. 9-107.5 . 9-136. 9-28. 9-29. 9-163. 9-98. 9-180. 9-80. 9-97. 9-163. 941. 9166. 9-17. 9-16. 9-155. 9-126. 9-17. 9-66. 9-85. 9-184. 9-118. 9-16. 9-233 wire gauge 9-12. 9-232 three-phase non-salient synchronous generators general data 9-246 three-phase non-salient synchronous machine stator data inner diameter 9-247 outer diameter 9-247 slot type 9-248 slots 9-248 stator slots 9-248 stator skew 9-249 three-phase synchronous generators exciter efficiency 9-120 friction loss 9-97 general data 9-97 rotor pole diagram 9-114 rotor pole data 9-114 rotor winding data 9-115 parallel branches 9-116 winding type 9-116 wire wrap 9-116 stator data 9-97 stator slots 9-99 winding types 9-104 stator ducts 9-100. 9-134. 9-129. 9175. 9-156. 9-156. 9-85. 9-139. 9-211. 9-203. 9106. 9-29. 9-80. 9-230 stator slots 9-7 windings 9-8 wire diameter 9-12. 9-166. 9-151. 9-112. 9-98. 9-56. 9-77. 9171. 9-126. 9-233 three-phase inductions motors stator data winding type 9-8. 9-187. 9-36. 9156. 9-56. 964. 9-233 wire wrap 9-11. 9-127. 9-139. 9-241 winding connection 9-22 rotor data 9-16. 956. 983. 9-223. 9-72. 9-32. 9-36. 9-190. 9-238 parallel branches 9-11. 9-64. 9-107. 9-43 stator data 9-5 conductor length adjustment 9-13. Inc. All rights reserved. 9-134. 9-64. 9-36. 9-112. 9108. 9-21. 9-180.Maxwell Online Help 9-119. 9-211. 9213. 9-135. 9-135. 9-82. 9156. 9-84. 9-69. 9-184. 9-37. 9-230 slots 9-6. 9-222. 9163. 9171. 9-107. 9-77. 9-153. 9-192. 9-216. 9-174. 9-249 stator skew 9-100 stator winding end clearance 9-13. 9-192. 9-69. 9-167. 9-38. 9-187. 9-167. 9-191. 9-210. 9-97. Maxwell Online Help toolbars overview 1-12 traces adding blank 7-12 adding to reports 7-11 removing 7-12 replacing 7-12 Traces dialog box 7-7 tuning choosing variables to tune 2-46 predefined in Q3D Extractor 2-41 setting default value 2-36 types in Q3D Extractor 2-35 W winding data exporting 8-42 U units as part of variable definitions 2-35. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 2-41. 2-37. Inc. 237. 2-44. 2-47 universal motors defining motors 9-178 functionality 9-177 general data 9-179 general procedure 9-178 user interface overview 1-8 V validation check 2-8 variables add array 2-39 adding local variables 2-37 adding project variables 2-35. 2-42. All rights reserved. . 2-45. 2-47 assigning to parameters 2-45 choosing to optimize 2-45 choosing to tune 2-46 dataset expressions in 2-45 dependent 2-38 including in functions 2-41 including in sensitivity analysis 2-46 including in statistical analysis 2-47 overview 2-35 Index-7 Release 14. 2-44. 2-42. . 2-46. 2-45. Inc. 246.5 .Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS.© SAS IP. 241.